DL205 Analog I/O Modules

Manual Number D2--ANLG--M

WARNING
Thank you for purchasing automation equipment from Automationdirect.com, doing business as, AutomationDirect. We want your new automation equipment to operate safely. Anyone who installs or uses this equipment should read this publication (and any other relevant publications) before installing or operating the equipment. To minimize the risk of potential safety problems, you should follow all applicable local and national codes that regulate the installation and operation of your equipment. These codes vary from area to area and usually change with time. It is your responsibility to determine which codes should be followed, and to verify that the equipment, installation, and operation are in compliance with the latest revision of these codes. At a minimum, you should follow all applicable sections of the National Fire Code, National Electrical Code, and the codes of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). There may be local regulatory or government offices that can also help determine which codes and standards are necessary for safe installation and operation. Equipment damage or serious injury to personnel can result from the failure to follow all applicable codes and standards. We do not guarantee the products described in this publication are suitable for your particular application, nor do we assume any responsibility for your product design, installation, or operation. Our products are not fault-tolerant and are not designed, manufactured or intended for use or resale as on-line control equipment in hazardous environments requiring fail-safe performance, such as in the operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft navigation or communication systems, air traffic control, direct life support machines, or weapons systems, in which the failure of the product could lead directly to death, personal injury, or severe physical or environmental damage (High Risk Activities). AutomationDirect specifically disclaims any expressed or implied warranty of fitness for High Risk Activities. For additional warranty and safety information, see the Terms and Conditions section of our Desk Reference. If you have any questions concerning the installation or operation of this equipment, or if you need additional information, please call us at 770--844--4200. This publication is based on information that was available at the time it was printed. At AutomationDirect we constantly strive to improve our products and services, so we reserve the right to make changes to the products and/or publications at any time without notice and without any obligation. This publication may also discuss features that may not be available in certain revisions of the product.

TRADEMARKS
This publication may contain references to products produced and/or offered by other companies. The product and company names may be trademarked and are the sole property of their respective owners. AutomationDirect disclaims any proprietary interest in the marks and names of others.

Copyright 2009, Automationdirect.com Incorporated All Rights Reserved No part of this manual shall be copied, reproduced, or transmitted in any way without the prior, written consent of Automationdirect.com Incorporated. AutomationDirect retains the exclusive rights to all information included in this document.

AVERTISSEMENT
Nous vous remercions davoir achet lquipement dautomatisation de Automationdirect.commc en faisant des affaires comme, AutomationDirect. Nous tenons ce que votre nouvel quipement dautomatisation fonctionne en toute scurit. Toute personne qui installe ou utilise cet quipement doit lire la prsente publication (et toutes les autres publications pertinentes) avant de linstaller ou de lutiliser. Afin de rduire au minimum le risque dventuels problmes de scurit, vous devez respecter tous les codes locaux et nationaux applicables rgissant linstallation et le fonctionnement de votre quipement. Ces codes diffrent dune rgion lautre et, habituellement, voluent au fil du temps. Il vous incombe de dterminer les codes respecter et de vous assurer que lquipement, linstallation et le fonctionnement sont conformes aux exigences de la version la plus rcente de ces codes. Vous devez, tout le moins, respecter toutes les sections applicables du Code national de prvention des incendies, du Code national de llectricit et des codes de la National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). Des organismes de rglementation ou des services gouvernementaux locaux peuvent galement vous aider dterminer les codes ainsi que les normes respecter pour assurer une installation et un fonctionnement srs. Lomission de respecter la totalit des codes et des normes applicables peut entraner des dommages lquipement ou causer de graves blessures au personnel. Nous ne garantissons pas que les produits dcrits dans cette publication conviennent votre application particulire et nous nassumons aucune responsabilit lgard de la conception, de linstallation ou du fonctionnement de votre produit. Nos produits ne sont pas insensibles aux dfaillances et ne sont ni conus ni fabriqus pour lutilisation ou la revente en tant ququipement de commande en ligne dans des environnements dangereux ncessitant une scurit absolue, par exemple, lexploitation dinstallations nuclaires, les systmes de navigation arienne ou de communication, le contrle de la circulation arienne, les quipements de survie ou les systmes darmes, pour lesquels la dfaillance du produit peut provoquer la mort, des blessures corporelles ou de graves dommages matriels ou environnementaux (activits risque lev). La socit AutomationDirect nie toute garantie expresse ou implicite daptitude lemploi en ce qui a trait aux activits risque lev. Pour des renseignements additionnels touchant la garantie et la scurit, veuillez consulter la section Modalits et conditions de notre documentation. Si vous avez des questions au sujet de linstallation ou du fonctionnement de cet quipement, ou encore si vous avez besoin de renseignements supplmentaires, nhsitez pas nous tlphoner au 770--844--4200. Cette publication sappuie sur linformation qui tait disponible au moment de limpression. la socit AutomationDirect, nous nous efforons constamment damliorer nos produits et services. Cest pourquoi nous nous rservons le droit dapporter des modifications aux produits ou aux publications en tout temps, sans pravis ni quelque obligation que ce soit. La prsente publication peut aussi porter sur des caractristiques susceptibles de ne pas tre offertes dans certaines versions rvises du produit.

Marques de commerce
La prsente publication peut contenir des rfrences des produits fabriqus ou offerts par dautres entreprises. Les dsignations des produits et des entreprises peuvent tre des marques de commerce et appartiennent exclusivement leurs propritaires respectifs. AutomationDirect nie tout intrt dans les autres marques et dsignations. Copyright 2009, Automationdirect.commc Incorporated Tous droits rservs Nulle partie de ce manuel ne doit tre copie, reproduite ou transmise de quelque faon que ce soit sans le consentement pralable crit de la socit Automationdirect.com Incorporated. AutomationDirect conserve les droits exclusifs lgard de tous les renseignements contenus dans le prsent document.

1
Manual Revisions
If you contact us in reference to this manual, be sure to include the edition or revision number. Title: DL205 Analog I/O Manual Manual Number: D2--ANLG--M Edition/Rev Original 2nd Edition 3rd Edition 4th Edition 5th Edition 6th Edition 6th Edition Rev A Date 1/94 4/95 9/97 4/99 5/00 4/02 6/02 Description of Changes original issue New Edition Added new modules Added new modules Added new modules Added new modules Added DL250--1 and DL260 CPUs and removed references to DL250 CPU (Note: DL250 has same functionality as DL250--1 except for local expansion I/O capability.) Minor corrections Added new F2--8AD4DA chapters 15 and 16; miscellaneous minor changes Added information about changes to F2--04THM jumper link locations in chapter 7. Added information about jumper link locations and some input specifications changes on F2--04AD--1, F2--04AD--2, F2--08AD--1, F2--08AD--2, and F2--02DAS--2 modules. Added R Wide input range to F2--04THM spec table.

6th Edition Rev B 7th Edition 7th Edition Rev A 7th Edition Rev B

8/02 8/05 11/06 4/10

1
Table of Contents
Chapter 1: Getting Started

i
1-2 1--2 1--2 1--2 1-3 1--3 1-3 1-4 1--4 1--4 1--4 1--4 1--4 1--4 1--4 1--4 1--4 1--4 1--4 1--4 1--4 1--4 1--4 1--4 1-5 1--5 1--5 1--5 1--5 1--5 1--5 1--5 1--5 1--5 1--5 1--5 1--5 1--5 1--5 1--5 1-6 1--6 1--6

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Purpose of this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supplemental lManuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conventions Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Key Topics for Each Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Physical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Input Module Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channels per Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input Impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conversion Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLC Update Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linearity Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maximum Inaccuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accuracy vs. Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I/O Points Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Power Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Base Power Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relative Humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Output Module Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channels per Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output Impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLC Update Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linearity Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maximum Inaccuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accuracy vs. Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Power Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Base Power Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RelativeHumidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I/O Points Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting the Appropriate Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wide Variety of Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ii

Table of Contents Analog Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Combination Analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Made Easy - Four Simple Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--7 1--7 1--8 1--8 1-9

Chapter 2: F2-04AD-1, F2-04AD-1L 4-Channel Analog Current Input

Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Input Configuration Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Placement Requirements (DL230 and Remote I/O Bases) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Module Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting the Number of Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Power Supply Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current Loop Transmitter Impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel Scanning Sequence for a DL230 CPU (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel Scanning Sequence for a DL240, DL250--1 or or DL260 CPU (Pointer Method) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Module Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding the Input Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Data Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Active Channel Indicator Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module Diagnostic Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Writing the Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reading Values: Pointer Method and Multiplexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pointer Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reading Values (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Channel Selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Power Failure Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scaling the Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog and Digital Value Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filtering Input Noise (DL250--1, DL260 CPU Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 2--3 2--3 2--3 2--4 2-5 2--5 2-6 2--6 2--6 2--7 2--8 2-9 2--9 2--10 2--10 2--11 2--11 2--12 2--12 2--12 2-13 2--13 2--13 2--15 2--16 2--16 2--16 2--17 2--18

Chapter 3: F2-04AD-2, F2-04AD-2L 4-Channel Analog Voltage Input

Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Input Configuration Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Placement Requirements (DL230 and Remote I/O Bases) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Module Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 3--3 3--3 3--3 3--4 3-5

Table of Contents Selecting the Number of Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting the Input Signal Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Power Supply Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Custom Input Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel Scanning Sequence for a DL230 CPU (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel Scanning Sequence with a DL240, DL250--1 or DL260 CPU (Pointer Method) . . . . . Analog Module Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding the Input Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Data Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Active Channel Indicator Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module Diagnostic and Sign Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Writing the Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reading Values: Pointer Method and Multiplexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pointer Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Bipolar Ranges (Pointer Method) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reading Values (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Channel Selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Bipolar Ranges (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using 2s Complement (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Power Failure Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scaling the Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog and Digital Value Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filtering Input Noise (DL250--1, DL260 CPUs Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--5 3--6 3-7 3--7 3--7 3--7 3--8 3--9 3-10 3--10 3--11 3--11 3--12 3--12 3--12 3--13 3--13 3-14 3--14 3--14 3--16 3--17 3--18 3--18 3--19 3--20 3--20 3--21 3--22

iii

Chapter 4: F2-08AD-1 8-Channel Analog Current Input

Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Input Configuration Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Placement Requirements (DL230 and Remote I/O Bases) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Module Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting the Number of Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Power Supply Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current Loop Transmitter Impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel Scanning Sequence for a DL230 CPU (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel Scanning Sequence with a DL240, DL250--1 or DL260 CPU (Pointer Method) . . . . . Analog Module Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding the Input Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Data Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Active Channel Indicator Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 4--3 4--3 4--3 4--4 4-5 4--5 4-6 4--6 4--6 4--6 4--7 4-8 4--8 4--9 4--9 4--10 4--10 4--11

iv

Table of Contents Module Diagnostic Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Writing the Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reading Values: Pointer Method and Multiplexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pointer Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reading Values Multiplexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Channel Selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Power Failure Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scaling the Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog and Digital Value Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filtering Input Noise (DL250--1, DL260 CPU Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--11 4--11 4-12 4--12 4--12 4--14 4--15 4--15 4--15 4--16 4--17

Chapter 5: F2-08AD-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Input

Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Input Configuration Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Placement Requirements (DL230 and Remote I/O Bases) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Module Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting the Number of Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Input Voltage Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Power Supply Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel Scanning Sequence for a DL230 CPU (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel Scanning Sequence for a DL240, DL250--1 or DL260 CPU (Pointer Method) . . . . . . Analog Module Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding the Input Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Data Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Active Channel Indicator Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module Diagnostic and Sign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Writing the Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reading Values: Pointer Method and Multiplexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pointer Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Bipolar Ranges (Pointer Method) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reading Values (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Channel Selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Bipolar Ranges (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using 2s Complement (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Power Failure Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scaling the Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog and Digital Value Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filtering Input Noise (DL250--1, DL260 CPUs Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 5--3 5--3 5--3 5--4 5-5 5--5 5--6 5-7 5--7 5--7 5--8 5-9 5--9 5--9 5--10 5--10 5--10 5--11 5--11 5--11 5-12 5--12 5--12 5--14 5--15 5--15 5--16 5--17 5--18 5--18 5--19 5--20

Table of Contents

Chapter 6: F2-04RTD 4-Channel RTD Input

Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RTD Input Configuration Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Placement Requirements (DL230 and Remote I/O Bases) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Module Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jumper Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting the Number of Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Input Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting the Conversion Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RTD -- Resistance Temperature Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ambient Variations in Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel Scanning Sequence for a DL230 CPU (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel Scanning Sequence for a DL240, DL250--1 or or DL260 CPU (Pointer Method) . . . Analog Module Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Writing the Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reading Values: Pointer Method and Multiplexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pointer Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Negative Temperature Readings with Magnitude Plus Sign (Pointer Method) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Negative Temperatures 2s Complement (Binary / Pointer Method) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding the Input Assignments (Multiplexing Ladder Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Data Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Active Channel Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BrokenTransmitter Bits (Pointer and Multiplexing Ladder Methods) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reading Magnitude Plus Sign Values (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reading 2s Complement Values (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scaling the Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filtering Input Noise (DL250--1, DL260 CPUs Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 6--2 6--2 6--3 6--4 6-5 6--5 6--5 6--5 6--6 6-7 6--7 6--7 6--7 6--8 6-9 6--9 6--10 6--10 6-11 6--11 6--11 6--13 6--15 6--15 6--16 6--16 6--16 6--17 6--18 6--18 6--19

Chapter 7: F2-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input

Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Thermocouple Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voltage Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Thermocouple Input Configuration Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Placement Requirements (DL230 and Remote I/O Bases) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Module Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jumper Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibrate Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting the Number of Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Input Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting the Conversion Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 7--2 7--3 7--3 7--3 7--3 7--4 7-5 7--5 7--5 7--6 7--6 7--7

vi

Table of Contents Thermocouple Conversion Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voltage Conversion Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Power Supply Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Thermocouples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AmbientVariations in Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel Scanning Sequence for a DL230 CPU (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel Scanning Sequence for a DL240, DL250--1 or DL260 CPU (Pointer Method) . . . . . Analog Module Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Writing the Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reading Values: Pointer Method and Multiplexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pointer Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Negative Temperature Readings with Magnitude Plus Sign (Pointer Method) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Negative Temperatures 2s Complement (Binary / Pointer Method) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding the Input Assignments (Multiplexing Ladder Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Data Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Active Channel Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Broken Transmitter Bits (Pointer and Multiplexing Ladder Methods) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reading Magnitude Plus Sign Values (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reading 2s Complement Values (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scaling the Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module Resolution16-Bit (Unipolar Voltage Input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module Resolution 15-Bit Plus Sign (Bipolar Voltage Input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog and Digital Value Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filtering Input Noise (DL250--1, DL260 CPUs Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--7 7--7 7-8 7--8 7--8 7--9 7--9 7--9 7-11 7--11 7--12 7--12 7-13 7--13 7--13 7--15 7--17 7--17 7--18 7--18 7--18 7--19 7--20 7--20 7--21 7--21 7--22 7--23

Chapter 8: F2-02DA-1, F2-02DA-1L 2-Channel Analog Current Output

Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Output Configuration Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Placement Requirements (DL230 and Remote I/O Bases) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Power Supply Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel Update Sequence for a DL230 CPU (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel Update Sequence for a DL240, DL250--1 or DL260 CPU (Pointer Method) . . . . . . . . Understanding the Output Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Data Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Writing the Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 8--3 8--3 8--3 8--4 8-5 8--5 8--5 8--6 8--6 8-7 8--7 8--8 8--9 8--9 8--9 8--10 8--10 8-11

Table of Contents Reading Values: Pointer Method and Multiplexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pointer Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Writing Data (Multiplexing ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sending Data to One Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sending the Same Data to Both Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculating the Digital Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog and Digital Value Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--11 8--11 8--13 8--14 8--14 8--15 8--15

vii

Chapter 9: F2-02DA-2, F2-02DA-2L 2-Channel Analog Voltage Output

Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Output Configuration Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Placement Requirements (DL230 and Remote I/O Bases) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Module Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voltage Range and Output Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supply Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel Update Sequence for a DL230 CPU (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel Update Sequence for a DL240, DL250--1 or DL260 CPU (Pointer Method) . . . . . . . . Understanding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . the Output Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel Select Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Data Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signal Sign Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bipolar Output Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Writing the Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculating the Digital Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Negative Values with Bipolar Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Writing Values: Pointer Method and Multiplexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Writing Values (Pointer Method) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Writing Data (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sending Data to One Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sending the Same Data to Both Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog and Digital Value Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 9--3 9--3 9--3 9--4 9-5 9--6 9-8 9--8 9--8 9--8 9--8 9-9 9--9 9--10 9--11 9--11 9--11 9--12 9--12 9--12 9--13 9-14 9--14 9--15 9--16 9--16 9--18 9--20 9--20 9--21

Chapter 10: F2-08DA-1 8-Channel Analog Current Output

Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Output Configuration Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Placement Requirements (DL230 and Remote I/O Bases) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 10--3 10--3 10--3 10--4 10-5

viii

Table of Contents 10--5 10--5 10--5 10--6 10--6 10-7 10--7 10--8 10--8 10--8 10--9 10--10 10--10 10--10 10-11 10--11 10--12 10--12 10--14 10--15 10--16 10--16

Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supply Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel Update Sequence for a DL230 CPU (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel Update Sequence with a DL240, DL250--1 or DL260 CPU (Pointer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . the Output Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel Select Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Data Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Writing the Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculating the Digital Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Writing Values: Pointer Method and Multiplexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pointer Method Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Writing Data (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Writing Data (Multiplexing Example) Continued . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sending Data to One Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog and Digital Value Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 11: F2-08DA-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Output

Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Output Configuration Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Placement Requirements (DL230 and Remote I/O Bases) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Module Jumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voltage Range and Output Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supply Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel Update Sequence for a DL230 CPU (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel Update Sequence for a DL240, DL250--1 or DL260 CPU (Pointer Method) . . . . . . . . Understanding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . the Output Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel Select Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Data Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Writing the Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculating the Digital Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Writing Values: Pointer Method and Multiplexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pointer Method Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Writing Data (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 11--3 11--3 11--3 11--4 11-5 11--5 11-6 11--6 11--6 11--6 11--6 11-7 11--7 11--8 11--9 11--9 11--9 11--10 11--10 11--10 11-11 11--11 11--12 11--12 11--14

Table of Contents Writing Data (Multiplexing Example) Continued . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--15 Sending Data to One Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--16 Analog andDigital Value Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--16

ix

Chapter 12: F2-02DAS-1 4-20mA 2-Channel Analog Current Output

Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Output Configuration Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Placement Requirements (DL230 and Remote I/O Bases) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loop Power Supply Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel Update Sequence for a DL230 CPU (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel Update Sequence for a DL240, DL250--1 or DL260 CPU (Pointer Method) . . . . . . . . Understanding the Output Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Data Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Writing the Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculating the Digital Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engineering Units Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reading Values: Pointer Method and Multiplexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pointer Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Writing Data (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sending Data to One Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sending the Same Data to Both Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog and Digital Value Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 12--3 12--3 12--3 12--4 12-5 12--5 12--5 12--5 12-6 12--6 12--7 12--8 12--8 12--8 12--9 12--9 12-10 12--10 12--10 12--11 12--11 12--13 12--14 12--14 12--15

Chapter 13: F2-02DAS-2 0-5, 0-10V 2-Channel Isolated Output

Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Output Configuration Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Placement Requirements (DL230 and Remote I/O Bases) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Module Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmitter Power Supply Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel Update Sequence for a DL230 CPU (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel Update Sequence for a DL240, DL250--1 or DL260 CPU (Pointer Method) . . . . . . . . 13-2 13--3 13--3 13--3 13--4 13-5 13-6 13--6 13--6 13--6 13-7 13--7 13--8

Table of Contents Understanding the Output Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Data Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Writing the Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculating the Digital Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engineering Units Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reading Values: Pointer Method and Multiplexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pointer Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Writing Data (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sending Data to One Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sending the Same Data to Both Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog and Digital Value Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13--8 13--9 13--9 13--9 13--10 13-11 13--11 13--11 13--12 13--12 13--14 13--15 13--15 13--16

Chapter 14: F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out Combination Analog

Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Combination Analog Configuration Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Placement Requirements (DL230 and Remote I/O Bases) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Power Supply Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current Loop Transmitter Impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input Channel Scanning Sequence for a DL230 CPU (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input Channel Scanning Sequence for a DL240, DL250--1 or DL260 CPU (Pointer Method) . Output Channel Update Sequence for a DL230 CPU (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output Channel Update Sequence for a DL240, DL250--1 or DL260 CPU (Pointer Method) . Understanding the I/O Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input Data Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Active Channel Indicator Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Indicator Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output Data Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output Channel Selection Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Writing the Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Input Power Failure Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculating the Output Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scaling the Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Read / Write Program (Pointer Method) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reading Input Values (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Input Channel Selected (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Writing Output Values (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sending Data to One Channel (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sending the Same Data to Both Channels (Multiplexing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 14--2 14--3 14--3 14--3 14--4 14-5 14--5 14--5 14--6 14--7 14-8 14--8 14--8 14--9 14--9 14--10 14--10 14--11 14--11 14--11 14--12 14--12 14-13 14--13 14--13 14--15 14--16 14--18 14--19 14--19 14--20 14--20

Table of Contents Analog and Digital Value Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14--20 Filtering Input Noise (DL250--1, DL260 CPUs Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14--21

xi

Chapter 15: F2-8AD4DA-1 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination

Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hardware and Firmware Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module Placement and Configuration Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Power Supply Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current Loop Transmitter Impedance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input Channel Scanning Sequence (Pointer Method) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output Channel Update Sequence (Pointer Method) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding the I/O Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special V-Memory Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module Configuration Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Number of I/O Channels Enabled & Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input Resolution Selection Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input Track and Hold Selection Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Writing the Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring the Module to Read / Write I/O (Pointer Method) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module 12 Bit Input Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module 14 Bit Input Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module 16 Bit Input Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog and Digital Input Data Value Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input Value Comparisons: Analog, Digital, Engineering Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scaling the Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Input Track and Hold Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module16 Bit Output Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital and Analog Output Data Value Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output Value Comparisons: Analog, Digital, Engineering Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculating the Digital Output Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculating Output Data; Engineering Units Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2 15--2 15--3 15--4 15--5 15--5 15-6 15--6 15--6 15--7 15--8 15-9 15--9 15--10 15--11 15--12 15--12 15-13 15--13 15--14 15--15 15--15 15-16 15--16 15--20 15--20 15--20 15--21 15--21 15--22 15--25 15--27 15--27 15--27 15--28 15--28

Chapter 16: F2-8AD4DA-2 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination

Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hardware and Firmware Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2 16--2 16--3 16--4 16--5

xii

Table of Contents Module Placement and Configuration Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the Field Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Power Supply Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input Channel Scanning Sequence (Pointer Method) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output Channel Update Sequence (Pointer Method) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding the I/O Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special V-Memory Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module Configuration Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Number of I/O Channels Enabled & Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input Resolution Selection Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input and Output Range Selection Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input Track and Hold Selection Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Writing the Control Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring the Module to Read / Write I/O (Pointer Method) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module 12 Bit Input Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module 14 Bit Input Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module 16 Bit Input Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog and Digital Input Data Value Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scaling the Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Input Track and Hold Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module16 Bit Output Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital and Analog Output Data Value Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output Value Comparisons: Analog, Digital, Engineering Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculating the Digital Output Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculating Output Data; Engineering Units Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16--5 16-6 16--6 16--6 16--7 16-8 16--8 16--9 16--10 16--11 16--11 16-12 16--12 16--13 16--14 16--14 16--15 16-16 16--16 16--20 16--20 16--20 16--21 16--22 16--24 16--26 16--26 16--26 16--27 16--27

Appendix A: DL205 Discrete I/O Memory Map

X Input / Y Output Bit Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Relay Bit Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remote I/O Bit Map (DL 260 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2 A-4 A-8

1
Getting Started

In This Chapter. . . .
Introduction Conventions Used Physical Characteristics Analog Input Module Terminology Analog Output Module Terminology Selecting the Appropriate Module Analog Made Easy - Four Simple Steps

1-2
Getting Started Getting Started

Getting Started

Introduction
The Purpose of this Manual This manual will show you how to select and install analog input and analog output modules. It also shows several ways to use the analog data in your PLC program. If you understand the DL205 instruction set and system setup requirements, this manual will provide the information you need to install and use the analog modules. This manual is not intended to be a tutorial on analog signal theory, but rather a user reference manual for the DL205 Analog I/O modules. You may also want to have a copy of the DL205 User Manual (D2--USER--M) at hand when you are working with the analog modules. The DL205 User Manual is not absolutely necessary, but it does provide detailed descriptions of the instructions used to acquire the analog data. The User Manual also provides a more thorough description of how the I/O points are assigned to the module. Now, you have the material necessary to quickly understand the DL205 Analog I/O modules. So, lets get started! We realize that even though we strive to be the best, we may have arranged our information in such a way you cannot find what you are looking for. First, check these resources for help in locating the information: Table of Contents -- chapter and section listing of contents, in the front of this manual S Appendices -- reference material for key topics, near the end of this manual You can also check our online resources for the latest product support information: S Internet -- Our address is http://www.automationdirect.com If you still need assistance, please call us at 770--844--4200. Our technical support group is glad to work with you in answering your questions. They are available Monday through Friday from 9:00 A.M. to 6:00 P.M. Eastern Standard Time. If you have a comment or question about any of our products, services, or manuals, please fill out and return the Suggestions card that was shipped with this manual. S

How to Use

DL205 Analog Modules

The OP-1500 and OP-1510 Operator panels may be reconfigured to exchange data with your programmable controller.

Supplemental Manuals

Technical Support

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

Getting Started

1-3
Getting Started

Conventions Used
When you see the light bulb icon in the left-hand margin, the paragraph to its immediate right will give you a special tip. The word TIP: in boldface will mark the beginning of the text. When you see the notepad icon in the left-hand margin, the paragraph to its immediate right will be a special note. The word NOTE: in boldface will mark the beginning of the text. When you see the exclamation mark icon in the left-hand margin, the paragraph to its immediate right will be a warning. This information could prevent injury, loss of property, or even death (in extreme cases). The word WARNING: in boldface will mark the beginning of the text. Key Topics for Each Chapter The beginning of each chapter will list the key topics that can be found in that chapter. 1

Physical Characteristics
The DL205 Analog Modules provide many features that make the modules easy to use. With the exception of the Thermocouple module, the terminal blocks are removable, which makes wiring a simple task. All of the DL205 analog modules have normal screw terminal connectors. Access the module terminals by removing the front cover (not shown). To remove the front cover, press the tab on the lower front corner of the cover. For ease of removal, the terminal blocks have squeeze tabs on the top and bottom. To remove a terminal block, press the tabs and pull the terminal block away from the module. WARNING: For some modules, field device power may still be present on the terminal block even though the PLC system is turned off. To minimize the risk of electrical shock, check all field device power before you remove the connector. Press tabs to remove terminal block.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

1-4
Getting Started Getting Started

Getting Started

Analog Input Module Terminology

We use several different terms throughout the rest of this manual. You do not have to be an expert on analog terms to use the products, but it may help make it easier to select the appropriate modules if you take a few minutes to review these definitions. Channels per Module Input Ranges Resolution Input Type Input Impedance Conversion Method PLC Update Rate Linearity Error Maximum Inaccuracy The total number of analog signals the module receives from field devices. The minimum to maximum spans in voltage or current the module will successfully convert to digital values. The number of binary weighted bits available on the digital side of the module for use in converting the analog value to a digital value. Specifies if the module accepts single ended, or differential input signals. The resistive load of the module as seen by a voltage or current input signal. The method the module uses to convert the analog signal to a digital value. Speed at which the analog signals are digitized and acknowledged in the PLC. The relative accuracy of the digital representation over the entire input range. Maximum absolute error of the digital representation of the signal over the entire input range. Factors which contribute to maximum inaccuracy are also specified separately. These factors are full-scale calibration error, offset calibration error, and accuracy vs. temperature. The variations in the modules conversion accuracy with temperature over the modules operating temperature range. The number of I/O points the CPU must dedicate to the module. Some modules require a separate 12VDC or 24VDC power source. The 24VDC output supply at the local base can be used as long as you do not exceed the current ratings of 300mA. The amount of base current required by the module. Use this value in your power budget calculations. The minimum and maximum temperatures the module will operate within. The minimum and maximum humidity the module will operate within. The time required for an analog input to reach 95% of its final value at the converter following a step change in the input signal level.

Accuracy vs. Temperature I/O Points Required External Power Source Base Power Required Operating Temperature Relative Humidity Step Response

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

Getting Started

1-5
Getting Started

Analog Output Module Terminology

Channels per Module Output Ranges Resolution Output Current Output Impedance Load Impedance PLC Update Rate Linearity Error Maximum Inaccuracy The total number of analog signals the module sends to field devices. The minimum to maximum spans in voltage or current the module outputs, converted from digital values. The number of binary weighted bits available on the digital side of the module for use in converting the digital value to an analog signal. The maximum current the module will drive using a voltage output signal. The output impedance of the module using a voltage output signal. The minimum and maximum resistance the module can drive, specified for current and voltage output signals. The speed at which digital values in the PLC are converted to analog output signals. The relative accuracy of the digital representation over the entire output range. Maximum absolute error of the digital representation of the signal over the entire output range. Factors which contribute to maximum inaccuracy are also specified separately. These factors are full-scale calibration error, offset calibration error, and accuracy vs temperature. The variations in the modules conversion accuracy with temperature over the modules operating temperature range. All output modules contain circuitry which is optically isolated from PLC-side logic. That circuitry requires field-side power from a separate 24VDC power source. The 24VDC output supply at the local base can be used as long as you do not exceed the current ratings. The amount of base current required by the module. Use this value in your power budget calculations. The minimum and maximum temperatures the module will operate within. The range of air humidity over which the module will operate properly. The number of I/O points the CPU must dedicate to the module.

Accuracy vs. Temperature External Power Source

Base Power Required Operating Temperature Relative Humidity I/O Points Required

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

1-6
Getting Started Getting Started

Getting Started

Selecting the Appropriate Module

Wide Variety of Modules There are a wide variety of Analog I/O modules available for use with the DL205 family of automation products. These modules are well suited for monitoring and controlling various types of analog signals such as pressure, temperature, etc. No complex programming or module setup software is required. Simply install the module, add a few lines to your RLL program, and youre ready!

Read the input data

Store input data Calculate output values

Data OUT Data IN

Write output values

Analog input, temperature input and analog output modules are available. These modules are designed and manufactured by FACTS Engineering. FACTS has been producing feature-packed products for the DirectLOGIC families (and compatible products) for years! These modules are readily identifiable by their F2-- prefix in the part number. Diagnostic Features The DL205 Analog Modules use an on-board microcontroller that automatically monitors module diagnostics. You can easily detect missing field-side supply 24 VDC voltage or a loose terminal block.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

Getting Started

1-7
Getting Started

The following tables provide a condensed version of the information you need to select the appropriate module. The most important thing is to simply determine the number of channels required and the signal ranges that must be supported. Once youve determined these parameters, look in the specific chapter for the selected module to determine the installation and operation requirements. Analog Input Specification F2-04AD-1, (L) F2-04AD-2, (L) Channels Input Ranges 4 4 -- 20 mA 4 8 F2-08AD-1 8 0 -- 5V, 0 -- 10V, --5 to +5V, --10 to +10V 12 bit (1 in 4096), and 13 bit (1 in 8192) Single ended 0.1% at 25 C (77 F ), 0.3% at 0 -- 60 C (32 -- 140 F) 5 F2-08AD-2

0 -- 5V, 0 -- 10V, 4 -- 20 mA --5 to +5V, --10 to +10V 12 bit (1 in 4096), and 13 bit (1 in 8192) Single ended 0.1% at 25 C (77 F ), 0.3% at 0 -- 60 C (32 -- 140 F) 3 12 bit (1 in 4096) Single ended 0.1% at 25 C (77 F ), 0.25% at 0 -- 60 C (32 -- 140 F) 4 F2-04THM 4 16 bit voltage ranges 24 bit Internal

Resolution Input Type Maximum Inaccuracy

12 bit (1 in 4096) Single ended 0.5% at 25 C (77 F ),

0.65% at 0 -- 60 C (32 -- 140 F) See Chapter... 2 Special Input Specification Input Channels Resolution Input Ranges 4 16 bit internal

F2-04RTD

Pt100, -200.0 -- 850.0 _C Type J -190 -- 760C E -210 -- 1000C (-328 -- 1562 _F) K -150 -- 1372C Pt1000, -200.0 -- 595.0 _C R 65 -- 1768C (-328 -- 1103 _F) R Wide 0 -- 1768C jPt100, -38.0 -- 450.0 _C S 65 -- 1768C (-36 -- 842 _F) T -230 -- 400C Cu. 25, Cu. 10 B 529 -- 1820C -200.0 -- 260.0 _C N -70 -- 1300C (-328 -- 500 _F) C 65 -- 2320C Voltage Ranges 0--5 VDC 5 VDC 0--156mVDC 156mVDC Differential 1.0C 6 Differential 3.0C Temperature 0.02% Voltage 7

Input Type Maximum Input Inaccuracy See Chapter...

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

1-8
Getting Started Getting Started

Getting Started

Analog Output

Specification Channels Output Ranges 2

F2-02DA-1, (L) 2 4 -- 20 mA

F2-02DA-2, (L) 0 -- 5V, 0 -- 10V, --5 to +5V, --10 to +10V 12 bit (1 in 4096) Single ended 9

Resolution Output Type See Chapter... Specification Channels Output Ranges Resolution Output Type See Chapter... Specification Channels Output Ranges Resolution Output Type See Chapter... Combination Analog Specification Input Channels Output Channels Input Ranges Output Ranges Resolution Channel Isolation Input and Output Types Maximum Input Inaccuracy

12 bit (1 in 4096) Single ended 8 F2-08DA-1 8 4 -- 20mA 12 bit (1 in 4096) Single ended 10 F2-02DAS-1 2 4 -- 20mA 16 bit (1 in 65536) Current sourcing 12

F2-08DA-2 8 0 -- 5V, 0 -- 10V 16 bit (1 in 4096) Single ended, 1 common 11 F2-02DAS-2 8 0 -- 5V, 0 -- 10V 16 bit (1 in 65536) Isolated 13 F2-4AD2DA

4 2 4 -- 20 mA 4 -- 20 mA 12 bit (1 in 4096) Non-isolated (one common) Single ended 0.3% at 25 C (77 F ) 0.45% at 0 -- 60 C (32 -- 140 F) 0.1% at 25 C (77 F ) 0.3% at 0 -- 60 C (32 -- 140 F) 14

Maximum Output Inaccuracy See Chapter . . . .

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

Getting Started

1-9
Getting Started

Analog Made Easy - Four Simple Steps

Once you have selected the appropriate module, use the chapter that describes that module and complete the following steps. Step 1 . Take a minute to review the detailed specifications to make sure the module meets your application requirements.

Step 2 . If applicable, set the module switches and/or jumpers to select: S number of channels S the operating ranges

Step 3 . Connect the field wiring to the module connector.

Read the input data

Step 4 . Review the module operating characteristics and write the control program.

Store input data Calculate output values

Write output values

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-04AD-1, F2-04AD-1L 4-Channel Analog Current Input

In This Chapter. . . .
Module Specifications Setting the Module Jumpers Connecting the Field Wiring Module Operation Writing the Control Program

2-2

F2-04AD-1, F2-04AD-1L 4-Channel Analog Current Input

Module Specifications
F2-04AD-1 The F2--04AD--1 analog Input module provides several hardware features. S On-board 250 ohm, 1/2 watt precision resistors provide substantial over-current-protection for 4--20mA current loops. S Analog inputs are optically isolated from the PLC logic. S The module has a removable terminal block so the module can be easily removed or changed without disconnecting the wiring. S With a DL240/250--1/260 CPU, you can read all four channels in one scan. S On-board active analog filtering and RISC-like microcontroller provide digital signal processing to maintain precision analog measurements in noisy environments.
F2-04AD-1
IN ANALOG 4CH

F2-04AD-1
10--30VDC 5mA

F2--04AD--1, (L) 4-Ch. Current Input

ANALOG IN 4--20mA

0V +24V CH1-CH1+ CH2-CH2+ CH3-CH3+ CH4-CH4+

F2-04AD-1L

F2-04AD-1L (Obsolete) NOTE: In 2009 the F2-04AD-1L was discontinued. A re-designed F2-04AD-1 was released at the same time which can be powered by either 12 VDC or 24VDC input power supplies. This new module is a direct replacement for prior F2-04AD-1 and all F2-04AD-1L modules. The new module is a single circuit board design and the jumper link locations are different. See Setting the Module Jumpers on page 2-5. Also, some specifications were changed on page 2-3. Otherwise, the re-designed module functions the same as the prior designs.

IN

ANALOG 4CH

F2-04AD-1
18--26.4VDC 80mA

0V +12V CH1-CH1+ CH2-CH2+ CH3-CH3+ CH4-CH4+

ANALOG IN 4--20mA

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-04AD-1, F2-04AD-1L 4-Channel Analog Current Input

2-3

Input Specifications

These tables provide specifications for both the F2--04AD--1 and F2--04AD--1L Analog Input Modules (all specifications are the same for both modules except for the input voltage requirements). Review these specifications to make sure the module meets your application requirements.
Number of Channels Input Range Resolution Step Response Crosstalk Active Low-pass Filtering Input Impedance Absolute Maximum Ratings Converter type Linearity Error (End to End) Input Stability Full Scale Calibration Error (Offset error not included) Offset Calibration Error Maximum Inaccuracy Accuracy y vs. Temperature p Recommended Fuse (external) PLC Update Rate Digital Inputs Input points required Power Budget Requirement External Power Supply Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Relative Humidity Environmental air Vibration Shock Noise Immunity 4, single ended (one common) 4 to 20 mA current 12 bit (1 in 4096) 4.9 ms (*4.0 ms) to 95% of full step change --80 dB, 1/2 count maximum --3 dB at 120Hz (*80Hz), 2 poles (--12 dB per octave)

F2--04AD--1, (L) 4-Ch. Current Input

250 0.1%, W current input --40 mA to +40 mA, mA current input Successive approximation 1 count (0.025% (0 025% of full scale) maximum 1 count 12 counts maximum, maximum @ 20mA current input 7 counts maximum, maximum @ 4mA current input .5% @ 25C (77F) .65% 0 to 60_C (32 to 140F) 50 ppm/_C maximum full scale calibration (including maximum offset change) 0 032 A, 0.032 A Series 217 fast-acting, fast-acting current inputs 1 channel per scan maximum (DL230 CPU) 4 channels per scan maximum (DL240/250--1/260 CPU) 12 binary data bits, 2 channel ID bits, 2 diagnostic bits 16 point (X) input module 100 mA (*50 mA) maximum, maximum 5 VDC (supplied by base) 5mA (*80mA) max., 10 (*18) to 30 VDC (F2-04AD-1) 90mA maximum, 10 to 15 VDC (F2-04AD-1L) 0 to 60_ C (32 to 140 F) -20 to 70_ C (-4 to 158 F) 5 to 95% (non-condensing) No corrosive gases permitted MIL STD 810C 514.2 MIL STD 810C 516.2 NEMA ICS3--304

One count in the specification table is equal to one least significant bit of the analog data value (1 in 4096).

* Values in parenthesis with an asterisk are for older modules with two circuit board design and date codes 0609F3 or previous. Values not in parenthesis are for single circuit board models with date code 0709G or above.

Analog Input Configuration Requirements

Appears as a 16-point discrete input module and can be installed in any slot of a DL205 system. The available power budget and discrete I/O points are the limiting factors. Check the user manual for your particular model of CPU and I/O base for more information regarding power budget and number of local, local expansion or remote I/O points.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

2-4

F2-04AD-1, F2-04AD-1L 4-Channel Analog Current Input Even though the module can be placed in any slot, it is important to examine the configuration if you are using a DL230 CPU. As you can see in the section on writing the program, you use V-memory locations to extract the analog data. If you place the module so that the input points do not start on a V-memory boundary, the instructions cannot access the data. This also applies when placing this module in a remote base using a D2--RSSS in the CPU slot.

Special Placement Requirements (DL230 and Remote I/O Bases)

Correct!

F2-04AD-1

F2--04AD--1, (L) 4-Ch. Current Input

Slot 0
8pt Input

Slot 1
8pt Input

Slot 2
16pt Input

Slot 3
16pt Input

Slot 4
16pt Output

X0 -X7

X10 -X17

X20 X37

X40 -X57 V40402

Y0 -Y17

V40400 Data is correctly entered so input points start on a V-memory boundary. V40401 MSB X 3 7

LSB X 2 0

Incorrect

F2-04AD-1

Slot 0
8pt Input

Slot 1
16pt Input

Slot 2
16pt Input

Slot 3
16pt Input

Slot 4
16pt Output

X0 -X7

X10 X27

X30 -X47

X50 -X67

Y0 -Y17

Data is split over two locations, so instructions cannot access data from a DL230. MSB X 3 7 V40401 X X 3 2 0 7 LSB X 2 0 MSB X 1 7 V40400 X X 1 7 0 LSB X 0

To use the V-memory references required for a DL230 CPU, the first input address assigned to the module must be one of the following X locations. The table also shows the V-memory addresses that correspond to these X locations. X V X0 X20 X40 X60 X100 X120 X140 X160

V40400 V40401 V40402 V40403 V40404 V40405 V40406 V40407

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-04AD-1, F2-04AD-1L 4-Channel Analog Current Input

2-5

Setting the Module Jumpers

Selecting the Number of Channels There are two jumpers, labeled +1 and +2, that are used to select the number of channels that will be used. See the figures below to find the jumpers on your module. The module is set from the factory for four channel operation. Any unused channels are not processed, so if you only select channels 1 thru 3, channel 4 will not be active. The following table shows how to use the jumpers to select the number of channels. No. of Channels +1 +2 1 No No 1, 2 Yes No 1, 2, 3 No Yes 1, 2, 3, 4 Yes Yes

F2--04AD--1, (L) 4-Ch. Current Input

For example, to select all 4 channels (1 -- 4), leave both jumpers installed. To select channel 1, remove both jumpers.

Jumper Location on Modules Having Date Code 0609F3 and Previous (Two Circuit Board Design)

Jumper Location on Modules Having Date Code 0709G and Above (Single Circuit Board Design)

+1

+2

+1 +2

Jumper +1

These jumpers are located on the motherboard, the one with the black D-shell style backplane connector.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

2-6

F2-04AD-1, F2-04AD-1L 4-Channel Analog Current Input

Connecting the Field Wiring

Wiring Guidelines Your company may have guidelines for wiring and cable installation. If so, you should check those before you begin the installation. Here are some general things to consider: S Use the shortest wiring route whenever possible. S Use shielded wiring and ground the shield at the transmitter source. Do not ground the shield at both the module and the source. S Do not run the signal wiring next to large motors, high current switches, or transformers. This may cause noise problems. S Route the wiring through an approved cable housing to minimize the risk of accidental damage. Check local and national codes to choose the correct method for your application.

F2--04AD--1, (L) 4-Ch. Current Input

User Power Supply Requirements

The module requires at least one field-side power supply. You may use the same or separate power sources for the module supply and the current transmitter supply. The F2-04AD-1 module requires 18--30VDC, at 80 mA. The DL205 bases have built-in 24 VDC power supplies that provide up to 300mA of current. You may use this with F2-04AD-1 modules instead of a separate supply if you are using only a couple of analog modules. It is desirable in some situations to power the transmitters separately in a location remote from the PLC. This will work as long as the transmitter supply meets the voltage and current requirements, and the transmitters minus (--) side and the module supplys minus (--) side are connected together. WARNING: If you are using the 24 VDC base power supply, make sure you calculate the power budget. Exceeding the power budget can cause unpredictable system operation that can lead to a risk of personal injury or damage to equipment. The DL205 base has a switching type power supply. As a result of switching noise, you may notice 3--5 counts of instability in the analog input data if you use the base power supply. If this is unacceptable, you should try one of the following: 1. Use a separate linear power supply. 2. Connect the 24VDC common to the frame ground, which is the screw terminal marked G on the base. By using these methods, the input stability is rated at 1 count. The F2-04AD-1L module requires 10--15VDC, at 90 mA and must be powered by a separate power supply.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-04AD-1, F2-04AD-1L 4-Channel Analog Current Input Current Loop Transmitter Impedance

2-7

Standard 4 to 20 mA transmitters and transducers can operate from a wide variety of power supplies. Not all transmitters are alike and the manufacturers often specify a minimum loop or load resistance that must be used with the transmitter. The F2-04AD-1, (L) provides 250 ohm resistance for each channel. If your transmitter requires a load resistance below 250 ohms, you do not have to make any adjustments. However, if your transmitter requires a load resistance higher than 250 ohms, you need to add a resistor in series with the module. Consider the following example for a transmitter being operated from a 30 VDC supply with a recommended load resistance of 750 ohms. Since the module has a 250 ohm resistor, you need to add an additional resistor.
R = Tr Mr R = 750 250 R 500 R -- resistor to add Tr -- Transmitter Requirement Mr -- Module resistance (internal 250 ohms)

F2--04AD--1, (L) 4-Ch. Current Input

Two-wire Transmitter + -DC Supply +30V 0V R

Module Channel 1
CH1+ CH10V 250 ohms

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

2-8

F2-04AD-1, F2-04AD-1L 4-Channel Analog Current Input The F2--04AD--1, (L) module has a removable connector to make wiring easier. Simply squeeze the top and bottom retaining clips and gently pull the connector from the module. Use the following diagram to connect the field wiring. The diagram shows separate module and transmitter power supplies. If you desire to use only one field-side supply, just combine the supplies positive (+) terminals into one node, and remove the transmitter supply.
See NOTE 5 Module Supply 10-15 VDC 18-30 VDC + -

Wiring Diagram

Typical User Wiring

F2--04AD--1, (L) 4-Ch. Current Input

Internal Module Wiring

0 VDC See NOTE 5 DC to DC Converter +24 VDC +5V +15V 0V -15V

IN

ANALOG 4CH

See NOTE 1

+ CH1 4-wire + 4-20mA Transmitter CH2 3-wire + 4-20mA Transmitter CH3 2-wire + 4-20mA Transmitter CH4 2-wire + 4-20mA Transmitter + Fuse

CH1CH1+ CH2CH2+ Fuse CH3CH3+ Fuse CH4CH4+ Fuse

250 ohms

F2-04AD-1
10--30VDC 5mA

250 ohms

250 ohms

A to D Converter

250 ohms

ANALOG IN 4--20mA

0V +24V CH1-CH1+ CH2-CH2+ CH3-CH3+ CH4-CH4+

Analog Switch

+ 18-30VDC Supply

OV

Transmitter Supply

24 Volts Model Shown

NOTE 1: Shields should be grounded at the signal source. NOTE 2: More than one external power supply can be used, provided all the power supply commons are connected. NOTE 3: A Series 217, 0.032A fast-acting fuse is recommended for 4-20 mA current loops. NOTE 4: If the power supply common of an external power supply is not connected to 0VDC on the module, then the output of the external transmitter must be isolated. To avoid ground loop errors, recommended 4-20 mA transmitter types are: 2 or 3 wire: Isolation between input signal and power supply. 4 wire: Isolation between input signal, power supply, and 4-20mA output. NOTE 5: Use 10-15VDC for F2-04AD-1L Use 18-30VDC for F2-04AD-1

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-04AD-1, F2-04AD-1L 4-Channel Analog Current Input

2-9

Module Operation
Before you begin writing the control program, it is important to take a few minutes to understand how the module processes and represents the analog signals. The module can supply different amounts of data per scan, depending on the type of CPU you are using. The DL230 can obtain one channel of data per CPU scan. Since there are four channels, it can take up to four scans to get data for all channels. Once all channels have been scanned the process starts over with channel 1. Unused channels are not processed, so if you select only two channels, then each channel will be updated every other scan. The multiplexing method can also be used for the DL240/250--1 and DL260 CPUs.

Channel Scanning Sequence for a DL230 CPU (Multiplexing)

F2--04AD--1, (L) 4-Ch. Current Input

Scan Read Inputs Execute Application Program

Read the data Scan N Scan N+1 Store data Scan N+2 Scan N+3 Scan N+4 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 1 System With DL230 CPU

Write to Outputs

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

2-10

F2-04AD-1, F2-04AD-1L 4-Channel Analog Current Input If you are using a DL240/250--1/260 CPU , you can obtain all four channels of input data in one scan. This is because the DL240/250--1/260 CPU supports special V-memory locations that are used to manage the data transfer. This is discussed in more detail in the section on Writing the Control Program.

Channel Scanning Sequence for a DL240, DL250-1 or or DL260 CPU (Pointer Method)

Scan

F2--04AD--1, (L) 4-Ch. Current Input

Read Inputs Execute Application Program

Read the data Scan N Scan N+1 Store data Scan N+2 Scan N+3 Scan N+4

System With DL240/250-1/260 CPU Ch 1, 2, 3, 4 Ch 1, 2, 3, 4 Ch 1, 2, 3, 4 Ch 1, 2, 3, 4 Ch 1, 2, 3, 4

Write to Outputs

Analog Module Updates

Even though the channel updates to the CPU are synchronous with the CPU scan, the module asynchronously monitors the analog transmitter signal and converts the signal to a 12-bit binary representation. This enables the module to continuously provide accurate measurements without slowing down the discrete control logic in the RLL program. For the vast majority of applications, the values are updated much faster than the signal changes. However, in some applications, the update time can be important. The module takes approximately 4 milliseconds to sense 95% of the change in the analog signal. Note, this is not the amount of time required to convert the signal to a digital representation. The conversion to the digital representation takes only a few microseconds. Many manufacturers list the conversion time, but it is the settling time of the filter that really determines the update time.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-04AD-1, F2-04AD-1L 4-Channel Analog Current Input Understanding the Input Assignments

2-11

You may recall the F2-04AD-1, (L) module requires 16 discrete input points in the CPU. You can use these points to obtain: S an indication of which channel is active S the digital representation of the analog signal S module diagnostic information Since all input points are automatically mapped into V-memory, it is very easy to determine the location of the data word that will be assigned to the module.
F2-04AD-1

F2--04AD--1, (L) 4-Ch. Current Input

Slot 0
8pt Input

Slot 1
8pt Input

Slot 2
16pt Input

Slot 3
16pt Input

Slot 4
16pt Output

X0 -X7

X10 -X17

X20 X37

X40 -X57
V40402

Y0 -Y17
V40500

V40400

MSB X XXX 3 3 3 3 7 6 5 4

V40401

LSB X 2 0

Data Bits

Analog Data Bits

Within these word locations, the individual bits represent specific information about the analog signal. The first twelve bits represent the analog V40401 data in binary format. MSB LSB Bit Value Bit Value 0 1 6 64 1 1 1 1 1 19 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 7 128 5 4 3 21 0 2 4 8 256 3 8 9 512 = data bits 4 16 10 1024 5 32 11 2048

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

2-12

F2-04AD-1, F2-04AD-1L 4-Channel Analog Current Input

Active Channel Indicator Inputs

F2--04AD--1, (L) 4-Ch. Current Input

Two of the inputs are binary-encoded to indicate the active channel (remember, the V-memory bits are mapped directly to discrete inputs). The inputs are automatically turned on and off to indicate the active channel for each scan. Scan X35 X34 Channel N Off Off 1 N+1 Off On 2 N+2 On Off 3 N+3 On On 4 N+4 Off Off 1 The last two inputs are used for module diagnostics. Module Busy The first diagnostic input (X36 in this example) indicates a busy condition. This input will always be active on the first PLC scan, to tell the CPU the analog data is not valid. After the first scan, the input usually only comes on when extreme environmental (electrical) noise problems are present. The programming examples in the next section shows how you can use this input. The wiring guidelines shown earlier in this chapter provide steps that can help reduce noise problems.

V40401 MSB X X 3 3 5 4 LSB X 2 0

= channel inputs

Module Diagnostic Inputs

V40401 MSB X X 3 3 7 6 LSB X 2 0

= diagnostic inputs Note: When using the pointer method, the value placed into the V-memory location will be 8000 instead of the bit being set.

Channel Failure The last diagnostic input (X37 in this example) indicates the analog channel is not operating. For example, if the 24 VDC input power is missing or if the terminal block is loose, the module will turn on this input point. The module also returns a data value of zero to further indicate there is a problem. The next section, Writing the Control Program, shows how you can use these inputs in your control program. Module Resolution Since the module has 12-bit resolution, the analog signal is converted into 4096 counts ranging from 0 -- 4095 (212). For example, a 4mA signal would be 0 and a 20mA signal would be 4095. This is equivalent to a a binary value of 0000 0000 0000 to 1111 1111 1111, or 000 to FFF hexadecimal. The diagram shows how this relates to the signal range. Each count can also be expressed in terms of the signal level by using the equation shown.
4 -- 20mA
20mA

4mA 0 4095

Resolution = H L 4095 H = high limit of the signal range L = low limit of the signal range 16mA / 4095 = 3.907uA per count

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-04AD-1, F2-04AD-1L 4-Channel Analog Current Input

2-13

Writing the Control Program

Reading Values: Pointer Method and Multiplexing There are two methods of reading values: S The pointer method S Multiplexing You must use the multiplexing method when using a DL230 CPU. You must also use the multiplexing method with remote I/O modules (the pointer method will not work). You can use either method when using DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 CPUs, but for ease of programming it is strongly recommended that you use the pointer method. The DL205 series has special V-memory locations assigned to each base slot that greatly simplify the programming requirements. These V-memory locations allow you to: S specify the data format S specify the number of channels to scan S specify the storage locations NOTE: DL250 CPUs with firmware release version 1.06 or later support this method. If you must use the DL230 example, module placement in the base is very important. Review the section earlier in this chapter for guidelines. The example program shows how to setup these locations. Place this rung anywhere in the ladder program, or in the initial stage if you are using stage programming instructions. This is all that is required to read the data into V-memory locations. Once the data is in V-memory you can perform math on the data, compare the data against preset values, and so forth. V2000 is used in the example but you can use any user V-memory location. In this example the module is installed in slot 2. You should use the V-memory locations for your module placement. The pointer method automatically converts values to BCD (depending on the LD statement in the ladder logic).
SP0 LD K 04 00

Pointer Method
230

F2--04AD--1, (L) 4-Ch. Current Input

240 250- 1 260

- or -

LD K 84 00

Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the data format. The upper byte, most significant nibble (MSN) selects the data format (i.e. 0=BCD, 8=Binary), the LSN selects the number of channels (i.e. 1, 2, 3, or 4). The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator interfaces. The DL230/240 CPUs do not support binary math functions, whereas the DL250 does.

OUT V7662 LDA O2000 OUT V7672

Special V-memory location assigned to slot 2 that contains the number of channels to scan. This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used to store the incoming data. For example, the O2000 entered here would designate the following addresses. Ch1 - V2000, Ch2 - V2001, Ch3 - V2002, Ch 4 - V2003 The octal address (O2000) is stored here. V7672 is assigned to slot 2 and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the octal value in this location to determine exactly where to store the incoming data.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

2-14

F2-04AD-1, F2-04AD-1L 4-Channel Analog Current Input The tables below show the special V-memory locations used by the DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 for the CPU base and local expansion base I/O slots. Slot 0 (zero) is the module next to the CPU or D2--CM module. Slot 1 is the module two places from the CPU or D2--CM, and so on. Remember, the CPU only examines the pointer values at these locations after a mode transition. Also, if you use the DL230 (multiplexing) method, verify that these addresses in the CPU are zero. The Table below applies to the DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 CPU base.
CPU Base: Analog Input Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations Slot 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

F2--04AD--1, (L) 4-Ch. Current Input

No. of Channels Storage Pointer

V7660 V7661 V7662 V7663 V7664 V7665 V7666 V7667 V7670 V7671 V7672 V7673 V7674 V7675 V7676 V7677

The Table below applies to the DL250--1 or DL260 expansion base 1.

Expansion Base D2-CM #1: Analog Input Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations Slot No. of Channels Storage Pointer 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V36000 V36001 V36002 V36003 V36004 V36005 V36006 V36007 V36010 V36011 V36012 V36013 V36014 V36015 V36016 V36017

The Table below applies to the DL250--1 or DL260 expansion base 2.

Expansion Base D2-CM #2: Analog Input Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations Slot No. of Channels Storage Pointer 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V36100 V36101 V36102 V36103 V36104 V36105 V36106 V36107 V36110 V36111 V36112 V36113 V36114 V36115 V36116 V36117

The Table below applies to the DL260 CPU expansion base 3.

Expansion Base D2-CM #3: Analog Input Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations Slot No. of Channels Storage Pointer 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V36200 V36201 V36202 V36203 V36204 V36205 V36206 V36207 V36210 V36211 V36212 V36213 V36214 V36215 V36216 V36217

The Table below applies to the DL260 CPU expansion base 4.

Expansion Base D2-CM #4: Analog Input Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations Slot No. of Channels Storage Pointer 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V36300 V36301 V36302 V36303 V36304 V36305 V36306 V36307 V36310 V36311 V36312 V36313 V36314 V36315 V36316 V36317

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-04AD-1, F2-04AD-1L 4-Channel Analog Current Input

2-15

Reading Values (Multiplexing)

230

240 250- 1 260

The DL230 CPU does not have the special V-memory locations that allow you to automatically enable the data transfer. Since all channels are multiplexed into a single data word, the control program must be setup to determine which channel is being read. Since the module appears as X input points to the CPU, it is very easy to use the active channel status bits to determine which channel is being monitored. Note, this example is for a module installed as shown in the previous examples. The addresses used would be different if the module was installed in a different I/O arrangement. You can place these rungs anywhere in the program, or if you are using stage programming place them in a stage that is always active.
Load Data when Module is not busy X36 LD V40401 ANDD KFFF BCD Store Channel 1 X36 X34 X35

F2--04AD--1, (L) 4-Ch. Current Input

Loads the complete data word into the accumulator. The V-memory location depends on the I/O configuration. See Appendix A for the memory map. This instruction masks the channel identification bits. Without this, the values used will not be correct so do not forget to include it. It is usually easier to perform math operations in BCD, so it is best to convert the data to BCD immediately. You can leave out this instruction if your application does not require it. When the module is not busy and X34 and X35 are off, channel 1 data is stored in V2000.

OUT V2000

Store Channel 2 X36 X34 X35

OUT V2001

When X34 is on and X35 is off, channel 2 data is stored in V2001.

Store Channel 3 X36 X34 X35

OUT V2002

When X34 is off and X35 is on, channel 3 data is stored in V2002.

Store Channel 4 X36 X34 X35

OUT V2003

When both X34 and X35 are on, channel 4 data is stored in V2003.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

2-16

F2-04AD-1, F2-04AD-1L 4-Channel Analog Current Input Since you do not have to determine which channel is selected, the single channel program is even more simple.
Store Channel 1 when Module is not busy X36 X34 X35 LD V40401 ANDD KFFF BCD
Loads the complete data word into the accumulator. The V-memory location depends on the I/O configuration. See Appendix A for the memory map. This instruction masks the channel identification bits. Without this, the values used will not be correct so do not forget to include it. It is usually easier to perform math operations in BCD, so it is best to convert the data to BCD immediately. You can leave out this instruction if your application does not require it. When the module is not busy and X34 and X35 are off, channel 1 data is stored in V2000.

Single Channel Selected

F2--04AD--1, (L) 4-Ch. Current Input

OUT V2000

Analog Power Failure Detection

The Analog module has an on-board processor that can diagnose analog input circuit problems. You can easily create a simple ladder rung to detect these problems. This rung shows an input point that would be assigned if the module was installed as shown in the previous examples. A different point would be used if the module was installed in a different I/O arrangement. Multiplexing method
V2000 K0 X37
V-memory location V2000 holds channel 1 data. When a data value of zero is returned and input X37 is on, then the analog circuitry is not operating properly.

C1
OUT

Pointers method
V2000 K8000

C1
OUT

V-memory location V2000 holds channel 1 data. When a data value of 8000 is returned, then the analog circuitry is not operating properly.

Scaling the Input Data

Most applications usually require measurements in engineering units, which provides more meaningful data. This is accomplished by using the conversion formula shown. You may have to make adjustments to the formula depending on the scale you choose for the engineering units.

Units = A H L 4095 H = High limit of the engineering unit range L = Low limit of the engineering unit range A = Analog value (0 -- 4095)

For example, if you wanted to measure pressure (PSI) from 0.0 to 99.9 then you would have to multiply the analog value by 10 in order to imply a decimal place when you view the value with the programming software or a handheld programmer. Notice how the calculations differ when you use the multiplier.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-04AD-1, F2-04AD-1L 4-Channel Analog Current Input

2-17

Analog Value of 2024, slightly less than half scale, should yield 49.4 PSI Example without multiplier Units = A H L 4095 Units = 2024 100 0 4095 Units = 49
Handheld Display

Example with multiplier Units = 10 A H L 4095 Units = 20240 100 0 4095 Units = 494
Handheld Display

V 2001 V 2000 0000 0049

V 2001 V 2000 0000 0494

This value is more accurate

F2--04AD--1, (L) 4-Ch. Current Input

The following example shows how you would write the program to perform the engineering unit conversion. This example assumes you have BCD data loaded into the appropriate V-memory locations using instructions that apply for the model of CPU you are using.
Note: this example uses SP1, which is always on. You could also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact.

SP1

LD V2000 MUL K1000 DIV K4095 OUT V2010

When SP1 is on, load channel 1 data to the accumulator.

Multiply the accumulator by 1000 (to start the conversion).

Divide the accumulator by 4095.

Store the result in V2010.

Analog and Digital Value Conversions

Sometimes it is useful to be able to quickly convert between the signal levels and the digital values. This is especially helpful during machine startup or troubleshooting. The following table provides formulas to make this conversion easier.
Range 4 to 20mA If you know the digital value... A = 16D + 4 4095 If you know the analog signal level... D = 4095 (A 4) 16 D = 4095 (A 4) 16 4095 D= (10mA 4) 16 D = (255.93) (6)

For example, if you have measured the signal as 10mA, you can use the formula to easily determine the digital value that will be stored in the V-memory location that contains the data.

D = 1536

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

2-18

F2-04AD-1, F2-04AD-1L 4-Channel Analog Current Input Add the following logic to filter and smooth analog input noise in DL250--1 and DL260 CPUs. This is especially useful when using PID loops. Noise can be generated by the field device and/or induced by field wiring. The analog value in BCD is first converted to a binary number because there is not a BCD-to-real conversion instruction. Memory location V1400 is the designated work space in this example. The MULR instruction is the filter factor, which can be from 0.1 to 0.9. The example uses 0.2. A smaller filter factor increases filtering. You can use a higher precision value, but it is not generally needed. The filtered value is then converted back to binary and then to BCD. The filtered value is stored in location V1402 for use in your application or PID loop. NOTE: Be careful not to do a multiple number conversion on a value. For example, if you are using the pointer method to get the analog value, it is in BCD and must be converted to binary. However, if you are using the conventional method of reading analog and are masking the first twelve bits, then it is already in binary and no conversion using the BIN instruction is needed.
SP1

Filtering Input Noise (DL250-1, DL260 CPU Only)

230 240 250- 1 260

F2--04AD--1, (L) 4-Ch. Current Input

LD V2000

Loads the analog signal, which is a BCD value and has been loaded from V-memory location V2000, into the accumulator. Contact SP1 is always on. Converts the BCD value in the accumulator to binary. Remember, this instruction is not needed if the analog value is originally brought in as a binary number. Converts the binary value in the accumulator to a real number.

BIN

BTOR

SUBR V1400

Subtracts the real number stored in location V1400 from the real number in the accumulator, and stores the result in the accumulator. V1400 is the designated workspace in this example. Multiplies the real number in the accumulator by 0.2 (the filter factor), and stores the result in the accumulator. This is the filtered value. Adds the real number stored in location V1400 to the real number filtered value in the accumulator, and stores the result in the accumulator. Copies the value in the accumulator to location V1400.

MULR R0.2

ADDR V1400

OUTD V1400

RTOB

Converts the real number in the accumulator to a binary value, and stores the result in the accumulator. Converts the binary value in the accumulator to a BCD number. Note: The BCD instruction is not needed for PID loop PV (loop PV is a binary number). Loads the BCD number filtered value from the accumulator into location V1402 to use in your application or PID loop.

BCD

OUT V1402

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-04AD-2, F2-04AD-2L 4-Channel Analog Voltage Input

In This Chapter. . . .
Module Specifications Setting the Module Jumpers Connecting the Field Wiring Module Operation Writing the Control Program

3-2

F2-04AD-2, F2-04AD-2L 4-Channel Analog Voltage Input

Module Specifications
F2-04AD-2 The F2-04AD-2 analog Input module provides several hardware features. S Analog inputs are optically isolated from the PLC logic. S The module has a removable terminal block so the module can be easily removed or changed without disconnecting the wiring. S With a DL240/250--1/260 CPU, you can read all four channels in one scan. S On-board active analog filtering and microcontroller provide digital signal processing to maintain precision analog measurements in noisy environments. F2-04AD-2, (L) 4-Ch. Voltage Input
F2-04AD-2
IN ANALOG 4CH

F2-04AD-2
10--30VDC 5mA

ANALOG IN 0--5, 0--10VDC +/--5,+/--10VDC

0V +24V CH1-CH1+ CH2-CH2+ CH3-CH3+ CH4-CH4+

F2-04AD-2L (Obsolete) NOTE: In 2009 the F2-04AD-2L was discontinued. A re-designed F2-04AD-2 was released at the same time which can be powered by either 12 VDC or 24VDC input power supplies. This new module is a direct replacement for prior F2-04AD-2 and all F2-04AD-2L modules. The new module is a single circuit board design and the jumper link locations are different. See Setting the Module Jumpers on page 3-5. Also, some specifications were changed on page 3-3. Otherwise, the re-designed module functions the same as the prior designs.

F2-04AD-2L
IN ANALOG 4CH

F2-04AD-2
18--26.4VDC 90mA

--

0V +12V CH1-CH1+ CH2-CH2+ CH3-CH3+ CH4-CH4+

ANALOG IN 0--5, 0--10VDC +/--5,+/--10VDC

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-04AD-2, F2-04AD-2L 4-Channel Analog Voltage Input

3-3

Input Specifications

All specifications are the same for both modules except for the input voltage requirements. Review these specifications to make sure the module meets your application requirements.
Number of Channels Input Ranges Resolution Common Mode Rejection Step Response Crosstalk Active Low-pass Filtering Input Impedance Absolute Maximum Ratings Converter type Linearity Error (End to End) Input Stability Full Scale Calibration Error (Offset error not included) Offset Calibration Error Maximum Inaccuracy Accuracy vs vs. Temperature 4, single ended (one common) 0 to 5V, 0 to 10V, 5V, 10V 12 bit (1 in 4096) unipolar (0 -- 4095) 13 bit (1 in 8192) bipolar (--4095 -- +4095) --50 dB at 800 Hz 8.2 ms (*10 ms) to 95% of full step change --70 dB, 1 count maximum --3 dB at 80Hz, 2 poles (--12 dB per octave) > 20 M --75 to +75 VDC Successive approximation 1 count (0.025% of span) maximum unipolar 2 counts maximum bipolar 1 count 3 counts maximum 1 count maximum (0V input) .1% @ 25C (77F) .3% 0 to 60_C (32 to 140F)

F2-04AD-2, (L) 4-Ch. Voltage Input

General Specifications

50 ppm / _C full scale calibration change (including maximum offset change of 2 counts) One count in the specification table is equal to one least significant bit of the analog data value (1 in 4096). 1 channel per scan maximum (D2--230 CPU) PLC Update Rate 4 channels per scan max. (D2--240/250--1/260CPU) Digital Inputs Input points required Power Budget Requirement External Power Supply 12 binary data bits, 2 channel ID bits, 1 sign/diagnostics bit 1 diagnostic bit bit, 16 point (X) input module 110 mA (*60 mA) maximum, maximum 5 VDC (supplied by base) 5 mA (*90 mA) max., 10--30 VDC (*18--26.4 VDC) (F2-04AD-2 models); 90 mA maximum, 10 to 15 VDC (F2-04AD-2L models) 0 to 60_ C (32 to 140 F ) --20 to 70_ C (--4 to 158 F) 5 to 95% (non-condensing) No corrosive gases permitted MIL STD 810C 514.2 MIL STD 810C 516.2

Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Relative Humidity Environmental air Vibration Shock

Noise Immunity NEMA ICS3--304 ICS3 304 * Values in parenthesis with an asterisk are for older modules with two circuit board design and date codes 0609F4 and previous. Values not in parenthesis are for single circuit board models with date code 0709G and above.

Analog Input Configuration Requirements

Appears as a 16-point discrete input module and can be installed in any slot of a DL205 system. The available power budget and discrete I/O points are the limiting factors. Check the user manual for your particular model of CPU and I/O base for more information regarding power budget and number of local, local expansion or remote I/O points.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

3-4

F2-04AD-2, F2-04AD-2L 4-Channel Analog Voltage Input Even though the module can be placed in any slot, it is important to examine the configuration if you are using a DL230 CPU. As you can see in the section on writing the program, you use V-memory locations to extract the analog data. If you place the module so that the input points do not start on a V-memory boundary, the instructions cannot access the data. This also applies when placing this module in a remote base using a D2--RSSS in the CPU slot. Correct!
F2--04AD-2

Special Placement Requirements (DL230 and Remote I/O Bases)

Slot 0
8pt Input

Slot 1
8pt Input

Slot 2
16pt Input

Slot 3
16pt Input

Slot 4
16pt Output

X0 -X7

X10 -X17

X20 X37

X40 -X57

Y0 -Y17

V40400

V40402 V40500

V40401 Data is correctly entered so input points start on a V-memory boundary. MSB X 3 7 LSB X 2 0

F2-04AD-2, (L) 4-Ch. Voltage Input

Incorrect

F2--04AD-2

Slot 0
8pt Input

Slot 1
16pt Input

Slot 2
16pt Input

Slot 3
16pt Input

Slot 4
16pt Output

X0 -X7

X10 -X27

X30 -X47

X50 -X67

Y0 -Y17

Data is split over two locations, so instructions cannot access data from a DL230. MSB X 3 7 V40401 X X 3 2 0 7 LSB X 2 0 MSB X 1 7 V40400 X X 1 7 0 LSB X 0

To use the V-memory references required for a DL230 CPU, the first input address assigned to the module must be one of the following X locations. The table also shows the V-memory addresses that correspond to these X locations. X V X0 X20 X40 X60 X100 X120 X140 X160

V40400 V40401 V40402 V40403 V40404 V40405 V40406 V40407

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-04AD-2, F2-04AD-2L 4-Channel Analog Voltage Input

3-5

Setting the Module Jumpers

Selecting the Number of Channels There are two jumpers, labeled +1 and +2, that are used to select the number of channels that will be used. See the figures below to find the jumpers on your module. The module is set from the factory for four channel operation. Any unused channels are not processed, so if you only select channels 1 thru 3, channel 4 will not be active. The following table shows how to use the jumpers to select the number of channels. Channel +1 +2 1 No No 1, 2 Yes No 1, 2, 3 No Yes 1, 2, 3, 4 Yes Yes Yes = jumper installed No = jumper removed

For example, to select all 4 channels (1--4), leave both jumpers installed. To select channel 1, remove both jumpers. F2-04AD-2, (L) 4-Ch. Voltage Input

Jumper Location on Modules Having Date Code 0609F4 and Previous (Two Circuit Board Design)
+1 +2

Jumper Location on Modules Having Date Code 0709G and Above (Single Circuit Board Design)

Use jumpers +1 and +2 to select number of channels. +1 +2

Jumper +1

These jumpers are located on the motherboard, the one with the black D-shell style backplane connector.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

3-6

F2-04AD-2, F2-04AD-2L 4-Channel Analog Voltage Input

Selecting the Input Signal Range

There is another jumper, labeled either J2 or J3 (depending on the whether you have a single or double circuit board module), that is used to select between the 5V ranges and the 10V ranges. See the figures below to locate the jumper on your module. The module comes from the factory set for 10V operation (jumper not installed).

Install jumper J2 or J3 for 0--5V or 5V operation. Remove J2 or J3, or store on a single pin, for 0 to10 or 10V operation.

Jumper J2 Location on Modules Having Date Code 0609F4 and Previous (Two Circuit Board Design)

Jumper J3 Location on Modules Having Date Code 0709G and Above (Single Circuit Board Design)

J3

Jumper J2

F2-04AD-2, (L) 4-Ch. Voltage Input

Jumper J2 is located on the smaller circuit board, which is on top of the motherboard. Install J2 for 0--5V or 5V operation. Remove J2, or store on a single pin, for 0 to10 or 10V operation.

Install J3 for 0--5V or 5V operation. Remove J3, or store on a single pin, for 0 to10 or 10V operation.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-04AD-2, F2-04AD-2L 4-Channel Analog Voltage Input

3-7

Connecting the Field Wiring

Wiring Guidelines Your company may have guidelines for wiring and cable installation. If so, you should check those before you begin the installation. Here are some general things to consider: S Use the shortest wiring route whenever possible. S Use shielded wiring and ground the shield at the transmitter source. Do not ground the shield at both the module and the source. S Do not run the signal wiring next to large motors, high current switches, or transformers. This may cause noise problems. S Route the wiring through an approved cable housing to minimize the risk of accidental damage. Check local and national codes to choose the correct method for your application. The module requires at least one field-side power supply. You may use the same or separate power sources for the module supply and the voltage transmitter supply. The F2-04AD-2 module requires 18--26.4VDC at 80 mA. The DL205 bases have built-in 24 VDC power supplies that provide up to 300mA of current. You may use this instead of a separate supply if you are using only a couple of analog modules. It is desirable in some situations to power the transmitters separately in a location remote from the PLC. This will work as long as the transmitter supply meets the voltage and current requirements, and the transmitter minus (--) side and the module supplys minus (--) side are connected together. WARNING: If you are using the 24 VDC base power supply, make sure you calculate the power budget. Exceeding the power budget can cause unpredictable system operation that can lead to a risk of personal injury or damage to equipment. The DL205 base has a switching type power supply. As a result of switching noise, you may notice 3--5 counts of instability in the analog input data if you use the base power supply. If this is unacceptable, you should try one of the following: 1. Use a separate linear power supply. 2. Connect the 24VDC common to the frame ground, which is the screw terminal marked G on the base. By using these methods, the input stability is rated at 1 count. The F2-04AD-2L requires 10--15VDC at 90mA and must be powered by a separate power supply.

User Power Supply Requirements

F2-04AD-2, (L) 4-Ch. Voltage Input

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

3-8

F2-04AD-2, F2-04AD-2L 4-Channel Analog Voltage Input Occasionally you may have the need to connect a (current) transmitter with an unusual signal range. By changing the wiring slightly and adding an external resistor to convert the current to voltage, you can easily adapt this module to meet the specifications for a transmitter that does not adhere to one of the standard input ranges. The following diagram shows how this works. The example below only shows channel 1, but you can also use the other channels as well.
Module internal circuitry 0V Field wiring + 50mA CH3 0V 24 V +5V +15V 0V -15V DC to DC Converter

Custom Input Ranges

24V IN+ INR

CH1

Analog Switch

Current Transmitter

CH2

A to D Converter

CH4

F2-04AD-2, (L) 4-Ch. Voltage Input

R=

Vmax Imax

OV

R = value of external resistor Vmax = high limit of selected voltage range (5V or 10V) Imax = maximum current supplied by the transmitter Example: current transmitter capable of 50mA, 0 -- 10V range selected. R= 10V 50mA R = 200 ohms

NOTE:Your choice of resistor can affect the accuracy of the module. A resistor that has 0.1% tolerance and a 50ppm / _C temperature coefficient is recommended. If you use 4--20mA signals and convert them to voltage using this method, you can easily check for broken transmitter conditions. For example, if you are using the 0--5V range and the lowest signal for the 4--20mA transmitter is 4mA, the lowest digital value for the signal is not 0, but instead is 819. If the transmitter is working properly, the smallest value would be 819 in the DL205. If you see a value of less than about 750 (allowing for tolerance), then you know the transmitter is broken.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-04AD-2, F2-04AD-2L 4-Channel Analog Voltage Input Wiring Diagram

3-9

The module has a removable connector to make wiring easier. Simply squeeze the top and bottom retaining clips and gently pull the connector from the module. Use the following diagram to connect the field wiring. The diagram shows separate module and transmitter power supplies. If you desire to use only one field-side supply, just combine the supplies positive (+) terminals into one node and remove the transmitter supply.

Notes: 1. Shields should be grounded at the signal source. 2. Unused inputs should be jumpered together (i.e. Ch4-- to Ch4+). 3. More than one external power supply can be used provided the commons are connected together. 4. F2-04AD-2L requires 10--15 VDC input supply.
Module Supply See NOTES 3, 4 18-26.4VDC + -

Typical User Wiring

See NOTE 1

Internal Module Wiring

0 VDC +24 VDC CH1-CH1+ CH2-Analog Switch CH2+ CH3-CH3+ CH4-CH4+ CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 0V 24 V +5V +15V 0V -15V

IN
DC to DC Converter

ANALOG 4CH

+ CH1 Voltage + Transmitter + CH2 Voltage + Transmitter +

F2-04AD-2
10--30VDC 5mA

F2-04AD-2, (L) 4-Ch. Voltage Input

CH3 Voltage + Transmitter +

A to D Converter

CH4 Voltage + Transmitter

ANALOG IN 0--5, 0--10VDC +/--5,+/--10VDC

0V +24V CH1-CH1+ CH2-CH2+ CH3-CH3+ CH4-CH4+

+ See NOTE 3 5-12VDC Supply

OV

Transmitter Supply

24 volts model shown, but wiring is the same for 12 volts model.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

3-10

F2-04AD-2, F2-04AD-2L 4-Channel Analog Voltage Input

Module Operation
Before you begin writing the control program, it is important to take a few minutes to understand how the module processes and represents the analog signals. The module can supply different amounts of data per scan, depending on the type of CPU you are using. The DL230 can obtain one channel of data per CPU scan. Since there are four channels, it can take up to four scans to get data for all channels. Once all channels have been scanned the process starts over with channel 1. Unused channels are not processed, so if you select only two channels, then each channel will be updated every other scan. The multiplexing method can also be used for the DL240/250--1/DL260 CPUs.

Channel Scanning Sequence for a DL230 CPU (Multiplexing)

Scan Read Inputs

System With DL230 CPU

F2-04AD-2, (L) 4-Ch. Voltage Input

Execute Application Program

Read the data Scan N Scan N+1 Store data Scan N+2 Scan N+3 Scan N+4 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 1

Write to Outputs

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-04AD-2, F2-04AD-2L 4-Channel Analog Voltage Input Channel Scanning Sequence with a DL240, DL250-1 or DL260 CPU (Pointer Method)

3-11

If you are using a DL240, DL250--1 or DL260 CPU, you can obtain all four channels of input data in one scan. This is because the DL240/250--1/260 CPU supports special V-memory locations that are used to manage the data transfer (this is discussed in more detail in the section on Writing the Control Program).

Scan Read Inputs Execute Application Program

Read the data Scan N Scan N+1 Store data Scan N+2 Scan N+3 Scan N+4

System With DL240/250-1/ 260CPU

Ch 1, 2, 3, 4 Ch 1, 2, 3, 4 Ch 1, 2, 3, 4 Ch 1, 2, 3, 4 Ch 1, 2, 3, 4

F2-04AD-2, (L) 4-Ch. Voltage Input

Write to Outputs

Analog Module Updates

Even though the channel updates to the CPU are synchronous with the CPU scan, the module asynchronously monitors the analog transmitter signal and converts the signal to a 12-bit binary representation. This enables the module to continuously provide accurate measurements without slowing down the discrete control logic in the RLL program. For the vast majority of applications, the values are updated much faster than the signal changes. However, in some applications, the update time can be important. The module takes approximately 10 milliseconds to sense 95% of the change in the analog signal. Note, this is not the amount of time required to convert the signal to a digital representation. The conversion to the digital representation takes only a few microseconds. Many manufacturers list the conversion time, but it is the settling time of the filter that really determines the update time.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

3-12

F2-04AD-2, F2-04AD-2L 4-Channel Analog Voltage Input You may recall that the module appears to the CPU as a 16-point discrete input module. You can use these points to obtain: S an indication of which channel is active. S the digital representation of the analog signal. S module diagnostic information. Since all input points are automatically mapped into V memory, it is very easy to determine the location of the data word that will be assigned to the module.
F2--04AD-2

Understanding the Input Assignments

Slot 0
8pt Input

Slot 1
8pt Input

Slot 2
16pt Input

Slot 3
16pt Input

Slot 4
16pt Output

X0 -X7

X10 -X17

X20 X37

X40 -X57 V40402

Y0 -Y17

V40400 V40401

F2-04AD-2, (L) 4-Ch. Voltage Input

MSB XXXX 3 3 3 3 7 6 5 4

LSB X 2 0

Data Bits

Within these word locations, the individual bits represent specific information about the analog signal. Analog Data Bits The first twelve bits represent the analog data in binary format. Bit Value Bit Value 0 1 6 64 1 2 7 128 2 4 8 256 3 8 9 512 4 16 10 1024 5 32 11 2048 Two of the inputs are binary encoded to indicate the active channel (remember, the V-memory bits are mapped directly to discrete inputs). The inputs automatically turn on and off to indicate the current channel for each scan. Scan X35 X34 Channel N Off Off 1 N+1 Off On 2 N+2 On Off 3 N+3 On On 4 N+4 Off Off 1
V40401 MSB LSB 11 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 10

= data bits

Active Channel Indicator Inputs

V40401 MSB X X 3 3 5 4 LSB X 2 0

= channel inputs

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-04AD-2, F2-04AD-2L 4-Channel Analog Voltage Input Module Diagnostic and Sign Inputs The last two inputs are used for module diagnostics. Module Busy The first diagnostic input (X36 in this example) indicates a busy condition. This input will always be active on the first PLC scan, to tell the CPU that the analog data is not valid. After the first scan, the input usually only comes on when extreme environmental (electrical) noise problems are present.

3-13

V40401 MSB XX 3 3 7 6 LSB X 2 0

= Module Busy = diagnostics and sign

The last input (X37 in this example) is used for two purposes. Signal Sign When using bipolar ranges you need to know if the value returned is positive or negative. When this input is off, the value stored represents a positive analog signal (0V or greater). If the input is on, then the value stored represents a negative input signal (less than 0V). Channel Failure This input can also indicate an analog channel failure. For example, if the 24 VDC input power is missing or the terminal block is loose, the module turns on this input and returns a data value of zero (remember, if this input is on and the data value is not equal to zero, then it is just showing the sign). The next section, Writing the Control Program, shows how you can use these inputs in your control program. Module Resolution Since the module has 12-bit unipolar resolution, the analog signal is converted into 4096 counts ranging from 0 -- 4095 (212). For example, with a 0 to 10V scale, a 0V signal would be 0 and a 10V signal would be 4095. This is equivalent to a binary value of 0000 0000 0000 to 1111 1111 1111, or 000 to FFF hexadecimal. The diagram shows how this relates to each signal range. The bipolar ranges utilize a sign bit to provide 13-bit resolution. A value of 4095 can represent the upper limit of either side of the range. Use the sign bit to determine negative values.
Unipolar Ranges
+V +V 0V 0V 0 4095 -V -4095

F2-04AD-2, (L) 4-Ch. Voltage Input

Bipolar Ranges

4095

Unipolar Resolution = H L 4095 H Bipolar Resolution = L 8191 H or L = high or low limit of the range

Each count can also be expressed in terms of the signal level by using the equation shown. The following table shows the smallest detectable signal change that will result in one LSB change in the data value for each input signal range. Range 0 to +10V --10 to +10V 0 to +5V --5V to +5V Signal Span (H - L) 10V 20V 5V 10V Divide By 4095 8191 4095 8191 Smallest Detectable Change 2.44 mV 2.44 mV 1.22 mV 1.22 mV

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

3-14

F2-04AD-2, F2-04AD-2L 4-Channel Analog Voltage Input

Writing the Control Program

Reading Values: Pointer Method and Multiplexing There are two methods of reading values: S The pointer method S Multiplexing You must use the multiplexing method when using a DL230 CPU. You must also use the multiplexing method with remote I/O modules (the pointer method will not work). You can use either method when using DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 CPUs, but for ease of programming it is strongly recommended that you use the pointer method. DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 CPUs have special V-memory locations assigned to each base slot that greatly simplify the programming requirements. These V-memory locations: S specify the data format S specify the number of channels to scan S specify the storage locations NOTE: DL250 CPUs with firmware release version 1.06 or later support this method. If you must use the DL230 example, module placement in the base is very important. Review the section earlier in this chapter for guidelines. The example program shows how to setup these locations. Place this rung anywhere in the ladder program or in the Initial Stage if you are using RLL PLUS instructions. This is all that is required to read the data into V-memory locations. Once the data is in V-memory, you can perform math on the data, compare the data against preset values, and so forth. V2000 is used in the example but you can use any user V-memory location. In this example the module is installed in slot 2. You should use the V-memory locations for your module placement. The pointer method automatically converts values to BCD.
SP0 LD K 04 00

Pointer Method
230

240 250- 1 260

F2-04AD-2, (L) 4-Ch. Voltage Input

- or -

LD K 84 00

Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the data format. The upper byte, most significant nibble (MSN) selects the data format (i.e. 0=BCD, 8=Binary), the LSN selects the number of channels (i.e. 1, 2, 3, or 4). The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator interfaces. The DL230/240 CPUs do not support binary math functions, whereas the DL250 does.

OUT V7662 LDA O2000 OUT V7672

Special V-memory location assigned to slot 2 that contains the number of channels to scan. This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used to store the incoming data. For example, the O2000 entered here would designate the following addresses. Ch1 - V2000, Ch2 - V2001, Ch3 - V2002, Ch 4 - V2003 The octal address (O2000) is stored here. V7672 is assigned to slot 2 and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the octal value in this location to determine exactly where to store the incoming data.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-04AD-2, F2-04AD-2L 4-Channel Analog Voltage Input

3-15

The tables below show the special V-memory locations used by the DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 for the CPU base and local expansion base I/O slots. Slot 0 (zero) is the module next to the CPU or D2--CM module. Slot 1 is the module two places from the CPU or D2--CM, and so on. Remember, the CPU only examines the pointer values at these locations after a mode transition. Also, if you use the DL230 (multiplexing) method, verify that these addresses in the CPU are zero. The Table below applies to the DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 CPU base.
CPU Base: Analog Input Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations Slot No. of Channels Storage Pointer 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V7660 V7661 V7662 V7663 V7664 V7665 V7666 V7667 V7670 V7671 V7672 V7673 V7674 V7675 V7676 V7677

The Table below applies to the DL250--1 or DL260 expansion base 1.

Expansion Base D2-CM #1: Analog Input Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations Slot No. of Channels Storage Pointer 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V36000 V36001 V36002 V36003 V36004 V36005 V36006 V36007 V36010 V36011 V36012 V36013 V36014 V36015 V36016 V36017

F2-04AD-2, (L) 4-Ch. Voltage Input

The Table below applies to the DL250--1 or DL260 expansion base 2.

Expansion Base D2-CM #2: Analog Input Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations Slot No. of Channels Storage Pointer 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V36100 V36101 V36102 V36103 V36104 V36105 V36106 V36107 V36110 V36111 V36112 V36113 V36114 V36115 V36116 V36117

The Table below applies to the DL260 CPU expansion base 3.

Expansion Base D2-CM #3: Analog Input Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations Slot No. of Channels Storage Pointer 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V36200 V36201 V36202 V36203 V36204 V36205 V36206 V36207 V36210 V36211 V36212 V36213 V36214 V36215 V36216 V36217

The Table below applies to the DL260 CPU expansion base 4.

Expansion Base D2-CM #4: Analog Input Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations Slot No. of Channels Storage Pointer 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V36300 V36301 V36302 V36303 V36304 V36305 V36306 V36307 V36310 V36311 V36312 V36313 V36314 V36315 V36316 V36317

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

3-16

F2-04AD-2, F2-04AD-2L 4-Channel Analog Voltage Input With bipolar ranges, you need some additional logic to determine whether the value being returned represents a positive voltage or a negative voltage. For example, you may need to know the direction for a motor. With the DL240/250 CPU, you cannot use the last input (X37 in the previous examples) to show the sign for each channel. This is because the DL240/250--1/260 reads all four channels in one scan. Therefore, if you tried to use X37 you would only be monitoring the last channel that was read. You would not be able to determine the sign for the previous three channels. There is a simple solution: S If you get a value greater than or equal to 8001, the value is negative.

Using Bipolar Ranges (Pointer Method)

230 240 250- 1 260

The sign bit is the most significant bit, which combines 8000 to the data value. If the value is greater than or equal to 8001, you only have to mask the most significant bit and the active channel bits to determine the actual data value. The following program shows how you can accomplish this. Since you always want to know when a value is negative, these rungs should be placed before any other operations that use the data, such as math instructions, scaling operations, and so forth. Also, if you are using stage programming instructions, these rungs should be in a stage that is always active. Please note, you only need this logic for each channel that is using bipolar input signals. The example only shows two channels. F2-04AD-2, (L) 4-Ch. Voltage Input
Check Channel 1 SP1

LD V2000 ANDD K7FFF

Load channel 1 data from V-memory into the accumulator. Remember, the data can be negative. Contact SP1 is always on. This instruction masks the sign bit of the BCD data if it is set. Without this step, negative values will not be correct, so do not forget to include it. Put the actual signal value in V2020. Now you can use the data normally.

OUT V2020 V2000 K8001 C1

OUT

Channel 1 data is negative when C1 is on (a value of -1 reads as 8001, -2 is 8002, etc.).

Check Channel 2 SP1

LD V2001 ANDD K7FFF

Load channel 2 from V-memory into the accumulator. Remember, the data can be negative. Contact SP1 is always on. This instruction masks the sign bit of the BCD data if it is set. Without this step, negative values will not be correct, so do not forget to include it. Put the actual signal value in V2021. Now you can use the data normally.

OUT V2021 V2001 K8001 C2

OUT

Channel 2 data is negative when C2 is on (a value of -1 reads as 8001, -2 is 8002, etc.).

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-04AD-2, F2-04AD-2L 4-Channel Analog Voltage Input

3-17

Reading Values (Multiplexing)

230 240 250- 1 260

The DL230 CPU does not have the special V-memory locations that allow you to automatically enable the data transfer. Since all channels are multiplexed from a single data word, the control program must be setup to determine which channel is being read. Since the module appears as 16 X input points to the CPU, it is very easy to use the active channel status bits to determine which channel is being monitored. Note, this example is for a module installed as shown in the previous examples. The addresses used would be different if the module was used in a different I/O configuration. You can place these rungs anywhere in the program, or if you are using stage programming place them in a stage that is always active.
Load data when module is not busy. X36 LD V40401 ANDD KFFF BCD Store Channel 1 X36 X34 X35
Loads the complete data word into the accumulator. The V-memory location depends on the I/O configuration. See Appendix A for the memory map. This instruction masks the channel identification bits. Without this, the values used will not be correct, so do not forget to include it. It is usually easier to perform math operations in BCD. So it is best to convert the data to BCD immediately. You can leave out this instruction if your application does not require it.

F2-04AD-2, (L) 4-Ch. Voltage Input

OUT V2000

When the module is not busy and X34 and X35 are off, channel 1 data is stored in V2000.

Store Channel 2 X36 X34 X35

OUT V2001

When X34 is on and X35 is off, channel 2 data is stored in V2001.

Store Channel 3 X36 X34 X35

OUT V2002

When X34 is off and X35 is on, channel 3 data is stored in V2002.

Store Channel 4 X36 X34 X35

OUT V2003

When both X34 and X35 are on, channel 4 data is stored in V2003.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

3-18

F2-04AD-2, F2-04AD-2L 4-Channel Analog Voltage Input Since you do not have to determine which channel is selected, the single channel program is even simpler.
Store channel 1 when module is not busy. X36 X34 X35 LD V40401 ANDD KFFF BCD
Loads the complete data word into the accumulator. The V-memory location depends on the I/O configuration. See Appendix A for the memory map. This instruction masks the channel identification bits. Without this, the values used will not be correct, so do not forget to include it. It is usually easier to perform math operations in BCD, so it is best to convert the data to BCD immediately. You can leave out this instruction if your application does not require it. When the module is not busy and X34 and X35 are off, channel 1 data is stored in V2000.

Single Channel Selected

OUT V2000

Using Bipolar Ranges (Multiplexing)

F2-04AD-2, (L) 4-Ch. Voltage Input

With bipolar ranges, you need some additional logic because you need to know if the value being returned represents a positive voltage or a negative voltage. For example, you may need to know the direction for a motor. Since the DL230 only reads one channel per scan, you can use the last input (X37 in the examples) to show the sign. The following program shows how you can accomplish this. Since you always want to know when a value is negative, these rungs should be placed before any operations that use the data, such as math instructions, scaling operations, and so forth. Also, if you are using stage programming instructions these rungs should be in a stage that is always active. Please note, you only need the additional logic for those channels that are using bipolar input signals. The example shows two channels but you can repeat these steps for all four channels if necessary.
Load data when module is not busy. X36 LD V40401
Loads the complete data word into the accumulator. The V-memory location depends on the I/O configuration. See Appendix A for the memory map. This instruction masks the channel identification bits. Without this, the values used will not be correct, so do not forget to include it. It is usually easier to perform math operations in BCD, so it is best to convert the data to BCD immediately. You can leave out this instruction if your application does not require it. When the module is not busy and X34 and X35 are off, channel 1 data is stored in V2000. C0 is reset to indicate channel ones value is positive.

ANDD KFFF Store Channel 1 X36 X34 X35 BCD

OUT V2000 C0
RST

Store Channel 2 X36 X34 X35

X37

C0
SET

If X37 is on, then the data value represents a negative voltage. C0 is set to indicate channel 1s value is negative. When the module is not busy, and X34 is on and X35 is off, channel 2 data is stored in V2001. C1 is reset to indicate that channel 2s value is positive.

OUT V2001 C1
RST

X37

C1
SET

If X37 is on, then the data value represents a negative voltage. C1 is set to indicate that channel 2s value is negative.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-04AD-2, F2-04AD-2L 4-Channel Analog Voltage Input Using 2s Complement (Multiplexing)

230

3-19

The 2s complement data format may be required to display negative values on some operator interface devices. It could also be used to simplify data averaging on bipolar signals. The example shows two channels, but you can repeat these steps for all four channels if necessary.
Load data when module is not busy. X36 LD V40401 ANDD KFFF OUT V2000 C0
RST Loads the complete data word into the accumulator. The V-memory location depends on the I/O configuration. See Appendix A for the memory map. This instruction masks the channel identification bits. Without this, the values used will not be correct, so do not forget to include it. When the module is not busy and X34 and X35 are off, channel 1 data is stored in V2000. C0 is reset to indicate that channel 1s value is positive.

240 250- 1 260

Store Channel 1 X36 X34 X35

X37

C0
SET

If X37 is on, then the data value represents a negative voltage. C0 is set to indicate that channel 1s value is negative. Invert the bit pattern in the accumulator.

INV BCD ADDD K1 X36 X34 X35 OUTD V2040 Store Channel 2 X36 X34 X35

F2-04AD-2, (L) 4-Ch. Voltage Input

Channel 1 data is in double word starting at V2040.

OUT V2001 C1
RST

When the module is not busy and X34 is on and X35 is off, channel 2 data is stored in V2001. C1 is reset to indicate channel 2s value is positive.

X37

C1
SET

If X37 is on, then the data value represents a negative voltage. C1 is set to indicate that channel 2s value is negative. Invert the bit pattern in the accumulator.

INV BCD

ADDD K1 X36 X34 X35 OUTD V2042

Channel 2 data is in double word starting at V2042.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

3-20

F2-04AD-2, F2-04AD-2L 4-Channel Analog Voltage Input The analog module has a microcontroller that can diagnose analog input circuit problems. You can easily create a simple ladder rung to detect these problems. This rung shows an input point that would be assigned if the module was used as shown in the previous examples. A different point would be used if the module was installed in a different I/O configuration. Multiplexing method
V2000 K0 X37 C0
OUT V-memory location V2000 holds channel 1 data. When a data value of zero is returned and input X37 is on, then the analog circuitry is not operating properly.

Analog Power Failure Detection

Pointers method
V2000 K8000

C0
OUT

V-memory location V2000 holds channel 1 data. When a data value of 8000 is returned, then the analog circuitry is not operating properly.

F2-04AD-2, (L) 4-Ch. Voltage Input

Scaling the Input Data

Most applications usually require measurements in engineering units, which provide more meaningful data. This is accomplished by using the conversion formula shown. You may have to make adjustments to the formula depending on the scale you choose for the engineering units.

Units = A H L 4095 H = high limit of the engineering unit range L = low limit of the engineering unit range A = Analog value (0 -- 4095)

For example, if you wanted to measure pressure (PSI) from 0.0 to 99.9 then you would have to multiply the analog value by 10 in order to imply a decimal place when you view the value with the programming software or a handheld programmer. Notice how the calculations differ when you use the multiplier.
Analog Value of 2024, slightly less than half scale, should yield 49.4 PSI Example without multiplier Units = A H L 4095 Units = 2024 100 0 4095 Units = 49
Handheld Display

Example with multiplier Units = 10 A H L 4095 Units = 20240 100 0 4095 Units = 494
Handheld Display

V 2001 0000

V 2000 0049

V 2001 0000

V 2000 0494

This value is more accurate.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-04AD-2, F2-04AD-2L 4-Channel Analog Voltage Input

3-21

Here is how you would write the program to perform the engineering unit conversion. This example assumes you have BCD data loaded into the appropriate V-memory locations using instructions that apply for the model of CPU you are using. NOTE: This example uses SP1, which is always on. You could also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact.

SP1

LD V2000 MUL K1000 DIV K4095 OUT V2010

When SP1 is on, load channel 1 data to the accumulator.

Multiply the accumulator by 1000 (to start the conversion).

Divide the accumulator by 4095.

Store the result in V2010.

Analog and Digital Value Conversions

Sometimes it is useful to be able to quickly convert between the signal levels and the digital values. This is especially helpful during machine startup or troubleshooting. Remember, this module does not operate like other versions of analog input modules that you may be familiar with. The bipolar ranges use 0--4095 for both positive and negative voltages. The sign bit allows this, which actually provides better resolution than those modules that do not offer a sign bit. The following table provides formulas to make this conversion easier.
Range 0 to 5V --5V to +5V 0 to 10V --10V to +10V If you know the digital value ... A = 5D 4095 A = 10D 4095 If you know the signal level ... D = 4095 (A) 5 D = 4095 ABS(A) 10

F2-04AD-2, (L) 4-Ch. Voltage Input

For example, if you are using the --10 to +10V range and you have measured the signal at 6V, use the following formula to determine the digital value that is stored in the V-memory location that contains the data.

D = 4095 (A) 10 D = 4095 (6V) 10 D = (409.5) (6) D = 2457

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

3-22

F2-04AD-2, F2-04AD-2L 4-Channel Analog Voltage Input Add the following logic to filter and smooth analog input noise in DL250--1/DL260 CPUs. This is especially useful when using PID loops. Noise can be generated by the field device and/or induced by field wiring. The analog value in BCD is first converted to a binary number because there is not a BCD-to-real conversion instruction. Memory location V1400 is the designated workspace in this example. The MULR instruction is the filter factor, which can be from 0.1 to 0.9. The example uses 0.2. A smaller filter factor increases filtering. You can use a higher precision value, but it is not generally needed. The filtered value is then converted back to binary and then to BCD. The filtered value is stored in location V1402 for use in your application or PID loop. NOTE: Be careful not to do a multiple number conversion on a value. For example, if you are using the pointer method to get the analog value, it is in BCD and must be converted to binary. However, if you are using the conventional method of reading analog and are masking the first twelve bits, then it is already in binary and no conversion using the BIN instruction is needed.
SP1

Filtering Input Noise (DL250-1, DL260 CPUs Only)

230 240 250- 1 260

LD V2000

Loads the analog signal, which is a BCD value and has been loaded from V-memory location V2000, into the accumulator. Contact SP1 is always on. Converts the BCD value in the accumulator to binary. Remember, this instruction is not needed if the analog value is originally brought in as a binary number. Converts the binary value in the accumulator to a real number.

F2-04AD-2, (L) 4-Ch. Voltage Input

BIN

BTOR

SUBR V1400

Subtracts the real number stored in location V1400 from the real number in the accumulator, and stores the result in the accumulator. V1400 is the designated workspace in this example. Multiplies the real number in the accumulator by 0.2 (the filter factor), and stores the result in the accumulator. This is the filtered value. Adds the real number stored in location V1400 to the real number filtered value in the accumulator, and stores the result in the accumulator. Copies the value in the accumulator to location V1400.

MULR R0.2

ADDR V1400

OUTD V1400

RTOB

Converts the real number in the accumulator to a binary value, and stores the result in the accumulator. Converts the binary value in the accumulator to a BCD number. Note: the BCD instruction is not needed for PID loop PV (loop PV is a binary number). Loads the BCD number filtered value from the accumulator into location V1402 to use in your application or PID loop.

BCD

OUT V1402

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-08AD-1 8-Channel Analog Current Input

In This Chapter. . . .
Module Specifications Setting the Module Jumpers Connecting the Field Wiring Module Operation Writing the Control Program

4-2

F2-08AD-1 8-Channel Analog Current Input

Module Specifications
NOTE: A re-designed F2-08AD-1 with a single circuit board design was released in 2009. The jumper link location is different. See Setting the Module Jumpers on page 4-5. Also, some specifications were changed on page 4-3. Otherwise, the re-designed module functions the same as the prior design.

The F2-08AD-1 Analog Input module provides several hardware features: S Analog inputs are optically isolated from the PLC logic. S On-board 250 ohm, 1/2 watt precision resistors provide substantial over-current-protection for 4--20mA current loops. S The module has a removable terminal block so the module can be easily removed or changed without disconnecting the wiring. S With a DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 CPU, you can read all channels in one scan. Firmware Requirements: To use this module, D2--230 CPUs must have firmware version 1.6 or later. To use the pointer method of writing values, D2--240 CPUs require firmware version 2.2 or later. All versions of the D2--250--1 and D2--260 CPUs firmware support this module and the pointer method.

IN

ANALOG 8CH

F2-08AD-1
10--30VDC 5mA

0V +24V CH1+ CH2+ CH3+ CH4+ CH5+ CH6+ CH7+ CH8+

ANALOG IN 4--20mA

F2-08AD-1 8-Ch. Current Input

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-08AD-1 8-Channel Analog Current Input

4-3

The following tables provide the specifications for the F2--08AD--1 Analog Input Module. Review these specifications to make sure the module meets your application requirements. Input Specifications
Number of Channels Input Range Resolution Step Response Crosstalk Active Low--Pass Filtering Input Impedance Absolute Maximum Ratings Linearity Error (End to End) Input Stability Full Scale Calibration Error (Offset Error Included) Offset Calibration Error Maximum Inaccuracy Accuracy vs. Temperature Recommended Fuse (external) 8, single ended (one common) 4 to 20 mA current 12 bit (1 in 4096) 1 ms (*7 ms) to 95% of full step change --70 dB, 1 count maximum --3dB @ 200Hz (-6 dB per octave) 250 0.1%, W current input --45 mA to +45 mA, mA current input 1 count (0.025% (0 025% of full scale) maximum 1 count 5 counts maximum, @ 20.000mA 2 counts maximum maximum, @ 4.000mA 4 000mA .1% @ 25C .25% 0 to 60_C (32 to 140F) 50 ppm/_C maximum full scale calibration (including maximum offset change) 0 032 A, 0.032 A Series 217 fast-acting, fast-acting current inputs

One count in the specification table is equal to one least significant bit of the analog data value (1 in 4096).

General Specifications

PLC Update Rate Data Acquisition Time Digital Inputs Input Points Required Power Budget Requirement External Power Supply Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Relative Humidity Environmental air Vibration Shock Noise Immunity

1 channel per scan maximum (DL230 CPU) 8 channels per scan maximum (DL240/250--1/260 CPU) 3ms/channel (asynchronous) 12 binary data bits, 3 channel ID bits, 1 broken transmitter detection bit 16 point (X) input module 100 mA (*50 mA) maximum, maximum 5 VDC (supplied by base) 5 mA (*80 mA) maximum, 10--30 VDC (*18--26.4 VDC) 0 to 60_ C (32 to 140 F) --20 to 70_ C (--4 to 158 F) 5 to 95% (non-condensing) No corrosive gases permitted MIL STD 810C 514.2 MIL STD 810C 516.2 NEMA ICS3--304

F2-08AD-1 8-Ch. Current Input

* Values in parenthesis with an asterisk are for older modules with two circuit board design and date codes 0609B5 and previous. Values not in parenthesis are for single circuit board models with date code 0709C1 and above.

Analog Input Configuration Requirements

The F2-08AD-1 Analog Input appears as a 16-point discrete input module. The module can be installed in any slot of a DL205 system. The available power budget and discrete I/O points are the limiting factors. Check the user manual for your particular model of CPU and I/O base for more information regarding power budget and number of local, local expansion or remote I/O points.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

4-4

F2-08AD-1 8-Channel Analog Current Input Even though the module can be placed in any slot, it is important to examine the configuration if you are using a DL230 CPU. As you will see in the section on writing the program, you use V-memory locations to extract the analog data. If you place the module so that the input points do not start on a V-memory boundary, the instructions cannot access the data. This also applies when placing this module in a remote base using a D2--RSSS in the CPU slot. Correct!
F2-08AD-1

Special Placement Requirements (DL230 and Remote I/O Bases)

Slot 0
8pt Input

Slot 1
8pt Input

Slot 2
16pt Input

Slot 3
16pt Input

Slot 4
16pt Output

X0 -X7

X10 -X17

X20 X37

X40 -X57 V40402

Y0 -Y17

V40400 Data is correctly entered so input points start on a V-memory boundary. V40401 MSB X 3 7

LSB X 2 0

Incorrect

F2-08AD-1

Slot 0

Slot 1
16pt Input

Slot 2
16pt Input

Slot 3
16pt Input

Slot 4
16pt Output

F2-08AD-1 8-Ch. Current Input

8pt Input

X0 -X7

X10 X27

X30 -X47

X50 -X67

Y0 -Y17

Data is split over two locations, so instructions cannot access data from a DL230. MSB X 3 7 V40401 X X 3 2 0 7 LSB X 2 0 MSB X 1 7 V40400 X X 1 7 0 LSB X 0

To use the V-memory references required for a DL230 CPU, the first input address assigned to the module must be one of the following X locations. The table also shows the V-memory addresses that correspond to these X locations. X X0 X20 X40 X60 X100 X120 X140 X160

V V40400 V40401 V40402 V40403 V40404 V40405 V40406 V40407

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-08AD-1 8-Channel Analog Current Input

4-5

Setting the Module Jumpers

Selecting the Number of Channels There are three jumpers, labeled +1, +2, and +4 that are used to select the number of channels that will be used. See the figures below to locate the jumpers on your module. The module is set from the factory for eight channel operation (all three jumpers installed). Any unused channels are not processed. For example, if you only select channels 1 thru 3, channels 4 thru 8 will not be active. The following table shows how to set the jumpers to select the number of channels. No. of +4 Channels +1 +2 1 No No No 1,2 Yes No No 1,2,3 No Yes No For example, to select 8-channel 1,2,3,4 Yes Yes No operation, leave all three jumpers 1,2,3,4,5 No No Yes installed. To select only channel 1, 1,2,3,4,5,6 Yes No Yes remove (or store on a single post to 1,2,3,4,5,6,7 No Yes Yes prevent losing them) all three jumpers. 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8 Yes Yes Yes Yes = jumper installed No = jumper removed

F2-08AD-1 8-Ch. Current Input

Jumper Location on Modules Having Date Code 0609B9 and Previous (Two Circuit Board Design)
+1 +2 +4

Jumper Location on Modules Having Date Code 0709C1 and Above (Single Circuit Board Design)

+1+2 +4

+4

+2

+1

These jumpers are located on the motherboard, the one with the black D-shell style backplane connector.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

4-6

F2-08AD-1 8-Channel Analog Current Input

Connecting the Field Wiring

Wiring Guidelines Your company may have guidelines for wiring and cable installation. If so, you should check those before you begin the installation. Here are some general things to consider: S Use the shortest wiring route whenever possible. S Use shielded wiring and ground the shield at the transmitter source. Do not ground the shield at both the module and the source. S Do not run the signal wiring next to large motors, high current switches, or transformers. This may cause noise problems. S Route the wiring through an approved cable housing to minimize the risk of accidental damage. Check local and national codes to choose the correct method for your application. The F2-08AD-1 requires at least one field-side power supply. You may use the same or separate power sources for the module supply and the current transmitter supply. The module requires 18--26.4VDC, at 80 mA. The DL205 bases have built-in 24 VDC power supplies that provide up to 300mA of current . You may use this instead of a separate supply if you are using only a couple of analog modules. It is desirable in some situations to power the transmitters separately in a location remote from the PLC. This will work as long as the transmitter supply meets the voltage and current requirements, and the transmitter minus (--) side and the module supplys minus (--) side are connected together. WARNING: If you are using the 24 VDC base power supply, make sure you calculate the power budget. Exceeding the power budget can cause unpredictable system operation that can lead to a risk of personal injury or damage to equipment. F2-08AD-1 8-Ch. Current Input The DL205 base has a switching type power supply. As a result of switching noise, you may notice 3--5 counts of instability in the analog input data if you use the base power supply. If this is unacceptable, you should try one of the following. 1. Use a separate linear power supply. 2. Connect the 24VDC common to the frame ground, which is the screw terminal marked G on the base. By using these methods, the input stability is rated at 1 count. If you want to use a separate supply, choose one that meets the following requirements: 18--26.4 VDC, 80mA current. Current Loop Transmitter Impedance Standard 4 to 20 mA transmitters and transducers can operate from a wide variety of power supplies. Not all transmitters are alike and the manufacturers often specify a minimum loop or load resistance that must be used with the transmitter. The F2-08AD-1 provides 250 ohm resistance for each channel. If your transmitter requires a load resistance below 250 ohms, you do not have to make any adjustments. However, if your transmitter requires a load resistance higher than 250 ohms, you need to add a resistor in series with the module.

User Power Supply Requirements

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-08AD-1 8-Channel Analog Current Input

4-7

Consider the following example for a transmitter being operated from a 30 VDC supply with a recommended load resistance of 750 ohms. Since the module has a 250 ohm resistor, you need to add an additional resistor.
R = Tr Mr R = 750 250 R 500 R -- resistor to add Tr -- Transmitter Requirement Mr -- Module resistance (internal 250 ohms)

Two-wire Transmitter + -DC Supply +30V 0V Wiring Diagram R

Module Channel 1
CH1+ CH10V 250 ohms

The F2-08AD-1 module has a removable connector to make wiring easier. Simply squeeze the top and bottom retaining clips and gently pull the connector from the module. Use the following diagram to connect the field wiring. The diagram shows separate module and transmitter power supplies. If you desire to use only one field-side supply, just combine the supplies positive (+) terminals into one node, and remove the transmitter supply.
Module Supply 18-26.4VDC + -

Typical User Wiring

See NOTE 1 0 VDC

Internal Module Wiring

+5V +15V 0V -15V

IN

ANALOG 8CH

DC to DC Converter

+24 VDC + CH1 4-wire + 4-20mA Transmitter CH2 3-wire + 4-20mA Transmitter CH3 2-wire + 4-20mA Transmitter CH4 2-wire + 4-20mA Transmitter + Fuse CH1+ CH2+ CH3+ CH4+ Fuse CH5+ CH6+ Fuse CH7+ CH8+ Fuse
250 250

F2-08AD-1

F2-08AD-1 8-Ch. Current Input

10--30VDC 5mA

250 250 250 250 250 250

0V +24V
A to D Converter

Analog Switch

CH1+ CH2+ CH3+ CH4+ CH5+ CH6+ CH7+ CH8+

ANALOG IN 4--20mA

Transmitter Supply

OV

NOTE 1: Shields should be grounded at the signal source. NOTE 2: More than one external power supply can be used, provided all the power supply commons are connected. NOTE 3: A Series 217, 0.032A fast-acting fuse is recommended for 4-20 mA current loops. NOTE 4: If the power supply common of an external power supply is not connected to the 0V terminal on the module, then the output of the external transmitter must be isolated. To avoid ground loop errors, recommended 4-20 mA transmitter types are: - For 2 or 3 wire connections: Isolation between the input supply signal and the power supply. - For 4 wire connections: Isolation between the input supply signal, the power supply, and the 4-20 mA output.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

4-8

F2-08AD-1 8-Channel Analog Current Input

Module Operation
Channel Scanning Sequence for a DL230 CPU (Multiplexing) Before you begin writing the control program, it is important to take a few minutes to understand how the module processes and represents the analog signals. The F2-08AD-1 module can supply different amounts of data per scan, depending on the type of CPU you are using. The DL230 can obtain one channel of data per CPU scan. Since there are eight channels, it can take up to eight scans to get data for all channels. Once all channels have been scanned the process starts over with channel 1. Unused channels are not processed, so if you select only two channels, then each channel will be updated every other scan. The multiplexing method can also be used for DL240/250--1/260 CPUs.

Scan Read Inputs Execute Application Program

Read the data Scan N Scan N+1 (repeat for ch. 3-6) Store data Scan N+6 Scan N+7 Channel 7 Channel 8 Channel 1 Channel 1 Channel 2 System With DL230 CPU

Write to Outputs

Scan N+8

F2-08AD-1 8-Ch. Current Input

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-08AD-1 8-Channel Analog Current Input Channel Scanning Sequence with a DL240, DL250-1 or DL260 CPU (Pointer Method)

4-9

If you are using a DL240/250--1/260 CPU, you can obtain all eight channels of input data in one scan. This is because the DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 CPUs support special V-memory locations that are used to manage the data transfer (this is discussed in more detail in the section on Writing the Control Program.)
Scan Read Inputs Execute Application Program
Read the data Scan N Scan N+1 Store data Scan N+2 Scan N+3 Scan N+4 Ch 1, 2, 3, ...8 Ch 1, 2, 3, ...8 Ch 1, 2, 3, ...8 Ch 1, 2, 3, ...8 Ch 1, 2, 3, ...8 System With DL240/250-1/ 260CPU

Write to Outputs

Analog Module Updates

Even though the channel updates to the CPU are synchronous with the CPU scan, the module asynchronously monitors the analog transmitter signal and converts the signal to a 12-bit binary representation. This enables the module to continuously provide accurate measurements without slowing down the discrete control logic in the RLL program. For the vast majority of applications, the values are updated much faster than the signal changes. However, in some applications the update time can be important. The module takes approximately 7mS to sense 95% of the change in the analog signal. Note, this is not the amount of time required to convert the signal to a digital representation. The conversion to the digital representation takes only a few microseconds. Many manufacturers list the conversion time, but it is the settling time of the filter that really determines the update time.

F2-08AD-1 8-Ch. Current Input

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

4-10

F2-08AD-1 8-Channel Analog Current Input You may recall the F2-08AD-1 module requires 16 discrete input points in the CPU. You can use these points to obtain: S an indication of which channel is active. S the digital representation of the analog signal. S module diagnostic information. Since all input points are automatically mapped into V-memory, it is very easy to determine the location of the data word that will be assigned to the module.
F2-08AD-1

Understanding the Input Assignments

Slot 0
8pt Input

Slot 1
8pt Input

Slot 2
16pt Input

Slot 3
16pt Input

Slot 4
16pt Output

X0 -X7

X10 -X17

X20 X37

X40 -X57
V40402

Y0 -Y17
V40500

V40400

MSB X XXX 3 3 3 3 7 6 5 4

V40401

LSB X 2 0

Data Bits

Within these word locations, the individual bits represent specific information about the analog signal. Analog Data Bits F2-08AD-1 8-Ch. Current Input The first twelve bits represent the analog data in binary format. Bit Value Bit Value 0 1 6 64 1 2 7 128 2 4 8 256 3 8 9 512 4 16 10 1024 5 32 11 2048

V40401 MSB LSB 1 11 11 1 9 8 7 65 4 3 21 0 5 43 21 0

= data bits

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-08AD-1 8-Channel Analog Current Input Active Channel Three of the inputs are binary-encoded Indicator Inputs to indicate the active channel. (Remember, the V-memory bits are mapped directly to discrete inputs.) The inputs are automatically turned on and off to indicate the active channel for each scan. Scan X34 X35 X36 Channel N Off Off Off 1 N+1 On Off Off 2 N+2 Off On Off 3 N+3 On On Off 4 N+4 Off Off On 5 N +5 On Off On 6 N +6 Off On On 7 N +7 On On On 8 Module Diagnostic Inputs The last input (X37 in this example) is the broken transmitter and missing 24 volts input power indicator. When X37 is on, the input transmitter maybe broken for the corresponding input. If there is no external 24 volts input power, or if there is a loose or missing terminal block, then X37 goes on and a value of zero is returned for all enabled channels. Since the module has 12-bit resolution, the analog signal is converted into 4096 counts ranging from 0 -- 4095 (212). For example, a 4mA signal would be 0 and a 20mA signal would be 4095. This is equivalent to a a binary value of 0000 0000 0000 to 1111 1111 1111, or 000 to FFF hexadecimal. The diagram shows how this relates to the signal range. Each count can also be expressed in terms of the signal level by using the equation shown.

4-11

V40401 MSB XX X 3 3 3 6 5 4 LSB X 2 0

= channel inputs

V40401 MSB X 3 7 LSB X 2 0

= diagnostic inputs

Module Resolution

4 -- 20mA
20mA

F2-08AD-1 8-Ch. Current Input

4mA 0 4095

Resolution = H L 4095 H = high limit of the signal range L = low limit of the signal range 16mA / 4095 = 3.907A per count

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

4-12

F2-08AD-1 8-Channel Analog Current Input

Writing the Control Program

Reading Values: Pointer Method and Multiplexing There are two methods of reading values: S The pointer method S Multiplexing You must use the multiplexing method when using a DL230 CPU. You must also use the multiplexing method with remote I/O modules (the pointer method will not work). You can use either method when using DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 CPUs, but for ease of programming it is strongly recommended that you use the pointer method. The DL205 series has special V-memory locations (shown in the tables on the next page) that are assigned to each base slot that greatly simplify the programming requirements. These V-memory locations allow you to: S specify the data format S specify the number of channels to scan S specify the storage locations NOTE: DL240 CPUs with firmware release 2.2 or later supports this method. DL250 CPUs with firmware release version 1.06 or later support this method. If you must use the DL230 example, module placement in the base is very important. Review the section earlier in this chapter for guidelines. The example program below shows how to setup these locations. Place this rung anywhere in the ladder program or in the Initial Stage if you are using RLL PLUS instructions. This is all that is required to read the data into V-memory locations. Once the data is in V-memory, you can perform math on the data, compare the data against preset values, and so forth. V2000 is used in the example, but you can use any user V-memory location. In this example the module is installed in slot 2. You should use the V-memory locations for your module placement. The pointer method automatically converts values to BCD. F2-08AD-1 8-Ch. Current Input
SP0 LD K 08 00

Pointer Method
230

240 250- 1 260

- or -

LD K 88 00

Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the data format. The upper byte, most significant nibble (MSN) selects the data format (i.e. 0=BCD, 8=Binary), the LSN selects the number of channels (i.e. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8). The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator interfaces. The DL230/240 CPUs do not support binary math functions, whereas the DL250 does.

OUT V7662 LDA O2000 OUT V7672

Special V-memory location assigned to slot 2 that contains the number of channels to scan. This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used to store the incoming data. For example, the O2000 entered here would designate the following addresses. Ch1 - V2000, Ch2 - V2001, Ch3 - V2002, Ch 4 - V2003 Ch5 - V2004, Ch6 - V2005, Ch7 - V2006, Ch8 - V2007 The octal address (O2000) is stored here. V7672 is assigned to slot 2 and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the octal value in this location to determine exactly where to store the incoming data.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-08AD-1 8-Channel Analog Current Input

4-13

The tables below show the special V-memory locations used by the DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 for the CPU base and local expansion base I/O slots. Slot 0 (zero) is the module next to the CPU or D2--CM module. Slot 1 is the module two places from the CPU or D2--CM, and so on. Remember, the CPU only examines the pointer values at these locations after a mode transition. Also, if you use the DL230 (multiplexing) method, verify that these addresses in the CPU are zero. The Table below applies to the DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 CPU base.
CPU Base: Analog Input Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations Slot No. of Channels Storage Pointer 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V7660 V7661 V7662 V7663 V7664 V7665 V7666 V7667 V7670 V7671 V7672 V7673 V7674 V7675 V7676 V7677

The Table below applies to the DL250--1 or DL260 expansion base 1.

Expansion Base D2-CM #1: Analog Input Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations Slot No. of Channels Storage Pointer 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V36000 V36001 V36002 V36003 V36004 V36005 V36006 V36007 V36010 V36011 V36012 V36013 V36014 V36015 V36016 V36017

The Table below applies to the DL250--1 or DL260 expansion base 2.

Expansion Base D2-CM #2: Analog Input Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations Slot No. of Channels Storage Pointer 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V36100 V36101 V36102 V36103 V36104 V36105 V36106 V36107 V36110 V36111 V36112 V36113 V36114 V36115 V36116 V36117

The Table below applies to the DL260 CPU expansion base 3.

Expansion Base D2-CM #3: Analog Input Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations Slot No. of Channels Storage Pointer 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V36200 V36201 V36202 V36203 V36204 V36205 V36206 V36207 V36210 V36211 V36212 V36213 V36214 V36215 V36216 V36217

F2-08AD-1 8-Ch. Current Input

The Table below applies to the DL260 CPU expansion base 4.

Expansion Base D2-CM #4: Analog Input Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations Slot No. of Channels Storage Pointer 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V36300 V36301 V36302 V36303 V36304 V36305 V36306 V36307 V36310 V36311 V36312 V36313 V36314 V36315 V36316 V36317

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

4-14

F2-08AD-1 8-Channel Analog Current Input The DL230 CPU does not have the special V-memory locations that allow you to automatically enable the data transfer. Since all channels are multiplexed into a single data word, the control program must be setup to determine which channel is being read. Since the module appears as X input points to the CPU, it is very easy to use the active channel status bits to determine which channel is being monitored. Note, this example is for a module installed as shown in the previous examples. The addresses used would be different if the module was installed in another I/O configuration. You can place these rungs anywhere in the program or if you are using stage programming place them in a stage that is always active.
SP1 LD V40401 ANDD KFFF BCD Store Channel 1 X34 X35 X36
Loads the complete data word into the accumulator. The V-memory location depends on the I/O configuration. See Appendix A for the memory map. This instruction masks the channel identification bits. Without this, the values used will not be correct so do not forget to include it. It is usually easier to perform math operations in BCD, so it is best to convert the data to BCD immediately. You can leave out this instruction if your application does not require it. When X34, X35 and X36 are off, channel 1 data is stored in V2000.

Reading Values Multiplexing

230

240 250- 1 260

OUT V2000

Store Channel 2 X34 X35 X36

OUT V2001

When X34 is on, X35 and X36 are off, and broken transmitter detect is off, channel 2 data is stored in V2001.

(repeat for channels 3 - 6) Store Channel 7 X34 X35 X36

OUT V2006

When X35 and X36 are on and X34 is off, channel 7 data is stored in V2006.

F2-08AD-1 8-Ch. Current Input

Store Channel 8 X34 X35 X36

OUT V2007

When X34, X35 and X36 are on, channel 8 data is stored in V2007.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-08AD-1 8-Channel Analog Current Input Single Channel Selected

4-15

Since you do not have to determine which channel is selected, the single channel program is even more simple.
Store Channel 1 X36 X34 X35
Loads the complete data word into the accumulator. The V-memory location depends on the I/O configuration. See Appendix A for the memory map. This instruction masks the channel identification bits. Without this, the values used will not be correct, so do not forget to include it. It is usually easier to perform math operations in BCD, so it is best to convert the data to BCD immediately. You can leave out this instruction if your application does not require it. When X34, X35 and X36 are off, channel 1 data is stored in V2000.

LD V40401 ANDD KFFF BCD OUT V2000

Analog Power Failure Detection

The analog module has an on-board processor that can diagnose analog input circuit problems. You can easily create a simple ladder rung to detect these problems. This rung shows an input point that would be assigned if the module I/O begins at X20 as shown in the previous examples. A different point would be used if the module was installed in a different I/O arrangement. Multiplexing method
V2000 K0 X37

C1
OUT

V-memory location V2000 holds channel 1 data. When a data value of zero is returned and input X37 is on, then the analog circuitry is not operating properly.

Pointers method
V2000 K8000

C1
OUT

V-memory location V2000 holds channel 1 data. When a data value of 8000 is returned, then the analog circuitry is not operating properly.

F2-08AD-1 8-Ch. Current Input

Scaling the Input Data

Most applications usually require measurements in engineering units, which provide more meaningful data. This is accomplished by using the conversion formula shown. You may have to make adjustments to the formula depending on the scale you choose for the engineering units.

Units = A H L 4095 H = high limit of the engineering unit range L = low limit of the engineering unit range A = Analog value (0 -- 4095)

For example, if you wanted to measure pressure (PSI) from 0.0 to 99.9 then you would have to multiply the analog value by 10 in order to imply a decimal place when you view the value with the programming software or a handheld programmer. Notice how the calculations differ when you use the multiplier.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

4-16

F2-08AD-1 8-Channel Analog Current Input

Analog value of 2024, slightly less than half scale, should yield 49.4 PSI Example without multiplier Units = A H L 4095 Units = 2024 100 0 4095 Units = 49
Handheld Display

Example with multiplier Units = 10 A H L 4095 Units = 20240 100 0 4095 Units = 494
Handheld Display

V 2001 V 2000 0000 0049

V 2001 V 2000 0000 0494

This value is more accurate.

Here is how you would write the program to perform the engineering unit conversion. Note, this example will work with all DL205 CPUs, but it assumes you have already loaded the BCD data into the appropriate V-memory locations using instructions that apply for the model of CPU you are using.
Note, this example uses SP1, which is always on. You could also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact.

SP1

LD V2000 MUL K1000 DIV K4095

When SP1 is on, load channel 1 data to the accumulator.

Multiply the accumulator by 1000 (to start the conversion).

Divide the accumulator by 4095.

F2-08AD-1 8-Ch. Current Input

OUT V2010

Store the result in V2010.

Analog and Digital Value Conversions

Sometimes it is useful to be able to quickly convert between the signal levels and the digital values. This is especially helpful during machine startup or troubleshooting. The following table provides formulas to make this conversion easier.
Range 4 to 20mA If you know the digital value... A = 16D + 4 4095 If you know the analog signal level... D = 4095 (A 4) 16 D = 4095 (A 4) 16 D = 4095 (10mA 4) 16 D = (255.93) (6) D = 1536

For example, if you have measured the signal as 10mA, you can use the formula to easily determine the digital value that will be stored in the V-memory location that contains the data.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-08AD-1 8-Channel Analog Current Input Filtering Input Noise (DL250-1, DL260 CPU Only)
230

4-17

240 250- 1 260

Add the following logic to filter and smooth analog input noise in DL250--1 and DL260 CPUs. This is especially useful when using PID loops. Noise can be generated by the field device and/or induced by field wiring. The analog value in BCD is first converted to a binary number because there is not a BCD-to-real conversion instruction. Memory location V1400 is the designated workspace in this example. The MULR instruction is the filter factor, which can be from 0.1 to 0.9. The example uses 0.2. A smaller filter factor increases filtering. You can use a higher precision value, but it is not generally needed. The filtered value is then converted back to binary and then to BCD. The filtered value is stored in location V1402 for use in your application or PID loop. NOTE: Be careful not to do a multiple number conversion on a value. For example, if you are using the pointer method to get the analog value, it is in BCD and must be converted to binary. However, if you are using the conventional method of reading analog and are masking the first twelve bits, then it is already in binary and no conversion using the BIN instruction is needed.
SP1
Loads the analog signal, which is a BCD value and has been loaded from V-memory location V2000, into the accumulator. Contact SP1 is always on. Converts the BCD value in the accumulator to binary. Remember, this instruction is not needed if the analog value is originally brought in as a binary number. Converts the binary value in the accumulator to a real number.

LD V2000

BIN

BTOR

SUBR V1400

Subtracts the real number stored in location V1400 from the real number in the accumulator, and stores the result in the accumulator. V1400 is the designated workspace in this example. Multiplies the real number in the accumulator by 0.2 (the filter factor), and stores the result in the accumulator. This is the filtered value. Adds the real number stored in location V1400 to the real number filtered value in the accumulator, and stores the result in the accumulator. Copies the value in the accumulator to location V1400.

F2-08AD-1 8-Ch. Current Input

MULR R0.2

ADDR V1400

OUTD V1400

RTOB

Converts the real number in the accumulator to a binary value, and stores the result in the accumulator. Converts the binary value in the accumulator to a BCD number. Note: The BCD instruction is not needed for PID loop PV (loop PV is a binary number). Loads the BCD number filtered value from the accumulator into location V1402 to use in your application or PID loop.

BCD

OUT V1402

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-08AD-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Input

In This Chapter. . . .
Module Specifications Setting the Module Jumpers Connecting the Field Wiring Module Operation Writing the Control Program

5-2

F2-08AD-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Input

Module Specifications
NOTE: A re-designed F2-08AD-2 with a single circuit board design was released in 2009. The jumper link location is different. See Setting the Module Jumpers on page 5-5. Also, some specifications were changed on page 5-3. Otherwise, the re-designed module functions the same as the prior design. The F2-08AD-2 Analog Voltage Input module provides several hardware features: S Analog inputs are optically isolated from the PLC logic. S The module has a removable terminal block so the module can be easily removed or changed without disconnecting the wiring. S With a DL240, DL250--1 or DL260 CPU, you can update all channels in one scan. Firmware Requirements: To use this module, D2--230 CPUs must have firmware version 1.6 or later. To use the pointer method of writing values, D2--240 CPUs require firmware version 2.2 or later. All versions of the D2--250--1 and D2--260 CPUs firmware support this module and the pointer method.
IN ANALOG 8CH

F2-08AD-2
10--30VDC 5mA

0V +24V CH1+ CH2+ CH3+ CH4+ CH5+ CH6+ CH7+ CH8+

ANALOG IN 0--5,0--10VDC +/--5,+/--10VDC

F2-08AD-2 8-Ch. Voltage Input

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-08AD-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Input

5-3

The following tables provide the specifications for the F2-08AD-2 Analog Input Module. Review these specifications to make sure the module meets your application requirements. Input Specifications
Number of Channels Input Ranges Resolution Step Response Crosstalk Active Low--Pass Filtering Input Impedance Maximum Continuous Overload Linearity Error (End to End) Input Stability Full Scale Calibration Error (Offset error not included) Offset Calibration Error Maximum Inaccuracy Accuracy vs. Temperature 8, single ended (one common) 0 - 5V, 0 - 10V, 5V., 10V. 12 bit (1 in 4096) unipolar (0 -- 4095) 13 bit (1 in 8192) bipolar (--4095 -- +4095) 1 ms (*4 ms) to 95% of full step change --70 dB, 1 count maximum --3dB @ 200Hz (-6 dB per octave) > 20M --75 VDC to +75 VDC 0.025% of span (1 count maximum unipolar) ( 2 count maximum bipolar) 1 count 3 counts maximum 1 count maximum, maximum @ 0 VDC .1% @ 25C .3% 0 to 60_C (32 to 140F) 50 ppm/_C maximum full scale calibration (including maximum offset change of 2 counts)

One count in the specification table is equal to one least significant bit of the analog data value (1 in 4096).

General Specifications

PLC Update Rate Data Acquisition Time Digital Inputs Input points required Power Budget Requirement External Power Supply Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Relative Humidity Environmental air Vibration Shock Noise Immunity

1 channel per scan maximum (DL230 CPU) 8 channels per scan maximum (DL240/250--1/260 CPU) 3ms/channel (asynchronous) 12 binary data bits, 1 sign bit, 3 channel ID bits, 1 diagnostic bit 16 point (X) input module 100 mA (*60 mA) maximum, maximum 5 VDC (supplied by base) 5 mA (*80 mA) maximum, 10--30 (*18--26.4) VDC 0 to 60_ C (32 to 140 F) --20 to 70_ C (--4 to 158 F) 5 to 95% (non-condensing) No corrosive gases permitted MIL STD 810C 514.2

F2-08AD-2 8-Ch. Voltage Input

MIL STD 810C 516.2 NEMA ICS3--304

* Values in parenthesis with an asterisk are for older modules with two circuit board design and date codes 0609D4 and previous. Values not in parenthesis are for single circuit board models with date code 0709E1 and above.

Analog Input Configuration Requirements

The F2-08AD-2 Analog Input appears as a 16-point discrete input module. The module can be installed in any slot of a DL205 system. The available power budget and discrete I/O points are the limiting factors. Check the user manual for your particular model of CPU and I/O base for more information regarding power budget and number of local, local expanison or remote I/O points.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

5-4

F2-08AD-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Input Even though the module can be placed in any slot, it is important to examine the configuration if you are using a DL230 CPU. As you will see in the section on writing the program, you use V-memory locations to extract the analog data. If you place the module so that the input points do not start on a V-memory boundary, the instructions cannot access the data. This also applies when placing this module in a remote base using a D2--RSSS in the CPU slot. Correct!
F2-08AD-2

Special Placement Requirements (DL230 and Remote I/O Bases)

Slot 0
8pt Input

Slot 1
8pt Input

Slot 2
16pt Input

Slot 3
16pt Input

Slot 4
16pt Output

X0 -X7

X10 -X17

X20 X37

X40 -X57 V40402

Y0 -Y17

V40400 Data is correctly entered so input points start on a V-memory boundary. V40401 MSB X 3 7

LSB X 2 0

Incorrect

F2-08AD-2

Slot 0
8pt Input

Slot 1
16pt Input

Slot 2
16pt Input

Slot 3
16pt Input

Slot 4
16pt Output

X0 -X7

X10 X27

X30 -X47

X50 -X67

Y0 -Y17

Data is split over two locations, so instructions cannot access data from a DL230. MSB V40401 X X 3 2 0 7 LSB X 2 0 MSB X 1 7 V40400 X X 1 7 0 LSB X 0

F2-08AD-2 8-Ch. Voltage Input

X 3 7

To use the required V-memory references, the first input address assigned to the module must be one of the following X locations. The table also shows the V-memory addresses that correspond to these X locations. X X0 X20 X40 X60 X100 X120 X140 X160

V V40400 V40401 V40402 V40403 V40404 V40405 V40406 V40407

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-08AD-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Input

5-5

Setting the Module Jumpers

Selecting the Number of Channels There are three jumpers, labeled +1, +2, and +4 that are used to select the number of channels that will be used. See the figures below to locate the jumpers on your module. The module is set from the factory for eight channel operation (all three jumpers installed). Any unused channels are not processed. For example, if you only select channels 1 thru 3, channels 4 thru 8 will not be active. The following table shows how to set the jumpers to select the number of channels. No. of +4 Channels +1 +2 1 No No No 1,2 Yes No No 1,2,3 No Yes No 1,2,3,4 Yes Yes No 1,2,3,4,5 No No Yes 1,2,3,4,5,6 Yes No Yes 1,2,3,4,5,6,7 No Yes Yes 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8 Yes Yes Yes

For example, to select 8-channel operation, leave all three jumpers installed. To select only channel 1, remove (or store on a single post to prevent losing them) all three jumpers. Yes = jumper installed No = jumper removed

Jumper Location on Modules Having Date Code 0609D4 and Previous (Two Circuit Board Design)
+1 +2 +4

Jumper Location on Modules Having Date Code 0709E1 and Above (Single Circuit Board Design)

Use jumpers +1, +2 and +4 to select number of channels.

+1 +2
+4 +2 +1

+4 F2-08AD-2 8-Ch. Voltage Input

These jumpers are located on the motherboard, the one with the black D-shell style backplane connector.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

5-6

F2-08AD-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Input

Selecting the Input Voltage Range

There is another jumper labeled J3 that is used to select between the 5V ranges and the 10V ranges. See the figures below to locate the jumber on your module. The module comes from the factory set for 10V operation (jumper is removed and is stored on one of the pins).

Install J3 for 0--5V or 5V operation. Remove J3 or store on single pin, for 0 to 10 or 10V operation.

Jumper J3 Location on Modules Having Date Code 0609D4 and Previous (Two Circuit Board Design)

Jumper J3 Location on Modules Having Date Code 0709E1 and Above (Single Circuit Board Design)

J3

Jumper J3

J3 is located on the smaller circuit board, which is on top of the motherboard. Install J3 for 0--5V or 5V operation. Remove J3 or store on single pin, for 0 to 10 or 10V operation.

Install J3 for 0--5V or 5V operation. Remove J3 or store on single pin, for 0 to 10 or 10V operation.

F2-08AD-2 8-Ch. Voltage Input

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-08AD-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Input

5-7

Connecting the Field Wiring

Wiring Guidelines Your company may have guidelines for wiring and cable installation. If so, you should check those before you begin the installation. Here are some general things to consider: S Use the shortest wiring route whenever possible. S Use shielded wiring and ground the shield at the transmitter source. Do not ground the shield at both the module and the source. S Do not run the signal wiring next to large motors, high current switches, or transformers. This may cause noise problems. S Route the wiring through an approved cable housing to minimize the risk of accidental damage. Check local and national codes to choose the correct method for your application. You may use the same or separate power source for the transmitter voltage supply. The DL205 bases have built-in 24 VDC power supplies that provide up to 300mA of current. You may use this instead of a separate supply if you are using only a couple of analog modules. It is desirable in some situations to power the transmitters separately in a location remote from the PLC. This will work as long as the transmitter supply meets the voltage and current requirements, and the transmitters minus (--) side and the module supplys minus (--) side are connected together. WARNING: If you are using the 24 VDC base power supply, make sure you calculate the power budget. Exceeding the power budget can cause unpredictable system operation that can lead to a risk of personal injury or damage to equipment. The DL205 base has a switching type power supply. As a result of switching noise, you may notice 3--5 counts of instability in the analog input data if you use the base power supply. If this is unacceptable, try one of the following: 1. Use a separate linear power supply. 2. Connect the 24VDC common to the frame ground, which is the screw terminal marked G on the base. By using these methods, the input stability is rated at 1 count. Unused inputs should be shorted together and connected to common.

User Power Supply Requirements

F2-08AD-2 8-Ch. Voltage Input

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

5-8

F2-08AD-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Input The F2-08AD-2 module has a removable connector to make wiring easier. Simply squeeze the top and bottom retaining clips and gently pull the connector from the module. Use the following diagram to connect the field wiring.

Wiring Diagram

CH1+ Voltage Transmitter CH2+ Voltage Transmitter CH3+ Voltage Transmitter CH4+ Voltage Transmitter

CH1+ CH2+

IN

ANALOG 8CH

CH3+ CH4+ CH5+ CH6+

F2-08AD-2

Analog Mux

10--30VDC 5mA

0V +24V CH1+ CH2+ CH3+ CH4+ CH5+ CH6+ CH7+ CH8+

ANALOG IN 0--5,0--10VDC +/--5,+/--10VDC

ADC

CH7+ CH8+ 0 VDC +24 VDC + -

Transmitter Supply

Note 1: Connect unused channels (CH5+, CH6+, CH7+, CH8+ in this diagram) to common (0 VDC).

F2-08AD-2 8-Ch. Voltage Input

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-08AD-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Input

5-9

Module Operation
Channel Scanning Sequence for a DL230 CPU (Multiplexing) Before you begin writing the control program, it is important to take a few minutes to understand how the module processes and represents the analog signals. The F2-08AD-2 module can supply different amounts of data per scan, depending on the type of CPU you are using. The DL230 can obtain one channel of data per CPU scan. Since there are eight channels, it can take up to eight scans to get data for all channels. Once all channels have been scanned the process starts over with channel 1. Unused channels are not processed, so if you select only two channels, then each channel will be updated every other scan. The multiplexing method can also be used for DL240/250--1/260 CPUs.

Scan Read Inputs Execute Application Program

Read the data Scan N Scan N+1 Store data (repeat for ch. 3-6) Scan N+6 Scan N+7 Channel 7 Channel 8 Channel 1 Channel 1 Channel 2 System With DL230 CPU

Write to Outputs

Scan N+8

Channel Scanning Sequence for a DL240, DL250-1 o DL260 CPU (Pointer Method)

If you are using a DL240, DL250--1 or DL260 CPU, you can obtain all eight channels of input data in one scan. This is because those CPUs supports special V-memory locations that are used to manage the data transfer (this is discussed in more detail in the section on Writing the Control Program.)
Scan Read Inputs Execute Application Program
Read the data Scan N Scan N+1 Store data Scan N+2 Scan N+3 Scan N+4 Ch 1, 2, 3, ...8 System With DL240/250-1/ 260CPU

F2-08AD-2 8-Ch. Voltage Input

Ch 1, 2, 3, ...8 Ch 1, 2, 3, ...8 Ch 1, 2, 3, ...8 Ch 1, 2, 3, ...8

Write to Outputs

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

5-10

F2-08AD-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Input Even though the channel updates to the CPU are synchronous with the CPU scan, the module asynchronously monitors the analog transmitter signal and converts the signal to a 12-bit binary representation. This enables the module to continuously provide accurate measurements without slowing down the discrete control logic in the RLL program. For the vast majority of applications, the values are updated much faster than the signal changes. However, in some applications the update time can be important. The module takes approximately 4ms to sense 95% of the change in the analog signal. Note, this is not the amount of time required to convert the signal to a digital representation. The conversion to the digital representation takes only a few microseconds. Many manufacturers list the conversion time, but it is the settling time of the filter that really determines the update time. You may recall the F2-08AD-2 module requires 16 discrete input points in the CPU. You can use these points to obtain: S an indication of which channel is active. S the digital representation of the analog signal. S module diagnostic information. Since all input points are automatically mapped into V-memory, it is very easy to determine the location of the data word that will be assigned to the module.
F2-08AD-2

Analog Module Updates

Understanding the Input Assignments

Slot 0
8pt Input

Slot 1
8pt Input

Slot 2
16pt Input

Slot 3
16pt Input

Slot 4
16pt Output

X0 -X7

X10 -X17

X20 X37

X40 -X57
V40402

Y0 -Y17
V40500

V40400

MSB X XXX 3 3 3 3 7 6 5 4

V40401

LSB X 2 0

Data Bits

Within these word locations, the individual bits represent specific information about the analog signal. F2-08AD-2 8-Ch. Voltage Input Analog Data Bits The first twelve bits represent the analog data in binary format. Bit Value Bit Value 0 1 6 64 1 2 7 128 2 4 8 256 3 8 9 512 4 16 10 1024 5 32 11 2048
V40401 MSB LSB 1 1 1 1 11 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 5 4 3 2 10

= data bits

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-08AD-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Input

5-11

Active Channel Indicator Inputs

Three of the inputs are binary-encoded to indicate the active channel. (remember, the V-memory bits are mapped directly to discrete inputs.) The inputs are automatically turned on and off to indicate the active channel for each scan. Scan X34 X35 X36 Channel N Off Off Off 1 N+1 On Off Off 2 N+2 Off On Off 3 N+3 On On Off 4 N+4 Off Off On 5 N +5 On Off On 6 N +6 Off On On 7 N +7 On On On 8 The MSB input is the broken transmitter/ no 24 volts indicator and sign indicator. If bit is on and the data is zero, there is no 24 volts input power or the terminal block is loose or missing. If the data is not zero then the input represents the sign bit. Since the module has 12-bit unipolar resolution, the analog signal is converted into 4096 counts ranging from 0 -- 4095 (212). For example, with a 0 to 10V scale, a 0V signal would be 0, and a 10V signal would be 4095. This is equivalent to a binary value of 0000 0000 0000 to 1111 1111 1111, or 000 to FFF hexadecimal. The diagram shows how this relates to each signal range. The bipolar ranges utilize a sign bit to provide 13-bit resolution. A value of 4095 can represent the upper limit of either side of the range. Use the sign bit to determine negative values.

V40401 MSB X XX 3 3 3 6 5 4 LSB X 2 0

= channel inputs

Module Diagnostic and Sign

V40401 MSB X 3 7 LSB X 2 0

= diagnostic input / sign bit

Unipolar Ranges Bipolar Ranges
+V 0V

Module Resolution

+V

0V 0 4095

-V -4095

4095

Unipolar Resolution = H L 4095 H Bipolar Resolution = L 8191 H or L = high or low limit of the range

Each count can also be expressed in terms of the signal level by using the equation shown. The following table shows the smallest detectable signal change that will result in one LSB change in the data value for each input signal range. Range 0 to +10V --10 to +10V 0 to +5V --5V to +5V Signal Span (H - L) 10V 20V 5V 10V Divide By 4095 8191 4095 8191 Smallest Detectable Change 2.44 mV 2.44 mV 1.22 mV 1.22 mV

F2-08AD-2 8-Ch. Voltage Input

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

5-12

F2-08AD-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Input

Writing the Control Program

Reading Values: Pointer Method and Multiplexing There are two methods of reading values: S The pointer method S Multiplexing You must use the multiplexing method when using a DL230 CPU. You must also use the multiplexing method with remote I/O modules (the pointer method will not work). You can use either method when using DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 CPUs, but for ease of programming it is strongly recommended that you use the pointer method. The DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 CPUs have special V-memory locations assigned to each base slot that greatly simplify the programming requirements. These V-memory locations: S specify the data format. S specify the number of channels to scan. S specify the storage locations. NOTE: DL240 CPUs with firmware release 2.2 or later supports this method. DL250 CPUs with firmware release version 1.06 or later support this method. If you must use the DL230 example, module placement in the base is very important. Review the section earlier in this chapter for guidelines. The example program shows how to setup these locations. Place this rung anywhere in the ladder program or in the initial stage if you are using stage programming instructions. This is all that is required to read the data into V-memory locations. Once the data is in V-memory, you can perform math on the data, compare the data against preset values, and so forth. V2000 is used in the example, but you can use any user V-memory location. In this example the module is installed in slot 2. You should use the V-memory locations for your module placement. The pointer method automatically converts values to BCD.
SP0 LD K 08 00

Pointer Method
230

240 250- 1 260

- or -

LD K 88 00

Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the data format. The upper byte, most significant nibble (MSN) selects the data format (i.e. 0=BCD, 8=Binary), the LSN selects the number of channels (i.e. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8). The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator interfaces. The DL230/240 CPUs do not support binary math functions, whereas the DL250 does.

F2-08AD-2 8-Ch. Voltage Input

OUT V7662 LDA O2000 OUT V7672

Special V-memory location assigned to slot 2 that contains the number of channels to scan. This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used to store the incoming data. For example, the O2000 entered here would designate the following addresses. Ch1 - V2000, Ch2 - V2001, Ch3 - V2002, Ch4 - V2003 Ch5 - V2004, Ch6 - V2005, Ch7 - V2006, Ch8 -V2007 The octal address (O2000) is stored here. V7672 is assigned to slot 2 and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the octal value in this location to determine exactly where to store the incoming data.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-08AD-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Input

5-13

The tables below show the special V-memory locations used by the DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 for the CPU base and local expansion base I/O slots. Slot 0 (zero) is the module next to the CPU or D2--CM module. Slot 1 is the module two places from the CPU or D2--CM, and so on. Remember, the CPU only examines the pointer values at these locations after a mode transition. Also, if you use the DL230 (multiplexing) method, verify that these addresses in the CPU are zero. The Table below applies to the DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 CPU base.
CPU Base: Analog Input Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations Slot No. of Channels Storage Pointer 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V7660 V7661 V7662 V7663 V7664 V7665 V7666 V7667 V7670 V7671 V7672 V7673 V7674 V7675 V7676 V7677

The Table below applies to the DL250--1 or DL260 expansion base 1.

Expansion Base D2-CM #1: Analog Input Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations Slot No. of Channels Storage Pointer 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V36000 V36001 V36002 V36003 V36004 V36005 V36006 V36007 V36010 V36011 V36012 V36013 V36014 V36015 V36016 V36017

The Table below applies to the DL250--1 or DL260 expansion base 2.

Expansion Base D2-CM #2: Analog Input Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations Slot No. of Channels Storage Pointer 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V36100 V36101 V36102 V36103 V36104 V36105 V36106 V36107 V36110 V36111 V36112 V36113 V36114 V36115 V36116 V36117

The Table below applies to the DL260 CPU expansion base 3.

Expansion Base D2-CM #3: Analog Input Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations Slot No. of Channels Storage Pointer 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V36200 V36201 V36202 V36203 V36204 V36205 V36206 V36207 V36210 V36211 V36212 V36213 V36214 V36215 V36216 V36217

The Table below applies to the DL260 CPU expansion base 4.

Expansion Base D2-CM #4: Analog Input Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations Slot No. of Channels Storage Pointer 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V36300 V36301 V36302 V36303 V36304 V36305 V36306 V36307 V36310 V36311 V36312 V36313 V36314 V36315 V36316 V36317

F2-08AD-2 8-Ch. Voltage Input

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

5-14

F2-08AD-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Input With bipolar ranges, you need some additional logic to determine whether the value being returned represents a positive or a negative voltage. For example, you may need to know the direction for a motor. With the pointer method, you cannot use the last input (X37 in the previous examples) to show the sign for each channel because the DL240/250--1/260 read all eight channels in one scan. If you tried to use X37, you would only be monitoring the last channel that was read. You would not be able to determine the sign for the previous channels. There is a simple solution: S If you get a value greater than or equal to 8001, the value is negative. The sign bit is the most significant bit, which combines 8000 to the data value. If the value is greater than or equal to 8001, you only have to mask the most significant bit and the active channel bits to determine the actual data value. The following program shows how you can accomplish this. Since you always want to know when a value is negative, these rungs should be placed before any other operations that use the data, such as math instructions, scaling operations, and so forth. Also, if you are using stage programming instructions, these rungs should be in a stage that is always active. Note, you only need this logic for each channel that is using bipolar input signals. The example only shows two channels.
Check Channel 1 SP1 LD V2000 ANDD K7FFF OUT V2020 V2000 Check Channel 2 SP1 K8001 C1
OUT Load channel 1 data from V-memory into the accumulator. Remember, the data can be negative. Contact SP1 is always on. This instruction masks the sign bit of the BCD data if it is set. Without this step, negative values will not be correct, so do not forget to include it. Put the actual signal value in V2020. Now you can use the data normally.

Using Bipolar Ranges (Pointer Method)

230

240 250- 1 260

Channel 1 data is negative when C1 is on (a value of -1 reads as 8001, -2 is 8002, etc.). Load channel 2 from V-memory into the accumulator. Remember, the data can be negative. Contact SP1 is always on. This instruction masks the sign bit of the BCD data, if it is set. Without this step, negative values will not be correct, so do not forget to include it. Put the actual signal value in V2021. Now you can use the data normally.

LD V2001 ANDD K7FFF

OUT V2021 V2001 K8001 C2

OUT

F2-08AD-2 8-Ch. Voltage Input

Channel 2 data is negative when C2 is on (a value of -1 reads as 8001, -2 is 8002, etc.).

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-08AD-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Input Reading Values (Multiplexing)

230 240 250- 1 260

5-15

The DL230 CPU does not have the special V-memory locations that allow you to automatically enable the data transfer. Since all channels are multiplexed into a single data word, the control program must be setup to determine which channel is being read. Since the module appears as X input points to the CPU, it is very easy to use the active channel status bits to determine which channel is being monitored. Note, this example is for a module installed as shown in the previous examples. The addresses used would be different if the module was used in a different slot. You can place these rungs anywhere in the program, or if you are using stage programming instructions place them in a stage that is always active.
SP1 LD V40401 ANDD KFFF BCD Store Channel 1 X34 X35 X36
Loads the complete data word into the accumulator. The V-memory location depends on the I/O configuration. See Appendix A for the memory map. This instruction masks the channel identification bits. Without this, the values used will not be correct so do not forget to include it. It is usually easier to perform math operations in BCD, so it is best to convert the data to BCD immediately. You can leave out this instruction if your application does not require it. When X34, X35 and X36 are off, channel 1 data is stored in V2000.

OUT V2000

Store Channel 2 X34 X35 X36

OUT V2001

When X34 is on, X35 and X36 are off, and broken transmitter detect is off, channel 2 data is stored in V2001.

(repeat for channels 3 - 6) Store Channel 7 X34 X35 X36 OUT V2006
When X35 and X36 are on and X34 is off, channel 7 data is stored in V2006.

Store Channel 8 X34 X35 X36

OUT V2007

When X34, X35 and X36 are on, channel 8 data is stored in V2007.

Single Channel Selected

Since you do not have to determine which channel is selected, the single channel program is even simpler.
Store Channel 1 X36 X34 X35 LD V40401 ANDD KFFF BCD
Loads the complete data word into the accumulator. The V-memory location depends on the I/O configuration. See Appendix A for the memory map. This instruction masks the channel identification bits. Without this, the values used will not be correct, so do not forget to include it. It is usually easier to perform math operations in BCD. So it is best to convert the data to BCD immediately. You can leave out this instruction if your application does not require it. When the module is not busy, and X34 and X35 are off, channel 1 data is stored in V2000.

F2-08AD-2 8-Ch. Voltage Input

OUT V2000

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

5-16

F2-08AD-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Input With bipolar ranges, you need some additional logic because you need to know if the value being returned represents a positive voltage or a negative voltage. For example, you may need to know the direction for a motor. Since the DL230 only reads one channel per scan, you can use the last input (X37 in the examples) to show the sign. The following program shows how you can accomplish this. Since you always want to know when a value is negative, these rungs should be placed before any operations that use the data, such as math instructions, scaling operations, and so forth. Also, if you are using stage programming instructions, these rungs should be in a stage that is always active. Note, you only need the additional logic for those channels that are using bipolar input signals. The example shows two channels, but you can repeat these steps for all eight channels if necessary.
Load Data SP1 LD V40401
Loads the complete data word into the accumulator. The V-memory location depends on the I/O configuration. See Appendix A for the memory map. This instruction masks the channel identification bits. Without this, the values used will not be correct, so do not forget to include it. It is usually easier to perform math operations in BCD, so it is best to convert the data to BCD immediately. You can leave out this instruction if your application does not require it.

Using Bipolar Ranges (Multiplexing)

230

240 250- 1 260

ANDD KFFF BCD Store Channel 1 X34 X35 X36

OUT V2000 C0
RST

When the module is not busy, and X34, X35 and X36 are off, channel 1 data is stored in V2000. C0 is reset to indicate channel 1s value is positive.

X37

SET

C0

If X37 is on, then the data value represents a negative voltage. C0 is set to indicate channel 1s value is negative.

Store Channel 2 X34 X35 X36

OUT V2001 C1
RST

When the module is not busy, and X34 is on and X35 and X36 are off, channel 2 data is stored in V2001. C1 is reset to indicate channel 2s value is positive.

X37

C1
SET

If X37 is on, then the data value represents a negative voltage. C1 is set to indicate channel 2s value is negative.

F2-08AD-2 8-Ch. Voltage Input

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-08AD-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Input Using 2s Complement (Multiplexing)

230

5-17

The 2s complement data format may be required to display negative values on some operator interface devices. It could also be used to simplify data averaging on bipolar signals. The example shows two channels, but you can repeat these steps for all eight channels if necessary.
Load data when module is not busy. X36 LD V40401 ANDD KFFF OUT V2000 C0
RST Loads the complete data word into the accumulator. The V-memory location depends on the I/O configuration. See Appendix A for the memory map. This instruction masks the channel identification bits Without this, the values used will not be correct, so do not forget to include it. When the module is not busy, and X34, X35 and X36 are off, channel 1 data is stored in V2000. C0 is reset to indicate that channel 1s value is positive.

240 250- 1 260

Store Channel 1 X36 X34 X35

X37

C0
SET

If X37 is on, then the data value represents a negative voltage. C0 is set to indicate that channel 1s value is negative. Invert the bit pattern in the accumulator.

INV BCD ADDD K1 X36 X34 X35 OUTD V2040

Channel 1 data is in double word starting at V2040.

Store Channel 2 X36 X34 X35

OUT V2001 C1
RST

When the module is not busy, and X34 is on and X35 and X36 are off, channel 2 data is stored in V2001. C1 is reset to indicate that channel 2s value is positive.

X37

C1
SET

If X37 is on, then the data value represents a negative voltage. C1 is set to indicate that channel 2s value is negative. Invert the bit pattern in the accumulator.

INV BCD

F2-08AD-2 8-Ch. Voltage Input

ADDD K1 X36 X34 X35 OUT V2042

Channel 2 data is in double word starting at V2042.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

5-18

F2-08AD-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Input The analog module has an on-board RISC-like microcontroller that can diagnose analog input circuit problems. You can easily create a simple ladder rung to detect these problems. This rung shows an input point that would be assigned if the module was used as shown in the previous examples. A different point would be used if the module was installed in a different I/O arrangement. Multiplexing method
V2000 K0 X37 C1
OUT

Analog Power Failure Detection

V-memory location V2000 holds channel 1 data. When a data value of zero is returned and input X37 is on, the analog channel is not operating properly.

Pointer method
V2000

K8000

C1
OUT

V-memory location V2000 holds channel 1 data. When a data value of 8000 is returned, the analog channel is not operating properly.

Scaling the Input Data

Most applications usually require measurements in engineering units, which provide more meaningful data. This is accomplished by using the conversion formula shown. You may have to make adjustments to the formula depending on the scale you choose for the engineering units.

Units = A H L 4095 H = high limit of the engineering unit range L = low limit of the engineering unit range A = Analog value (0 -- 4095)

For example, if you wanted to measure pressure (PSI) from 0.0 to 99.9 you would have to multiply the analog value by 10 in order to imply a decimal place when you view the value with the programming software or a handheld programmer. Notice how the calculations differ when you use the multiplier.
Analog Value of 2024, slightly less than half scale, should yield 49.4 PSI Example without multiplier Units = A H L 4095 Units = 2024 100 0 4095 Units = 49
Handheld Display

Example with multiplier Units = 10 A H L 4095 Units = 20240 100 0 4095 Units = 494
Handheld Display

F2-08AD-2 8-Ch. Voltage Input

V 2001 V 2000 0000 0049

V 2001 V 2000 0000 0494

This value is more accurate.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-08AD-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Input

5-19

The example below shows how you would write the program to perform the engineering unit conversion. This example assumes you have BCD data loaded into the appropriate V-memory locations using instructions that apply for the model of CPU you are using.
Note, this example uses SP1, which is always on. You could also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact.

SP1

LD V2000 MUL K1000 DIV K4095 OUT V2010

When SP1 is on, load channel 1 data to the accumulator.

Multiply the accumulator by 1000 (to start the conversion).

Divide the accumulator by 4095.

Store the result in V2010.

Analog and Digital Value Conversions

Sometimes it is useful to be able to quickly convert between the signal levels and the digital values. This is especially helpful during machine startup or troubleshooting. Remember, this module does not operate like other versions of analog input modules that you may be familiar with. The bipolar ranges use 0--4095 for both positive and negative voltages. The sign bit allows this, which actually provides better resolution than those modules that do not offer a sign bit. The following table provides formulas to make this conversion easier.
Range 0 to 5V --5V to +5V 0 to 10V --10V to +10V If you know the digital value ... A = 5D 4095 A = 10D 4095 If you know the signal level ... D = 4095 (A) 5 D = 4095 (A) 10

For example, if you are using the --10 to +10V range and you have measured the signal at 6V, use the following formula to determine the digital value that is stored in the V-memory location that contains the data.

D = 4095 (A) 10 D = 4095 (6V) 10 D = (409.5) (6) D = 2457

F2-08AD-2 8-Ch. Voltage Input

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

5-20

F2-08AD-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Input Add the following logic to filter and smooth analog input noise in DL250--1 and DL260 CPUs. This is especially useful when using PID loops. Noise can be generated by the field device and/or induced by field wiring. The analog value in BCD is first converted to a binary number because there is not a BCD-to-real conversion instruction. Memory location V1400 is the designated workspace in this example. The MULR instruction is the filter factor, which can be from 0.1 to 0.9. The example uses 0.2. A smaller filter factor increases filtering. You can use a higher precision value, but it is not generally needed. The filtered value is then converted back to binary and then to BCD. The filtered value is stored in location V1402 for use in your application or PID loop. NOTE: Be careful not to do a multiple number conversion on a value. For example, if you are using the pointer method to get the analog value, it is in BCD and must be converted to binary. However, if you are using the conventional method of reading analog and are masking the first twelve bits, then it is already in binary and no conversion using the BIN instruction is needed.
SP1
Loads the analog signal, which is a BCD value and has been loaded from V-memory location V2000, into the accumulator. Contact SP1 is always on. Converts the BCD value in the accumulator to binary. Remember, this instruction is not needed if the analog value is originally brought in as a binary number. Converts the binary value in the accumulator to a real number.

Filtering Input Noise (DL250-1, DL260 CPUs Only)

230

240 250- 1 260

LD V2000

BIN

BTOR

SUBR V1400

Subtracts the real number stored in location V1400 from the real number in the accumulator, and stores the result in the accumulator. V1400 is the designated workspace in this example. Multiplies the real number in the accumulator by 0.2 (the filter factor), and stores the result in the accumulator. This is the filtered value. Adds the real number stored in location V1400 to the real number filtered value in the accumulator, and stores the result in the accumulator. Copies the value in the accumulator to location V1400.

MULR R0.2

ADDR V1400

OUTD V1400

F2-08AD-2 8-Ch. Voltage Input

RTOB

Converts the real number in the accumulator to a binary value, and stores the result in the accumulator. Converts the binary value in the accumulator to a BCD number. Note: The BCD instruction is not need for PID loop PD (loop PD is a binary number). Loads the BCD number filtered value from the accumulator into location V1402 to use in your application or PID loop.

BCD

OUT V1402

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-04RTD 4-Channel RTD Input

In This Chapter. . . .
Module Specifications Setting the Module Jumpers Connecting the Field Wiring Module Operation Writing the Control Program

6-2
F2-04RTD 4 Ch. RTD Input

F2-04RTD 4-Channel RTD Input

Module Specifications
The F2-04RTD 4-Channel Resistive Temperature Detector Input Module provides several features and benefits: S Provides four RTD input channels with 0.1F resolution. S Automatically converts type Pt100 jPt100 Pt1000 Cu 25 Cu10 signals into direct temperature readings. No extra scaling or complex conversion is required. S Temperature data format is selectable between F or C , magnitude plus sign, or 2s complement. S Precision lead wire resistance compensation by dual matched current sources and ratiometric measurements. S Temperature calculation and linearization are based on data provided by the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). S Diagnostics features include detection of short circuits and input power disconnection. Module Calibration
IN RTD TEMP

F2-04RTD
RTD INPUT CH1-CH1+ CH2-CH2+ COM COM CH3-CH3+ CH4-CH4+
F2-04RTD

The module automatically re-calibrates every five seconds to remove any offset and gain errors. The F2-04RTD module requires no user calibration. However, if your process requires calibration, it is possible to correct the RTD tolerance using ladder logic. You can subtract or add a constant to the actual reading for that particular RTD. The F2-04RTD module requires 32 discrete input points from the CPU. The module can be installed in any slot of a DL205 system, including remote bases. The limiting factors on the number of analog modules used are: S For local and local expansion systems, the available power budget and number of discrete I/O points. S For remote I/O systems, the available power budget and number of remote I/O points. Check the user manual for your particular CPU model for more information regarding the available power budget and number of local, local expansion or remote I/O points. NOTE: DL230 CPUs with firmware release version 1.6 or later, DL240 CPUs with firmware release 2.5 or later, DL250 CPUs with firmware release version 1.06 or later are required for proper operation.

RTD Input Configuration Requirements

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-04RTD 4-Channel RTD Inputs

6-3
F2-04RTD 4-Ch. RTD Input

The following table provides the specifications for the F2-04RTD module. Review these specifications to make sure the module meets your application requirements. Input Specifications
Number of Channels Input Ranges 4, differential inputs Pt100 Pt 1000 jPt100 10Cu. 25Cu. Resolution Absolute Maximum Ratings Converter Type Sampling Rate Linearity Error (End to End) PLC Update Rate Temperature Drift Maximum Inaccuracy RTD Excitation Current Common Mode Range Notch Filter Digital Input Points Required -200C to 850C (-328F to 1562F) -200C to 595C (-328F to 1103F) -38C to 450C (-36F to 842F) -200C to 260C (-328F to 500F) -200C to 260C (-328F to 500F)

0.1 C, 0.1 F ( 3276.7) Fault protected input, 50 Vdc Charge balancing, 24-bit 160 msec per channel 0.05 C maximum,0.01 C typical 4 Channels/Scan max. 240/250--1/260 CPU 1 Channel/Scan max. 230 CPU 5ppm per C (maximum) 1C 200 A 0--5 VDC >100dB notches @ 50/60 Hz f --3dB = 13.1 Hz 32 (X) input points 15 binary data bits, 1 sign bit, 2 channel ID bits 4 fault bits 90 mA @ 5 VDC (from base) 0 to 60 C (32 to 140 F) --20 to 70 C (--4 to 158 F) 5 to 95% (non-condensing) No corrosive gases permitted MIL STD 810C 514.2 MIL STD 810C 516.2 NEMA ICS3--304

Power Budget Requirement Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Relative Humidity Environmental air Vibration Shock Noise Immunity

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

6-4
F2-04RTD 4 Ch. RTD Input

F2-04RTD 4-Channel RTD Input

Special Placement Requirements (DL230 and Remote I/O Bases)

It is important to examine the configuration if you are using a DL230 CPU. As you can see in the section on writing the program, you use V-memory locations to send the analog data. If you place the module so that the input points do not start on a V-memory boundary, the instructions cannot access the data. This also applies when placing this module in a remote base using a D2--RSS in the CPU slot. See the table below. Correct!
F2-04RTD

Slot 0
16pt Output

Slot 1
8pt Output

Slot 2
16pt Input

Slot 3
32pt Input

Slot 4
8pt Input

Y0 -Y17

Y20 -Y27

X0 -X17 V40400

X20 X57

X60 -X67 V40403 LSB X 2 0 F2-04RTD

Data is correctly entered so input points start on a V-memory boundary address from the table below. V40402 LSB MSB MSB X 5 7 XX 54 07 X 4 0 X 3 7

V40401 -- V40402 V40401 XX 32 07

Incorrect

Slot 0
16pt Output

Slot 1
8pt Output

Slot 2
16pt Input

Slot 3
8pt Input

Slot 4
32pt Input

Y0 -Y17

Y20 -Y27

X0 -X17

X20 -X27

X30 X67

Data is split over three locations, so instructions cannot access data from a DL230. MSB X 7 7 V40403 XX 76 07 LSB X 6 0 MSB X 5 7 V40402 XX 5 4 0 7 LSB X 4 0 MSB X 3 7 V40401 XX 3 2 0 7 LSB X 2 0

To use the V-memory references required for a DL230 CPU, the first input address assigned to the module must be one of the following X locations. The table also shows the V-memory addresses that correspond to these X locations. X V X0 X20 X40 X60 X100 X120 X140 X160 V40400 V40401 V40402 V40403 V40404 V40405 V40406 V40407

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-04RTD 4-Channel RTD Inputs

6-5
F2-04RTD 4-Ch. RTD Input

Setting the Module Jumpers

Jumper Locations Locate the bank of seven jumpers (J8) on the PC board. Notice that the description of each jumper is on the PC board. You can select the following options by installing or removing the jumpers: S Number of channels: 1 thru 4. S The input type: 10 ohms) or 25 copper RTDs; jPt 100 , Pt 100 or Pt 1000 RTDs S Temperature conversion: 2s complement or magnitude plus sign format in Fahrenheit or Celsius. To prevent losing a jumper when it is removed, store it near its original location by sliding one of its sockets over a single pin. The two jumpers labeled CH+1 and CH+2 are used to select the number of channels that will be used. The factory default setting is four-channel operation (both jumpers installed). Any unused channels are not processed. For example, if you select channels 1 thru 3, channel 4 will be inactive. The table shows how to arrange the jumpers to select the number of channels. X = jumper installed, empty space = jumper removed Number of Channels 1 2 3 4 X X X X Jumper CH+1 CH+2
J8 CH+1 CH+2 RTD-0 RTD-1 RTD-2 Units-0 Units-1 Jumper Descriptions

Selecting the Number of Channels

Setting Input Type

The jumpers labeled RTD-0, RTD-1, and RTD-2 are used to select the type of RTD. The module can be used with many types of RTDs. All channels of the module must be the same RTD type. The default setting from the factory is Pt100 RTD-2 comes with the jumper removed). This selects the DIN 43760 European type RTD. European curve type RTDs are calibrated to DIN 43760, BS1905, or IEC751 specifications which is .00385 / / C (100 C = 138.5 ). The jPt100 type is used for the American curve (.00392 // C), platinum 100 RTDs. The 10 and 25 RTD settings are used with copper RTDs.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

6-6
F2-04RTD 4 Ch. RTD Input

F2-04RTD 4-Channel RTD Input The table shows how to arrange the jumpers to set the input type. X = jumper installed, empty space = jumper removed Jumper Pins
RTD Inputs RTD-0 RTD-1 RTD-2

Cu 10 Cu 25 jPt100 Pt100 Pt1000 Selecting the Conversion Units X X X X X

Use the last two jumpers, Units-0 and Unit-1, to set the conversion unit. The options are magnitude + sign or 2s complement in Fahrenheit or Celsius. The module comes from the factory with both jumpers installed for magnitude + sign conversion in Fahrenheit. All RTD types are converted into a direct temperature reading in either Fahrenheit or Celsius. The data contains one implied decimal place. For example, a value in V-memory of 1002 would be 100.2_C or _F. Negative temperatures can be represented in either 2s complement or magnitude plus sign form. If the temperature is negative, the most significant bit in the V-memory location is set (X17). The 2s complement data format may be required to correctly display bipolar data on some operator interfaces. This data format could also be used to simplify averaging a bipolar signal. To view this data format in DirectSoft32, select Signed Decimal. The table shows how to arrange the jumpers. X = jumper installed, empty space = jumper removed. Jumper Temperature Conversion Units Magnitude + Sign _F _C Units-0 Units-1 X X X 2s Complement _F _C X

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-04RTD 4-Channel RTD Inputs

6-7
F2-04RTD 4-Ch. RTD Input

Connecting the Field Wiring

Wiring Guidelines Your company may have guidelines for wiring and cable installation. If so, you should check those before you begin the installation. Here are some general things to consider: S Use the shortest wiring route whenever possible. S Use shielded wiring and ground the shield at the transmitter source. Do not ground the shield at both the module and the source. S Do not run the signal wiring next to large motors, high current switches, or transformers. This may cause noise problems. S Route the wiring through an approved cable housing to minimize the risk of accidental damage. Check local and national codes to choose the correct method for your application. Use shielded RTDs whenever possible to minimize noise on the input signal. Ground the shield wire at one end only. Connect the shield wire to the COM terminal. Lead Configuration for RTD Sensors The suggested three-lead configuration shown below provides one lead to the CH+ terminal, one lead to the CH- terminal, and one lead to the common terminal. Compensation circuitry nulls out the lead length for accurate temperature measurements. Some sensors have four leads. When making connections, do not connect the second lead to the CH+ input; leave that lead unconnected. Do not use configurations having only one lead connected to each input. There is no compensation and temperature readings will be inaccurate. This module has low RTD excitation current, worst-case dissipation is only .016 mW. Wiring Connections For Typical RTD Sensor Black Black To CH-To COM

RTD - Resistance Temperature Detector

Sensor Red To CH+ Red (if applicable) No Connection (if sensor has 4 leads, only connect one lead to CH+) Ambient Variations in Temperature The F2-04RTD module has been designed to operate within the ambient temperature range of 0_C to 60_C. Precision analog measurement with no long term temperature drift is assured by a chopper stabilized programmable gain amplifier, ratiometric referencing, and automatic offset and gain calibration.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

6-8
F2-04RTD 4 Ch. RTD Input

F2-04RTD 4-Channel RTD Input

Wiring Diagram

The F2-04RTD module has a removable connector to make wiring easier. Simply squeeze the top and bottom retaining clips and gently pull the connector from the module. Wiring Diagram
IN

Note 1

Ch1 -Ch1 + Ch2 + C C Ch3 -Ch3 + Ch4 -Ch4 +

200 mA Current Source F2-04RTD Ref. Adj.

RTD INPUT CH1-CH1+

RTD TEMP

Ch2 --

ANALOG MULTIPLEXER

Note 2

+ -200 mA Current Source

A/D

CH2-CH2+ COM COM CH3-CH3+ CH4-CH4+

F2-04RTD

Notes: 1. The three wires connecting the RTD to the module must be the same type and length. Do not use the shield or drain wire for the third connection. 2. If the RTD sensor has four wires, the plus (+) sense wire should be left unconnected as shown.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-04RTD 4-Channel RTD Inputs

6-9
F2-04RTD 4-Ch. RTD Input

Module Operation
Before you begin writing the control program, it is important to take a few minutes to understand how the module processes and represents the analog signals. Channel Scanning Sequence for a DL230 CPU (Multiplexing) The F2-04RTD module can supply different amounts of data per scan, depending on the type of CPU you are using. The DL230 can obtain one channel of data per CPU scan. Since there are four channels, it can take up to four scans to get data for all channels. Once all channels have been scanned the process starts over with channel 1. Unused channels are not processed, so if you select only two channels, each channel will be updated every other scan. The multplexing method can also be used for the DL240/250--1/260 CPUs.

Scan Read Inputs Execute Application Program

Read the data Scan N Scan N+1 Store data Scan N+2 Scan N+3 Scan N+4 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 1 System With DL230 CPU

Write to Outputs

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

6-10
F2-04RTD 4 Ch. RTD Input

F2-04RTD 4-Channel RTD Input

Channel Scanning Sequence for a DL240, DL250-1 or DL260 CPU (Pointer Method)

If you are using a DL240, DL250--1 or DL260 CPU, you can obtain all four channels of input data in one scan. This is because the DL240/250--1/260 CPUs support special V-memory locations that are used to manage the data transfer. This is discussed in more detail in the section on Writing the Control Program.

Scan Read Inputs Execute Application Program

Read the data Scan N Scan N+1 Store data Scan N+2 Scan N+3 Scan N+4 Ch 1, 2, 3, 4 Ch 1, 2, 3, 4 Ch 1, 2, 3, 4 Ch 1, 2, 3, 4 Ch 1, 2, 3, 4 System With DL240/250-1/260 CPU

Write to Outputs

Analog Module Updates

Even though the channel updates to the CPU are synchronous with the CPU scan, the module asynchronously monitors the analog transmitter signal and converts the signal to a 16-bit binary representation. This enables the module to continuously provide accurate measurements without slowing down the discrete control logic in the RLL program. The time required to sense the temperature and copy the value to V-memory is 160 milliseconds minimum to 640 milliseconds plus 1 scan time maximum (number of channels x 160 msec + 1 scan time).

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-04RTD 4-Channel RTD Inputs

6-11
F2-04RTD 4-Ch. RTD Input

Writing the Control Program

Reading Values: Pointer Method and Multiplexing There are two methods of reading values: S The pointer method S Multiplexing You must use the multiplexing method when using a DL230 CPU. You must also use the multiplexing method with remote I/O modules (the pointer method will not work). You can use either method when using DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 CPUs, but for ease of programming it is strongly recommended that you use the pointer method. The CPU has special V-memory locations assigned to each base slot that greatly simplify the programming requirements. These V-memory locations: S specify the number of channels to scan. S specify the storage locations. The example program shows how to setup these locations. Place this rung anywhere in the ladder program, or in the initial stage if you are using stage programming instructions. This is all that is required to read the data into V-memory locations. Once the data is in V-memory, you can perform math on the data, compare the data against preset values, and so forth. V2000 is used in the example, but you can use any user V-memory location. In the examples, the module is installed in slot 2. You should use the V-memory locations used in your application. The pointer method automatically converts values to BCD. NOTE: DL240 CPUs with firmware release version 2.5 or later and DL250 CPUs with firmware release version 1.06 or later support this method. Use the DL230 multiplexing example if your firmware revision is earlier (verify that the addresses in the CPU are zero).

Pointer Method
230 240 250- 1 260

SP0 LD K 04 00

- or -

LD K 84 00

Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the data format. The upper byte, most significant nibble (MSN) selects the data format (0=BCD, 8=Binary), the LSN selects the number of channels (1, 2, 3, or 4). The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator interfaces. The DL230/240 CPUs do not support binary math functions, whereas the DL250 does.

OUT V7662 LDA O2000 OUT V7672

Special V-memory location assigned to slot 2 that contains the number of channels to scan. This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used to store the incoming data. For example, the O2000 entered here would designate the following addresses: Ch1 - V2000, V2001, Ch 2 - V2002, V2003, Ch 3 - V2004, V2005, Ch 4 - V2006, V2007. The octal address (O2000) is stored here. V7672 is assigned to slot 2 and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the octal value in this location to determine exactly where to store the incoming data.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

6-12
F2-04RTD 4 Ch. RTD Input

F2-04RTD 4-Channel RTD Input The tables below show the special V-memory locations used by the DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 for the CPU base and local expansion base I/O slots. Slot 0 (zero) is the module next to the CPU or D2--CM module. Slot 1 is the module two places from the CPU or D2--CM, and so on. Remember, the CPU only examines the pointer values at these locations after a mode transition. Also, if you use the DL230 (multiplexing) method, verify that these addresses in the CPU are zero. The Table below applies to the DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 CPU base.
CPU Base: Analog Input Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations Slot No. of Channels Storage Pointer 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V7660 V7661 V7662 V7663 V7664 V7665 V7666 V7667 V7670 V7671 V7672 V7673 V7674 V7675 V7676 V7677

The Table below applies to the DL250--1 or DL260 expansion base 1.

Expansion Base D2-CM #1: Analog Input Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations Slot No. of Channels Storage Pointer 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V36000 V36001 V36002 V36003 V36004 V36005 V36006 V36007 V36010 V36011 V36012 V36013 V36014 V36015 V36016 V36017

The Table below applies to the DL250--1 or DL260 expansion base 2.

Expansion Base D2-CM #2: Analog Input Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations Slot No. of Channels Storage Pointer 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V36100 V36101 V36102 V36103 V36104 V36105 V36106 V36107 V36110 V36111 V36112 V36113 V36114 V36115 V36116 V36117

The Table below applies to the DL260 CPU expansion base 3.

Expansion Base D2-CM #3: Analog Input Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations Slot No. of Channels Storage Pointer 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V36200 V36201 V36202 V36203 V36204 V36205 V36206 V36207 V36210 V36211 V36212 V36213 V36214 V36215 V36216 V36217

The Table below applies to the DL260 CPU expansion base 4.

Expansion Base D2-CM #4: Analog Input Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations Slot No. of Channels Storage Pointer 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V36300 V36301 V36302 V36303 V36304 V36305 V36306 V36307 V36310 V36311 V36312 V36313 V36314 V36315 V36316 V36317

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-04RTD 4-Channel RTD Inputs

6-13
F2-04RTD 4-Ch. RTD Input

Negative Temperature Readings with Magnitude Plus Sign (Pointer Method)

230 240 250- 1 260

With bipolar ranges, you need some additional logic to determine whether the value being returned represents a positive voltage or a negative voltage. For example, you may need to know the direction for a motor. There is a simple solution: S If you are using bipolar ranges and you get a value greater than or equal to 8000H, the value is negative. S If you get a value less than or equal to 7FFFH, the value is positive. The sign bit is the most significant bit, which combines 8000H to the data value. If the value is greater than or equal to 8000H, you only have to mask the most significant bit and the active channel bits to determine the actual data value. NOTE: DL240 CPUs with firmware release version 2.5 or later and DL250 CPUs with firmware release version 1.06 or later support this method. Use the DL230 multiplexing example if your firmware revision is earlier. The following two programs show how you can accomplish this. The first example uses magnitude plus sign (binary) and the second example uses magnitude plus sign (BCD). Since you always want to know when a value is negative, these rungs should be placed before any other operations that use the data, such as math instructions, scaling operations, and so forth. Also, if you are using stage programming instructions, these rungs should be in a stage that is always active. Note: you only need this logic for each channel that is using bipolar input signals. The following examples only show two channels.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

6-14
F2-04RTD 4 Ch. RTD Input

F2-04RTD 4-Channel RTD Input

Check Channel 1 SP1 LD V2000 ANDD K7FFF
Load channel 1 data from V-memory into the accumulator. Contact SP1 is always on.

Magnitude Plus Sign (Binary)

This instruction masks the sign bit of the binary data, if it is set. Without this step, negative values will not be correct so do not forget to include it. Put the actual signal value in V2010. Now you can use the data normally.

OUT V2010 V2000 Check Channel 2 SP1 K8000 C1

OUT

Channel 1 data is negative when C1 is on (a value of -1.0 reads as 8010, -2.0 is 8020, etc.). Load channel 2 from V-memory into the accumulator. Contact SP1 is always on.

LD V2002 ANDD K7FFF

This instruction masks the sign bit of the binary data, if it is set. Without this step, negative values will not be correct so do not forget to include it. Put the actual signal value in V2012. Now you can use the data normally.

OUT V2012 V2002 K8000 C2

OUT

Channel 2 data is negative when C2 is on (a value of -1.0 reads as 8010, -2.0 is 8020, etc.). Load channel 1 data from V-memory into the accumulator. Remember, the data can be negative. Contact SP1 is always on. This instruction masks the sign bit of the BCD data, if it is set. Without this step, negative values will not be correct so do not forget to include it. Put the actual signal value in V2010. Now you can use the data normally.

Magnitude Plus Sign (BCD)

Check Channel 1 SP1

LDD V2000 ANDD

K7FFFFFFF

OUTD V2010 V2001 Check Channel 2 SP1 K8000 C1

OUT

Channel 1 data is negative when C1 is on (a value of -1.0 reads as 8000 0010, -2.0 is 8000 0020, etc.).

LDD V2002 ANDD

Load channel 2 from V-memory into the accumulator. Remember, the data can be negative. Contact SP1 is always on. This instruction masks the sign bit of the BCD data, if it is set. Without this step, negative values will not be correct so do not forget to include it. Put the actual signal value in V2012. Now you can use the data normally.

K7FFFFFFF

OUTD V2012 V2003 K8000 C2

OUT

Channel 2 data is negative when C2 is on (a value of -1.0 reads as 8000 0010, -2.0 is 8000 0020, etc.).

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-04RTD 4-Channel RTD Inputs

6-15
F2-04RTD 4-Ch. RTD Input

Negative Temperatures 2s Complement (Binary / Pointer Method)

230 240 250- 1 260

You can use the 2s complement mode for negative temperature display purposes, while at the same time using the magnitude plus sign of the temperature in your control program. The DirectSOFT32 element Signed Decimal is used to display negative numbers in 2s complement form. To find the absolute value of a negative number in 2s complement, invert the number and add 1 as shown in the following example:
V2000 K8000
Load negative value into the accumulator so we can convert it to a positive value.

LD V2000

INV

Invert the binary pattern in the accumulator.

ADDB K1

Add 1.

OUT V2010

Save Channel 1 data at V2010. Repeat for other channels as required.

Understanding the Input Assignments (Multiplexing Ladder Only)

230 240 250- 1 260

You may recall that this module appears to the CPU as a 32-point discrete input module. You can use these points to obtain: S An indication of which channel is active S The digital representation of the analog signal S Module diagnostic information Since all input points are automatically mapped into V-memory, it is very easy to determine the location of the data word that will be assigned to the module.
F2-04RTD

Slot 0
8pt Input

Slot 1
8pt Input

Slot 2
32pt Input

Slot 3
16pt Input

Slot 4
16pt Output

X0 -X7

X10 -X17

X20 X57

X60 -X77 V40403

Y0 -Y17

V40400
MSB V40402
8 7 6 5 4 3

LSB
2 1 0

MSB

V40401
8 7 6 5 4 3 2

LSB
1 0

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

X 5 7

X X 5 4 0 7

X 4 0

X 3 7

X X 3 2 0 7

X 2 0

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

6-16
F2-04RTD 4 Ch. RTD Input

F2-04RTD 4-Channel RTD Input Remember, when using DL230 CPUs input points must start on a V-memory boundary. To use the V-memory references required for a DL230 CPU, the first input address assigned to the module must be one of the following X locations. The table also shows the V-memory addresses that correspond to these X locations. X V X0 X20 X40 X60 X100 X120 X140 X160

V40400 V40401 V40402 V40403 V40404 V40405 V40406 V40407

V40401 MSB LSB 1 1 111 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 5 4 321 0
X 3 7

Analog Data Bits

The first 16 bits represent the analog data in binary format. Bit Value Bit Value 0 1 8 256 1 2 9 512 2 4 10 1024 3 8 11 2048 4 16 12 4096 5 32 13 8192 6 64 14 16384 7 128 15 32768

= data bits

X 2 0

Active Channel Bits

The active channel bits represent the multiplexed channel selections in binary format. Channel Bit 1 Bit 0 0 0 1 0 1 2 1 0 3 1 1 4

V40402 MSB
X 5 7

LSB 10 X = active channel bits 4 0

Broken Transmitter Bits (Pointer and Multiplexing Ladder Methods)

The broken transmitter bits are on when the corresponding RTD is open. Channel Bit 8 1 9 2 10 3 11 4

V40402 MSB
X 5 7

LSB 11 9 8 10 X 5 0
X 4 7

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 X 4 0

= broken transmitter bits

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-04RTD 4-Channel RTD Inputs

6-17
F2-04RTD 4-Ch. RTD Input

Reading Magnitude Plus Sign Values (Multiplexing)

230 240 250- 1 260

The DL230 CPU does not have the special V-memory locations that allow you to automatically enable the data transfer. Since all channels are multiplexed into a single data word, the control program must be setup to determine which channel is being read. Since the module appears as X input points to the CPU, it is very easy to use the active channel status bits to determine which channel is being monitored. NOTE: DL230 CPUs with firmware release version 1.6 or later required for multiplexing ladder.

SP1

LD V40401

Loads the complete data word into the accumulator. The V-memory location depends on the I/O configuration. See Appendix A for the memory map. This instruction masks the sign bit. Without this, the values used will not be correct so do not forget to include it. When X40, X41, and X50 are off, channel 1 data is stored in V2000. C0 is reset to indicate that channel 1s value is positive.

Store Channel 1 X40 X41 X50

ANDD K7FFF OUT V2000 C0

RST

X37 Store Channel 2 X40 X41 X51

C0
SET

If X37 is on, the data value represents a negative temperature. C0 is set to indicate that channel 1s value is negative. When X40 is on and X41 and X51 are off, channel 2 data is stored in V2001. C1 is reset to indicate that channel 2s value is positive.

OUT V2001 C1
RST

X37 Store Channel 3 X40 X41 X52 OUT V2002

C1
SET

If X37 is on, the data value represents a negative temperature. C1 is set to indicate that channel 2s value is negative. When X40 and X52 are off and X41 is on, channel 3 data is stored in V2002. C2 is reset to indicate that channel 3s value is positive.

C2
RST

Store Channel 4 X40 X41 X53

X37

C2
SET

If X37 is on, then the data value represents a negative temperature. C2 is set to indicate that channel 3s value is negative. When both X40 and X41 are on and X53 is off, channel 4 data is stored in V2003. C3 is reset to indicate that channel 4s value is positive.

OUT V2003 C3
RST

X37

C3
SET

If X37 is on, the data value represents a negative temperature. C3 is set to indicate that channel 4s value is negative.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

6-18
F2-04RTD 4 Ch. RTD Input

F2-04RTD 4-Channel RTD Input

Reading 2s Complement Values (Multiplexing)

230 240 250- 1 260

The DL230 CPU does not have the special V-memory locations that allow you to automatically enable the data transfer. Since all channels are multiplexed into a single data word, the control program must be setup to determine which channel is being read. Since the module appears as X input points to the CPU, it is very easy to use the active channel status bits to determine which channel is being monitored. The 2s complement data format may be required to correctly display bipolar data on some operator interfaces. This data format could also be used to simplify averaging a bipolar signal. To view this data format in DirectSOFT32, select Signed Decimal.
Load Data SP1 LD V40401 ANDD K7FFF Store Channel 1 X40 X41 X50
Loads the complete data word into the accumulator. The V-memory location depends on the I/O configuration. This instruction masks the channel sign bit.

OUT V2000

When X40, X41 and X50 are off, channel 1 data is stored in V2000.

Store Channel 2 X40 X41 X51

OUT V2001

When X40 is on and X41 and X51 are off, channel 2 data is stored in V2001.

Store Channel 3 X40 X41 X52

OUT V2002

When X40 and X52 are off and X41 is on, channel 3 data is stored in V2002.

Store Channel 4 X40 X41 X53

OUT V2003

When both X40 and X41 are on and X53 is off, channel 4 data is stored in V2003.

Scaling the Input Data

No scaling of the input temperature is required. The readings directly reflect the actual temperatures. For example: a reading of 8482 is 848.2 _C, a reading of 16386 is --0.2_C. (magnitude plus sign) and a reading of 32770 is --0.2_C (2s complement).

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-04RTD 4-Channel RTD Inputs

6-19
F2-04RTD 4-Ch. RTD Input

Filtering Input Noise (DL250-1, DL260 CPUs Only)

230 240 250- 1 260

Add the following logic to filter and smooth analog input noise in DL250--1 and DL260 CPUs. This is especially useful when using PID loops. Noise can be generated by the field device and/or induced by field wiring. The analog value in BCD is first converted to a binary number because there is not a BCD-to-real conversion instruction. Memory location V1400 is the designated workspace in this example. The MULR instruction is the filter factor, which can be from 0.1 to 0.9. The example uses 0.2. A smaller filter factor increases filtering. You can use a higher precision value, but it is not generally needed. The filtered value is then converted back to binary and then to BCD. The filtered value is stored in location V1402 for use in your application or PID loop. NOTE: Be careful not to do a multiple number conversion on a value. For example, if you are using the pointer method to get the analog value, it is in BCD and must be converted to binary. However, if you are using the conventional method of reading analog and are masking the first fifteen bits, then it is already in binary and no conversion using the BIN instruction is needed. Also, if you are using the conventional method, change the LLD V2000 instruction to LD V2000.
SP1 LDD V2000
Loads the analog signal, which is a BCD value and has been loaded from V-memory location V2000, into the accumulator. Contact SP1 is always on. Converts the BCD value in the accumulator to binary. Remember, this instruction is not needed if the analog value is originally brought in as a binary number. Converts the binary value in the accumulator to a real number.

BIN

BTOR

SUBR V1400

Subtracts the real number stored in location V1400 from the real number in the accumulator, and stores the result in the accumulator. V1400 is the designated workspace in this example. Multiplies the real number in the accumulator by 0.2 (the filter factor), and stores the result in the accumulator. This is the filtered value. Adds the real number stored in location V1400 to the real number filtered value in the accumulator, and stores the result in the accumulator. Copies the value in the accumulator to location V1400.

MULR R0.2

ADDR V1400

OUTD V1400

RTOB

Converts the real number in the accumulator to a binary value, and stores the result in the accumulator. Converts the binary value in the accumulator to a BCD number. Note: The BCD instruction is not needed for PID loop PV (loop PV is a binary number). Loads the BCD number filtered value from the accumulator into location V1402 to use in your application or PID loop.

BCD

OUTD V1402

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input

In This Chapter. . . .
Module Specifications Setting The Module Jumpers Connecting the Field Wiring Module Operation Writing the Control Program

7-2

F2-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input

Module Specifications
The F2-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input Module IN TEMP VOLT provides several features and benefits. S Four thermocouple input channels with 16-bit voltage resolution or 0.1 _C/_F temperature resolution. S Automatically converts type E, J, K, R, S, T, B, N, or F2-04THM C thermocouple signals into direct temperature readings. No extra scaling or complex conversion is required. CH 1+ S Temperature data can be expressed in _F or _C. CH 1 CH 2+ S Module can be configured as 5V, 156mV, CH 2 0--5V or 0--156 mV and will convert volts and millivolt CH 3+ signal levels into 16-bit digital (0--65535) values. CH 3 S Signal processing features include automatic cold CH 4+ junction compensation, thermocouple linearization, CH 4 and digital filtering. +24V S The temperature calculation and linearization are 0V based on data provided by the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). S Diagnostic features include detection of thermocouple burnout or disconnection. The following tables provide the specifications for the F2-04THM Analog Input Module. Review these specifications to make sure the module meets your application requirements.
THERMOCOUPLE mV 0-5, -5-+5VDC 18--26.4VDC, 60mA

F2-04THM 4-Ch. Thermocouple General Specifications

Number of Channels Common Mode Range Common Mode Rejection Input Impedance Absolute Maximum Ratings Accuracy vs. Temperature PLC Update Rate Digital Inputs Input Points Required External Power Supply Power Budget Requirement Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Relative Humidity Environmental air Vibration Shock Noise Immunity

4, differential 5VDC 90dB min. @ DC, 150dB min. @ 50/60 Hz. 1M Fault protected inputs to 50 VDC Fault-protected 5 ppm/_C maximum full scale calibration (including maximum offset change) 4 channels per scan max. DL240/250--1/260 CPU 1 channel per scan max. DL230 CPU 16 binary data bits, 2 channel ID bits, 4 diagnostic bits 32 point (X) input module 60 mA maximum, 18 to 26.4 VDC 110 mA maximum, maximum 5 VDC (supplied by base) 0 to 60_ C (32 to 140 F) --20 to 70_ C (--4 to 158 F) 5 to 95% (non-condensing) No corrosive gases permitted MIL STD 810C 514.2 MIL STD 810C 516.2 NEMA ICS3--304

One count in the specification table is equal to one least significant bit of the analog data value (1 in 65535).

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input

7-3

Thermocouple Specifications

Input Ranges

Type J --190 to 760_C --310 to 1400_F Type E --210 to 1000_C --346 to1832_F Type K --150 to 1372_C --238 to 2502_F Type R 65 to 1768_C 149 to 3214_F Type R Wide* 0 to 1768_C 32 to 3214_F Type S 65 to 1768_C 149 to 3214_F Type T --230 to 400_C --382 to 752_F Type B 529 to 1820_C 984 to 3308_F Type N --70 to 1300_C --94 to 2372_F Type C 65 to 2320_C 149 to 4208_F 0.1C / 0.1_F Automatic 30 min. typically 1C repeatability .05C maximum, .01C typical 3C (excluding thermocouple error)

Display Resolution Cold Junction Compensation Warm-Up Time Linearity Error (End to End) Maximum Inaccuracy

F2-04THM 4 Ch. Thermocouple

* R Wide range is available only on modules with date code 0410E2 and later. Voltage Specifications
Voltage Ranges Resolution Full Scale Calibration Error (Offset Error Included) Offset Calibration Error Linearity Error (End to End) Maximum Inaccuracy

Voltage: 0-5V, 5V, 0-156.25mV, 156.25mVDC 16 bit (1 in 65535) 13 counts typical, 33 maximum 1 count maximum, @ 0V input 1 count maximum .02% 02% @ 25C (77F)

4-Ch. Thermocouple

Module Calibration Thermocouple Input Configuration Requirements

The F2-04THM module requires no calibration. The module automatically calibrates every five seconds, which removes offset and gain errors. For each thermocouple type, the temperature calculation and linearization performed by the microprocessor is accurate to within .01 _C. The F2-04THM module requires 32 discrete input points from the CPU. The module can be installed in any slot of a DL205 system. The limitations on the number of analog modules are: S For local and local expansion systems, the available power budget and number of discrete I/O points. S For remote I/O systems, the available power budget and number of remote I/O points. Check the user manual for your particular model of CPU and I/O base for more information regarding power budget and number of local, local expanison or remote I/O points.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

7-4

F2-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input It is important to examine the configuration if you are using a DL230 CPU. As you can see in the section on writing the program, you use V-memory locations to send the analog data. If you place the module so that the input points do not start on a V-memory boundary, the instructions cannot access the data. This also applies when placing this module in a remote base using a D2--RSSS in the CPU slot. Correct!
F2-04THM

Special Placement Requirements (DL230 and Remote I/O Bases)

Slot 0

Slot 1
8pt Output

Slot 2
16pt Input

Slot 3
32pt Input

Slot 4
8pt Input

F2-04THM 4-Ch. Thermocouple

16pt Output

Y0 -Y17

Y20 -Y27

X0 -X17 V40400

X20 X57

X60 -X67 V40403

Data is correctly entered so input points start on a V-memory boundary address from the table below. MSB X 5 7 V40402 XX 54 07 LSB X 4 0 MSB X 3 7

V40401 -- V40402 V40401 XX 32 07 F2-04THM LSB X 2 0

Incorrect

Slot 0
16pt Output

Slot 1
8pt Output

Slot 2
16pt Input

Slot 3
8pt Input

Slot 4
32pt Input

Y0 -Y17

Y20 -Y27

X0 -X17

X20 -X27

X30 X67

MSB X 7 7

V40403 XX 76 07

Data is split over three locations, so instructions cannot access data from a DL230. V40402 MSB LSB LSB MSB X 6 0 X 5 7 XX 5 4 0 7 X 4 0 X 3 7

V40401 XX 3 2 0 7

LSB X 2 0

To use the V-memory references required for a DL230 CPU, the first input address assigned to the module must be one of the following X locations. The table also shows the V-memory addresses that correspond to these X locations. X V X0 X20 X40 X60 X100 X120 X140 X160

V40400 V40401 V40402 V40403 V40404 V40405 V40406 V40407

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input

7-5

Setting the Module Jumpers

Jumper Locations Use the figures below to locate the single jumper (J9) and bank of eight jumpers (J7) on the PC board. Notice that the PC board was re--designed starting with date code 0806E1 and the jumper locations changed; the functionality of the jumpers did not change. To prevent losing a jumper when it is removed, store it in its original location by sliding one of its sockets over a single pin. You can select the following options by installing or removing the appropriate jumpers: S Number of channels S S S Input type Conversion units Calibrate enable F2-04THM 4 Ch. Thermocouple

Jumper Locations on Modules Having Date Code Prior to 0806E1

J9 Calibrate enable J7 Options CH+1 CH+2 Tc Type 0 J9 J7 Tc Type 1 Tc Type 2 Tc Type 3 Units-0 Units-1

Jumper Locations on Modules Having Date Code 0806E1 and Later

J7 J7 Options CH+1 CH+2 Tc Type 0 Tc Type 1 J7 Tc Type 2 Tc Type 3 J9 Units-0

J7

4-Ch. Thermocouple

Units-1 J9 Calibrate enable

Calibrate Enable

Locate the Calibrate Enable jumper J9. The jumper comes from the factory in the jumper removed setting (the jumper is installed over only one of the two pins). Installing this jumper disables the thermocouple active burn-out detection circuitry, which enables you to attach a thermocouple calibrator to the module. To make sure that the output of the thermocouple calibrator is within the 5V common mode voltage range of the module, connect the negative side of the differential voltage input channel to the 0V terminal, then connect the thermocouple calibrator to the differential inputs (for example, Ch 3+ and Ch 3). For the voltage input ranges, this jumper is inactive and can be installed or removed with no effect on voltage input.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

7-6

F2-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input The top two J7 jumpers labeled CH+1 and CH+2 determine the number of channels that will be used. The table shows how to set the jumpers for channels 1 thru 4. The module comes with both jumpers installed for four channel operation. For example, to select channels 1 thru 3, leave the CH+2 jumper installed and remove the CH+1 jumper. Any unused channels are not processed. For example, if you only select channels 1 thru 3, channel 4 will not be active.

Selecting the Number of Channels

X = jumper installed, blank space = jumper removed Number of Channels 1 2 3 4 X Jumper CH+1 CH+2

X X
X

F2-04THM 4-Ch. Thermocouple

Setting Input Type

The next four jumpers (Tc Type 0, Tc Type 1, Tc Type 2, Tc Type 3) must be set to match the type of thermocouple being used or the input voltage level. The module can be used with many types of thermocouples. Use the table to determine your settings. The module comes from the factory with all four jumpers installed for use with a J type thermocouple. For example, to use an S type thermocouple, remove the jumper labeled Tc Type 2. All channels of the module must be the same thermocouple type or voltage range. X = Jumper installed, and blank space = jumper removed. Thermocouple / Voltage Inputs Tc Type 0 J K E R R Wide* S T B N C 0--5V. 5V. 0--156mV. 156mV. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Jumper Tc Type 1 Tc Type 2 X X X X Tc Type 3 X X X X

* R Wide range is available only on modules with date code 0410E2 and later.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input Selecting the Conversion Units

7-7

Use the last two jumpers, Units-0 and Units-1, to set the conversion unit used for either thermocouples or voltage inputs. The options are magnitude plus sign or 2s complement, plus Fahrenheit or Celsius for thermocouples. See the next two sections for jumper settings when using thermocouples or if using voltage inputs. All thermocouple types are converted into a direct temperature reading in either Fahrenheit or Celsius. The data contains one implied decimal place. For example, a value in V-memory of 1002 would be 100.2_C or _F. For thermocouple ranges which include negative temperatures (J,E,K,T,N), the display resolution is from --3276.7 to +3276.7. For positive-only thermocouple ranges (R,S,B,C), the display resolution is 0 to 6553.5. Negative temperatures can be represented in either 2s complement or magnitude plus sign form. If the temperature is negative, the most significant bit in the V-memory location is set (X17). The 2s complement data format may be required to correctly display bipolar data on some operator interfaces. This data format could also be used to simplify averaging a bipolar signal. To view this data format in DirectSoft32, select Signed Decimal. For unipolar thermocouple ranges (R,S,B,C), it does not matter if magnitude plus sign or 2s complement is selected. Use the table to select settings. The module comes with both jumpers installed for magnitude plus sign conversion in Fahrenheit. For example, remove the Units-0 jumper and leave the Units-1 jumper installed for magnitude plus sign conversion in Celsius. X = Jumper installed, and blank space = jumper removed. Temperature Conversion Units Jumper Units-0 Units-1 Magnitude Plus Sign _F _C X X X 2s Complement _F _C X 4-Ch. Thermocouple F2-04THM 4 Ch. Thermocouple

Thermocouple Conversion Units

Voltage Conversion Units

The bipolar voltage input ranges, 5V or 156mV (see previous page for 5V and 156mV settings), may be converted to a 15-bit magnitude plus sign or a 16-bit 2s complement value. Use the table to select settings. The module comes with both jumpers installed for magnitude plus sign conversion. Remove the Units-1 jumper and leave the Units-0 jumper installed for 2s complement conversion. X = Jumper installed, and blank space = jumper removed. Jumper Pi Pins Units-0 Units-1 Voltage Conversion Units Magnitude Plus Sign X X 2s Complement X

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

7-8

F2-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input

Connecting the Field Wiring

Wiring Guidelines Your company may have guidelines for wiring and cable installation. If so, you should check those before you begin the installation. Here are some general things to consider: S Use the shortest wiring route whenever possible. S Use shielded wiring and ground the shield at the transmitter source. Do not ground the shield at both the module and the source. S Do not run the signal wiring next to large motors, high current switches, or transformers. This may cause noise problems. S Route the wiring through an approved cable housing to minimize the risk of accidental damage. Check local and national codes to choose the correct method for your application. You may use the same or separate power source for the 0--5V or 0--156mV transmitter voltage supply. The DL205 bases have built-in 24 VDC power supplies that provide up to 300mA of current. You may use this instead of a separate supply if you are using only a couple of analog modules and voltage transmitters. It is desirable in some situations to power the transmitters separately in a location remote from the PLC. This will work as long as the transmitter supply meets the voltage and current requirements and the transmitters minus (--) side and the module supplys minus (--) side are connected together. WARNING: If you are using the 24 VDC base power supply, make sure you calculate the power budget. Exceeding the power budget can cause unpredictable system operation that can lead to a risk of personal injury or damage to equipment. The DL205 base has a switching type power supply. As a result of switching noise, you may notice some instability in the analog input data if you use the base power supply. If this is unacceptable, you should try one of the following: 1. Use a separate linear power supply. 2. Connect the 24VDC common to the frame ground, which is the screw terminal marked G on the base. Unused temperature inputs should be shorted together and connected to common.

F2-04THM 4-Ch. Thermocouple

User Power Supply Requirements

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input Thermocouples

7-9

Use shielded thermocouples whenever possible to minimize the presence of noise on the thermocouple wire. Ground the shield wire at one end only. For grounded thermocouples, connect the shield at the sensor end. For ungrounded thermocouples, connect the shield to the 0V (common) terminal. Grounded Thermocouple Assembly A grounded thermocouple provides better response time than an ungrounded thermocouple because the tip of the thermocouple junction is in direct contact with the protective case. Ungrounded Thermocouple Assembly An ungrounded thermocouple is electrically isolated from the protective case. If the case is electrically grounded it provides a low-impedance path for electrical noise to travel. The ungrounded thermocouple provides a more stable and accurate measurement in a noisy environment. Exposed Grounded Thermocouple The thermocouple does not have a protective case and is directly connected to a device with a higher potential. Grounding the thermocouple assures that the thermocouple remains within the common mode specifications. Because a thermocouple is essentially a wire, it provides a low-impedance path for electrical noise. The noise filter has a response of >100dB @ 50/60 Hz. WARNING: A thermocouple can become shorted to a high voltage potential. Because common terminals are internally connected together, whatever voltage potential exists on one thermocouple will exist on the other channels.

F2-04THM 4 Ch. Thermocouple

Ambient Variations in Temperature

The F2-04THM module has been designed to operate within the ambient temperature range of 0_C to 60_C. The cold junction compensation is calibrated to operate in a still-air environment. If the module is used in an application that has forced convection cooling, an error of 2--3_C may be introduced. To compensate for this you can use ladder logic to correct the values. When configuring the system design it is best to locate any heat-producing devices above and away from the PLC chassis because the heat will affect the temperature readings. For example, heat introduced at one end of the terminal block can cause a channel-to-channel variation. When exposing the F2-04THM module to abrupt ambient temperature changes it will take several minutes for the cold junction compensation and terminal block to stabilize. Errors introduced by abrupt ambient temperature changes will be less than 4_C. Use the following diagrams to connect the field wiring.

4-Ch. Thermocouple

Wiring Diagram

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

7-10

F2-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input Thermocouple Input Wiring Diagram

See Notes 1 and 2 CH1+ CH1
Examples of differential thermocouple wiring

IN

TEMP VOLT

CH2+ CH2 CH3+ CH3

F2-04THM
THERMOCOUPLE mV 0-5, -5-+5VDC

Analog Mux

F2-04THM 4-Ch. Thermocouple

CH 1+ CH 1 CH 2+ CH 2 CH 3+ CH 3 CH 4+ CH 4 +24V 0V
18--26.4VDC, 60mA

ADC

Examples of grounded thermocouple wiring

CH4+ CH4

Module Supply 18-26.4 VDC

+24VDC 0V

Note 1: Terminate shields at the respective signal source. Note 2: Connect unused channels to a common terminal (0V, CH4+, CH4).

Voltage Input Wiring Diagram

See Notes 3 and 4 CH1+ Voltage Transmitter CH1 IN TEMP VOLT

CH2+ Voltage Transmitter CH2 CH3+ Voltage Transmitter + Transmitter Supply CH3

F2-04THM
THERMOCOUPLE mV 0-5, -5-+5VDC

Analog Mux

CH 1+ CH 1 CH 2+ CH 2 CH 3+ CH 3 CH 4+ CH 4 +24V 0V
18--26.4VDC, 60mA

ADC

CH4+ CH4 +24 VDC 0V

18-26.4 VDC Module Supply

Note 3: Connect unused channels to a common terminal (0V, CH4+, CH4). Note 4: When using 0-156mV and 5V ranges, connect (-) or (0) volts terminals (CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4, CH+4) to 0V to ensure common mode range acceptance.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input

7-11

Module Operation
Channel Scanning Sequence for a DL230 CPU (Multiplexing) Before you begin writing the control program, it is important to take a few minutes to understand how the module processes and represents the analog signals. The F2-04THM module can supply different amounts of data per scan, depending on the type of CPU you are using. The DL230 can obtain one channel of data per CPU scan. Since there are four channels, it can take up to four scans to get data for all channels. Once all channels have been scanned the process starts over with channel 1. Unused channels are not processed, so if you select only two channels, then each channel will be updated every other scan. The multiplexing method can also be used for the DL240/250--1/260 CPUs.

F2-04THM 4 Ch. Thermocouple

Scan Read Inputs Execute Application Program

Read the data Scan N Scan N+1 Store data Scan N+2 Scan N+3 Scan N+4 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 1 System With DL230 CPU

4-Ch. Thermocouple

Write to Outputs

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

7-12

F2-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input If you are using a DL240, DL250--1 or a DL260 CPU, you can obtain all four channels of input data in one scan. This is because the DL240/250--1/260 CPUs support special V-memory locations that are used to manage the data transfer (this is discussed in more detail in the section on Writing the Control Program).

Channel Scanning Sequence for a a DL240, DL250-1 or DL260 CPU (Pointer Method)

Scan Read Inputs Execute Application Program

Read the data Scan N Scan N+1 Store data Scan N+2 Scan N+3 Scan N+4 Ch. 1, 2, 3, 4 Ch. 1, 2, 3, 4 Ch. 1, 2, 3, 4 Ch. 1, 2, 3, 4 Ch. 1, 2, 3, 4 System With DL240/250- 1/260 CPU

F2-04THM 4-Ch. Thermocouple

Write to Outputs

Analog Module Updates

Even though the channel updates to the CPU are synchronous with the CPU scan, the module asynchronously monitors the analog transmitter signal and converts the signal to a 16-bit binary representation. This enables the module to continuously provide accurate measurements without slowing down the discrete control logic in the RLL program. The time required to sense the temperature and copy the value to V-memory is 160 milliseconds minimum to 640 milliseconds plus 1 scan time maximum (number of channels x 160 milliseconds + 1 scan time).

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input

7-13

Writing the Control Program

Reading Values: Pointer Method and Multiplexing There are two methods of reading values: S S The pointer method Multiplexing

You must use the multiplexing method when using a DL230 CPU. You must also use the multiplexing method with remote I/O modules (the pointer method will not work). You can use either method when using DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 CPUs, but for ease of programming it is strongly recommended that you use the pointer method. Pointer Method
230

F2-04THM 4 Ch. Thermocouple

The CPU has special V-memory locations assigned to each base slot that greatly simplify the programming requirements. These V-memory locations: S S specify the number of channels to scan. specify the storage locations.

240 250- 1 260

The example program shows how to setup these locations. Place this rung anywhere in the ladder program, or in the initial stage if you are using stage programming instructions. This is all that is required to read the data into V-memory locations. Once the data is in V-memory, you can perform math on the data, compare the data against preset values, and so forth. V2000 is used in the example, but you can use any user V-memory location. In the examples, the module is installed in slot 2. You should enter the V-memory locations used in your application. The pointer method automatically converts values to BCD. NOTE: DL240 CPUs with firmware release version 2.5 or later and DL250 CPUs with firmware release version 1.06 or later support this method. Use the DL230 multiplexing example if your firmware revision is earlier.

4-Ch. Thermocouple

SP0 LD K 04 00

- or -

LD K 84 00

Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the data format. The upper byte, most significant nibble (MSN) selects the data format (0=BCD, 8=Binary), the LSN selects the number of channels (1, 2, 3, or 4). The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator interfaces. The DL230/240 CPUs do not support binary math functions, whereas the DL250 does.

OUT V7662 LDA O2000 OUT V7672

Special V-memory location assigned to slot 2 that contains the number of channels to scan. This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used to store the incoming data. For example, the O2000 entered here would designate the following addresses: Ch1 - V2000, V2001, Ch 2 - V2002, V2003, Ch 3 - V2004, V2005, Ch 4 - V2006, V2007. The octal address (O2000) is stored here. V7672 is assigned to slot 2 and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the octal value in this location to determine exactly where to store the incoming data.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

7-14

F2-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input The tables below show the special V-memory locations used by the DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 for the CPU base and local expansion base I/O slots. Slot 0 (zero) is the module next to the CPU or D2--CM module. Slot 1 is the module two places from the CPU or D2--CM, and so on. Remember, the CPU only examines the pointer values at these locations after a mode transition. Also, if you use the DL230 (multiplexing) method, verify that these addresses in the CPU are zero. The Table below applies to the DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 CPU base.
CPU Base: Analog Input Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations Slot 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

F2-04THM 4-Ch. Thermocouple

No. of Channels Storage Pointer

V7660 V7661 V7662 V7663 V7664 V7665 V7666 V7667 V7670 V7671 V7672 V7673 V7674 V7675 V7676 V7677

The Table below applies to the DL250--1 or DL260 expansion base 1.

Expansion Base D2-CM #1: Analog Input Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations Slot No. of Channels Storage Pointer 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V36000 V36001 V36002 V36003 V36004 V36005 V36006 V36007 V36010 V36011 V36012 V36013 V36014 V36015 V36016 V36017

The Table below applies to the DL250--1 or DL260 expansion base 2.

Expansion Base D2-CM #2: Analog Input Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations Slot No. of Channels Storage Pointer 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V36100 V36101 V36102 V36103 V36104 V36105 V36106 V36107 V36110 V36111 V36112 V36113 V36114 V36115 V36116 V36117

The Table below applies to the DL260 CPU expansion base 3.

Expansion Base D2-CM #3: Analog Input Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations Slot No. of Channels Storage Pointer 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V36200 V36201 V36202 V36203 V36204 V36205 V36206 V36207 V36210 V36211 V36212 V36213 V36214 V36215 V36216 V36217

The Table below applies to the DL260 CPU expansion base 4.

Expansion Base D2-CM #4: Analog Input Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations Slot No. of Channels Storage Pointer 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V36300 V36301 V36302 V36303 V36304 V36305 V36306 V36307 V36310 V36311 V36312 V36313 V36314 V36315 V36316 V36317

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input Negative Temperature Readings with Magnitude Plus Sign (Pointer Method)
230

7-15

With bipolar ranges, you need some additional logic to determine whether the value being returned represents a positive voltage or a negative voltage. For example, you may need to know the direction for a motor. There is a simple solution: S S If you are using bipolar ranges and you get a value greater than or equal to 8000H , the value is negative. If you get a value less than or equal to 7FFFH, the value is positive.

240 250- 1 260

The sign bit is the most significant bit, which combines 8000H to the data value. If the value is greater than or equal to 8000H, you only have to mask the most significant bit and the active channel bits to determine the actual data value. NOTE: DL240 CPUs with firmware release version 2.5 or later and DL250 CPUs with firmware release version 1.06 or later support this method. Use the DL230 multiplexing example if your firmware revision is earlier. The following two programs show how you can accomplish this. The first example uses magnitude plus sign (binary) and the second example uses magnitude plus sign (BCD). Since you always want to know when a value is negative, these rungs should be placed before any other operations that use the data, such as math instructions, scaling operations, and so forth. Also, if you are using stage programming instructions, these rungs should be in a stage that is always active. Note: you only need this logic for each channel that is using bipolar input signals. The examples only show two channels. F2-04THM 4 Ch. Thermocouple

Magnitude Plus Sign (Binary)

Check Channel 1 SP1 LD V2000 ANDD K7FFF

Load channel 1 data from V-memory into the accumulator. Contact SP1 is always on.

4-Ch. Thermocouple

This instruction masks the sign bit of the binary data, if it is set. Without this step, negative values will not be correct so do not forget to include it. Put the actual signal value in V2010. Now you can use the data normally.

OUT V2010 V2000 Check Channel 2 SP1 K8000 C1

OUT

Channel 1 data is negative when C1 is on (a value of -1.0 reads as 8010, -2.0 is 8020, etc.). Load channel 2 from V-memory into the accumulator. Contact SP1 is always on.

LD V2002 ANDD K7FFF

This instruction masks the sign bit of the binary data, if it is set. Without this step, negative values will not be correct so do not forget to include it. Put the actual signal value in V2012. Now you can use the data normally.

OUT V2012 V2002 K8000 C2

OUT

Channel 2 data is negative when C2 is on (a value of -1.0 reads as 8010, -2.0 is 8020, etc.).

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

7-16

F2-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input

Magnitude Plus Sign (BCD)

Check Channel 1 SP1

LDD V2000 ANDD

Load channel 1 data from V-memory into the accumulator. Remember, the data can be negative. Contact SP1 is always on. This instruction masks the sign bit of the BCD data, if it is set. Without this step, negative values will not be correct so do not forget to include it. Put the actual signal value in V2010. Now you can use the data normally.

K7FFFFFFF

OUTD V2010

F2-04THM 4-Ch. Thermocouple

V2001 Check Channel 2 SP1

K8000

C1
OUT

Channel 1 data is negative when C1 is on (a value of -1.0 reads as 8000 0010, -2.0 is 8000 0020, etc.).

LDD V2002 ANDD

Load channel 2 from V-memory into the accumulator. Remember, the data can be negative. Contact SP1 is always on. This instruction masks the sign bit of the BCD data, if it is set. Without this step, negative values will not be correct so do not forget to include it. Put the actual signal value in V2012. Now you can use the data normally.

K7FFFFFFF

OUTD V2012 V2003 K8000 C2

OUT

Channel 2 data is negative when C2 is on (a value of -1.0 reads as 8000 0010, -2.0 is 8000 0020, etc.).

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input Negative Temperatures 2s Complement (Binary / Pointer Method)
230 240 250- 1 260

7-17

You can use the 2s complement mode for negative temperature display purposes while at the same time using the magnitude plus sign of the temperature in your control program. The DirectSOFT32 element Signed Decimal is used to display negative numbers in 2s complement form. To find the absolute value of a negative number in 2s complement, invert the number and increment it by 1 as shown in the following example:
V2000 K8000
Load channel 1 negative data value into the accumulator so we can convert it to its absolute value. Invert the binary pattern in the accumulator.

LD V2000 INV OUT V2010 INCB V2010

F2-04THM 4 Ch. Thermocouple

Store the inverted data in V2010.

Increment the inverted V2010 data by 1.

Repeat for other channels as required.

Understanding the Input Assignments (Multiplexing Ladder Only)

230

240 250- 1 260

You may recall that the F2-04THM module appears to the CPU as a 32-point discrete input module. You can use these points to obtain: S An indication of which channel is active S The digital representation of the analog signal S Module diagnostic information Since all input points are automatically mapped into V-memory, it is very easy to determine the location of the data word that will be assigned to the module.
F2-04THM

4-Ch. Thermocouple

Slot 0
8pt Input

Slot 1
8pt Input

Slot 2
32pt Input

Slot 3
16pt Input

Slot 4
16pt Output

X0 -X7

X10 -X17

X20 X57

X60 -X77 V40403

Y0 -Y17

V40400
MSB V40402
8 7 6 5 4 3

LSB
2 1 0

MSB

V40401
8 7 6 5 4 3 2

LSB
1 0

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

X 5 7

X X 5 4 0 7

X 4 0

X 3 7

X X 3 2 0 7

X 2 0

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

7-18

F2-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input

Remember, when using DL230 CPUs input points must start on a V-memory boundary. To use the V-memory references required for a DL230 CPU, the first input address assigned to the module must be one of the following X locations. The table also shows the V-memory addresses that correspond to these X locations. X V Analog Data Bits F2-04THM 4-Ch. Thermocouple X0 X20 X40 X60 X100 X120 X140 X160

V40400 V40401 V40402 V40403 V40404 V40405 V40406 V40407

The first 16 bits represent the analog data in binary format. Bit Value Bit Value 0 1 8 256 1 2 9 512 2 4 10 1024 3 8 11 2048 4 16 12 4096 5 32 13 8192 6 64 14 16384 7 128 15 32768

V40401 MSB LSB 1 1 111 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 5 4 321 0

X 3 7

= data bits

X 2 0

Active Channel Bits

The active channel bits represent the multiplexed channel selections in binary format. Channel Bit 1 Bit 0 0 0 1 0 1 2 1 0 3 1 1 4

V40402 MSB
X 5 7

LSB 1 0 X = active channel bits 4 0

Broken Transmitter Bits (Pointer and Multiplexing Ladder Methods)

The broken transmitter bits are on when the corresponding thermocouple is open. Channel Bit 8 1 9 2 10 3 11 4

V40402 MSB
X 5 7

LSB 11 9 8 10 X 5 0
X 4 7

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 X 4 0

= broken transmitter bits

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input Reading Magnitude Plus Sign Values (Multiplexing)
230

7-19

The DL230 CPU does not have the special V-memory locations that allow you to automatically enable the data transfer. Since all channels are multiplexed into a single data word, the control program must be setup to determine which channel is being read. Since the module appears as X input points to the CPU, it is very easy to use the active channel status bits to determine which channel is being monitored.

240 250- 1 260

NOTE: DL230 CPUs with firmware release version 1.6 or later is required for multiplexing ladder. F2-04THM 4 Ch. Thermocouple

SP1

LD V40401

Loads the complete data word into the accumulator. The V-memory location depends on the I/O configuration. See Appendix A for the memory map. This instruction masks the sign bit. Without this, the values used will not be correct so do not forget to include it. When X40, X41, and X50 are off, channel 1 data is stored in V2000. C0 is reset to indicate that channel 1s value is positive.

Store Channel 1 X40 X41 X50

ANDD K7FFF OUT V2000 C0

RST

X37 Store Channel 2 X40 X41 X51

C0
SET

If X37 is on, the data value represents a negative temperature. C0 is set to indicate that channel 1s value is negative. When X40 is on and X41 and X51 are off, channel 2 data is stored in V2001. C1 is reset to indicate that channel 2s value is positive.

OUT V2001 C1
RST

4-Ch. Thermocouple

X37 Store Channel 3 X40 X41 X52 OUT V2002

C1
SET

If X37 is on, the data value represents a negative temperature. C1 is set to indicate that channel 2s value is negative. When X40 and X52 are off and X41 is on, channel 3 data is stored in V2002. C2 is reset to indicate that channel 3s value is positive.

C2
RST

Store Channel 4 X40 X41 X53

X37

C2
SET

If X37 is on, then the data value represents a negative temperature. C2 is set to indicate that channel 3s value is negative. When both X40 and X41 are on and X53 is off, channel 4 data is stored in V2003. C3 is reset to indicate that channel 4s value is positive.

OUT V2003 C3
RST

X37

C3
SET

If X37 is on, the data value represents a negative temperature. C3 is set to indicate that channel 4s value is negative.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

7-20

F2-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input

Reading 2s Complement Values (Multiplexing)

230

240 250- 1 260

The DL230 CPU does not have the special V-memory locations that allow you to automatically enable the data transfer. Since all channels are multiplexed into a single data word, the control program must be setup to determine which channel is being read. Since the module appears as X input points to the CPU, it is very easy to use the active channel status bits to determine which channel is being monitored. The 2s complement data format may be required to correctly display bipolar data on some operator interfaces. This data format could also be used to simplify averaging a bipolar signal. To view this data format in DirectSOFT32, select Signed Decimal.
Load Data SP1 LD V40401 ANDD K7FFF Store Channel 1 X40 X41 X50
Loads the complete data word into the accumulator. The V-memory location depends on the I/O configuration. This instruction masks the channel sign bit.

F2-04THM 4-Ch. Thermocouple

OUT V2000

When X40, X41 and X50 are off, channel 1 data is stored in V2000.

Store Channel 2 X40 X41 X51

OUT V2001

When X40 is on and X41 and X51 are off, channel 2 data is stored in V2001.

Store Channel 3 X40 X41 X52

OUT V2002

When X40 and X52 are off and X41 is on, channel 3 data is stored in V2002.

Store Channel 4 X40 X41 X53

OUT V2003

When both X40 and X41 are on and X53 is off, channel 4 data is stored in V2003.

Scaling the Input Data

No scaling of the input temperature is required. The readings directly reflect the actual temperatures. For example: a reading of 8482 is 848.2 _C, a reading of 16386 is --0.2_C. (magnitude plus sign), and a reading of 32770 is --0.2_C (2s complement).

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input

7-21

Module Resolution 16-Bit (Unipolar Voltage Input)

Unipolar analog signals are converted into 65536 counts ranging from 0 to 65535 (216). For example, with a 0 to 156mV signal range, 78mV would be 32767. A value of 65535 represents the upper limit of the range.
Unipolar Resolution = H L 65535 H or L = high or low limit of the range

5V

156mV

2.5V

78 mV

0V

0V 0 32767 Counts 65535

F2-04THM 4 Ch. Thermocouple

Module Resolution 15-Bit Plus Sign (Bipolar Voltage Input)

The module has 16-bit unipolar 156 mV 5 V or 15-bit + sign bipolar resolution. Bipolar analog signals are converted into 32768 counts ranging from 0 to 32767 (215). For example, with a --156mV to 0V 0V 156mV signal range, 156mV would be 32767. The bipolar ranges utilize a sign bit to provide 16-bit resolution. A value of 32767 can represent the upper --156 mV --5 V limit of either side of the range. 32767 Use the sign bit to determine negative values.
Bipolar Resolution = H L 32767 H or L = high or low limit of the range

0 Counts

32767

4-Ch. Thermocouple

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

7-22

F2-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input

Analog and Digital Value Conversions

Sometimes it is useful to be able to quickly convert between the signal levels and the digital values. This is especially helpful during machine startup or troubleshooting. Remember, this module does not operate like other versions of analog input modules that you may be familiar with. The bipolar ranges use 0--32767 for both positive and negative voltages. The sign bit allows this and it actually provides better resolution than those modules that do not offer a sign bit. The following table provides formulas to make this conversion easier.
Range 0 to 5V If you know the digital value ... A= 5D 65535 If you know the signal level ... D = 65535 (A) 5 D = 65535 (A) 0.15625 D = 65535 (A) 10 D = 65535 (A) 0.3125

F2-04THM 4-Ch. Thermocouple

0 to 156.25mV
5V 156.25mV

A = 0.15625D 65535 A = 10D 65535 A = 0.3125D 65535

For example, if you are using the 5V range and you have measured the signal at 2.5V, use the following formula to determine the digital value that is stored in the V-memory location that contains the data.

D = 65535 (A) 10 D = 65535 (2.5V) 10 D = (6553.5) (2.5) D = 16383.75

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-04THM 4-Channel Thermocouple Input Filtering Input Noise (DL250-1, DL260 CPUs Only)
230 240 250- 1 260

7-23

Add the following logic to filter and smooth analog input noise in DL250--1 and DL260 CPUs. This is especially useful when using PID loops. Noise can be generated by the field device and/or induced by field wiring. The analog value in BCD is first converted to a binary number because there is not a BCD-to-real conversion instruction. Memory location V1400 is the designated workspace in this example. The MULR instruction is the filter factor, which can be from 0.1 to 0.9. The example uses 0.2. A smaller filter factor increases filtering. You can use a higher precision value, but it is not generally needed. The filtered value is then converted back to binary and then to BCD. The filtered value is stored in location V1402 for use in your application or PID loop. NOTE: Be careful not to do a multiple number conversion on a value. For example, if you are using the pointer method to get the analog value, it is in BCD and must be converted to binary. However, if you are using the conventional method of reading analog and are masking the first fifteen bits, then it is already in binary and no conversion using the BIN instruction is needed. Also, if you are using the conventional method, change the LDD V2000 instruction to LD V2000.
SP1 LDD V2000
Loads the analog signal, which is a BCD value and has been loaded from V-memory location V2000, into the accumulator. Contact SP1 is always on. Converts the BCD value in the accumulator to binary. Remember, this instruction is not needed if the analog value is originally brought in as a binary number. Converts the binary value in the accumulator to a real number.

F2-04THM 4 Ch. Thermocouple

BIN

BTOR

SUBR V1400

Subtracts the real number stored in location V1400 from the real number in the accumulator, and stores the result in the accumulator. V1400 is the designated workspace in this example. Multiplies the real number in the accumulator by 0.2 (the filter factor), and stores the result in the accumulator. This is the filtered value. Adds the real number stored in location V1400 to the real number filtered value in the accumulator, and stores the result in the accumulator. Copies the value in the accumulator to location V1400.

4-Ch. Thermocouple

MULR R0.2

ADDR V1400

OUTD V1400

RTOB

Converts the real number in the accumulator to a binary value, and stores the result in the accumulator. Converts the binary value in the accumulator to a BCD number. Note: The BCD instruction is not needed for PID loop PV (loop PV is a binary number). Loads the BCD number filtered value from the accumulator into location V1402 to use in your application or PID loop.

BCD

OUTD V1402

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-02DA-1, F2-02DA-1L 2-Channel Analog Current Output

In This Chapter. . . .
Module Specifications Connecting the Field Wiring Module Operation Writing the Control Program

8-2

F2-02DA-1, F2-02DA-1L 2-Channel Analog Current Output

Module Specifications
The F2-02DA-1 and F2--02DA--1L Analog Output modules provide several hardware features: S Analog outputs are optically isolated from the PLC logic. S The module has a removable terminal block so the module can be easily removed or changed without disconnecting the wiring. S With a DL240, DL250--1 or DL260 CPU, you can update both channels in one scan. S F2-02DA-1: Low-power CMOS design requires less than 60mA from an external 18--30 VDC power supply. S F2-02DA-1L: Low-power CMOS design requires less than 70mA from an external 10--15 VDC power supply.
OUT ANALOG 2CH

F2-02DA-1
18--30VDC 60mA ANALOG OUT 4--20mA

0V +24V CH1-CH1+ CH2-CH2+ NC NC NC NC

F2--02DA1

F2-02DA-1, (L) 2-Ch. Current Output

F2-02DA--1
NOTE: The F2--02DA--1 and F2--02DA--1L modules look very similar and it is very easy to mistake one module for the other. If your module does not work, check the terminal label to see if you have a 12 volts (L) or a 24 volts model and that it is being supplied with the proper input voltage.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-02DA-1, F2-02DA-1L 2-Channel Analog Current Output

8-3

The following tables provide the specifications for the F2-02DA-1 and F2--02DA--1L Analog Output Modules. Review these specifications to make sure the module meets your application requirements. Output Specifications
Number of Channels Output Ranges Resolution Output Type Maximum Loop Supply Peak Output Voltage Load Impedance Maximum Load / Power Supply Linearity Error (end to end) Conversion Settling time Full-Scale Calibration Error (offset error included) Offset Calibration Error Maximum Inaccuracy Accuracy vs. vs Temperature 2 4 to 20 mA 12 bit (1 in 4096) Single ended, 1 common 30VDC 40VDC (clamped by transient voltage suppressor) 0 minimum 620 /18V, /18V 910 /24V, /24V 1200 /30V 1 count (0.025% 0 025% of full scale) maximum 100s maximum (full scale change) 5 counts maximum, maximum 20mA @ 25_C (77_F) 3 counts maximum, 4mA @ 25_C (77_F) 0.1% @ 25C (77_F) 0.3% @ 0 to 60_C (32 to 140F) 50 ppm/_C full scale calibration change (including maximum offset change of 2 counts) 1 channel per scan maximum (D2--230 CPU) 2 channels per scan maximum (D2--240/250--1/260 CPU) 12 binary data bits, 2 channel ID bits 16 point (Y) output module 40 mA @ 5 VDC (supplied by base) F2--02DA--1: 18-30 VDC, 60 mA F2--02DA--1L: 12-15 VDC, VDC 70 mA (add 20 mA for each current loop used) 0 to 60_ C (32 to 140 F) --20 to 70_ C (--4 to 158 F ) 5 to 95% (non-condensing) No corrosive gases permitted MIL STD 810C 514.2 MIL STD 810C 516.2 NEMA ICS3--304

F2-02DA-1, (L) 2-Ch. Current Output

General Specifications

PLC Update Rate

Digital outputs Output points required Power Budget Requirement External Power Supply

Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Relative Humidity Environmental air Vibration Shock Noise Immunity

One count in the specification table is equal to one least significant bit of the analog data value (1 in 4096).

Analog Output Configuration Requirements

The F2-02DA-1 (L) Analog output appears as a 16-point discrete output module. The module can be installed in any slot if you are using a DL240 CPU (firmware V1.5 or later) or DL250 CPU. The available power budget and discrete I/O points are the limiting factors. Check the user manual for your particular model of CPU and I/O base for more information regarding power budget and number of local, local expanison or remote I/O points.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 1/10

8-4

F2-02DA-1, F2-02DA-1L 2-Channel Analog Current Output It is important to examine the configuration if you are using a DL230 CPU. As you can see in the section on writing the program, you use V-memory locations to send the analog data. If you place the module so that the output points do not start on a V-memory boundary, the instructions cannot access the data. This also applies when placing this module in a remote base using a D2--RSSS in the CPU slot. Correct!
F2-02DA-1

Special Placement Requirements (DL230 and Remote I/O Bases)

Slot 0
16pt Input

Slot 1
8pt Input

Slot 2
16pt Output

Slot 3
16pt Output

Slot 4
8pt Output

X0 -X17

X20 -X27

Y0 -Y17

Y20 Y37

Y40 -Y47

Data is correctly entered so output points start on V-memory boundary.

MSB Y 3 7

V40500 V40502 V40501 LSB YY 32 07 Y 2 0

F2-02DA-1, (L) 2-Ch. Current Output

Incorrect

F2-02DA-1

Slot 0
16pt Input

Slot 1
8pt Input

Slot 2
16pt Output

Slot 3
8pt Output

Slot 4
16pt Output

X0 -X17

X20 -X27

Y0 -Y17

Y20 -Y27

Y30 -Y47

Data is split over two locations, so instructions cannot access data from a DL230. MSB Y 5 7 V40502 Y Y 5 4 0 7 LSB Y 4 0 MSB Y 3 7 V40501 Y Y 3 2 0 7 LSB Y 2 0

To use the required V-memory references, the first output address assigned to the module must be one of the following Y locations. The table also shows the V-memory addresses that correspond to these Y locations. Y V Y0 Y20 Y40 Y60 Y100 Y120 Y140 Y160

V40500 V40501 V40502 V40503 V40504 V40505 V40506 V40507

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-02DA-1, F2-02DA-1L 2-Channel Analog Current Output

8-5

Connecting the Field Wiring

Wiring Guidelines Your company may have guidelines for wiring and cable installation. If so, you should check those before you begin the installation. Here are some general things to consider: S Use the shortest wiring route whenever possible. S Use shielded wiring and ground the shield at the signal source. Do not ground the shield at both the module and the load. S Do not run the signal wiring next to large motors, high current switches, or transformers. This may cause noise problems. S Route the wiring through an approved cable housing to minimize the risk of accidental damage. Check local and national codes to choose the correct method for your application. The F2-02DA-1 (L) requires at least one field-side power supply. You may use the same or separate power sources for the module supply and loop supply. The module requires 18--30VDC, at 60 mA. The two current loops also require 18--30VDC, but at 20 mA each. The DL205 bases have built-in 24 VDC power supplies that provide up to 300mA of current. You may use this instead of a separate supply if you are using only a couple of analog modules. The current required is 60 mA (module) plus 40 mA (two current loops) for a total of 100 mA. It is desirable in some situations to power the loops separately in a location remote from the PLC. This will work as long as the loop supply meets the voltage and current requirements, and the transmitters minus (--) side and the module supplys minus (--) side are connected together. WARNING: If you are using the 24 VDC base power supply, make sure you calculate the power budget. Exceeding the power budget can cause unpredictable system operation that can lead to a risk of personal injury or damage to equipment.

User Power Supply Requirements

F2-02DA-1, (L) 2-Ch. Current Output

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 1/10

8-6

F2-02DA-1, F2-02DA-1L 2-Channel Analog Current Output The F2-02DA-1 (L) module has a removable connector to make wiring easier. Simply squeeze the top and bottom retaining clips and gently pull the connector from the module. Use the following diagram to connect the field wiring. The diagram shows separate module and loop power supplies. If you desire to use only one field-side supply, just combine the supplies positive (+) terminals into one node and remove the loop supply.

Wiring Diagram

NOTE 1: Shields should be connected to the 0V terminal of the module or 0V of the power supply. NOTE 2: Unused current outputs should remain open (no connections) for minimum power consumption.

Module Supply 18-30VDC + 0 VDC

Internal Module Wiring

OUT
+5V +15V 0V -15V DC to DC Converter

ANALOG 2CH

Typical User Wiring

60mA CH1See NOTE 1 Ch 1 load 250 ohms typical CH2-

+24 VDC

CH1+

F2-02DA-1
D to A Converter
18-30VDC 60mA ANALOG OUT 4-20mA

F2-02DA-1, (L) 2-Ch. Current Output

CH2+ N/C

Ch 1 Current sinking D to A Converter Ch 2 Current sinking

0V +24V CH1-CH1+ CH2-CH2+ NC NC NC NC

F2--02DA--1

Ch 2 load 250 ohms typical + 18-30VDC Loop Supply

N/C N/C N/C

Transient protected precision digital to analog converter output circuits

OV

Load Range

The maximum load resistance depends on the particular loop power supply in use. Loop Power Supply Voltage 30 VDC 24 VDC 18 VDC Acceptable Load Range 0 to 1200 0 to 910 0 to 620

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-02DA-1, F2-02DA-1L 2-Channel Analog Current Output

8-7

Module Operation
Before you begin writing the control program, it is important to take a few minutes to understand how the module processes and represents the analog signals. If you are using a DL230 CPU, you can send one channel of data to the output module on each scan. The module refreshes both field devices on each scan, but you can only get new data from the CPU at the rate of one channel per scan. Since there are two channels, it can take two scans to update both channels. However, if you are only using one channel, then you can update that channel on every scan. The multiplexing method can also be used for the DL240/250--1/260 CPUs.

Channel Update Sequence for a DL230 CPU (Multiplexing)

Scan

System With DL230 CPU

Read inputs F2-02DA-1, (L) 2-Ch. Current Output

Scan N Channel 1

Execute Application Program

Calculate the data Scan N+1 Scan N+2 Write data Channel 2

Channel 1

Scan N+3

Channel 2

Scan N+4

Channel 1

Write to outputs

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 1/10

8-8

F2-02DA-1, F2-02DA-1L 2-Channel Analog Current Output If you are using a DL240, DL250--1 or DL260 CPU, you can update both channels on every scan. This is because those CPUs support special V-memory locations that are used to manage the data transfer. This is discussed in more detail in the section on Writing the Control Program.

Channel Update Sequence for a DL240, DL250-1 or DL260 CPU (Pointer Method)

Scan

System With DL240/250-1/260 CPU

Read inputs
Scan N Channel 1, 2

Execute Application Program

Calculate the data Scan N+1 Scan N+2 Channel 1, 2

Channel 1, 2

F2-02DA-1, (L) 2-Ch. Current Output

Write data

Scan N+3

Channel 1, 2

Scan N+4

Channel 1, 2

Write to outputs

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-02DA-1, F2-02DA-1L 2-Channel Analog Current Output Understanding the Output Assignments

8-9

You may recall the F2-02DA-1 (L) module appears to the CPU as a 16-point discrete output module. These points provide the data value and an indication of which channel to update. Note, if you are using a DL240/250260 CPU, you may never have to use these bits, but it may help you understand the data format. Since all output points are automatically mapped into V-memory, it is very easy to determine the location of the data word that will be assigned to the module.
F2-02DA-1

Slot 0
16pt Input

Slot 1
8pt Input

Slot 2
16pt Output

Slot 3
16pt Output

Slot 4
8pt Output

X0 -X17

X20 -X27

Y0 -Y17

Y20 Y37

Y40 -Y47

V40500 V40502 V40501 MSB LSB YY 3 3 5 4 Y 2 0

F2-02DA-1, (L) 2-Ch. Current Output

Not used

Data Bits

Channel Select Outputs

Within this word location, the individual bits represent specific information about the analog signal. Two of the outputs select the active channel. Remember, the V-memory bits V40501 are mapped directly to discrete outputs. MSB LSB Turning a bit OFF selects its channel. By controlling these outputs, you can select Y Y Y 3 3 2 which channel(s) gets updated. 4 5 0 Y35 Y34 Channel On Off 1 = channel select outputs Off On 2 Off Off 1 & 2 (same data to both channels) On On none (both channels hold current values)

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 1/10

8-10

F2-02DA-1, F2-02DA-1L 2-Channel Analog Current Output

Analog Data Bits

The first twelve bits represent the analog data in binary format. Bit Value Bit Value 0 1 6 64 1 2 7 128 2 4 8 256 3 8 9 512 4 16 10 1024 5 32 11 2048 Since the module has 12-bit resolution, the analog signal is converted into 4096 counts ranging from 0 -- 4095 (212). For example, send a 0 to get a 4mA signal and 4095 to get a 20mA signal. This is equivalent to a binary value of 0000 0000 0000 to 1111 1111 1111, or 000 to FFF hexadecimal. The diagram shows how this relates to the signal range. Each count can also be expressed in terms of the signal level by using the equation shown.

V40501 MSB LSB 11 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 10

= data bits

Module Resolution

4 -- 20mA
20mA

4mA 0 4095

Resolution = H L 4095 H = high limit of the signal range L = low limit of the signal range 16mA / 4095 = 3.907A per count

F2-02DA-1, (L) 2-Ch. Current Output

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-02DA-1, F2-02DA-1L 2-Channel Analog Current Output

8-11

Writing the Control Program

Reading Values: Pointer Method and Multiplexing There are two methods of reading values: S The pointer method S Multiplexing You must use the multiplexing method when using a DL230 CPU. You must also use the multiplexing method with remote I/O modules (the pointer method will not work). You can use either method when using DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 CPUs, but for ease of programming it is strongly recommended that you use the pointer method. Once you have calculated the data values (shown previously) you have to enter the program that actually updates the module. The DL240/250--1/260 has special V-memory locations assigned to each base slot that greatly simplify the programming requirements. By using these V-memory locations you can: S specify the number of channels to update. S specify where to obtain the output data. NOTE: DL240 CPUs with firmware version 1.5 or later and DL250 CPUs with firmware version 1.06 or later support this method. If using the DL230 example, module placement in the base is very important. Refer to the earlier module placement section. The following program example shows how to set up these locations. Place this rung anywhere in the ladder program, or in the initial stage when using stage programming. The pointer method automatically converts values to BCD.
SP0 LD K2

Pointer Method
230

240 250- 1 260

F2-02DA-1, (L) 2-Ch. Current Output

- or -

LD K 82

Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the data format. The lower byte, most significant nibble (MSN) selects the data format (i.e. 0=BCD, 8=Binary), the LSN selects the number of channels (1 or 2). The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator interfaces. The DL230/240 CPUs do not support binary math functions, whereas the DL250 does.

OUT V7663 LDA O2000 OUT V7703

Special V-memory location assigned to slot 3 that contains the number of channels to scan. This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used to store the output data. For example, the O2000 entered here would designate the following addresses. Ch1 - V2000, Ch2 - V2001 The octal address (O2000) is stored here. V7703 is assigned to slot 3 and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the octal value in this location to determine exactly where to store the output data.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 1/10

8-12

F2-02DA-1, F2-02DA-1L 2-Channel Analog Current Output The tables below show the special V-memory locations used by the DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 for the CPU base and local expansion base I/O slots. Slot 0 (zero) is the module next to the CPU or D2--CM module. Slot 1 is the module two places from the CPU or D2--CM, and so on. Remember, the CPU only examines the pointer values at these locations after a mode transition. Also, if you use the DL230 (multiplexing) method, verify that these addresses in the CPU are zero. The Table below applies to the DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 CPU base.
CPU Base: Analog Output Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations

Slot No. of Channels Storage Pointer

V7660 V7661 V7662 V7663 V7664 V7665 V7666 V7667 V7700 V7701 V7702 V7703 V7704 V7705 V7706 V7707

The Table below applies to the DL250--1 or DL260 expansion base 1.

Expansion Base D2-CM #1: Analog Output Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations

Slot No. of Channels Storage Pointer

V36000 V36001 V36002 V36003 V36004 V36005 V36006 V36007 V36020 V36021 V36022 V36023 V36024 V36025 V36026 V36027

F2-02DA-1, (L) 2-Ch. Current Output

The Table below applies to the DL250--1 or DL260 expansion base 2.

Expansion Base D2-CM #2: Analog Output Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations

Slot No. of Channels Storage Pointer

V36100 V36101 V36102 V36103 V36104 V36105 V36106 V36107 V36120 V36121 V36122 V36123 V36124 V36125 V36126 V36127

The Table below applies to the DL260 CPU expansion base 3.

Expansion Base D2-CM #3: Analog Output Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations

Slot No. of Channels Storage Pointer

V36200 V36201 V36202 V36203 V36204 V36205 V36206 V36207 V36220 V36221 V36222 V36223 V36224 V36225 V36226 V36227

The Table below applies to the DL260 CPU expansion base 4.

Expansion Base D2-CM #4: Analog Output Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations

Slot No. of Channels Storage Pointer

V36300 V36301 V36302 V36303 V36304 V36305 V36306 V36307 V36320 V36321 V36322 V36323 V36324 V36325 V36326 V36327

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-02DA-1, F2-02DA-1L 2-Channel Analog Current Output Writing Data (Multiplexing )

230

8-13

240 250- 1 260

The DL230 CPU does not have the special V-memory locations that allow you to automatically enable the data transfer. Since all channels are multiplexed into a single data word, the control program must be setup to determine which channel to write. Since the module appears as Y output points to the CPU, it is very easy to use the channel selection outputs to determine which channel to update. Note, this example is for a module installed as shown in the previous examples. The addresses used would be different if the module was used in a different slot. You can place these rungs anywhere in the program or if you are using stage programming, place them in a stage that is always active. This example is a two-channel multiplexer that updates each channel on alternate scans. Relay SP7 is a special relay that is on for one scan, then off for one scan. NOTE: You must send binary data to the module. If the data is already in binary format, you should not use the BIN instruction shown in this example.

Load data into the accumulator. SP7 LD V2000 LD V2001

Loads the data for channel 1 into the accumulator.

F2-02DA-1, (L) 2-Ch. Current Output

SP7

Loads the data for channel 2 into the accumulator.

Send data to V-memory assigned to the module. SP1 BIN

Convert the data to binary (you must omit this step if you have converted the data elsewhere). SP1 is always on. The OUT instruction sends the data to the module. Our example starts with V40501, but the actual value depends on the location of the module in your application.

OUT V40501

Select the channel to update. SP7 Y34

OUT Selects channel 1 for update when Y34 is OFF (Y35-ON deselects channel 2). Note, Y34 and Y35 are used as in the previous examples. If the module was installed in a different I/O arrangement the addresses would be different. Selects channel 2 for update when Y35 is OFF (Y34-ON deselects channel 1). Note, Y34 and Y35 are used as in the previous examples. If the module was installed in a different I/O arrangement the addresses would be different.

SP7

Y35
OUT

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 1410

8-14

F2-02DA-1, F2-02DA-1L 2-Channel Analog Current Output If you are not using both channels, or if you want to control the updates separately, use the following program.
The LD instruction loads the data into the accumulator. Since SP1 is used, this rung automatically executes on every scan. You could also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact. The BIN instruction converts the accumulator data to binary (you must omit this step if you have already converted the data elsewhere). This AND Double instruction logically ANDs the accumulator with the constant FFF. It keeps the data from affecting channel select bits. The OUT instruction sends the data to the module. Our example starts with V40501, but the actual value depends on the location of the module in your application. Y34-OFF selects channel 1 for updating.

Sending Data to One Channel

SP1

LD V2000 BIN ANDD K0FFF OUT V40501 Y34

RST

Y35
OUT Y35-ON deselects channel 2 (do not update).

F2-02DA-1, (L) 2-Ch. Current Output

Sending the Same Data to Both Channels

If both channel selection outputs are off, both channels will be updated with the same data.
The LD instruction loads the data into the accumulator. Since SP1 is used, this rung automatically executes on every scan. You could also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact. The BIN instruction converts the accumulator data to binary (you must omit this step if you have already converted the data elsewhere). The AND Double instruction logically ANDs the accumulator value with the constant FFF. It keeps the data from affecting channel select bits. The OUT instruction sends the data to the module. Our example starts with V40501, but the actual value depends on the location of the module in your application. Y34-OFF selects channel 1 for updating.

SP1

LD V2000 BIN

ANDD K0FFF OUT V40501 Y34

RST

Y35
RST Y35-OFF selects channel 2 for updating.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-02DA-1, F2-02DA-1L 2-Channel Analog Current Output

8-15

Calculating the Digital Value

Your program must calculate the digital value to send to the analog module. There are many ways to do this, but most applications are understood more easily if you use measurements in engineering units. This is accomplished by using the conversion formula shown. You may have to make adjustments to the formula depending on the scale you choose for the engineering units.

A = U 4095 HL A = Analog value (0 -- 4095) U = Engineering Units H = high limit of the engineering unit range L = low limit of the engineering unit range

Consider the following example which controls pressure from 0.0 to 99.9 PSI. By using the formula, you can easily determine the digital value that should be sent to the module. The example shows the conversion required to yield 49.4 PSI. Notice the formula uses a multiplier of 10. This is because the decimal portion of 49.4 cannot be loaded, so you adjust the formula to compensate for it.
A = 10U A = 494 4095 10(H L) 4095 1000 0

F2-02DA-1, (L) 2-Ch. Current Output

A = 2023

Analog and Digital Value Conversions

Sometimes it is useful to be able to quickly convert between the signal levels and the digital values. This is especially helpful during machine startup or troubleshooting. The following table provides formulas to make this conversion easier.
Range 4 to 20mA If you know the digital value ... A = 16D + 4 4095 If you know the signal level ... D = 4095 (A 4) 16 D = 4095 (A 4) 16 D = 4095 (10mA 4) 16 D = (255.93) (6) D = 1536

For example, if you know you need a 10mA signal to achieve the desired result, you can easily determine the digital value that should be used.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 1/10

8-16

F2-02DA-1, F2-02DA-1L 2-Channel Analog Current Output The example program shows how you would write the program to perform the engineering unit conversion. This example assumes you have calculated or loaded the engineering unit values in BCD and stored them in V2300 and V2301 for channels 1 and 2 respectively. NOTE: The DL205 offers various instructions that allow you to perform math operations using BCD format. It is easier to perform math calculations in BCD and then convert the value to binary before sending the data to the module.

SP1

LD V2300

The LD instruction loads the engineering units used with channel 1 into the accumulator. This example assumes the numbers are BCD. Since SP1 is used, this rung automatically executes on every scan. You could also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact. Multiply the accumulator by 4095 (to start the conversion).

MUL K4095

F2-02DA-1, (L) 2-Ch. Current Output

DIV K1000

Divide the accumulator by 1000 (because we used a multiplier of 10, we have to use 1000 instead of 100).

OUT V2000 SP1

Store the BCD result in V2000 (the actual steps to write the data were shown earlier).

LD V2301

The LD instruction loads the engineering units used with channel 2 into the accumulator. This example assumes the numbers are BCD. Since SP1 is used, this rung automatically executes on every scan. You could also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact. Multiply the accumulator by 4095 (to start the conversion).

MUL K4095 DIV K1000

Divide the accumulator by 1000 (because we used a multiplier of 10, we have to use 1000 instead of 100).

OUT V2001

Store the BCD result in V2001 (the actual steps to write the data were shown earlier).

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-02DA-2, F2-02DA-2L 2-Channel Analog Voltage Output

In This Chapter. . . .
Module Specifications Setting the Module Jumpers Connecting the Field Wiring Module Operation Writing the Control Program

9-2

F2-02DA-2, F2--02DA--2L 2-Channel Analog Voltage Output

Module Specifications
The F2-02DA-2 and F2--02DA--2L Analog Output modules provide several hardware features: S Analog outputs are optically isolated from the PLC logic. S The module has a removable terminal block, so the module can be easily removed or changed without disconnecting the wiring. S With a DL240, DL250--1 or DL260 CPU, you can update both channels in one scan. S F2--02DA--2: Low-power CMOS design requires less than 60mA from an external 18--30 VDC power supply. S F2--02DA--2L: Low-power CMOS design requires less than 70mA from an external 10--15 VDC power supply. S Outputs can be independently configured for any of these four ranges: 1) 0 to 5 VDC 2) 0 to 10 VDC F2-02DA-2, (L) 2-Ch. Voltage Output 3) 5 VDC 4) 10 VDC
OUT ANALOG 2CH

F2-02DA-2
18--30VDC 60mA ANALOG OUT 0--5VDC --5--+5VDC

0V

+24V CH1-CH1+ CH2-CH2+ NC NC NC NC

0--10VDC --10--+10VDC

F2--02DA--2

F2-02DA--2
NOTE: The F2--02DA--2 and F2--02DA--2L modules look very similar and it is very easy to mistake one module for the other. If your module does not work, check the terminal label to see if you have a 12 volts (L) or a 24 volts model and that it is being supplied with the proper input voltage.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-02DA-2, F2--02DA--2L 2-Channel Analog Voltage Output

9-3

The following tables provide the specifications for the F2-02DA-2 and F2--02DA--2L Analog Output Modules. Output Specifications
Number of Channels Output Ranges Resolution Output Type Peak Output Voltage Load Impedance Load Capacitance Linearity Error (end to end) Conversion Settling Time Full-Scale Calibration Error ( ff t error included) (offset i l d d) Offset Calibration Error Accuracy vs. vs Temperature Maximum Inaccuracy 2 0 to 5V, 0 to 10V, 5V, 10V 12 bit (1 in 4096) Single ended, 1 common 15VDC (clamped by transient voltage suppressor) 2000 minimum .01F maximum 1 count (0.025% 0 025% of full scale) maximum 5 s maximum (full scale change) 12 counts max. unipolar p @ 25_C (77 ( _F) ) 16 counts max. bipolar @ 25_C (77_F) 3 counts maximum @ 25_C ( 77_F) unipolar 8 counts maximum @ 25_C (77_F) bipolar 50 ppm/_C full scale calibration change (including maximum offset change of 2 counts) Unipolar ranges 0.3% @ 25C (77F) 0.45% 0--60 0 60C ( 32--140 32 140F) Bipolar ranges 0.4% @ 25C (77F) 0.55% 0--60C (32--140F) 1 channel per scan maximum (D2--230 CPU) 2 channels per scan maximum (D2--240/250--1/ 260 CPU) 12 binary data bits, 2 channel ID bits, 1 sign bit 16 point (Y) output module 40 mA @ 5 VDC (supplied by base) F2--02DA--2: 18-30 VDC, 60 mA (outputs fully loaded) F2--02DA--2L: 10-15 VDC, 70 mA (outputs fully loaded) 0 to 60_ C (32 to 140 F) --20 to 70_ C (--4 to 158 F) 5 to 95% (non-condensing) No corrosive gases permitted MIL STD 810C 514.2 MIL STD 810C 516.2 NEMA ICS3--304

General Specifications

PLC Update Rate

Digital Outputs Output Points Required Power Budget Requirement External Power Supply

F2-02DA-2, (L) 2-Ch. Voltage Output

Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Relative Humidity Environmental Air Vibration Shock Noise Immunity

One count in the specification table is equal to one least significant bit of the analog data value (1 in 4096).

Analog Output Configuration Requirements

The F2-02DA-2 (L) analog output requires 16 discrete output points. The module can be installed in any slot of a DL205 system, but the available power budget and discrete I/O points can be limiting factors. Check the user manual for your particular model of CPU and I/O base for more information regarding power budget and number of local, local expanison or remote I/O points.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

9-4

F2-02DA-2, F2--02DA--2L 2-Channel Analog Voltage Output Even though the module can be placed in any slot, it is important to examine the configuration if you are using a DL230 CPU. As you can see in the section on writing the program, you use V-memory locations to extract the analog data. If you place the module so the output points do not start on a V-memory boundary, the instructions cannot access the data. This also applies when placing this module in a remote I/O base using a D2--RSSS in the CPU slot. Correct!
F2-02DA-2

Special Placement Requirements (DL230 and Remote I/O Bases)

Slot 0
16pt Input

Slot 1
8pt Input

Slot 2
16pt Output

Slot 3
16pt Output

Slot 4
8pt Output

X0 -X17

X20 -X27

Y0 -Y17

Y20 Y37

Y40 -Y47

Data is correctly entered so output points start on a V-memory boundary.

V40500 V40502 V40501 MSB LSB Y 3 7 Y 2 0

Incorrect

F2-02DA-2

Slot 0

Slot 1
8pt Input

Slot 2
16pt Output

Slot 3
8pt Output

Slot 4
16pt Output

F2-02DA-2, (L) 2-Ch. Voltage Output

16pt Input

X0 -X17

X20 -X27

Y0 -Y17

Y20 -Y27

Y30 Y47

Data is split over two locations, so instructions cannot access data from a DL230. MSB Y 5 7 V40502 Y Y 5 4 0 7 LSB Y 4 0 MSB Y 3 7 V40501 Y Y 3 2 0 7 LSB Y 2 0

To use the V-memory references required for a DL230 CPU, the first output address assigned to the module must be one of the following Y locations. The table also shows the V-memory addresses that correspond to these Y locations. Y V Y0 Y20 Y40 Y60 Y100 Y120 Y140 Y160

V40500 V40501 V40502 V40503 V40504 V40505 V40506 V40507

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-02DA-2, F2--02DA--2L 2-Channel Analog Voltage Output

9-5

Setting the Module Jumpers

The F2-02DA-2 (L) Analog Output module uses jumpers for selecting the voltage ranges for each channel. The range of each channel can be independently set. Available operating ranges are 0--5V, 0--10V, 5V, and 10V. There are three jumpers for each channel. Two sets are on the top board, and the third set is along the edge of the bottom board with the black D-shell backplane connector. Install or remove these jumpers to select the desired range. Unused jumpers can be stored on a single pin so they do not get lost. S Two of the top board jumpers are labeled UNI / 5 and there is one for each channel. S The two bottom board jumpers are labeled UNI and there is one for each channel. These jumpers determine the format of the channel output data, and the effect of their settings is independent from that of the other jumpers on the module. With a UNI jumper removed, the corresponding channel requires data values in the range of 2047. With a UNI jumper installed, the channel requires data values in the range of 0 to 4095. The other two top board jumpers are labeled BI-P 0-5 and there is one for each channel. These jumpers each have three possible settings (including jumper removed) since there are three pins.

NOTE: It is important to set the module jumpers correctly. The module will not operate correctly if the jumpers are not properly set for the desired voltage range. This figure shows the jumper locations. See the table on the following page to determine the proper settings for your application. F2-02DA-2, (L) 2-Ch. Voltage Output
UNI / 5 CH1 CH2

UNI / 5

Top Board

CH2-UNI CH1-UNI

Bipolar (BI--P)/0--5V Jumpers:

BI-P CH1 0-5 BI-P 0-5

CH2

Three positions available (counting removal): 1. Bipolar (BI--P) Position 2.

Bottom Board 3. Removed (jumper is shown stored on a single pin; this is the factory setting)

0--5V Position

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

9-6

F2-02DA-2, F2--02DA--2L 2-Channel Analog Voltage Output The table lists the eight possible combinations of voltage ranges and data formats, along with the corresponding jumper settings. For most applications, use one of the four standard selections shown in the shaded blocks in the table. Standard unipolar voltage ranges accept a data format of 0 to 4095. Standard bipolar ranges accept a data format of --2047 to +2047.
Voltage Range Output Data Format UNI / 5V Jumpers Settings g (t board) (top b d) UNI Output Format Jumpers Setti gs Settings (bottom board) Install Install Remove Remove Remove Remove Install Install Install here Install here Install here Install here BI-P 0-5V Jumpers Settings (top board) BI-P (Bipolar) Position 0-5V Position Install here Completely remove Install here Completely remove

Voltage Range and Output Combinations

0 to 5V 0 to 10V 0 to 5V 0 to 10V 5V 10V 5V 10V

0 to 4095 0 to 4095 2047 2047 2047 2047 0 to 4095 0 to 4095

Install Install Install Install Install Remove Install Remove

Standard selections are shown in shaded cells in the table.

For example, to select settings of 5V voltage range with a 2047 output data format for channel 1, refer to the table above and the figure on the previous page and arrange the jumpers as follows: S S F2-02DA-2, (L) 2-Ch. Voltage Output S Install the CH1 UNI / 5V jumper. Remove the CH1--UNI jumper. Store the jumper so it does not get lost by placing it on one pin. Install the CH1 BI--P 0--5 jumper in the BI--P (bipolar) position on the left pin and center pin.

The non-standard selections in the table provide the opposite data format for both unipolar and bipolar voltage ranges. If you are using unipolar output (0--5V or 0--10V) on one channel and bipolar output (5V, 10V) on the other channel, then one of the outputs will use a non-standard data format.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-02DA-2, F2--02DA--2L 2-Channel Analog Voltage Output

9-7

The graphs show the voltage range to output data format relationship for each of the eight selections.

Unipolar Ranges
0V -- 5V
5V 10V

0V -- 10V
5V (2.5V)

0V -- 5V
10V (5V) 0V -2047

0V -- 10V

0V 0 4095

0V 0 4095

0V -2047

+2047

+2047

Bipolar Ranges
5V
+5V 0V -5V -2047 +10V 0V -10V -2047

10V
+5V 0V -5V 0 +2047 0

5V
+10V 0V -10V (+2047) +4095 0

10V

+2047

(+2047) +4095

F2-02DA-2, (L) 2-Ch. Voltage Output DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

9-8

F2-02DA-2, F2--02DA--2L 2-Channel Analog Voltage Output

Connecting the Field Wiring

Wiring Guidelines Your company may have guidelines for wiring and cable installation. If so, you should check those before you begin the installation. Here are some general things to consider: S Use the shortest wiring route whenever possible. S Use shielded wiring and ground the shield at the signal source. Do not ground the shield at both the module and the load. S Do not run the signal wiring next to large motors, high current switches, or transformers. This may cause noise problems. S Route the wiring through an approved cable housing to minimize the risk of accidental damage. Check local and national codes to choose the correct method for your application. The F2-02DA-2 (L) requires a separate field-side power supply. Each module requires 18--30 VDC at up to 60mA current. The DL205 bases have built-in 24 VDC power supplies that provide up to 300mA of current. If you are using only a couple of analog modules, you can use this power source instead of a separate supply. If you want to use a separate supply, choose one that meets the power requirements of your application. WARNING: If you are using the 24 VDC base power supply, make sure you calculate the power budget. Exceeding the power budget can cause unpredictable system operation that can lead to a risk of personal injury or damage to equipment. Wiring Diagram The F2-02DA-2 (L) module has a removable connector to make wiring easier. Simply remove the retaining screws and gently pull the connector from the module. Use the following diagram to connect the field wiring.
OUT ANALOG 2CH

User Power Supply Requirements

NOTE 1: Shields should be connected to the 0V terminal of the module or the 0V terminal of the power supply. NOTE 2: Unused voltage outputs should remain open (no connections) for minimum power consumption. Internal Module Wiring
-

F2-02DA-2, (L) 2-Ch. Voltage Output

18-30VDC +

F2-02DA-2
Typical User Wiring
See NOTE 1 60mA CH1CH1+ CH2CH2+ N/C N/C N/C N/C Transient protected precision digital to analog converter output circuits 0 VDC DC to DC Converter +24 VDC +5V +15V 0V -15V Ch 1 Voltage sink/source D to A Converter Ch 2 Voltage sink/source D to A Converter
18-30VDC 60mA ANALOG OUT 0-5VDC -5-+5VDC

Ch 1 load 2k ohms minimum Resistance Ch 2 load 2k ohms minimum Resistance

0V

+24V CH1-CH1+ CH2-CH2+ NC NC NC NC

0-10VDC -10-+10VDC

F2--02DA--2

OV

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-02DA-2, F2--02DA--2L 2-Channel Analog Voltage Output

9-9

Module Operation
Before you begin writing the control program, it is important to take a few minutes to understand how the module processes and represents the analog signals. If you are using a DL230 CPU, you can send one channel of data to the output module on each scan. The module refreshes both field devices on each scan, but you can only get new data from the CPU at the rate of one channel per scan. Since there are two channels, it can take two scans to update both channels. However, if you are only using one channel, you can update that channel on every scan. The multiplexing method can also be used for DL240/250--1/260 CPUs.

Channel Update Sequence for a DL230 CPU (Multiplexing)

Scan

System With DL230 CPU

Read inputs
Scan N Channel 1

Execute Application Program

Calculate the data Scan N+1 Scan N+2 Channel 2

Channel 1

Write data

Scan N+3

Channel 2

F2-02DA-2, (L) 2-Ch. Voltage Output

Scan N+4

Channel 1

Write to outputs

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

9-10

F2-02DA-2, F2--02DA--2L 2-Channel Analog Voltage Output If you are using a DL240, DL250--1 or DL260 CPU, you can update both channels on every scan. This is because the DL240/250--1/260 CPU supports special V-memory locations that are used to manage the data transfer. This is discussed in more detail in the section on Writing the Control Program.

Channel Update Sequence for a DL240, DL250-1 or DL260 CPU (Pointer Method)

Scan

System With DL240/250-1/260 CPU

Read inputs
Scan N Channel 1, 2

Execute Application Program

Calculate the data Scan N+1 Scan N+2 Channel 1, 2

Channel 1, 2

Write data

Scan N+3

Channel 1, 2

Scan N+4

Channel 1, 2

Write to outputs F2-02DA-2, (L) 2-Ch. Voltage Output

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-02DA-2, F2--02DA--2L 2-Channel Analog Voltage Output Understanding the Output Assignments

9-11

You may recall the F2-02DA-2 (L) module requires 16 discrete output points in the CPU. These points provide the data value and an indication of which channel to update. Note, if you are using a DL240/250--1/260 CPU, you may never have to use these bits, but it may help you understand the data format. Since all output points are automatically mapped into V-memory, it is very easy to determine the location of the data word that will be assigned to the module.
F2-02DA-2

Slot 0
16pt Input

Slot 1
8pt Input

Slot 2
16pt Output

Slot 3
16pt Output

Slot 4
8pt Output

X0 -X17

X20 -X27

Y0 -Y17

Y20 Y37

Y40 -Y47

MSB Y 3 7 YY 3 3 5 4

V40500 V40502 V40501 LSB Y 2 0

Data Bits

Not Used

Within this word location, the individual bits represent specific information about the analog signal. Channel Select Outputs Two of the outputs select the active channel. Remember, the V-memory bits are mapped directly to discrete outputs. Turning a bit OFF selects its channel. By controlling these outputs, you can select which channel(s) gets updated. Y35 Y34 Channel On Off 1 Off On 2 Off Off 1 & 2 (same data to both channels) On On none (both channels hold current values)

V40501

F2-02DA-2, (L) 2-Ch. Voltage Output

MSB Y Y 3 3 5 4

LSB Y 2 0

= channel select outputs

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

9-12

F2-02DA-2, F2--02DA--2L 2-Channel Analog Voltage Output

Analog Data Bits The first twelve bits represent the analog data in binary format. Bit Value Bit Value 0 1 6 64 1 2 7 128 2 4 8 256 3 8 9 512 4 16 10 1024 5 32 11 2048

V40501 MSB LSB 11 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 10

= data bits

Signal Sign Output

The last output can be used to select the signal sign (+ or --) for bipolar ranges. By controlling this output, you can easily select positive or negative data values. Programming examples in the next section show how easy it is to make the sign selection part of your data value.

V40501 MSB Y 3 7 LSB Y 2 0

= signal sign output

Bipolar Output Data

If an output channel is configured for an output format of 0 -- 2047, the maximum valid value for the lower 12 bits is 2047. This means the 12th bit (bit 11) must always be 0.

V40501 MSB LSB 0 1 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 21 0 10

= data bits Bit 11 must be 0 for output format 2047. WARNING: If the data value exceeds 2047, the 12th bit becomes a 1, and the other eleven bits start over at 00000000000. At this point the modules channel output voltage also goes back to the bottom of its range and begins increasing again. The RLL program will be expecting a maximum output, but it will be minimum instead. This can have serious consequences in some applications, and may result in personal injury or damage to equipment. Therefore, in standard bipolar ranges (or whenever the output format is 2047 in general), be sure that your RLL program does not create numbers with absolute values greater than 2047.

F2-02DA-2, (L) 2-Ch. Voltage Output

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-02DA-2, F2--02DA--2L 2-Channel Analog Voltage Output

9-13

Module Resolution Since the module has 12-bit resolution, the analog signal is converted from 4096 counts ranging from 0--4095 (212). For example, with a 0 to 10V range, send a 0 to get a 0V signal, and send 4095 to get a 10V signal. This is equivalent to a binary value of 0000 0000 0000 to 1111 1111 1111, or 000 to FFF hexadecimal. Each count can also be expressed in terms of the signal level by using the following equation:
0 -- 10V
10V

Resolution = H L 4095 H = high limit of the signal range L = low limit of the signal range

0V 0 4095

The following table shows the smallest change in signal level due to a digital value change of 1 LSB count. Voltage Range 0 to 5V 0 to 10V
5V 10V

Signal Span 5 volts 10 volts 10 volts 20 volts

Divide By 4095 4095 4095 4095

Smallest Output Change 1.22 mV 2.44 mV 2.44 mV 4.88 mV

F2-02DA-2, (L) 2-Ch. Voltage Output DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

9-14

F2-02DA-2, F2--02DA--2L 2-Channel Analog Voltage Output

Writing the Control Program

Calculating the Digital Value Your program has to calculate the digital value to send to the analog module. There are many ways to do this, but most applications are understood more easily if you use measurements in engineering units. This is accomplished by using the conversion formula shown. You may have to make adjustments to the formula depending on the scale you choose for the engineering units.
A = U 4095 HL A = U 2047 HL for 0--4095 output format for 0--2047 output format

A = Analog value (0 -- 4095) U = Engineering units H = High limit of the engineering unit range L = Low limit of the engineering unit range

Consider the following example which controls pressure from 0.0 to 99.9 PSI. By using the formula you can easily determine the digital value that should be sent to the module. The example shows the conversion required to yield 49.4 PSI. Notice the formula uses a multiplier of 10. This is because the decimal portion of 49.4 cannot be loaded, so you must adjust the formula to compensate for it.
A = 10U 4095 10(H L) A = 494 4095 1000 0 A = 2023

The following example program shows how you would write the program to perform the engineering unit conversion to output data formats 0--4095. This example assumes you have calculated or loaded the engineering unit values in BCD format and stored them in V2300 and V2301 for channels 1 and 2 respectively. The DL205 offers instructions that allow you to perform math operations using BCD format. It is usually easier to perform any math calculations in BCD and then convert the value to binary before you send the data to the module.
SP1

F2-02DA-2, (L) 2-Ch. Voltage Output

LD V2300 MUL K4095 DIV K1000 OUT V2000

The LD instruction loads the engineering units used with channel 1 into the accumulator. This example assumes the numbers are BCD. Since SP1 is used, this rung automatically executes on every scan. You could also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact. Multiply the accumulator by 4095 (to start the conversion). Divide the accumulator by 1000 (because we used a multiplier of 10, we have to use 1000 instead of 100). Store the BCD result in V2000 (the actual steps required to send the data are shown later). The LD instruction loads the engineering units used with channel 2 into the accumulator. This example assumes the numbers are BCD. Since SP1 is used, this rung automatically executes on every scan. You could also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact. Multiply the accumulator by 4095 (to start the conversion). Divide the accumulator by 1000 (because we used a multiplier of 10, we have to use 1000 instead of 100). Store the BCD result in V2001 (the actual steps required to send the data are shown later).

SP1

LD V2301 MUL K4095 DIV K1000 OUT V2001

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-02DA-2, F2--02DA--2L 2-Channel Analog Voltage Output Negative Values with Bipolar Range

9-15

2047, you also need to specify whether the value is positive or negative. There

If you are using the bipolar ranges (5V, 10V) or an output data format of are two ways to show that the value is negative: S Turn on the sign output (Y37 in the examples, DL230 only). S Embed the sign output in the data value (required for the DL240/250--1/260 using the pointer method, an optional method for the DL230). To embed the sign output in the data values, just OR 8000 to the value. This has the same effect as turning on Y37. Remember, the V-memory location is mapped directly to the outputs. If you are going to use bipolar ranges, you also need to add logic to handle the positive and negative values. The logic would be similar for both values, but you should use some type of permissive contact to select the appropriate section of logic. Here is an example that re-scales a variable from a 0--1000 range to a 0--2047 range. It includes a step that combines 8000 with the value to make it negative.

NOTE: Do not exceed a value of 2047 for 2047 output formats.

Channel 1 X0 LD V2300 MUL K2047 DIV K1000 X0 X1 ORD K8000
The LD instruction loads the engineering units used with Channel 1 into the accumulator. This example assumes the numbers are BCD. Since X0 is used, this rung only executes when X0 is on (X1 would be the input that would indicate a negative value should be used). Multiply the accumulator by 2047 (to start the conversion). Divide the accumulator by 1000 (because we used a multiplier of 10, we have to use 1000 instead of 100). This ORD instruction imbeds the sign output in the data value when X0 and X1 are on. It combines the BCD value (8000) with the accumulator value to make it negative. Omit this rung if you choose to control the sign bit of the module (Y37) directly. Store the result in V2000. This is the digital value, in BCD form, that should be sent to the module (the actual steps required to send the data are shown later).

F2-02DA-2, (L) 2-Ch. Voltage Output

X0

OUT V2000

Channel 2 X0 LD V2301 MUL K2047 DIV K1000 X0 X2 ORD K8000

The LD instruction loads the engineering units used with Channel 2 into the accumulator. This example assumes the numbers are BCD. Since X0 is used, this rung only executes when X0 is on (X2 would be the input that would indicate a negative value should be used). Multiply the accumulator by 2047 (to start the conversion). Divide the accumulator by 1000 (because we used a multiplier of 10, we have to use 1000 instead of 100). This ORD instruction imbeds the sign output in the data value when X0 and X1 are on. It combines the BCD value (8000) with the accumulator value to make it negative. Omit this rung if you choose to control the sign bit of the module (Y37) directly. Store the result in V2001. This is the digital value, in BCD form, that should be sent to the module (the actual steps required to send the data are shown later).

X0

OUT V2001

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

9-16

F2-02DA-2, F2--02DA--2L 2-Channel Analog Voltage Output There are two methods of reading values: S The pointer method S Multiplexing You must use the multiplexing method when using a DL230 CPU. You must also use the multiplexing method with remote I/O modules (the pointer method will not work). You can use either method when using DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 CPUs, but for ease of programming it is strongly recommended that you use the pointer method. Once you have calculated the data values (shown previously) you must enter the program that actually updates the module. The DL240/250--1/260 has special V-memory locations assigned to each base slot that greatly simplify the programming requirements. By using these V-memory locations you can: S specify the number of channels to update. S specify where to obtain the output data . NOTE: DL240 CPUs with firmware release 1.5 or later supports this method. DL250 CPUs with firmware release version 1.06 or later support this method. If you must use the DL230 example, module placement in the base is very important. Review the section earlier in this chapter for guidelines. The following program example shows how to setup these locations. Place this rung anywhere in the ladder program, or in the initial stage if you are using stage programming. You may recall in the previous example we used V2000 and V2001 to store the calculated values. Also, in the previous examples we had the analog module installed in slot 3. You should use the appropriate memory locations for your application. The pointer method automatically converts values to BCD.
SP0 LD K2

Writing Values: Pointer Method and Multiplexing

Writing Values (Pointer Method)

230 240 250- 1 260

- or -

LD K 82

F2-02DA-2, (L) 2-Ch. Voltage Output

Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the data format. The lower byte, most significant nibble (MSN) selects the data format (0=BCD, 8=Binary), the LSN selects the number of channels (1 or 2). The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator interfaces. The DL230/240 CPUs do not support binary math functions, whereas the DL250 does.

OUT V7663 LDA O2000 OUT V7703

Special V-memory location assigned to slot 3 that contains the number of channels to scan. This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used to store the output data. For example, the O2000 entered here would designate the following addresses: Ch1 - V2000, Ch 2 - V2001 The octal address (O2000) is stored here. V7703 is assigned to slot 3 and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the octal value in this location to determine exactly where to store the output data.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-02DA-2, F2--02DA--2L 2-Channel Analog Voltage Output

9-17

The tables below show the special V-memory locations used by the DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 for the CPU base and local expansion base I/O slots. Slot 0 (zero) is the module next to the CPU or D2--CM module. Slot 1 is the module two places from the CPU or D2--CM, and so on. Remember, the CPU only examines the pointer values at these locations after a mode transition. Also, if you use the DL230 (multiplexing) method, verify that these addresses in the CPU are zero. The Table below applies to the DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 CPU base.
CPU Base: Analog Output Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations

Slot No. of Channels Storage Pointer

V7660 V7661 V7662 V7663 V7664 V7665 V7666 V7667 V7700 V7701 V7702 V7703 V7704 V7705 V7706 V7707

The Table below applies to the DL250--1 or DL260 expansion base 1.

Expansion Base D2-CM #1: Analog Output Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations

Slot No. of Channels Storage Pointer

V36000 V36001 V36002 V36003 V36004 V36005 V36006 V36007 V36020 V36021 V36022 V36023 V36024 V36025 V36026 V36027

The Table below applies to the DL250--1 or DL260 expansion base 2.

Expansion Base D2-CM #2: Analog Output Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations

Slot No. of Channels Storage Pointer

V36100 V36101 V36102 V36103 V36104 V36105 V36106 V36107 V36120 V36121 V36122 V36123 V36124 V36125 V36126 V36127

The Table below applies to the DL260 CPU expansion base 3.

Expansion Base D2-CM #3: Analog Output Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations

F2-02DA-2, (L) 2-Ch. Voltage Output

Slot No. of Channels Storage Pointer

V36200 V36201 V36202 V36203 V36204 V36205 V36206 V36207 V36220 V36221 V36222 V36223 V36224 V36225 V36226 V36227

The Table below applies to the DL260 CPU expansion base 4.

Expansion Base D2-CM #4: Analog Output Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations

Slot No. of Channels Storage Pointer

V36300 V36301 V36302 V36303 V36304 V36305 V36306 V36307 V36320 V36321 V36322 V36323 V36324 V36325 V36326 V36327

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

9-18

F2-02DA-2, F2--02DA--2L 2-Channel Analog Voltage Output The DL230 CPU does not have the special V-memory locations that allow you to automatically enable the data transfer. Since all channels are multiplexed into a single data word, the control program must be set up to determine which channel to write. Since the module appears as Y output points to the CPU, it is very easy to use the channel selection outputs to determine which channel to update. Note, this example is for a module installed as shown in the previous examples. The addresses used would be different if the module was used in a different I/O arrangement. You can place these rungs anywhere in the program or if you are using stage programming, place them in a stage that is always active. This example is a two-channel multiplexer that updates each channel on alternate scans. SP7 is a special relay that is on for one scan then off for one scan. A permissive contact on the last rung handles an embedded sign bit. NOTE: You must send binary data to the module. If the data is already in binary format, you should not use the BIN instruction shown in this example.

Writing Data (Multiplexing)

230 240 250- 1 260

Load data into the accumulator. SP7 LD V2000 SP7 LD V2001

Loads the data for channel 1 into the accumulator.

Loads the data for channel 2 into the accumulator.

Send data to V-memory assigned to the module. SP1 Convert the data to binary (you must omit this step if you BIN
have converted the data elsewhere). Remove sign bit for BCD to binary conversion. SP1 is always on. The OUT instruction sends the data to the module. Our example starts with V40501 but the actual value depends on the location of the module in your application.

ANDD K7FFF

F2-02DA-2, (L) 2-Ch. Voltage Output

OUT V40501 Select the channel to update. SP7 Y34

OUT

Selects channel 1 for update when Y34 is OFF (Y35-ON deselects channel 2). Note, Y34 and Y35 are used due to the previous examples. If the module was installed in a different I/O arrangement, the addresses would be different. Selects channel 2 for update when Y35 is OFF (Y34-ON deselects channel 1). Note, Y34 and Y35 are used due to the previous examples. If the module was installed in a different I/O arrangement, the addresses would be different. If the output format is -2047 to +2047, include this rung to embed the sign bit. For the output format 0 to 4095, omit this rung.

SP7

Y35
OUT

SP7

V2000 K8000

Y37
OUT

SP7

V2001 K8000

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-02DA-2, F2--02DA--2L 2-Channel Analog Voltage Output

9-19

If you are using an output format range of 2047 (most commonly used with bipolar voltage ranges), you also must specify whether the values are positive or negative. You could use the previous example with a simple addition to activate the sign output bit, or the following example uses individual contacts to determine the sign bit status for each channel. NOTE: If you embed the sign information into the data value (by adding 8000 to the data value) you should not use this method. Use the previous example.

Load data into the accumulator. SP7 LD V2000 SP7 LD V2001

Loads the data for channel 1 into the accumulator.

Loads the data for channel 2 into the accumulator.

Send data to V-memory assigned to the module. SP1 Convert the data to binary (you must omit this step if BIN
you have converted the data to binary). SP1 is always on. The OUT instruction sends the data to the module. Our example starts with V40501, but the actual value depends on the location of the module in your application.

OUT V40501 Select the channel to update. SP7 Y34

OUT

SP7

Y35
OUT

Selects channel 1 for update when Y34 is OFF (Y35-ON deselects channel 2). Note, Y34 and Y35 are used due to the previous examples. If the module was installed in a different I/O arrangement, the addresses would be different. Selects channel 2 for update when Y35 is OFF (Y34-ON deselects channel 1). Note, Y34 and Y35 are used due to the previous examples. If the module was installed in a different I/O arrangement, the addresses would be different. The permissive X1 activates Y37 (sign bit) during a channel 1 update scan. The permissive X2 activates Y37 during a channel 2 update scan. The sign bit (Y37 ON) indicates that the value is negative. You could use another permissive, such as a CR, etc.

F2-02DA-2, (L) 2-Ch. Voltage Output

SP7

X1

Y37
OUT

SP7

X2

NOTE: Do not exceed a value of 2047 for 2047 output data formats.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

9-20

F2-02DA-2, F2--02DA--2L 2-Channel Analog Voltage Output If you are not using both channels, or if you want to control the updates separately, use the following program. Remember, for bipolar ranges you either have to embed the sign information or use the sign output bit.
The LD instruction loads the data into the accumulator. Since SP1 is used, this rung automatically executes on every scan. You could also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact. The BIN instruction converts the accumulator data to binary (you must omit this step if you have already converted the data elsewhere). The ANDD instruction masks off the channel select bits to prevent an accidental channel selection. The OUT instruction sends the data to the module. Our example starts with V40501, but the actual value depends on the location of the module in your application. Y34-OFF selects channel 1 for updating.

Sending Data to One Channel

SP1

LD V2000 BIN ANDD K0FFF OUT V40501 Y34

RST

Y35
OUT

Y35-ON deselects channel 2 (do not update). The permissive X1 activates Y37, which is the sign bit. The sign bit indicates that the value is negative. You could use another permissive, such as a CR, etc. Omit this rung if you are using the 0 to +4095 output format.

X1

Y37
OUT

Sending the Same If both channel selection outputs are off, both channels will be updated with the same data. Remember, for bipolar ranges you either have to embed the sign Data to Both information or use the sign output bit. Channels
SP1
The LD instruction loads the data into the accumulator. Since SP1 is used, this rung automatically executes on every scan. You could also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact. The BIN instruction converts the accumulator data to binary (you must omit this step if you have already converted the data elsewhere. The ANDD instruction masks off the channel select bits to prevent an accidental channel selection. The OUT instruction sends the data to the module. Our example starts with V40501, but the actual value depends on the location of the module in your application. Y34-OFF selects channel 1 for updating.

F2-02DA-2, (L) 2-Ch. Voltage Output

LD V2000 BIN ANDD K0FFF OUT V40501 Y34

RST

Y35
RST Y35-OFF selects channel 2 for updating. The permissive X1 activates Y37, which is the sign bit. The sign bit indicates that the value is negative. You could use another permissive, such as a CR, etc. Omit this rung if you are using the 0 to +4095 output format.

X1

Y37
OUT

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-02DA-2, F2--02DA--2L 2-Channel Analog Voltage Output Analog and Digital Value Conversions

9-21

Sometimes it is useful to be able to quickly convert between the signal levels and the digital values. This is especially helpful during machine startup or troubleshooting. The following table provides formulas to make this conversion easier. Remember, if you embed the sign information into the data value, you must adjust the formulas accordingly.
Range 0 to 10V 10V (output format 2047) 0 to 5V 5V (output format 2047) If you know the digital value ... If you know the signal level ... A = 10D 4095 A = 10D 2047 A = 5D 4095 A = 5D 2047 D = 4095 (A) 10 D = 2047 (A) 10 D = 4095 (A) 5 D = 2047 (A) 5

For example, if you are using the 10V range with an output format of 2047, and you know you need a 6V signal level, use this formula to determine the digital value (D) that will be stored in the V-memory location that contains the data.

D = 2047 (A) 10 D = 2047 (6V) 10 D = (204.7) (6) D = 1228

F2-02DA-2, (L) 2-Ch. Voltage Output DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-08DA-1 8-Channel Analog Current Output

In This Chapter. . . .
Module Specifications Connecting the Field Wiring Module Operation Writing the Control Program

10

10-2

F2-08DA-1 8-Channel Analog Current Output

Module Specifications
The F2-08DA-1 Analog Output module provides several hardware features: S Supports DL230, DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 CPUs (see firmware requirements below). S Analog outputs are optically isolated from the PLC logic. S The module has a removable terminal block, so the module can be easily removed or changed without disconnecting the wiring. S Can update all channels in one scan (DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 only). S Outputs are both current sinking and sourcing.
OUT ANALOG
8 CHANNEL

F2-08DA-1
18-- 26.4VDC 80mA 4-- 20mA SNK-- SRC

1--O 2--O 3--O 4--O 5--O 6--O 7--O 8--O 0V

1--I 2--I 3--I 4--I 5--I 6--I 7--I 8--I N/C 24V

Firmware Requirements: To use this module, DL230 CPUs must have firmware version 2.7 or later. To use the pointer method of writing values, DL240 CPUs require firmware version 3.0 or later and DL250 CPUs require firmware version 1.33 or later.

F2-08DA--1

F2-08DA--1 8-Ch. Current Output

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-08DA-1 8-Channel Analog Current Output

10-3

The following tables provide the specifications for the F2-08DA-1 Analog Output Module. Review these specifications to make sure the module meets your application requirements. Output Specifications
Number of Channels Output Range Resolution Output Type Maximum Loop Voltage Source Load Sink Load Total Load (sink plus source) Linearity Error (end to end) Conversion Settling Time Full-Scale Calibration Error 8, single-ended 4--20mA 12 bit (1 in 4096) Current sinking and current sourcing 30VDC -- 400 (for loop power 18 -- 30V) 0 -- 600/18V, 0--900/24V, 0--1200/30V 600/18V, 900/24V, 1200/30V 2 count (0.050% 0 050% of full scale) maximum 400s maximum (full scale change) 12 counts max. sinking (any load) 12 counts max. sourcing load) g (125 ( ) 18 counts max. sourcing (250 load) 26 counts max. sourcing (400 load) 9 counts max. sinking (any load) 9 counts max. sourcing (125 load) 11 counts max. sourcing (250 load) 13 counts max. sourcing (400 load) 0.5% sinking (any load) & sourcing (125 load) 0.64% 0 6 % sou sourcing c g (250 ( 50 load) oad) 0.83% sourcing (400 load) 0.3% sinking (any load) & sourcing (125 load) 0 44% sourcing (250 load) 0.44% 0.63% sourcing (400 load) 8 channels per scan maximum 12 binary data bits, 3 ch. ID bits, 1 output enable bit / 16 (Y) output points required 30mA @ 5VDC (supplied by base) 18--30VDC, 50mA plus 20mA/output loop, class 2 0 to 60 C (32 to 140 F) --20 to 70 C (--4 to 158 F) 5 to 95% (non-condensing) No corrosive gases permitted MIL STD 810C 514.2 MIL STD 810C 516.2 NEMA ICS3--304

Offset Calibration Error

Max. Full Scale Inaccuracy @ 60C

Max. Full Scale Inaccuracy @ 25C (includes all errors & temperature drift)

General Specifications

PLC Update Rate Digital Outputs / Output Points Required Power Budget Requirement External Power Supply Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Relative Humidity Environmental Air Vibration Shock Noise Immunity

F2-08DA--1 8-Ch. Current Output

One count in the specification table is equal to one least significant bit of the analog data value (1 in 4096).

Analog Output Configuration Requirements

The F2-08DA-1 analog output requires 16 discrete output points. The module can be installed in any slot of a DL205 system, but the available power budget and discrete I/O points can be limiting factors. Check the user manual for your particular model of CPU and I/O base for more information regarding power budget and number of local, local expanison or remote I/O points.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev B. 4/10

10-4

F2-08DA-1 8-Channel Analog Current Output Even though the module can be placed in any slot, it is important to examine the configuration. As you can see in the section on writing the program, you use V-memory locations to extract the analog data. If you place the module so the output points do not start on a V-memory boundary, the instructions cannot access the data. This also applies when module is placed in remote base (D2--RSSS in CPU slot). Correct!
F2-08DA--1

Special Placement Requirements (DL230 and Remote I/O Bases)

Slot 0
16pt Input

Slot 1
8pt Input

Slot 2
16pt Output

Slot 3
16pt Output

Slot 4
8pt Output

X0 -X17

X20 -X27

Y0 -Y17

Y20 Y37

Y40 -Y47

Data is correctly entered so output points start on a V-memory boundary.

V40500 V40502 V40501 MSB LSB Y 3 7 Y 2 0

Incorrect

F2-08DA--1

Slot 0
16pt Input

Slot 1
8pt Input

Slot 2
16pt Output

Slot 3
8pt Output

Slot 4
16pt Output

X0 -X17

X20 -X27

Y0 -Y17

Y20 -Y27

Y30 Y47

MSB

Data is split over two locations, so instructions cannot access data from a DL230 (or when module is placed in a remote base). V40502 V40501 LSB MSB LSB Y Y 5 4 0 7 Y 4 0 Y 3 7 Y Y 3 2 0 7 Y 2 0

F2-08DA--1 8-Ch. Current Output

Y 5 7

To use the V-memory references required for the multiplexing method, the first output address assigned to the module must be one of the following Y locations. The table also shows the V-memory addresses that correspond to these Y locations. Y V Y0 Y20 Y40 Y60 Y100 Y120 Y140 Y160

V40500 V40501 V40502 V40503 V40504 V40505 V40506 V40507

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-08DA-1 8-Channel Analog Current Output

10-5

Connecting the Field Wiring

Wiring Guidelines Your company may have guidelines for wiring and cable installation. If so, you should check those before you begin the installation. Here are some general things to consider: S Use the shortest wiring route whenever possible. S Use shielded wiring and ground the shield at the signal source. Do not ground the shield at both the module and the load. S Do not run the signal wiring next to large motors, high current switches, or transformers. This may cause noise problems. S Route the wiring through an approved cable housing to minimize the risk of accidental damage. Check local and national codes to choose the correct method for your application. The F2-08DA-1 requires a separate field-side power supply. Each module requires 18--30VDC at up to 50mA current. The current loops also require 18--30VDC, but at 20mA each. The DL205 bases have built-in 24 VDC power supplies that provide up to 300mA of current. If you are using only a couple of analog modules, you can use this power source instead of a separate supply. The current required is 50mA plus 160mA (eight loops) for a total of 210mA. It is desirable in some situations to power the loops separately in a location remote from the PLC. This will work as long as the loop supply meets the voltage and current requirements, and the transmitters minus (--) side and the module supplys minus (--) side are connected together. WARNING: If you are using 24VDC output power from the base, make sure you calculate the power budget. Exceeding the power budget can cause unpredictable system operation that can lead to a risk of personal injury or damage to equipment.

User Power Supply Requirements

F2-08DA--1 8-Ch. Current Output DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev B. 4/10

10-6

F2-08DA-1 8-Channel Analog Current Output

Wiring Diagram

The F2-08DA-1 module has a removable connector to make wiring easier. Squeeze the latches on both ends of the connector and gently pull it from the module. Use the following diagram to connect the field wiring. Channels 1 and 2 are shown wired for sourcing, and channels 7 and 8 are shown wired for sinking. The diagram also shows how to wire an optional loop power supply.
OUT
Loop Power Supply See NOTE 1 + -

Typical User Wiring Internal Module Wiring Sink/Source Circuitry

ANALOG
8 CHANNEL

Ch 1 load 250 ohms typical Ch 2 load 250 ohms typical

1--O 2--O 3--O 4--O 5--O

1--I 2--I 3--I 4--I 5--I 6--I 7--I 8--I N/C 24V

F2-08DA-1
18-- 26.4VDC 80mA 4-- 20mA SNK-- SRC

1--O 2--O 3--O 4--O 5--O 6--O 7--O 8--O 0V

1--I 2--I 3--I 4--I 5--I 6--I 7--I 8--I N/C 24V

Ch 7 load 250 ohms typical Ch 8 load 250 ohms typical

6--O 7--O 8--O 0V

+ 18-30VDC -

NOTE 1: Shields should be connected to the 0V terminal of the module.

Load Range

The maximum load resistance depends on the particular loop power supply in use. Loop Power Supply Voltage 30 VDC 24 VDC 18 VDC Source Load Range Sink Load Range 0 to 1200 0 to 900 0 to 600

0 to t 400

F2-08DA--1 8-Ch. Current Output

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-08DA-1 8-Channel Analog Current Output

10-7

Module Operation
Channel Update Sequence for a DL230 CPU (Multiplexing) Before you begin writing the control program, it is important to take a few minutes to understand how the module processes and represents the analog signals. If you are using multiplexing ladder, you can send one channel of data to the output module on each scan. The module refreshes both field devices on each scan, but you can only get new data from the CPU at the rate of one channel per scan. Since there are eight channels, it can take eight scans to update all channels. However, if you are only using one channel, you can update that channel on every scan. The multiplexing method can also be used for the DL240/250--1/260 CPUs.

Scan

System Using Multiplex Method (DL230)

Read inputs
Scan N Channel 1

Execute Application Program

Calculate the data Scan N+1 Scan N+2 Channel 2

Channel 3

Write data

Scan N+3 . . . Scan N+8

Channel 4 . . . Channel 8

Write to outputs

F2-08DA--1 8-Ch. Current Output DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev B. 4/10

10-8

F2-08DA-1 8-Channel Analog Current Output If you are using pointers (Pointer Method), you can update all channels on every scan. This is because the DL240/250--1/260 CPU supports special V-memory locations that are used to manage the data transfer. This is discussed in more detail in the section on Writing the Control Program.

Channel Update Sequence with a DL240, DL250-1 or DL260 CPU (Pointer)

Scan

System With DL240/250-1/260 CPU Using Pointer Method

Read inputs
Scan N Channel 1, 2...8

Execute Application Program

Calculate the data Scan N+1 Scan N+2 Channel 1, 2...8

Channel 1, 2...8

Write data

Scan N+3

Channel 1, 2...8

Scan N+4

Channel 1, 2...8

Write to outputs

Understanding the Output Assignments

You may recall the F2-08DA-1 module requires 16 discrete output points in the CPU. These points provide the data value and an indication of which channel to update. Note, if you are using a DL240/250--1/260 CPU, you may never have to use these bits, but it may help you understand the data format. Since all output points are automatically mapped into V-memory, it is very easy to determine the location of the data word that will be assigned to the module.

F2-08DA--1 8-Ch. Current Output

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-08DA-1 8-Channel Analog Current Output

10-9

F2-08DA--1

Slot 0
16pt Input

Slot 1
8pt Input

Slot 2
16pt Output

Slot 3
16pt Output

Slot 4
8pt Output

X0 -X17

X20 -X27

Y0 -Y17

Y20 Y37

Y40 -Y47

MSB Y YYY 3 3 3 3 7 6 5 4

V40500 V40502 V40501 LSB Y 2 0

Data Bits

Within this word location, the individual bits represent specific information about the analog signal. Channel Select Outputs Three of the outputs select the active channel. Remember, the V-memory bits are mapped directly to discrete outputs. The binary weight of these three bits determines the selected channel. By controlling these outputs, you can select which channel gets updated.

V40501 MSB YY Y 3 3 3 6 5 4 LSB Y 2 0

= channel select outputs

Y36 Y35 Y34 Channel Number Selected 1 X X X X X X X X X X X X 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

F2-08DA--1 8-Ch. Current Output

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev B. 4/10

10-10

F2-08DA-1 8-Channel Analog Current Output

Analog Data Bits The first twelve bits represent the analog data in binary format. Bit Value Bit Value 0 1 6 64 1 2 7 128 2 4 8 256 3 8 9 512 4 16 10 1024 5 32 11 2048

V40501 MSB LSB 11 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 10

= data bits

Output Enable

The last output can be used to update outputs. If this output is off the outputs are cleared.

V40501 MSB Y 3 7 LSB Y 2 0

= output enable Module Resolution Since the module has 12-bit resolution, the analog signal is converted from 4096 counts ranging from 0--4095 (212). For example, send a 0 to get a 4mA signal, and send 4095 to get a 20mA signal. This is equivalent to a binary value of 0000 0000 0000 to 1111 1111 1111, or 000 to FFF hexadecimal. Each count can also be expressed in terms of the signal level by using the following equation:
4--20mA
20mA

Resolution = H L 4095 H = high limit of the signal range L = low limit of the signal range

4mA 0 4095

F2-08DA--1 8-Ch. Current Output

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-08DA-1 8-Channel Analog Current Output

10-11

Writing the Control Program

Calculating the Digital Value Your program has to calculate the digital value to send to the analog module. There are many ways to do this, but most applications are understood more easily if you use measurements in engineering units. This is accomplished by using the conversion formula shown. You may have to make adjustments to the formula depending on the scale you choose for the engineering units.
A = U 4095 HL for 0--4095 output format

A = Analog value (0 -- 4095) U = Engineering units H = High limit of the engineering unit range L = Low limit of the engineering unit range

Consider the following example which controls pressure from 0.0 to 99.9 PSI. By using the formula you can easily determine the digital value that should be sent to the module. The example shows the conversion required to yield 49.4 PSI. Notice the formula uses a multiplier of 10. This is because the decimal portion of 49.4 cannot be loaded, so you must adjust the formula to compensate for it.
A = 10U 4095 10(H L) A = 494 4095 1000 0 A = 2023

The following example program shows how you would write the program to perform the engineering unit conversion to output data formats 0--4095. This example assumes you have calculated or loaded the engineering unit values in BCD format and stored them in V2300 and V2301 for channels 1 and 2 respectively. The DL205 offers instructions that allow you to perform math operations using BCD format. It is usually easier to perform any math calculations in BCD and then convert the value to binary before you send the data to the module.
SP1 LD V2300 MUL K4095 DIV K1000 OUT V2000 SP1 LD V2301 MUL K4095 DIV K1000 OUT V2001
The LD instruction loads the engineering units used with channel 1 into the accumulator. This example assumes the numbers are BCD. Since SP1 is used, this rung automatically executes on every scan. You could also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact. Multiply the accumulator by 4095 (to start the conversion). Divide the accumulator by 1000 (because we used a multiplier of 10, we have to use 1000 instead of 100). Store the BCD result in V2000 (the actual steps required to send the data are shown later). The LD instruction loads the engineering units used with channel 2 into the accumulator. This example assumes the numbers are BCD. Since SP1 is used, this rung automatically executes on every scan. You could also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact. Multiply the accumulator by 4095 (to start the conversion). Divide the accumulator by 1000 (because we used a multiplier of 10, we have to use 1000 instead of 100). Store the BCD result in V2001 (the actual steps required to send the data are shown later).

F2-08DA--1 8-Ch. Current Output

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev B. 4/10

10-12

F2-08DA-1 8-Channel Analog Current Output There are two methods of reading values: S The pointer method S Multiplexing method You can use either method when using DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 CPUs, but for ease of programming it is strongly recommended that you use the pointer method. You must use the multiplexing method when using DL230 CPUs and with remote I/O modules (the pointer method will not work). Once you have calculated the data values (shown previously) you must enter the program that actually updates the module. The DL240/250--1/260 has special V-memory locations assigned to each base slot that greatly simplify the programming requirements. By using these V-memory locations you can: S specify the number of channels to update. S specify where to obtain the output data . NOTE: DL240 CPUs with firmware release version 3.0 or later and DL250 CPUs with firmware release 1.33 are required to support this method. The following program example shows how to setup these locations. Place this rung anywhere in the ladder program, or in the initial stage if you are using stage programming. You may recall in the previous example we used V2000 through V2007 to store the calculated values. Also, in the previous examples we had the analog module installed in slot 3. You should use the appropriate memory locations for your application. The pointer method automatically converts values to binary.
SP0 LD K8

Writing Values: Pointer Method and Multiplexing

Pointer Method Example

230 240 250- 1 260

- or -

LD K 88

Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the data format. The lower byte, most significant nibble (MSN) selects the data format (0=BCD, 8=Binary), the LSN selects the number of channels (1-8). The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator interfaces. The DL230/240 CPUs do not support binary math functions, whereas the DL250-1/DL260 does.

OUT V7663 LDA O2000 OUT V7703

Special V-memory location assigned to slot 3 that contains the number of channels to scan. This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used to store the output data. For example, the O2000 entered here would designate the following addresses: Ch1 - V2000, Ch 2 - V2001.....Ch8 - V2007 The octal address (O2000) is stored here. V7703 is assigned to slot 3 and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the octal value in this location to determine exactly where to store the output data.

F2-08DA--1 8-Ch. Current Output

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-08DA-1 8-Channel Analog Current Output

10-13

The tables below show the special V-memory locations used by the DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 for the CPU base and local expansion base I/O slots. Slot 0 (zero) is the module next to the CPU or D2--CM module. Slot 1 is the module two places from the CPU or D2--CM, and so on. Remember, the CPU only examines the pointer values at these locations after a mode transition. Also, if you use the DL230 (multiplexing) method, verify that these addresses in the CPU are zero. The Table below applies to the DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 CPU base.
CPU Base: Analog Output Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations

Slot No. of Channels Storage Pointer

V7660 V7661 V7662 V7663 V7664 V7665 V7666 V7667 V7700 V7701 V7702 V7703 V7704 V7705 V7706 V7707

The Table below applies to the DL250--1 or DL260 expansion base 1.

Expansion Base D2-CM #1: Analog Output Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations

Slot No. of Channels Storage Pointer

V36000 V36001 V36002 V36003 V36004 V36005 V36006 V36007 V36020 V36021 V36022 V36023 V36024 V36025 V36026 V36027

The Table below applies to the DL250--1 or DL260 expansion base 2.

Expansion Base D2-CM #2: Analog Output Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations

Slot No. of Channels Storage Pointer

V36100 V36101 V36102 V36103 V36104 V36105 V36106 V36107 V36120 V36121 V36122 V36123 V36124 V36125 V36126 V36127

The Table below applies to the DL260 CPU expansion base 3.

Expansion Base D2-CM #3: Analog Output Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations

Slot No. of Channels Storage Pointer

V36200 V36201 V36202 V36203 V36204 V36205 V36206 V36207 V36220 V36221 V36222 V36223 V36224 V36225 V36226 V36227

The Table below applies to the DL260 CPU expansion base 4.

Expansion Base D2-CM #4: Analog Output Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations

Slot No. of Channels Storage Pointer

V36300 V36301 V36302 V36303 V36304 V36305 V36306 V36307 V36320 V36321 V36322 V36323 V36324 V36325 V36326 V36327

F2-08DA--1 8-Ch. Current Output

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev B. 4/10

10-14

F2-08DA-1 8-Channel Analog Current Output The following example shows how to write data using the mutliplexing method.
C10 C0
OUT Restarts the update sequence. Updates channel 8.

Writing Data (Multiplexing)

230 240 250- 1 260

C7

LD V2007 BIN

ORD K7000 C10

OUT

C6

LD V2006 BIN

Updates channel 7.

ORD K6000 C7
OUT

C5

LD V2005 BIN

Updates channel 6.

ORD K5000 C6
OUT

C4

F2-08DA--1 8-Ch. Current Output

LD V2004 BIN

Updates channel 5.

ORD K4000 C5
OUT

Continued

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-08DA-1 8-Channel Analog Current Output Writing Data (Multiplexing Example) Continued

10-15

C3

LD V2003 BIN

Updates channel 4.

ORD K3000 C4
OUT

C2

LD V2002 BIN

Updates channel 3.

ORD K2000 C3
OUT

C1

LD V2001 BIN

Updates channel 2.

ORD K1000 C2
OUT

C0

LD V2000 BIN

Updates channel 1.

SP0

ORD K0 C1
OUT

F2-08DA--1 8-Ch. Current Output

SP1

OUT V40501 Y37

OUT

Sends the data to the module. Our example starts with V40501, but the actual value depends on the location of the module in your application.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev B. 4/10

10-16

F2-08DA-1 8-Channel Analog Current Output If you are using more than one channel, or if you want to control the updates separately, use the following program.
SP1
The LD instruction loads the data into the accumulator. Since SP1 is used, this rung automatically executes on every scan. You could also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact. The BIN instruction converts the accumulator data to binary (you must omit this step if you have already converted the data elsewhere). The ANDD instruction masks off the channel select bits to prevent an accidental channel selection. The OUT instruction sends the data to the module. Our example starts with V40501, but the actual value depends on the location of the module in your application. Y34, Y35, Y36-OFF selects channel 1 for updating.

Sending Data to One Channel

LD V2000 BIN ANDD K0FFF OUT V40501 Y34

RST

Y35
RST

Y36
RST

Y37
OUT

Y37 is the output enable bit.

Analog and Digital Value Conversions

Sometimes it is useful to be able to quickly convert between the signal levels and the digital values. This is especially helpful during machine startup or troubleshooting. The following table provides formulas to make this conversion easier. Remember, if you embed the sign information into the data value, you must adjust the formulas accordingly.
Range 4 to 20mA If you know the digital value ... If you know the signal level ... A = 16D + 4 4095 D = 4095 (A 4) 16

F2-08DA--1 8-Ch. Current Output

For example, if you know you need a 10mA signal to achieve the desired result, you can easily determine the digital value that should be used.

D = 4095 (A 4) 16 D = 4095 (10mA 4) 16 D = (255.93) (6) D = 1536

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-08DA-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Output

In This Chapter. . . .
Module Specifications Setting the Module Jumper Connecting the Field Wiring Module Operation Writing the Control Program

11

11-2
F2-08DA--2 8-Ch. Voltage Output

F2-08DA-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Output

Module Specifications
The F2-08DA-2 Analog Output module provides several hardware features: S Supports DL230, DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 CPUs (see firmware requirements below). S Analog outputs are optically isolated from the PLC logic. S The module has a removable terminal block, so the module can be easily removed or changed without disconnecting the wiring. S Can update all channels in one scan (DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 only). S Outputs are voltage sourcing. S Outputs can be configured for either of these ranges: 1) 0 to 5 VDC 2) 0 to 10 VDC Firmware Requirements: To use this module, DL230 CPUs must have firmware version 2.7 or later. To use the pointer method of writing values, DL240 CPUs require firmware version 3.0 or later and DL250 CPUs require firmware version 1.33 or later.
F2-08DA--2
OUT ANALOG 8CH

F2-08DA-2
21.6--26.4 140mA ANALOG OUT 0--5VDC 0--10VDC

0V +24V +V1 +V2 +V3 +V4 +V5 +V6 +V7 +V8

F2--08DA--2

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-08DA-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Output

11-3
F2-08DA--2 8-Ch. Voltage Output

The following tables provide the specifications for the F2-08DA-2 Analog Output Module. Review these specifications to make sure the module meets your application requirements. Output Specifications
Number of Channels Output Ranges Resolution Output Type Peak Output Voltage Load Impedance Load Capacitance Linearity Error (end to end) Conversion Settling Time Full Scale Calibration Error Full-Scale (offset error included) Offset Calibration Error Accuracy vs. vs Temperature Maximum Inaccuracy y 8, single-ended 0 to 5V, 0 to 10V 12 bit (1 in 4096) Voltage sourcing 15VDC (clamped by transient voltage suppressor) 1k (0--5V range); 10k 0--10V range) .01F maximum 1 count (0.025% 0 025% of full scale) maximum 400 s maximum (full scale change) 4.5ms to 9ms for digital out to analog out 12 counts max. @ 25C (77F) 3 counts maximum @ 25C ( 77F) 57 ppm/_C full scale calibration change (including maximum offset change of 2 counts) 0.3% @ 25C (77 ( F) ) 0.45% 0--60C ( 32--140F) 1 channel per scan maximum (Multiplexing) 8 channels per scan maximum (Pointer [DL240/DL250--1/260 only]) 12 binary data bits, 3 ch. ID bits, 1 output enable bit / 16 (Y) output points required 60 mA @ 5VDC (supplied by base) 24VDC (10%), 140mA (outputs fully loaded) 0 to 60 C (32 to 140 F) --20 to 70 C (--4 to 158 F) 5 to 95% (non-condensing) No corrosive gases permitted MIL STD 810C 514.2 MIL STD 810C 516.2 NEMA ICS3--304

General Specifications

PLC Update Rate

Digital Outputs / Output Points Required Power Budget Requirement External Power Supply Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Relative Humidity Environmental Air Vibration Shock Noise Immunity

One count in the specification table is equal to one least significant bit of the analog data value (1 in 4096).

Analog Output Configuration Requirements

The F2-08DA-2 analog output requires 16 discrete output points. The module can be installed in any slot of a DL205 system, but the available power budget and discrete I/O points can be limiting factors. Check the user manual for your particular model of CPU and I/O base for more information regarding power budget and number of local, local expanison or remote I/O points.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

11-4
F2-08DA--2 8-Ch. Voltage Output

F2-08DA-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Output Even though the module can be placed in any slot, it is important to examine the configuration. As you can see in the section on writing the program, you use V-memory locations to extract the analog data. If you place the module so the output points do not start on a V-memory boundary, the instructions cannot access the data. This also applies when module is placed in remote base (D2--RSSS in CPU slot). Correct!
F2-08DA--2

Special Placement Requirements (DL230 and Remote I/O Bases)

Slot 0
16pt Input

Slot 1
8pt Input

Slot 2
16pt Output

Slot 3
16pt Output

Slot 4
8pt Output

X0 -X17

X20 -X27

Y0 -Y17

Y20 Y37

Y40 -Y47

Data is correctly entered so output points start on a V-memory boundary.

V40500 V40502 V40501 MSB LSB Y 3 7 Y 2 0

Incorrect

F2-08DA--2

Slot 0
16pt Input

Slot 1
8pt Input

Slot 2
16pt Output

Slot 3
8pt Output

Slot 4
16pt Output

X0 -X17

X20 -X27

Y0 -Y17

Y20 -Y27

Y30 Y47

MSB Y 5 7

Data is split over two locations, so instructions cannot access data from a DL230 (or when module is placed in a remote base). V40502 V40501 LSB MSB LSB Y Y 5 4 0 7 Y 4 0 Y 3 7 Y Y 3 2 0 7 Y 2 0

To use the V-memory references required for the multiplexing method, the first output address assigned to the module must be one of the following Y locations. The table also shows the V-memory addresses that correspond to these Y locations. Y V Y0 Y20 Y40 Y60 Y100 Y120 Y140 Y160

V40500 V40501 V40502 V40503 V40504 V40505 V40506 V40507

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-08DA-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Output

11-5
F2--08DA--2 8-Ch. Voltage Output

Setting the Module Jumper

The F2-08DA-2 Analog Output module uses a jumper for selecting the 0--5V or 0--10V voltage ranges. This figure shows the jumper location and how to set it for either voltage range.
0- 5V 0- 10V

Top Board

Bottom Board

Voltage Range and Output Combinations

The table lists both possible combinations of voltage ranges and data formats, along with the corresponding jumper settings.
Voltage Range 0 to 5V 0 to 10V Output Data Format 0--4095 0--4095 Jumpers Setting (top board) Install Remove

These graphs show the voltage range to output data format relationship for each of the two selections.

Ranges
0V -- 5V
5V 10V

0V -- 10V

0V 0 4095

0V 0 4095

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

11-6
F2-08DA--2 8-Ch. Voltage Output

F2-08DA-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Output

Connecting the Field Wiring

Wiring Guidelines Your company may have guidelines for wiring and cable installation. If so, you should check those before you begin the installation. Here are some general things to consider: S Use the shortest wiring route whenever possible. S S S Use shielded wiring and ground the shield at the signal source. Do not ground the shield at both the module and the load. Do not run the signal wiring next to large motors, high current switches, or transformers. This may cause noise problems. Route the wiring through an approved cable housing to minimize the risk of accidental damage. Check local and national codes to choose the correct method for your application.

User Power Supply Requirements

The F2-08DA-2 requires a separate field-side power supply. Each module requires 21.6--26.4VDC at up to 140mA current. The DL205 bases have built-in 24 VDC power supplies that provide up to 300mA of current. If you are using only a couple of analog modules, you can use this power source instead of a separate supply. If you want to use a separate supply, choose one that meets the power requirements of your application. WARNING: If you are using 24 VDC output power from the base, make sure you calculate the power budget. Exceeding the power budget can cause unpredictable system operation that can lead to a risk of personal injury or damage to equipment.

Wiring Diagram

The F2-08DA-2 module has a removable connector to make wiring easier. Squeeze the latches on both ends of the connector and gently pull it from the module. Use the following diagram to connect the field wiring.
OUT
21.6-26.4VDC @140mA + -

ANALOG 8CH

Internal Module Wiring

F2-08DA-2
Typical User Wiring
See NOTE 1 Ch 1 load 1K-10K ohms minimum 0 VDC DC to DC Converter +24 VDC +V1 +V2 +V3 +V4 +V5 +V6 +V7 See NOTE 1 Ch 8 load 1K-10K ohms minimum +V8 D to A Converter Ch 8 Voltage source +5V +15V 0V -15V Ch 1 Voltage source D to A Converter
21.6--26.4 140mA ANALOG OUT 0--5VDC 0--10VDC

0V

+24V +V1 +V2 +V3 +V4 +V5 +V6 +V7 +V8

F2--08DA--2

NOTE 1: Shields should be connected to to the 0V terminal of the module.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-08DA-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Output

11-7
F2-08DA--2 8--Ch. Voltage Output

Module Operation
Channel Update Sequence for a DL230 CPU (Multiplexing) Before you begin writing the control program, it is important to take a few minutes to understand how the module processes and represents the analog signals. If you are using multiplexing ladder, you can send one channel of data to the output module on each scan. The module refreshes both field devices on each scan, but you can only get new data from the CPU at the rate of one channel per scan. Since there are eight channels, it can take eight scans to update all channels. However, if you are only using one channel, you can update that channel on every scan. The multiplexing method can also b used for the DL240/250--1/260 CPUs.

Scan

System Using Multiplex Method (DL230)

Read inputs
Scan N Channel 1

Execute Application Program

Calculate the data Scan N+1 Scan N+2 Channel 2

Channel 3

Write data

Scan N+3 . . . Scan N+8

Channel 4 . . . Channel 8

Write to outputs

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

11-8
F2-08DA--2 8-Ch. Voltage Output

F2-08DA-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Output If you are using pointers (Pointer Method), you can update all channels on every scan. This is because the DL240/250--1/260 CPU supports special V-memory locations that are used to manage the data transfer. This is discussed in more detail in the section on Writing the Control Program.

Channel Update Sequence for a DL240, DL250-1 or DL260 CPU (Pointer Method)

Scan

System With DL240/250-1/260 CPU Using Pointer Method

Read inputs
Scan N Channel 1, 2...8

Execute Application Program

Calculate the data Scan N+1 Scan N+2 Channel 1, 2...8

Channel 1, 2...8

Write data

Scan N+3

Channel 1, 2...8

Scan N+4

Channel 1, 2...8

Write to outputs

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-08DA-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Output Understanding the Output Assignments

11-9
F2--08DA--2 8-Ch. Voltage Output

You may recall the F2-08DA-2 module requires 16 discrete output points in the CPU. These points provide the data value and an indication of which channel to update. Note, if you are using a DL240/250--1/260 CPU, you may never have to use these bits, but it may help you understand the data format. Since all output points are automatically mapped into V-memory, it is very easy to determine the location of the data word that will be assigned to the module.
F2-08DA--2

Slot 0
16pt Input

Slot 1
8pt Input

Slot 2
16pt Output

Slot 3
16pt Output

Slot 4
8pt Output

X0 -X17

X20 -X27

Y0 -Y17

Y20 Y37

Y40 -Y47

MSB Y YYY 3 3 3 3 7 6 5 4

V40500 V40502 V40501 LSB Y 2 0

Data Bits

Within this word location, the individual bits represent specific information about the analog signal. Channel Select Outputs Three of the outputs select the active channel. Remember, the V-memory bits are mapped directly to discrete outputs. The binary weight of these three bits determines the selected channel. By controlling these outputs, you can select which channel gets updated.

V40501 MSB YY Y 3 3 3 6 5 4 LSB Y 2 0

= channel select outputs

Y36 Y35 Y34 Channel Number Selected 1 X X X X X X X X X X X X 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

11-10
F2-08DA--2 8-Ch. Voltage Output

F2-08DA-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Output

Analog Data Bits The first twelve bits represent the analog data in binary format. Bit Value Bit Value 0 1 6 64 1 2 7 128 2 4 8 256 3 8 9 512 4 16 10 1024 5 32 11 2048

V40501 MSB LSB 11 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 10

= data bits

Output Enable

The last output can be used to update outputs. If this output is off the outputs are cleared.

V40501 MSB Y 3 7 LSB Y 2 0

= output enable Module Resolution Since the module has 12-bit resolution, the analog signal is converted from 4096 counts ranging from 0--4095 (212). For example, with a 0 to 10V range, send a 0 to get a 0V signal, and send 4095 to get a 10V signal. This is equivalent to a binary value of 0000 0000 0000 to 1111 1111 1111, or 000 to FFF hexadecimal. Each count can also be expressed in terms of the signal level by using the following equation:
0 -- 10V
10V

Resolution = H L 4095 H = high limit of the signal range L = low limit of the signal range

0V 0 4095

The following table shows the smallest change in signal level due to a digital value change of 1 LSB count. Voltage Range 0 to 5V 0 to 10V Signal Span 5 volts 10 volts Divide By 4095 4095 Smallest Output Change 1.22 mV 2.44 mV

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-08DA-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Output

11-11
F2--08DA--2 8-Ch. Voltage Output

Writing the Control Program

Calculating the Digital Value Your program has to calculate the digital value to send to the analog module. There are many ways to do this, but most applications are understood more easily if you use measurements in engineering units. This is accomplished by using the conversion formula shown. You may have to make adjustments to the formula depending on the scale you choose for the engineering units.
A = U 4095 HL for 0--4095 output format

A = Analog value (0 -- 4095) U = Engineering units H = High limit of the engineering unit range L = Low limit of the engineering unit range

Consider the following example which controls pressure from 0.0 to 99.9 PSI. By using the formula you can easily determine the digital value that should be sent to the module. The example shows the conversion required to yield 49.4 PSI. Notice the formula uses a multiplier of 10. This is because the decimal portion of 49.4 cannot be loaded, so you must adjust the formula to compensate for it.
A = 10U 4095 10(H L) A = 494 4095 1000 0 A = 2023

The following example program shows how you would write the program to perform the engineering unit conversion to output data formats 0--4095. This example assumes you have calculated or loaded the engineering unit values in BCD format and stored them in V2300 and V2301 for channels 1 and 2 respectively. The DL205 offers instructions that allow you to perform math operations using BCD format. It is usually easier to perform any math calculations in BCD and then convert the value to binary before you send the data to the module.
SP1 LD V2300 MUL K4095 DIV K1000 OUT V2000 SP1 LD V2301 MUL K4095 DIV K1000 OUT V2001
The LD instruction loads the engineering units used with channel 1 into the accumulator. This example assumes the numbers are BCD. Since SP1 is used, this rung automatically executes on every scan. You could also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact. Multiply the accumulator by 4095 (to start the conversion). Divide the accumulator by 1000 (because we used a multiplier of 10, we have to use 1000 instead of 100). Store the BCD result in V2000 (the actual steps required to send the data are shown later). The LD instruction loads the engineering units used with channel 2 into the accumulator. This example assumes the numbers are BCD. Since SP1 is used, this rung automatically executes on every scan. You could also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact. Multiply the accumulator by 4095 (to start the conversion). Divide the accumulator by 1000 (because we used a multiplier of 10, we have to use 1000 instead of 100). Store the BCD result in V2001 (the actual steps required to send the data are shown later).

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

11-12
F2-08DA--2 8-Ch. Voltage Output

F2-08DA-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Output There are two methods of reading values: S The pointer method S Multiplexing method You can use either method when using DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 CPUs, but for ease of programming it is strongly recommended that you use the pointer method. You must use the multiplexing method when using DL230 CPUs and with remote I/O modules (the pointer method will not work). Once you have calculated the data values (shown previously) you must enter the program that actually updates the module. The DL240/250--1/260 has special V-memory locations assigned to each base slot that greatly simplify the programming requirements. By using these V-memory locations you can: S specify the number of channels to update. S specify where to obtain the output data . NOTE: DL240 CPUs with firmware release version 3.0 or later and DL250 CPUs with firmware release 1.33 are required to support this method. The following program example shows how to setup these locations. Place this rung anywhere in the ladder program, or in the initial stage if you are using stage programming. You may recall in the previous example we used V2000 through V2007 to store the calculated values. Also, in the previous examples we had the analog module installed in slot 3. You should use the appropriate memory locations for your application. The pointer method automatically converts values to binary.
SP0 LD K8

Writing Values: Pointer Method and Multiplexing

Pointer Method Example

230 240 250- 1 260

- or -

LD K 88

Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the data format. The lower byte, most significant nibble (MSN) selects the data format (0=BCD, 8=Binary), the LSN selects the number of channels (1-8). The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator interfaces. The DL230/240 CPUs do not support binary math functions, whereas the DL250 does.

OUT V7663 LDA O2000 OUT V7703

Special V-memory location assigned to slot 3 that contains the number of channels to scan. This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used to store the output data. For example, the O2000 entered here would designate the following addresses: Ch1 - V2000, Ch 2 - V2001.....Ch8 - V2007 The octal address (O2000) is stored here. V7703 is assigned to slot 3 and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the octal value in this location to determine exactly where to store the output data.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-08DA-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Output

11-13
F2-08DA--2 8--Ch. Voltage Output

The tables below show the special V-memory locations used by the DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 for the CPU base and local expansion base I/O slots. Slot 0 (zero) is the module next to the CPU or D2--CM module. Slot 1 is the module two places from the CPU or D2--CM, and so on. Remember, the CPU only examines the pointer values at these locations after a mode transition. Also, if you use the DL230 (multiplexing) method, verify that these addresses in the CPU are zero. The Table below applies to the DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 CPU base.
CPU Base: Analog Output Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations

Slot No. of Channels Storage Pointer

V7660 V7661 V7662 V7663 V7664 V7665 V7666 V7667 V7700 V7701 V7702 V7703 V7704 V7705 V7706 V7707

The Table below applies to the DL250--1 or DL260 expansion base 1.

Expansion Base D2-CM #1: Analog Output Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations

Slot No. of Channels Storage Pointer

V36000 V36001 V36002 V36003 V36004 V36005 V36006 V36007 V36020 V36021 V36022 V36023 V36024 V36025 V36026 V36027

The Table below applies to the DL250--1 or DL260 expansion base 2.

Expansion Base D2-CM #2: Analog Output Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations

Slot No. of Channels Storage Pointer

V36100 V36101 V36102 V36103 V36104 V36105 V36106 V36107 V36120 V36121 V36122 V36123 V36124 V36125 V36126 V36127

The Table below applies to the DL260 CPU expansion base 3.

Expansion Base D2-CM #3: Analog Output Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations

Installation and Safety Guidelines

Slot No. of Channels Storage Pointer

V36200 V36201 V36202 V36203 V36204 V36205 V36206 V36207 V36220 V36221 V36222 V36223 V36224 V36225 V36226 V36227

The Table below applies to the DL260 CPU expansion base 4.

Expansion Base D2-CM #4: Analog Output Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations

Slot No. of Channels Storage Pointer

V36300 V36301 V36302 V36303 V36304 V36305 V36306 V36307 V36320 V36321 V36322 V36323 V36324 V36325 V36326 V36327

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

11-14
F2-08DA--2 8-Ch. Voltage Output

F2-08DA-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Output The following example shows how to write data using the mutliplexing method.
C10 C0
OUT Restarts the update sequence. Updates channel 8.

Writing Data (Multiplexing)

230

240 250- 1 260

C7

LD V2007 BIN

ORD K7000 C10

OUT

C6

LD V2006 BIN

Updates channel 7.

ORD K6000 C7
OUT

C5

LD V2005 BIN

Updates channel 6.

ORD K5000 C6
OUT

C4

LD V2004 BIN

Updates channel 5.

ORD K4000 C5
OUT

Continued

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-08DA-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Output Writing Data (Multiplexing Example) Continued

11-15
F2-08DA--2 8--Ch. Voltage Output

C3

LD V2003 BIN

Updates channel 4.

ORD K3000 C4
OUT

C2

LD V2002 BIN

Updates channel 3.

ORD K2000 C3
OUT

C1

LD V2001 BIN

Updates channel 2.

ORD K1000 C2
OUT

C0

LD V2000 BIN

Updates channel 1.

SP0

ORD K0 C1
OUT

SP1

OUT V40501 Y37

OUT

Sends the data to the module. Our example starts with V40501, but the actual value depends on the location of the module in your application.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

11-16
F2-08DA--2 8-Ch. Voltage Output

F2-08DA-2 8-Channel Analog Voltage Output If you are using more than one channel, or if you want to control the updates separately, use the following program.
The LD instruction loads the data into the accumulator. Since SP1 is used, this rung automatically executes on every scan. You could also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact. The BIN instruction converts the accumulator data to binary (you must omit this step if you have already converted the data elsewhere). The ANDD instruction masks off the channel select bits to prevent an accidental channel selection. The OUT instruction sends the data to the module. Our example starts with V40501, but the actual value depends on the location of the module in your application. Y34, Y35, Y36-OFF selects channel 1 for updating.

Sending Data to One Channel

SP1

LD V2000 BIN ANDD K0FFF OUT V40501 Y34

RST

Y35
RST

Y36
RST

Y37
OUT

Y37 is the output enable bit.

Analog and Digital Value Conversions

Sometimes it is useful to be able to quickly convert between the signal levels and the digital values. This is especially helpful during machine startup or troubleshooting. The following table provides formulas to make this conversion easier. Remember, if you embed the sign information into the data value, you must adjust the formulas accordingly.
Range 0 to 10V 0 to 5V If you know the digital value ... If you know the signal level ... A = 10D 4095 A = 5D 4095 D = 4095 (A) 10 D = 4095 (A) 5

For example, if you are using the 0--10V range and you know you need a 6V signal level, use this formula to determine the digital value (D) that will be stored in the V-memory location that contains the data.

D = 4095 (A) 10 D = 4095 (6V) 10 D = (409.5) (6) D = 2457

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-02DAS-1 4-20mA 2-Channel Analog Current Output

In This Chapter. . . .
Module Specifications Connecting the Field Wiring Module Operation Writing the Control Program

12

12-2

F2-02DAS-1 4--20mA Isolated 2-Channel Analog Current Output

Module Specifications
The F2-02DAS-1 Analog Output module provides several hardware features: S Supports DL230, DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 CPUs (see firmware requirements below). S Analog outputs are isolated from channel to channel and channel to PLC logic. S The module has a removable terminal block so the module can be easily removed or changed without disconnecting the wiring. S Can update both channels in one scan (DL240/DL250--1/260 only) S Loop power supply requirements: 18--32VDC S Outputs are sourced through external loop supply Firmware Requirements: To use this module, DL230 CPUs must have firmware version 1.7 or later. To use the pointer method of writing values, DL240 CPUs require firmware version 2.9 or later and DL250 CPUs require firmware version 1.30 or later.
OUT ANALOG 2CH

F2-02DAS--1
18--32 VDC ANALOG OUT 4--20mA

F2-02DAS--1 2-Ch. Iso. Current Output

0V1 +V1 --I1 +I1 N/C N/C 0V2 +V2 --I2 +I2
F2-02DAS-1

F2-02DAS--1

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-02DAS-1 4--20mA Isolated 2-Channel Analog Current Output

12-3

The following tables provide the specifications for the F2-02DAS-1 Isolated Analog Output Module. Review these specifications to make sure the module meets your application requirements. Output Specifications
Number of Channels Output Range Resolution Output Type Isolation Voltage Loop Supply Load Impedance Linearity Error (end to end) Conversion Settling time Gain Calibration Error Offset Calibration Error Output Drift Maximum Inaccuracy 2, isolated (2 commons) 4 to 20 mA 16 bit (1 in 65536) Current sourcing 750V continuous, channel to channel, channel to logic

F2-02DAS--1 2-Ch. Iso. Current OUtput

18--32VDC 0 -- 525 10 counts (0.015% 0 015% of full scale) maximum 3ms to 0.1% 0 1% of full scale 32 counts t (0.05%) 0 05%) 13 counts (0.02%) 50 ppm/C 0.07% @ 25C (77_F) 0.18% @ 0 to 60_C (32 to 140F) 1 channel per scan maximum (Multiplexing) 2 channels per scan maximum (Pointer [DL240, DL250, DL260 only]) 16 binary data bits, 2 channel ID bits; 32 point (Y) output module 100 mA @ 5 VDC (supplied by base) 18--32VDC @ 50mA per channel, Class 2 0 to 60_ C (32 to 140 F) --20 to 70_ C (--4 to 158 F ) 5 to 95% (non-condensing) No corrosive gases permitted MIL STD 810C 514.2 MIL STD 810C 516.2 NEMA ICS3--304

General Specifications

PLC Update Rate

Digital outputs Output points required Power Budget Requirement External Power Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Relative Humidity Environmental air Vibration Shock Noise Immunity

One count in the specification table is equal to one least significant bit of the analog data value (1 in 65536).

Analog Output Configuration Requirements

The F2-02DAS-1 analog output requires 32 discrete output points. The module can be installed in any slot of a DL205 system, but the available power budget and discrete I/O points can be limiting factors. Check the user manual for your particular model of CPU and I/O base for more information regarding power budget and number of local, local expanison or remote I/O points.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

12-4

F2-02DAS-1 4--20mA Isolated 2-Channel Analog Current Output Even though the module can be placed in any slot, it is important to examine the configuration if you are using multiplexing ladder. As you can see in the section on writing the program, you use V-memory locations to send the analog data. If you place the module so that the output points do not start on a V-memory boundary, the instructions cannot access the data. This also applies when module is placed in remote base (D2--RSSS in CPU slot). Correct!
F2-02DAS--1

Special Placement Requirements (DL230 and Remote I/O Bases)

F2-02DAS--1 2-Ch. Iso. Current Output

Slot 0
16pt Input

Slot 1
8pt Input

Slot 2
16pt Output

Slot 3
32pt Output

Slot 4
8pt Output

X0 -X17

X20 -X27

Y0 -Y17

Y20 Y57

Y60 -Y67

MSB Y 5 7

V40502 YY 54 07

LSB Y 4 0

MSB Y 3 7

V40500 V40503 V40501 -- V40502 LSB V40501 YY 32 07 Y 2 0

Incorrect

F2-02DAS--1

Slot 0
16pt Input

Slot 1
8pt Input

Slot 2
16pt Output

Slot 3
8pt Output

Slot 4
32pt Output

X0 -X17

X20 -X27

Y0 -Y17

Y20 -Y27

Y30 -Y67

MSB Y 7 7

V40503 Y 6 7

Data is split over three locations, so instructions cannot access data from a DL230 (or when module is placed in a remote base). V40501 V40502 LSB MSB LSB MSB LSB Y Y 6 5 0 7 Y Y 4 3 0 7 Y Y 3 2 0 7 Y 2 0

To use the required V-memory references, the first output address assigned to the module must be one of the following Y locations. The table also shows the V-memory addresses that correspond to these Y locations. Y V Y0 Y20 Y40 Y60 Y100 Y120 Y140 Y160

V40500 V40501 V40502 V40503 V40504 V40505 V40506 V40507

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-02DAS-1 4--20mA Isolated 2-Channel Analog Current Output

12-5

Connecting the Field Wiring

Wiring Guidelines Your company may have guidelines for wiring and cable installation. If so, you should check those before you begin the installation. Here are some general things to consider: S Use the shortest wiring route whenever possible. S Use shielded wiring and ground the shield at the signal source. Do not ground the shield at both the module and the load. S Do not run the signal wiring next to large motors, high current switches, or transformers. This may cause noise problems. S Route the wiring through an approved cable housing to minimize the risk of accidental damage. Check local and national codes to choose the correct method for your application. The F2-02DAS-1 requires a separate field-side loop power supply. Each module requires 18--32VDC at up to 50mA per channel (or 100mA). WARNING: If you are using 24 VDC power from the base, make sure you calculate the power budget. Exceeding the power budget can cause unpredictable system operation that can lead to a risk of personal injury or damage to equipment. Wiring Diagram The F2-02DAS-1 module has a removable connector to make wiring easier. Simply squeeze the top and bottom retaining clips and gently pull the connector from the module. Use the following diagram to connect the field wiring.

F2-02DAS--1 2-Ch. Iso. Current Output

Loop Power Supply Requirements

NOTE 1: Shields should be connected to the 0V terminal of the module. NOTE 2: Loads must be within the compliance voltage. NOTE 3: For non--isolated outputs, connect all 0Vs together (0V1........0V2) and connect all +Vs together (+V1........+V2). Internal Module Wiring

Typical User Wiring

OUT

ANALOG 2CH

Transmitter Supply 18-32 VDC Ch 1 load 0-525 ohms See NOTE 2

0 V1 +V1 -I1 +I1 See NOTE 1 N/C N/C 0V2 +V2 -I2 +I2 100 ohms D to A Converter 4-20 mA current sourcing 100 ohms D to A Converter 4-20 mA current sourcing

F2-02DAS--1
18--32 VDC ANALOG OUT 4--20mA

0V1 +V1 --I1 +I1 N/C N/C 0V2 +V2 --I2 +I2
F2-02DAS-1

Transmitter Supply 18-32 VDC Ch 2 load 0-525 ohms See NOTE 2

See NOTE 1

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

12-6

F2-02DAS-1 4--20mA Isolated 2-Channel Analog Current Output

Module Operation
Before you begin writing the control program, it is important to take a few minutes to understand how the module processes and represents the analog signals. If you are using multiplexing ladder, you can send one channel of data to the output module on each scan. The module refreshes both field devices on each scan, but you can only get new data from the CPU at the rate of one channel per scan. Since there are two channels, it can take two scans to update both channels. However, if you are only using one channel, then you can update that channel on every scan. The multiplexing method can also be used for the DL240/250--1/260 CPUs.

Channel Update Sequence for a DL230 CPU (Multiplexing) F2-02DAS--1 2-Ch. Iso. Current Output

Scan

System Using Multiplex Method (DL230)

Read inputs
Scan N Channel 1

Execute Application Program

Calculate the data Scan N+1 Scan N+2 Write data Channel 2

Channel 1

Scan N+3

Channel 2

Scan N+4

Channel 1

Write to outputs

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-02DAS-1 4--20mA Isolated 2-Channel Analog Current Output Channel Update Sequence for a DL240, DL250-1 or DL260 CPU (Pointer Method)

12-7

If you are using pointers (Pointer Method), you can update both channels on every scan. This is because the D2--240, DL250--1 and D2--260 CPUs support special V-memory locations that are used to manage the data transfer. This is discussed in more detail in the section on Writing the Control Program.

Scan

System With DL240/250-1/260 CPU Using Pointer Method

F2-02DAS--1 2-Ch. Iso. Current Output

Read inputs
Scan N Channel 1, 2

Execute Application Program

Calculate the data Scan N+1 Scan N+2 Channel 1, 2

Channel 1, 2

Write data

Scan N+3

Channel 1, 2

Scan N+4

Channel 1, 2

Write to outputs

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

12-8

F2-02DAS-1 4--20mA Isolated 2-Channel Analog Current Output You may recall the F2-02DAS--1 module appears to the CPU as a 32-point discrete output module. These points provide the data value and an indication of which channel to update. Note, if you are using a DL240/250--1/260 CPU, you may never have to use these bits, but it may help you understand the data format. Since all output points are automatically mapped into V-memory, it is very easy to determine the location of the data word that will be assigned to the module.
F2-02DAS--1

Understanding the Output Assignments

F2-02DAS--1 2-Ch. Iso. Current Output

Slot 0
16pt Input

Slot 1
8pt Input

Slot 2
16pt Output

Slot 3
32pt Output

Slot 4
8pt Output

X0 -X17

X20 -X27

Y0 -Y17

Y20 Y57

Y60 -Y67

V40500 MSB Y 5 7 V40502 LSB Y 4 0 MSB Y 3 7

V40503 LSB Y 2 0

V40501

Channel Select Outputs

Within this word location, the individual bits represent specific information about the analog signal. Two of the outputs select the active channel. Remember, the V-memory bits V40502 are mapped directly to discrete outputs. MSB LSB Turning a bit OFF selects its channel. By controlling these outputs, you can select Y Y Y which channel(s) gets updated. 4 4 5 1 0 7 Y41 Y40 Channel On Off 1 = channel select outputs Off On 2 Off Off 1 & 2 (same data to both channels) On On none (both channels hold current values)

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-02DAS-1 4--20mA Isolated 2-Channel Analog Current Output

12-9

Analog Data Bits

The first sixteen bits represent the analog data in binary format. Bit Value Bit Value 0 1 8 256 1 2 9 512 2 4 10 1024 3 8 11 2048 4 16 12 4096 5 32 13 8192 6 64 14 16384 7 128 15 32768 Since the module has 16-bit resolution, the analog signal is converted into 65536 counts ranging from 0 -- 65535 (216). For example, send a 0 to get a 4mA signal and 65535 to get a 20mA signal. This is equivalent to a binary value of 0000 0000 0000 0000 to 1111 1111 1111 1111, or 0000 to FFFF hexadecimal. The diagram shows how this relates to the signal range. Each count can also be expressed in terms of the signal level by using the equation shown.

V40501 MSB LSB 11 1 1 11 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 54 3 2 10

= data bits F2-02DAS--1 2-Ch. Iso. Current Output

Module Resolution

4 -- 20mA
20mA

4mA 0 65535

Resolution = H L 65535 H = high limit of the signal range L = low limit of the signal range 16mA / 65535 = 0.2241 A per count

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

12-10

F2-02DAS-1 4--20mA Isolated 2-Channel Analog Current Output

Writing the Control Program

Calculating the Digital Value Your program must calculate the digital value to send to the analog module. There are many ways to do this, but most applications are understood more easily if you use measurements in engineering units. This is accomplished by using the conversion formula shown. You may have to make adjustments to the formula depending on the scale you choose for the engineering units.
A = U 65535 HL A = Analog value (0 -- 65535) U = Engineering Units H = high limit of the engineering unit range L = low limit of the engineering unit range

F2-02DAS--1 2-Ch. Iso. Current Output

Consider the following example which controls pressure from 0.0 to 99.9 PSI. By using the formula, you can easily determine the digital value that should be sent to the module. The example shows the conversion required to yield 49.4 PSI. Notice the formula uses a multiplier of 10. This is because the decimal portion of 49.4 cannot be loaded, so you adjust the formula to compensate for it.
A = 10U 65535 10(H L) A = 494 65535 1000 0 A = 32374

Engineering Units Conversion

The example program shows how you would write the program to perform the engineering unit conversion to output data formats 0 -- 65535 when using a DL250 CPU. This example assumes you have calculated or loaded the engineering unit values in BCD format and stored it in V2300 for channel 1.
SP1 LD V2300 BIN
The LD instruction loads the engineering units used with channel 1 into the accumulator. This example assumes the numbers are BCD. Since SP1 is used, this rung automatically executes on every scan. You could also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact. Convert BCD number to binary number.

BTOR

Convert binary number to real number.

MULR R65535 DIVR R1000 RTOB

Multiply the accumumlator by 65535 to start the conversion.

Divide the accumulator by 1000 (1000 = 100.0%).

Convert the result to binary.

BCD

Convert the result to BCD.

OUTD V2000

Store the BCD double word result in V2000 / V2001.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-02DAS-1 4--20mA Isolated 2-Channel Analog Current Output Reading Values: Pointer Method and Multiplexing

12-11

Pointer Method
230 240 250- 1 260

There are two methods of reading values: S The pointer method S Multiplexing You can use either method when using DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 CPUs, but for ease of programming it is strongly recommended that you use the pointer method. You must use the multiplexing method with remote I/O modules (the pointer method will not work). Once you have calculated the data values (shown previously) you have to enter the program that actually updates the module. The DL240/250--1/260 has special V-memory locations assigned to each base slot that greatly simplify the programming requirements. By using these V-memory locations you can: S specify the number of channels to update. S specify where to obtain the output data. NOTE: DL240 CPUs with firmware version 3.0 and DL250 CPUs with version 1.33 or later support this method. The following program example shows how to set up these locations. Place this rung anywhere in the ladder program, or in the initial stage when using stage programming. In this example we are using V2000 and V2002 to store the calculated values, and the analog module is installed in slot 3. You should use the appropriate memory locations for your application. The pointer method automatically converts values to binary.
SP0 LD K2

F2-02DAS--1 2-Ch. Iso. Current Output

- or -

LD K 82

Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the data format. The lower byte, most significant nibble (MSN) selects the data format (i.e. 0=BCD, 8=Binary), the LSN selects the number of channels (1 or 2). The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator interfaces. The DL230/240 CPUs do not support binary math functions, whereas the DL250 does.

OUT V7663 LDA O2000 OUT V7703

Special V-memory location assigned to slot 3 that contains the number of channels to scan. This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used to store the output data. For example, the O2000 entered here would designate the following addresses. Ch1 - V2000, Ch2 - V2002 The octal address (O2000) is stored here. V7703 is assigned to slot 3 and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the octal value in this location to determine exactly where to store the output data.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

12-12

F2-02DAS-1 4--20mA Isolated 2-Channel Analog Current Output The tables below show the special V-memory locations used by the DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 for the CPU base and local expansion base I/O slots. Slot 0 (zero) is the module next to the CPU or D2--CM module. Slot 1 is the module two places from the CPU or D2--CM, and so on. Remember, the CPU only examines the pointer values at these locations after a mode transition. Also, if you use the DL230 (multiplexing) method, verify that these addresses in the CPU are zero. The Table below applies to the DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 CPU base.
CPU Base: Analog Output Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations

F2-02DAS--1 2-Ch. Iso. Current Output

Slot No. of Channels Storage Pointer

V7660 V7661 V7662 V7663 V7664 V7665 V7666 V7667 V7700 V7701 V7702 V7703 V7704 V7705 V7706 V7707

The Table below applies to the DL250--1 or DL260 expansion base 1.

Expansion Base D2-CM #1: Analog Output Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations

Slot No. of Channels Storage Pointer

V36000 V36001 V36002 V36003 V36004 V36005 V36006 V36007 V36020 V36021 V36022 V36023 V36024 V36025 V36026 V36027

The Table below applies to the DL250--1 or DL260 expansion base 2.

Expansion Base D2-CM #2: Analog Output Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations

Slot No. of Channels Storage Pointer

V36100 V36101 V36102 V36103 V36104 V36105 V36106 V36107 V36120 V36121 V36122 V36123 V36124 V36125 V36126 V36127

The Table below applies to the DL260 CPU expansion base 3.

Expansion Base D2-CM #3: Analog Output Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations

Slot No. of Channels Storage Pointer

V36200 V36201 V36202 V36203 V36204 V36205 V36206 V36207 V36220 V36221 V36222 V36223 V36224 V36225 V36226 V36227

The Table below applies to the DL260 CPU expansion base 4.

Expansion Base D2-CM #4: Analog Output Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations

Slot No. of Channels Storage Pointer

V36300 V36301 V36302 V36303 V36304 V36305 V36306 V36307 V36320 V36321 V36322 V36323 V36324 V36325 V36326 V36327

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-02DAS-1 4--20mA Isolated 2-Channel Analog Current Output Writing Data (Multiplexing)
230 240 250- 1 260

12-13

Since all channels are multiplexed into a single data word, the control program can be setup to determine which channel to write. Since the module appears as Y output points to the CPU, it is very easy to use the channel selection outputs to determine which channel to update. Note, this example is for a module installed as shown in the previous examples. The addresses used would be different if the module was used in a different slot. You can place these rungs anywhere in the program or if you are using stage programming, place them in a stage that is always active. This example is a two-channel multiplexer that updates each channel on alternate scans. Relay SP7 is a special relay that is on for one scan, then off for one scan. Installation, Wiring, and Specifications NOTE: You must send binary data to the module. If the data is already in binary format, you should not use the BIN instruction shown in this example.

Load data into the accumulator. SP7 LD V2000 LD V2002

Loads the data for channel 1 into the accumulator. Note: Use LD if using binary, and use LDD if using BCD. Loads the data for channel 2 into the accumulator. Note: Use LD if using binary, and use LDD if using BCD.

SP7

Send data to V-memory assigned to the module. SP1 BIN

Convert the data to binary (you must omit this step if you have converted the data elsewhere). SP1 is always on. The OUT instruction sends the data to the module. Our example starts with V40501, but the actual value depends on the location of the module in your application.

OUT V40501

Installation and Safety Guidelines

Select the channel to update. SP7 Y40

OUT Selects channel 2 for update when Y41 is OFF (Y40-ON deselects channel 1). Note, Y40 and Y41 are used as in the previous examples. If the module was installed in a different I/O arrangement the addresses would be different. Selects channel 1 for update when Y41 is OFF (Y41-ON deselects channel 2). Note, Y40 and Y41 are used as in the previous examples. If the module was installed in a different I/O arrangement the addresses would be different.

SP7

Y41
OUT

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

12-14

F2-02DAS-1 4--20mA Isolated 2-Channel Analog Current Output If you are not using both channels, or if you want to control the updates separately, use the following program.
The LD instruction loads the data into the accumulator. Since SP1 is used, this rung automatically executes on every scan. You could also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact. Note: Use LD if using binary, and use LDD if using BCD. The BIN instruction converts the accumulator data to binary (you must omit this step if you have already converted the data elsewhere). The OUT instruction sends the data to the module. Our example starts with V40501, but the actual value depends on the location of the module in your application. Y40-OFF selects channel 1 for updating.

Sending Data to One Channel

SP1

LD V2000 BIN

F2-02DAS--1 2-Ch. Iso. Current Output

OUT V40501 Y40

RST

Y41
OUT

Y41-ON deselects channel 2 (do not update).

Sending the Same Data to Both Channels

If both channel selection outputs are off, both channels will be updated with the same data.
The LD instruction loads the data into the accumulator. Since SP1 is used, this rung automatically executes on every scan. You could also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact. Note: Use LD if using binary, and use LDD if using BCD. The BIN instruction converts the accumulator data to binary (you must omit this step if you have already converted the data elsewhere). The OUT instruction sends the data to the module. Our example starts with V40501, but the actual value depends on the location of the module in your application. Y40-OFF selects channel 1 for updating.

SP1

LD V2000 BIN

OUT V40501 Y40

RST

Y41
RST Y41-OFF selects channel 2 for updating.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-02DAS-1 4--20mA Isolated 2-Channel Analog Current Output Analog and Digital Value Conversions

12-15

Sometimes it is useful to be able to quickly convert between the signal levels and the digital values. This is especially helpful during machine startup or troubleshooting. The following table provides formulas to make this conversion easier. Remember, if you imbed the sign information into the data value, you must adjust the formulas accordingly.
Range 4 to 20mA If you know the digital value ... A = 16D + 4 65535 If you know the signal level ... D = 65535 (A 4) 16

For example, if you know you need a 10mA signal to achieve the desired result, you can easily determine the digital value that should be used.

F2-02DAS--1 2-Ch. Iso. Current Output

D = 65535 (A 4) 16 D = 65535 (10mA 4) 16 D = (4095.94) (6) D = 24575(5FFF h)

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-02DAS-2 0-5, 0-10V 2-Channel Isolated Output

In This Chapter. . . .
Module Specifications Setting the Module Jumpers Connecting the Field Wiring Module Operation Writing the Control Program

13

13-2

F2-02DAS-2 0--5, 0--10V 2-Channel Isolated Analog Output

Module Specifications
The F2-02DAS-2 Analog Output module provides several hardware features: S Supports D2--230, D2--240, DL250--1 and D2--260 CPUs (see firmware requirements below). S Analog outputs are isolated from channel to channel and channel to PLC logic. S The module has a removable terminal block so the module can be easily removed or changed without disconnecting the wiring. S Can update both channels in one scan (D2--240/D2--250--1/260 only) S Outputs are sourced through external loop supply F2--02DAS--2 2--ch. Iso. Voltage Output
OUT ANALOG 2CH

F2-02DAS--2
0--5VDC 0--10VDC

0V1 +V1 CH1--V CH1+V N/C N/C 0V2 +V2 CH2--V CH2+V
F2-02DAS-2

Firmware Requirements: To use this module, D2--230 CPUs must have firmware version 2.7 or later. To use the pointer method of writing values, D2--240 CPUs require firmware version 3.0 or later and D2--250 CPUs require firmware version 1.33 or later.

F2-02DAS--2

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-02DAS-2 0--5, 0--10V 2-Channel Isolated Analog Output

13-3

The following tables provide the specifications for the F2-02DAS-2 Isolated Analog Output Module. Review these specifications to make sure the module meets your application requirements. Output Specifications
Number of Channels Output Range Resolution Isolation Voltage Load Impedance Linearity Error (end to end) Conversion Settling time F ll Scale Full S l Calibration C lib ti Error E Offset Calibration Error Maximum Inaccuracy 2, isolated 0--5VDC, 0--10VDC 16 bit (1 in 65536) 750V continuous, channel to channel, channel to logic 2K Min 10 counts (0.015% 0 015% of full scale) maximum 3ms to 0.1% 0 1% of full scale 32 counts t (0.05%) 0 05%) 13 counts (0.02%) 0.07% @ 25C (77_F) 0.18% @ 0 to 60_C (32 to 140F) 1 channel per scan maximum (Multiplexing) 2 channels per scan maximum (Pointer [DL240/DL250--1/DL260 only]) 16 binary data bits, 2 channel ID bits; 32 point (Y) output module 60 mA @ 5 VDC (supplied by base) 21.6--26.4 VDC @ 60 mA 0 to 60_ C (32 to 140 F) --20 to 70_ C (--4 to 158 F ) 5 to 95% (non-condensing) No corrosive gases permitted MIL STD 810C 514.2 MIL STD 810C 516.2 NEMA ICS3--304

General Specifications

PLC Update Rate

Digital outputs Output points required Power Budget Requirement External Power Requirement Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Relative Humidity Environmental air Vibration Shock Noise Immunity

F2-02DAS--2 2--ch. Iso. Voltage Output

One count in the specification table is equal to one least significant bit of the analog data value (1 in 65536).

Analog Output Configuration Requirements

The F2-02DAS-2 analog output requires 32 discrete output points. The module can be installed in any slot of a DL205 system, but the available power budget and discrete I/O points can be limiting factors. Check the user manual for your particular model of CPU and I/O base for more information regarding power budget and number of local, local expanison or remote I/O points.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

13-4

F2-02DAS-2 0--5, 0--10V 2-Channel Isolated Analog Output Even though the module can be placed in any slot, it is important to examine the configuration if you are using multiplexing ladder. As you can see in the section on writing the program, you use V-memory locations to send the analog data. If you place the module so that the output points do not start on a V-memory boundary, the instructions cannot access the data. This also applies when module is placed in remote base (D2--RSSS in CPU slot). Correct!
F2-02DAS--2

Special Placement Requirements (DL230 and Remote I/O Bases)

Slot 0
16pt Input

Slot 1
8pt Input

Slot 2
16pt Output

Slot 3
32pt Output

Slot 4
8pt Output

X0 -X17

X20 -X27

Y0 -Y17

Y20 Y57

Y60 -Y67

MSB

V40502 YY 54 07

LSB Y 4 0

MSB Y 3 7

V40500 V40503 V40501 -- V40502 LSB V40501 YY 32 07 Y 2 0

F2--02DAS--2 2--ch. Iso. Voltage Output

Y 5 7

Incorrect

F2-02DAS--2

Slot 0
16pt Input

Slot 1
8pt Input

Slot 2
16pt Output

Slot 3
8pt Output

Slot 4
32pt Output

X0 -X17

X20 -X27

Y0 -Y17

Y20 -Y27

Y30 -Y67

MSB Y 7 7

V40503 Y 6 7

Data is split over three locations, so instructions cannot access data from a D2--230 (or when module is placed in a remote base). V40501 V40502 LSB MSB LSB MSB LSB Y Y 6 5 0 7 Y Y 4 3 0 7 Y Y 3 2 0 7 Y 2 0

To use the required V-memory references, the first output address assigned to the module must be one of the following Y locations. The table also shows the V-memory addresses that correspond to these Y locations. Y V Y0 Y20 Y40 Y60 Y100 Y120 Y140 Y160

V40500 V40501 V40502 V40503 V40504 V40505 V40506 V40507

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-02DAS-2 0--5, 0--10V 2-Channel Isolated Analog Output

13-5

Setting the Module Jumpers

The F2-02DAS--2 Analog Output module uses jumpers for selecting the voltage range for each channel. The range of each channel can be independently set. The available operating ranges are 0--5V and 0--10V. There is one jumper for each channel. Install or remove these jumpers to select the desired range. Unused jumpers can be stored on a single pin so they do not get lost. The module comes from the factory set for the 0--5V range. NOTE: It is important to set the module jumpers correctly. The module will not operate correctly if the jumpers are not properly set for the desired voltage range. These figures show the jumper locations. Newer models have a single circuit board design. Refer to the first drawing if you have one of these modules. Older modules have a two circuit board design and the jumpers are located on the top board. Refer to the lower drawing.
Single Circuit Board Design Jumper ON = 0--5V OFF= 0--10V
CH1

F2-02DAS--2 2--ch. Iso. Voltage Output

J2
Jumper ON = 0--5V OFF= 0--10V

J4
CH2

Two Circuit Board Design Jumper ON = 0--5V OFF= 0--10V

CH1

Top Board

Jumper ON = 0--5V OFF= 0--10V

CH2

Bottom Board

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

13-6

F2-02DAS-2 0--5, 0--10V 2-Channel Isolated Analog Output

Connecting the Field Wiring

Wiring Guidelines Your company may have guidelines for wiring and cable installation. If so, you should check those before you begin the installation. Here are some general things to consider: S Use the shortest wiring route whenever possible. S Use shielded wiring and ground the shield at the signal source. Do not ground the shield at both the module and the load. S Do not run the signal wiring next to large motors, high current switches, or transformers. This may cause noise problems. S Route the wiring through an approved cable housing to minimize the risk of accidental damage. Check local and national codes to choose the correct method for your application. The F2--02DAS--2 requires a separate transmitter power supply. Each channel requires 21.6--26.4 VDC at 60 mA per channel.

Transmitter Power Supply Requirements F2--02DAS--2 2--ch. Iso. Voltage Output

WARNING: If you are using 24 VDC power from the base, make sure you calculate the power budget. Exceeding the power budget can cause unpredictable system operation that can lead to a risk of personal injury or damage to equipment. Wiring Diagram The F2-02DAS-2 module has a removable connector to make wiring easier. Simply squeeze the top and bottom retaining clips and gently pull the connector from the module. Use the following diagram to connect the field wiring.

NOTE 1: Shields should be connected to the 0V. NOTE 2: Load must be within compliance voltage. NOTE 3: For non-isolated outputs, connect 0V1 to 0V2.

OUT
Internal module circuitry

ANALOG 2CH

User Wiring
Note 3 0V1 +V1 CH1--V CH1+V Note 1 N/C N/C 0V2 +V2 CH2--V CH2+V Note 1

Transmitter Supply + 24VDC CH1

2k Note 2

F2-02DAS--2
D/A
0--5VDC 0--10VDC

Voltage source

0V1 +V1 CH1--V

D/A

Transmitter Supply 24VDC + CH2

2k Note 2

CH1+V N/C N/C 0V2 +V2 CH2--V CH2+V

F2-02DAS-2

Voltage source

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-02DAS-2 0--5, 0--10V 2-Channel Isolated Analog Output

13-7

Module Operation
Before you begin writing the control program, it is important to take a few minutes to understand how the module processes and represents the analog signals. If you are using multiplexing ladder, you can send one channel of data to the output module on each scan. The module refreshes both field devices on each scan, but you can only get new data from the CPU at the rate of one channel per scan. Since there are two channels, it can take two scans to update both channels. However, if you are only using one channel, then you can update that channel on every scan. The multiplexing method can also be used for DL240/250--1/260 CPUs.

Channel Update Sequence for a DL230 CPU (Multiplexing)

Scan

System Using Multiplex Method (D2-230)

Read inputs
Scan N Channel 1

F2-02DAS--2 2--ch. Iso. Voltage Output

Execute Application Program

Calculate the data Scan N+1 Scan N+2 Write data Channel 2

Channel 1

Scan N+3

Channel 2

Scan N+4

Channel 1

Write to outputs

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

13-8

F2-02DAS-2 0--5, 0--10V 2-Channel Isolated Analog Output If you are using pointers (Pointer Method), you can update both channels on every scan. This is because the D2--240, D2--250--1 and D2--260 CPUs support special V-memory locations that are used to manage the data transfer. This is discussed in more detail in the section on Writing the Control Program.

Channel Update Sequence for a DL240, DL250-1 or DL260 CPU (Pointer Method)

Scan

System With D2-240/250-1/260 CPU Using Pointer Method

Read inputs
Scan N Channel 1, 2

Execute Application Program

Calculate the data Scan N+1 Scan N+2 Channel 1, 2

Channel 1, 2

F2--02DAS--2 2--ch. Iso. Voltage Output

Write data

Scan N+3

Channel 1, 2

Scan N+4

Channel 1, 2

Write to outputs

Understanding the Output Assignments

You may recall the F2-02DAS--2 module appears to the CPU as a 32-point discrete output module. These points provide the data value and an indication of which channel to update. Note, if you are using a D2--240/250--1/260 CPU, you may never have to use these bits, but it may help you understand the data format. Since all output points are automatically mapped into V-memory, it is very easy to determine the location of the data word that will be assigned to the module.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-02DAS-2 0--5, 0--10V 2-Channel Isolated Analog Output

13-9

F2-02DAS--2

Slot 0
16pt Input

Slot 1
8pt Input

Slot 2
16pt Output

Slot 3
32pt Output

Slot 4
8pt Output

X0 -X17

X20 -X27

Y0 -Y17

Y20 Y57

Y60 -Y67

V40500 MSB Y 5 7 V40502 LSB Y 4 0 MSB Y 3 7

V40503 LSB Y 2 0

V40501

Channel Select Outputs

Within this word location, the individual bits represent specific information about the analog signal. Two of the outputs select the active channel. Remember, the V-memory bits V40502 are mapped directly to discrete outputs. MSB LSB Turning a bit OFF selects its channel. By controlling these outputs, you can select Y Y Y which channel(s) gets updated. 4 4 5 1 0 7 Y41 Y40 Channel On Off 1 = channel select outputs Off On 2 Off Off 1 & 2 (same data to both channels) On On none (both channels hold current values)
V40501 MSB LSB 11 1 1 11 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 54 3 2 10

F2-02DAS--2 2--ch. Iso. Voltage Output

Analog Data Bits

The first sixteen bits represent the analog data in binary format. Bit Value Bit Value 0 1 8 256 1 2 9 512 2 4 10 1024 3 8 11 2048 4 16 12 4096 5 32 13 8192 6 64 14 16384 7 128 15 32768

= data bits

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

13-10

F2-02DAS-2 0--5, 0--10V 2-Channel Isolated Analog Output

Module Resolution

Since the module has 16-bit resolution, the analog signal is converted into 65536 counts ranging from 0 -- 65535 (216). For example, send a 0 to get a 0V signal and 65535 to get a 10V signal. This is equivalent to a binary value of 0000 0000 0000 0000 to 1111 1111 1111 1111, or 0000 to FFFF hexadecimal. The diagram shows how this relates to the signal range. Each count can also be expressed in terms of the signal level by using the equation shown.

0--5V or 0--10V
5 or 10V

65535

Resolution = H L 65535 H = high limit of the signal range L = low limit of the signal range

F2--02DAS--2 2--ch. Iso. Voltage Output DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-02DAS-2 0--5, 0--10V 2-Channel Isolated Analog Output

13-11

Writing the Control Program

Calculating the Digital Value Your program must calculate the digital value to send to the analog module. There are many ways to do this, but most applications are understood more easily if you use measurements in engineering units. This is accomplished by using the conversion formula shown. You may have to make adjustments to the formula depending on the scale you choose for the engineering units.
A = U 65535 HL A = Analog value (0 -- 65535) U = Engineering Units H = high limit of the engineering unit range L = low limit of the engineering unit range

Consider the following example which controls pressure from 0.0 to 99.9 PSI. By using the formula, you can easily determine the digital value that should be sent to the module. The example shows the conversion required to yield 49.4 PSI. Notice the formula uses a multiplier of 10. This is because the decimal portion of 49.4 cannot be loaded, so you adjust the formula to compensate for it.
A = 10U 65535 10(H L) A = 494 65535 1000 0 A = 32374

F2-02DAS--2 2--ch. Iso. Voltage Output

Engineering Units Conversion

The example program shows how you would write the program to perform the engineering unit conversion to output data formats 0 -- 65535 when using a D2--250 CPU. This example assumes you have calculated or loaded the engineering unit values in BCD format and stored it in V2300 for channel 1.
SP1 LD V2300 BIN
The LD instruction loads the engineering units used with channel 1 into the accumulator. This example assumes the numbers are BCD. Since SP1 is used, this rung automatically executes on every scan. You could also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact. Convert BCD number to binary number.

BTOR

Convert binary number to real number.

MULR R65535 DIVR R1000 RTOB

Multiply the accumumlator by 65535 to start the conversion.

Divide the accumulator by 1000 (1000 = 100.0%).

Convert the result to binary.

BCD

Convert the result to BCD.

OUTD V2000

Store the BCD double word result in V2000 / V2001.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

13-12

F2-02DAS-2 0--5, 0--10V 2-Channel Isolated Analog Output There are two methods of reading values: S The pointer method S Multiplexing You can use either method when using D2--240, D2--250--1 and D2--260 CPUs, but for ease of programming it is strongly recommended that you use the pointer method. You must use the multiplexing method with remote I/O modules (the pointer method will not work). Once you have calculated the data values (shown previously) you have to enter the program that actually updates the module. The D2--240/250--1/260 has special V-memory locations assigned to each base slot that greatly simplify the programming requirements. By using these V-memory locations you can: S specify the number of channels to update. S specify where to obtain the output data. NOTE: D2--240 CPUs with firmware version 3.0 and D2--250 CPUs with version 1.33 or later support this method. The following program example shows how to set up these locations. Place this rung anywhere in the ladder program, or in the initial stage when using stage programming. In this example we are using V2000 and V2002 to store the calculated values, and the analog module is installed in slot 3. You should use the appropriate memory locations for your application. The pointer method automatically converts values to binary.
SP0 LD K2

Reading Values: Pointer Method and Multiplexing

Pointer Method
230 240 250- 1 260

F2--02DAS--2 2--ch. Iso. Voltage Output

- or -

LD K 82

Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the data format. The lower byte, most significant nibble (MSN) selects the data format (i.e. 0=BCD, 8=Binary), the LSN selects the number of channels (1 or 2). The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator interfaces. The D2-230/240 CPUs do not support binary math functions, whereas the D2-250 does.

OUT V7663 LDA O2000 OUT V7703

Special V-memory location assigned to slot 3 that contains the number of channels to scan. This loads an octal value for the first V-memory location that will be used to store the output data. For example, the O2000 entered here would designate the following addresses. Ch1 - V2000, Ch2 - V2002 The octal address (O2000) is stored here. V7703 is assigned to slot 3 and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the octal value in this location to determine exactly where to store the output data.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-02DAS-2 0--5, 0--10V 2-Channel Isolated Analog Output

13-13

The tables below show the special V-memory locations used by the DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 for the CPU base and local expansion base I/O slots. Slot 0 (zero) is the module next to the CPU or D2--CM module. Slot 1 is the module two places from the CPU or D2--CM, and so on. Remember, the CPU only examines the pointer values at these locations after a mode transition. Also, if you use the DL230 (multiplexing) method, verify that these addresses in the CPU are zero. The Table below applies to the DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 CPU base.
CPU Base: Analog Output Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations

Slot No. of Channels Storage Pointer

V7660 V7661 V7662 V7663 V7664 V7665 V7666 V7667 V7700 V7701 V7702 V7703 V7704 V7705 V7706 V7707

The Table below applies to the DL250--1 or DL260 expansion base 1.

Expansion Base D2-CM #1: Analog Output Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations

Slot No. of Channels Storage Pointer

V36000 V36001 V36002 V36003 V36004 V36005 V36006 V36007 V36020 V36021 V36022 V36023 V36024 V36025 V36026 V36027

F2-02DAS--2 2--ch. Iso. Voltage Output

The Table below applies to the DL250--1 or DL260 expansion base 2.

Expansion Base D2-CM #2: Analog Output Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations

Slot No. of Channels Storage Pointer

V36100 V36101 V36102 V36103 V36104 V36105 V36106 V36107 V36120 V36121 V36122 V36123 V36124 V36125 V36126 V36127

The Table below applies to the DL260 CPU expansion base 3.

Expansion Base D2-CM #3: Analog Output Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations

Slot No. of Channels Storage Pointer

V36200 V36201 V36202 V36203 V36204 V36205 V36206 V36207 V36220 V36221 V36222 V36223 V36224 V36225 V36226 V36227

The Table below applies to the DL260 CPU expansion base 4.

Expansion Base D2-CM #4: Analog Output Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations

Slot No. of Channels Storage Pointer

V36300 V36301 V36302 V36303 V36304 V36305 V36306 V36307 V36320 V36321 V36322 V36323 V36324 V36325 V36326 V36327

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

13-14

F2-02DAS-2 0--5, 0--10V 2-Channel Isolated Analog Output Since all channels are multiplexed into a single data word, the control program can be setup to determine which channel to write. Since the module appears as Y output points to the CPU, it is very easy to use the channel selection outputs to determine which channel to update. Note, this example is for a module installed as shown in the previous examples. The addresses used would be different if the module was used in a different slot. You can place these rungs anywhere in the program or if you are using stage programming, place them in a stage that is always active. This example is a two-channel multiplexer that updates each channel on alternate scans. Relay SP7 is a special relay that is on for one scan, then off for one scan. NOTE: You must send binary data to the module. If the data is already in binary format, you should not use the BIN instruction shown in this example.

Writing Data (Multiplexing)

230

240 250- 1 260

Load data into the accumulator. SP7 LDD V2000 LDD V2002
Loads the data for channel 1 into the accumulator. Note: Use LD if using binary, and use LDD if using BCD. Loads the data for channel 2 into the accumulator. Note: Use LD if using binary, and use LDD if using BCD.

F2--02DAS--2 2--ch. Iso. Voltage Output

SP7

Send data to V-memory assigned to the module. SP1 BIN

Convert the data to binary (you must omit this step if you have converted the data elsewhere). SP1 is always on. The OUT instruction sends the data to the module. Our example starts with V40501, but the actual value depends on the location of the module in your application.

OUT V40501

Select the channel to update. SP7 Y40

OUT Selects channel 2 for update when Y41 is OFF (Y40-ON deselects channel 1). Note, Y40 and Y41 are used as in the previous examples. If the module was installed in a different I/O arrangement the addresses would be different. Selects channel 1 for update when Y40 is OFF (Y41-ON deselects channel 2). Note, Y40 and Y41 are used as in the previous examples. If the module was installed in a different I/O arrangement the addresses would be different.

SP7

Y41
OUT

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-02DAS-2 0--5, 0--10V 2-Channel Isolated Analog Output Sending Data to One Channel

13-15

If you are not using both channels, or if you want to control the updates separately, use the following program.
The LD instruction loads the data into the accumulator. Since SP1 is used, this rung automatically executes on every scan. You could also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact. Note: Use LD if using binary, and use LDD if using BCD. The BIN instruction converts the accumulator data to binary (you must omit this step if you have already converted the data elsewhere). The OUT instruction sends the data to the module. Our example starts with V40501, but the actual value depends on the location of the module in your application. Y40-OFF selects channel 1 for updating.

SP1

LDD V2000 BIN

OUT V40501 Y40

RST

Y41
OUT

Y41-ON deselects channel 2 (do not update).

F2-02DAS--2 2--ch. Iso. Voltage Output

Sending the Same Data to Both Channels

If both channel selection outputs are off, both channels will be updated with the same data.
The LD instruction loads the data into the accumulator. Since SP1 is used, this rung automatically executes on every scan. You could also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact. Note: Use LD if using binary, and use LDD if using BCD. The BIN instruction converts the accumulator data to binary (you must omit this step if you have already converted the data elsewhere). The OUT instruction sends the data to the module. Our example starts with V40501, but the actual value depends on the location of the module in your application. Y40-OFF selects channel 1 for updating.

SP1

LDD V2000 BIN

OUT V40501 Y40

RST

Y41
RST Y41-OFF selects channel 2 for updating.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

13-16

F2-02DAS-2 0--5, 0--10V 2-Channel Isolated Analog Output Sometimes it is useful to be able to quickly convert between the signal levels and the digital values. This is especially helpful during machine startup or troubleshooting. The following table provides formulas to make this conversion easier. Remember, if you imbed the sign information into the data value, you must adjust the formulas accordingly.
Range 0--5 VDC 0--10 VDC If you know the digital value ... A= 5D 65535 If you know the signal level ... D = 65535 A 5 D = 65535 A 10 D = 65535 A 5 D = 65535 (4) 5 D = (13107) (4)

Analog and Digital Value Conversions

A = 10D 65535

For example, if you know you need a 4V signal to achieve the desired result, you can easily determine the digital value that should be used.

F2--02DAS--2 2--ch. Iso. Voltage Output

D = 52428(CCCC h)

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out Combination Analog

In This Chapter. . . .
Module Specifications Connecting the Field Wiring Module Operation Writing the Control Program

14

14-2

F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out Combination Analog

Module Specifications
The F2-4AD2DA Analog Input/Output module provides several hardware features: S On-board 250 ohm, 1/2 watt precision resistors provide substantial over-current-protection for 4--20mA current loops. S Analog inputs and outputs are optically isolated from the PLC logic. S The module has a removable terminal block so the module can be easily removed or changed without disconnecting the wiring. S With a DL240/250--1/260 CPU, you can update all input and output channels in one scan. S On-board active analog filtering and RISC-like microcontroller provide digital signal processing to maintain precision analog measurements in noisy environments. S Low-power CMOS design requires less than 80mA from an external 18--26.4 VDC power supply.
IN/ OUT ANALOG

F2-4AD2DA
18 26.4 VDC 80 mA ANALOG 4 IN / 2 OUT 4--20mA

0V

+24V IN-IN

CH1+ CH2+ CH3+ CH4+ OUT-CH1+ CH2+

OUT

F2--4AD2DA

F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out

The following tables provide the specifications for the F2-4AD2DA Analog Input/Output Module. Review these specifications to make sure the module meets your application requirements. Input Specifications
Number of Input Channels Range Resolution Input Impedance Maximum Continuous Overload Input Stability Crosstalk Common Mode Rejection Active Low-Pass Filter Step Response Full Scale Calibration Error Offset Calibration Error Maximum Input Inaccuracy Recommended External Fuse 4, single ended (one common) 4 to 20 mA current 12 bit (1 in 4096) 250, 0.1%, W, 25ppm/_C current input resistance -40 to +40 mA, each current input 1 count -70 dB, 1 count maximum -50 dB at 800 Hz -3 dB at 50Hz, 2 poles (-12 dB per octave) 10 mS to 95% 12 counts maximum, at 20 mA current input 8 counts maximum, at 4 mA current input 0.3% @ 25C (77F) 0.45% @ 0 to 60C (32 to 140F) 0.032A, series 217 fast-acting, current inputs

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out Combination Analog

14-3

Output Specifications

Number of Output Channels Range Resolution Peak Withstanding Voltage External Load Resistance Loop Supply Voltage Range Maximum Load / Power Supply Linearity Error (best fit) Settling Time Maximum Inaccuracy Full Scale Calibration Error Offset Calibration Error

2 single ended (one common) 2, 4 to 20 mA current 12 bit (1 in 4096) 75 VDC, VDC current outputs 0 minimum, minimum current outputs 18-30VDC, current outputs 910/24V, /24V 620/18V, /18V 1200/30V, /30V current outputs 1 count (0.025% 0 025% of full scale) maximum 100 s maximum (full scale change) 0.1% @ 25C (77F) 0.3% @ 0 to 60C (32 to 140F) 5 counts at 20 mA current output 3 counts at 4 mA current output

General Module Specifications

Digital g Input p and Output p Points Required q PLC Update p Rate

16 point p (X) ( ) inputs p 16 point i (Y) outputs 4 input p channels p per scan maximum ( (D2-240/250-1/260 CPU) ) 2 output t t channels h l per scan maximum i (D2(D2 -240/250240/250 -1/260 1/260 CPU) 1 input and 1 output channel per scan maximum (D2-230 CPU) 60 mA @ 5 VDC (supplied by base) 18 to 26.4 VDC, 80 mA maximum plus 20 mA per loop output 45 ppm/C full scale calibration range (including maximum offset change) 0 to 60_ C (32 to 140 F) -20 to 70_ C (-4 to 158 F) 5 to 95% (non-condensing) No corrosive gases permitted

Power Budget Requirement External Power Supply Requirement Accuracy vs. Temperature Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Relative Humidity Environmental Air Vibration Shock Noise Immunity

F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out

MIL STD 810C 514.2 MIL STD 810C 516.2 NEMA ICS3-304

One count in the specification table is equal to one least significant bit of the analog data value (1 in 4096).

Combination Analog Configuration Requirements

The F2-4AD2DA Analog module requires 16 discrete input and 16 discrete output points. The module can be installed in any slot of a DL205 system, except when you use the DL230 programming method. The available power budget may also be a limiting factor. Check the user manual for your particular model of CPU and I/O base for more information regarding power budget and number of local, local expanison or remote I/O points.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

14-4

F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out Combination Analog Even though the module can be placed in any slot, it is important to examine the configuration if you are using a DL230 CPU. As you can see in the section on writing the program, you use V-memory locations to extract the analog data. If you place the module so that either the input or output points do not start on a V-memory boundary, the instructions cannot access the data. This also applies when the module is placed in remote I/O bases (D2--RSSS in CPU slot). F2-4AD2DA Correct!

Special Placement Requirements (DL230 and Remote I/O Bases)

Slot 0
8pt Input

Slot 1
8pt Input

Slot 2
16pt Output

Slot 3
16pt In / Out

Slot 4
8pt Output

X0 X7

X10 X17 V40400

Y0 Y17 V40500

X20 Y20 X37 Y37

Y40 Y47 V40502

Output Data is correctly entered so input and output points start on a V-memory boundary. V40501 MSB LSB Y 3 7

MSB X 3 7

V40401

LSB X 2 0

Y 2 0

Incorrect

F2-4AD2DA

F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out

Slot 0
8pt Input

Slot 1
8pt Input

Slot 2
8pt Output

Slot 3
16pt In / Out

Slot 4
16pt Output

X0 X7

X10 X17 V40400

Y0 Y7 V40500

X20 Y10 X37 Y27 V40401 V40500 V40501

Y30 Y47

V40501 V40502

Output Data is split over two locations, so instructions cannot write data from a DL230. MSB Y 3 7 V40501 Y Y 3 2 0 7 LSB Y 2 0 MSB Y 1 7 V40500 Y Y 1 7 0 LSB Y 0

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out Combination Analog

14-5

To use the V-memory references required for a DL230 CPU, the first input and output addresses assigned to the module must be one of the following X and Y locations. The table also shows the V-memory addresses that correspond to these locations. X V Y V X0 X20 X40 X60 X100 X120 X140 X160 V40400 V40401 V40402 V40403 V40404 V40405 V40406 V40407 Y0 Y20 Y40 Y60 Y100 Y120 Y140 Y160

V40500 V40501 V40502 V40503 V40504 V40505 V40506 V40507

Connecting the Field Wiring

Wiring Guidelines Your company may have guidelines for wiring and cable installation. If so, you should check those before you begin the installation. Here are some ideas to consider: S Use the shortest wiring route whenever possible. S S S Use shielded wiring and ground the shield at the signal source. Do not ground the shield at both the module and the load or source. Do not run the signal wiring next to large motors, high current switches, or transformers. This may cause noise problems. Route the wiring through an approved cable housing to minimize the risk of accidental damage. Check local and national codes to choose the correct method for your application.

User Power Supply Requirements

The F2-4AD2DA requires at least one field-side power supply. You may use the same or separate power sources for the module supply and loop supply. The module requires 18--26.4VDC, at 80 mA. In addition, each current loop requires 20 mA (a total of 120 mA for six current loops). If you want to use a separate power supply make sure that it meets these requirements. The DL205 bases have built-in 24 VDC power supplies that provide up to 300mA of current. You may use this instead of a separate supply if you are using only one combination module. The current required is 80 mA (module) plus up to 120 mA (six current loops) for a total of 200 mA. It is desirable in some situations to power the loops separately in a location remote from the PLC. This will work as long as the loops power supply meets the voltage and current requirements, and its minus (--) side and the module supplys minus (--) side are connected together. WARNING: If you are using the 24 VDC base power supply, make sure you calculate the power budget. Exceeding the power budget can cause unpredictable system operation that can lead to a risk of personal injury or damage to equipment.

F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

14-6

F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out Combination Analog

The DL205 base has a switching type power supply. As a result of switching noise, you may notice 3--5 counts of instability in the analog input data if you use the base power supply. If this is unacceptable, you should try one of the following: 1. Use a separate linear power supply. 2. Connect the 24VDC common to the frame ground, which is the screw terminal marked G on the base. Current Loop Transmitter Impedance By using these methods, the input stability is rated at 1 count. Standard 4 to 20 mA transmitters and transducers can operate from a wide variety of power supplies. Not all transmitters are alike and the manufacturers often specify a minimum loop or load resistance that must be used with the transmitter. The F2-4AD2DA provides 250 ohm resistance for each input channel. If your transmitter requires a load resistance below 250 ohms, you do not have to make any adjustments. However, if your transmitter requires a load resistance higher than 250 ohms, you need to add a resistor in series with the module. Consider the following example for a transmitter being operated from a 30 VDC supply with a recommended load resistance of 750 ohms. Since the module has a 250 ohm resistor, you need to add an additional resistor. Example:
R = Tr Mr R = 750 250 R 500 R -- resistor to add Tr -- Transmitter total resistance requirement Mr -- Module resistance (internal 250 ohms)

Two-wire Transmitter + -DC Supply +30V 0V R

Module Channel 1

F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out

IN1+ IN-

250 ohms

In the example, add a 500 ohm resistor (R) in series with the module.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out Combination Analog

14-7

Wiring Diagram The F2-04AD2DA module has a removable connector to make wiring easier. Simply squeeze the top and bottom retaining clips and gently pull the connector from the module. Use the following diagram to connect the field wiring. The diagram shows separate module and loop power supplies. If you desire to use only one field-side supply, just combine the supplies positive (+) terminals into one node, and remove the loop supply.
Note 1: Shields should be connected at their respective signal source. Note 2: Unused channels should remain open (no connections) for minimum power consumption. Note 3: More than one external power supply can be used provided all the power supply commons are connected together. Note 4: A series 217, 0.032A, fast-acting fuse is recommended for 4-20 mA current input loops. Note 5: If the power supply common of an external power supply is not connected to 0V on the module, then the output of the external transmitter must be isolated. To avoid ground loop errors, recommended 4-20mA transmitter types are: a. For 2 or 3 wire: Isolation between input signal and power supply. b. For 4 wire: Isolation between input signal, power supply, and 4-20 mA output. Note 6: If an analog channel is connected backwards, then incorrect data values will be returned for that channel. Input signals in the -4 to +4 mA range return a zero value. Signals in the -4 to -40 mA range return a non-zero value. Note 7: To avoid small errors due to terminal block losses, connect 0V, IN- and OUT- on the terminal block as shown. The modules internal connection of these nodes is not sufficient to permit module performance up to the accuracy specifications. Note 8: Choose a output transducer resistance according to the maximum load / power supply listed in the Output Specifications table.

Typical User Wiring See Note 1

Module Supply 18-26.4VDC + -

Internal Module Wiring

0 VDC DC to DC Converter +24 VDC ININ1+ +5V +15V 0V -15V

CH1 4-wire + 4-20mA Transmitter + CH2 3-wire + 4-20mA Transmitter -

IN/ OUT

ANALOG

F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out

F2-4AD2DA
18 26.4 VDC 80 mA ANALOG 4 IN / 2 OUT 4-20mA

Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse

IN2+ IN3+ IN4+ OUTOUT1+ OUT2+

250 ohms 250 ohms 250 ohms 250 ohms D to A Converter Ch 1 Current sinking D to A Converter Ch 2 Current sinking A to D Converter

0V

CH3 2-wire + 4-20mA Transmitter CH4 2-wire + 4-20mA Transmitter

+24V ININ

CH1+ CH2+ CH3+ CH4+ OUT-

Ch 1 load 0-910 ohms (@ 24V) Ch 2 load 0-910 ohms (@ 24V)

OUTCH1+

CH2+
F2--4AD2DA

18--30 VDC Supply Loop Supply 0V

See Note 8 See Note 1

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

14-8

F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out Combination Analog

Module Operation
Before you begin writing the control program, it is important to take a few minutes to understand how the module processes and represents the analog signals. The F2-4AD2DA module can supply different amounts of data per scan, depending on the type of CPU you are using. The DL230 can obtain one channel of input data per CPU scan. Since there are four channels, it can take up to four scans to get data for all channels. Once all channels have been scanned the process starts over with channel 1. Unused channels are not processed, so if you select only two channels, then each channel will be updated every other scan.

Input Channel Scanning Sequence for a DL230 CPU (Multiplexing)

Scan Read Inputs Execute Application Program Read the data

System With DL230 CPU

Scan N Scan N+1

Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 1

Store data

Scan N+2 Scan N+3 Scan N+4

Write to Outputs

F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out

Input Channel Scanning Sequence for a DL240, DL250-1 or DL260 CPU (Pointer Method)

If you are using a DL240, DL250--1 or DL260 CPU, you can obtain all four channels of input data in one scan. This is because the DL240/250--1/260 CPU supports special V-memory locations that are used to manage the data transfer. This is discussed in more detail in the section on Writing the Control Program.

Scan Read Inputs Execute Application Program Read the data

System With DL240/250-1/260 CPU

Scan N Scan N+1
Ch1, 2, 3, 4 Ch 1, 2, 3, 4 Ch1, 2, 3, 4 Ch 1, 2, 3, 4 Ch 1, 2, 3, 4

Store data

Scan N+2 Scan N+3 Scan N+4

Write to Outputs

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out Combination Analog Output Channel Update Sequence for a DL230 CPU (Multiplexing)

14-9

If you are using a DL230 CPU, you can send one channel of data to the output module on each scan. Since there are two channels, it can take two scans to update both channels. However, if you are only using one channel, then you can update that channel on every scan.

Scan Read inputs Scan N Execute Application Program Calculate the data Scan N+1 Scan N+2 Write data Scan N+3 Scan N+4

System With DL230 CPU

Channel 1

Channel 2

Channel 1

Channel 2

Channel 1

Write to outputs

Output Channel Update Sequence for a DL240, DL250-1 or DL260 CPU (Pointer Method)

If you are using a DL240, DL250--1 or DL260 CPU, you can update both channels on every scan. This is because the DL240/250--1/260 CPU supports special V-memory locations that are used to manage the data transfer. This is discussed in more detail in the section on Writing the Control Program. F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out

Scan Read inputs Scan N Execute Application Program Calculate the data Scan N+1 Scan N+2 Write data Scan N+3 Scan N+4 Write to outputs

System With DL240/250-1/260 CPU

Channel 1,2

Channel 1,2

Channel 1,2

Channel 1,2

Channel 1,2

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

14-10

F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out Combination Analog You may recall the F2-4AD2DA module appears to the CPU as 16 discrete input and 16 discrete output points. These points provide the data value and channel identification. Note, if you are using a DL240/250 CPU, you may never have to use these bits, but it may help you understand the data format. Since all output points are automatically mapped into V-memory, it is very easy to determine the location of the data words that will be assigned to the module.
F2-4AD2DA

Understanding the I/O Assignments

Slot 0
8pt Input

Slot 1
8pt Input

Slot 2
16pt Output

Slot 3
16pt In / Out

Slot 4
8pt Output

X0 X7

X10 X17 V40400

Y0 Y17 V40500

X20 Y20 X37 Y37

Y40 Y47 V40502

MSB YY 3 3 5 4

V40501

LSB Y 2 0

MSB X XXX 3 3 3 3 7 6 5 4

V40401

LSB X 2 0

Not Used

Output Data Bits

Input Data Bits

Input Data Bits F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out

Within this word location, the individual bits represent specific information about the analog signal. The first twelve bits of the input word represent the analog data in binary V40401 format. MSB LSB Bit Value Bit Value 1 1 1 1 11 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 1 6 64 5 4 3 2 10 1 2 7 128 2 4 8 256 = data bits 3 8 9 512 4 16 10 1024 5 32 11 2048

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out Combination Analog Active Channel Indicator Inputs Two of the inputs are binary encoded to indicate the active input channel. Remember, the V-memory bits are mapped directly to discrete inputs. The module automatically turns on and off these inputs to indicate the active input channel for each scan. Scan X35 X34 Channel N Off Off 1 N+1 Off On 2 N+2 On Off 3 N+3 On On 4 N+4 Off Off 1 The last two inputs are used for module diagnostics. Module Busy The first diagnostic input (X36 in this example) indicates a busy condition. This input will always be active on the first PLC scan to tell the CPU the analog data is not valid. After the first scan, the input usually only comes on when environmental (electrical) noise problems are present. The programming examples in the next section will show how you can use this input. The wiring guidelines presented earlier in this chapter provide steps that can help reduce noise problems.

14-11
LSB X 2 0

V40401 MSB X X 3 3 5 4

= channel inputs

Diagnostic Indicator Inputs

V40401 MSB X X 3 3 7 6 LSB X 2 0

= diagnostic inputs Note: When using the pointer method, the value placed into the V-memory location will be 8000 instead of the bit being set.

Module Failure The last diagnostic input (X37 in this example) indicates that the analog module is not operating. For example, if the 24 VDC input power is missing, or if the terminal block is loose, then the module will turn on this input point. The module will also return a data value of zero to further indicate there is a problem. This input point cannot detect which individual channel is at fault. If the cause of the failure goes away, the module turns this bit off. Output Data Bits The first twelve bits of the output word represent the analog data in binary format. Bit Value Bit Value 0 1 6 64 1 2 7 128 2 4 8 256 3 8 9 512 4 16 10 1024 5 32 11 2048
V40501 MSB LSB 11 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 10

F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out

= data bits

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

14-12

F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out Combination Analog Two of the outputs select the active channel. Remember, the V-memory bits are mapped directly to discrete outputs. Turning a bit OFF selects its channel. By controlling these outputs, you can select which channel(s) gets updated. Y35 Y34 Channel On Off 1 Off On 2 Off Off 1 & 2 (same data to both channels) On On None (both channels hold current values) Since the module has 12-bit resolution, the analog signal is converted into 4096 counts ranging from 0 -- 4095 (212). For example, a 4mA signal would be 0, and a 20mA signal would be 4095. This is equivalent to a binary value of 0000 0000 0000 to 1111 1111 1111, or 000 to FFF hexadecimal. The diagram shows how this relates to the signal range. Each count can also be expressed in terms of the signal level by using the equation shown.

Output Channel Selection Bits

V40501 MSB Y Y 3 3 5 4 LSB Y 2 0

= channel control outputs

Module Resolution

4 -- 20mA
20mA

4mA 0 4095

Resolution = H L 4095 H = high limit of the signal range L = low limit of the signal range 16mA / 4095 = 3.907A per count

F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out Combination Analog

14-13

Writing the Control Program

Before you begin writing the program, there are a few supplemental examples that can be extremely beneficial. They include: S S S Analog Input Power Failure Detection Input power failure detection Output data calculation Input data scaling

Take a close look at these examples. They may be helpful for your application. The analog module has a microcontroller that can diagnose analog input circuit problems. You can easily create a simple ladder rung to detect these problems. This rung shows an input point that would be assigned if the module was used as shown in the previous and following examples. Multiplexing method V-memory location V2000 holds
V2000 K0 X37

C1
OUT

channel 1 data. When a data value of zero is returned and input X37 is on, then the analog channel is not operating properly.

Pointers method
V2000 K8000

C1
OUT

V-memory location V2000 holds channel 1 data. When a data value of 8000 is returned, then the analog channel is not operating properly.

Calculating the Output Data

Your program has to calculate the digital value to send to the analog output channels. There are many ways to do this, but most applications are understood more easily if you use measurements in engineering units. This is accomplished by using the conversion formula shown. You may have to make adjustments to the formula depending on the scale you choose for the engineering units.

A = U 4095 HL A = Analog value (0 -- 4095) U = Engineering units H = high limit of the engineering unit range L = low limit of the engineering unit range

F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out

Consider the following example which controls pressure from 0.0 to 99.9 PSI. By using the formula, you can easily determine the digital value that should be sent to the module. The example shows the conversion required to yield 49.4 PSI. Notice the formula uses a multiplier of 10. This is because the decimal portion of 49.4 cannot be loaded, so you adjust the formula to compensate for it.
A = 10U A = 494 4095 10(H L) 4095 1000 0

A = 2023

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

14-14

F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out Combination Analog The example program below shows how you would write the program to perform the engineering unit conversion. This example will work with all CPUs and assumes that you have calculated or loaded the engineering unit values and stored them in V2300 and V2301 for channels 1 and 2 respectively. Also, we move the final values to V2004 and V2005, which are memory locations that are used in the following examples. You can use any user V locations, but they must match the locations that are specified as the source for the output data (see the next section for an example). NOTE: The DL205 offers instructions that allow you to perform math operations using BCD format. It is usually easier to perform any math calculations in BCD.

SP1

LD V2300

The LD instruction loads the engineering units used with channel 1 into the accumulator. This example assumes the numbers are BCD. Since SP1 is used, this rung automatically executes on every scan. You could also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact. Multiply the accumulator by 4095 (to start the conversion).

MUL K4095 DIV K1000

Divide the accumulator by 1000 (because we used a multiplier of 10, we have to use 1000 instead of 100).

OUT V2004

Store the BCD result in V2004 (the actual steps required to send the data are shown later).

F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out

SP1

LD V2301

The LD instruction loads the engineering units used with channel 2 into the accumulator. This example assumes the numbers are BCD. Since SP1 is used, this rung automatically executes on every scan. You could also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact. Multiply the accumulator by 4095 (to start the conversion).

MUL K4095 DIV K1000

Divide the accumulator by 1000 (because we used a multiplier of 10, we have to use 1000 instead of 100).

OUT V2005

Store the BCD result in V2005 (the actual steps required to send the data are shown later).

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out Combination Analog Scaling the Input Data Most applications usually require measurements in engineering units, which provide more meaningful data. This is accomplished by using the conversion formula shown. You may have to make adjustments to the formula depending on the scale you choose for the engineering units.

14-15

Units = A H L 4095 H = High limit of the engineering unit range L = Low limit of the engineering unit range A = Analog value (0 -- 4095)

For example, if you wanted to measure pressure (PSI) from 0.0 to 99.9, you would have to multiply the analog value by 10 in order to imply a decimal place when you view the value with the programming software or a handheld programmer. Notice how the calculations differ when you use the multiplier.
Analog Value of 2024, slightly less than half scale, should yield 49.4 PSI Example without multiplier Units = A H L 4095 Units = 2024 100 0 4095 Units = 49
Handheld Display

Example with multiplier Units = 10 A H L 4095 Units = 20240 100 0 4095 Units = 494
Handheld Display

V 2001 V 2000 0000 0049

V 2001 V 2000 0000 0494

This value is more accurate The example program below shows how you would write the program to perform the engineering unit conversion. This example assumes you have BCD data loaded into the appropriate V-memory locations using instructions that apply for the model of CPU you are using.
Note, this example uses SP1, which is always on. You could also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact.

F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out

SP1

LD V2000 MUL K1000 DIV K4095 OUT V2010

Load channel 1 data to the accumulator.

Multiply the accumulator by 1000 (to start the conversion).

Divide the accumulator by 4095.

Store the result in V2010.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

14-16

F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out Combination Analog The DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 CPUs have special V-memory locations assigned to each base slot that greatly simplify the programming requirements. These V-memory locations: S specify the number of input and output channels to scan. S S specify the storage location for the input data. specify the source location for the output data.

Read / Write Program (Pointer Method)

230

240 250- 1 260

NOTE: To use the pointer method, DL250 CPUs must have firmware revision 1.09 or later, and F2-AD2DA modules must be revision C1 or later. The example program shows how to setup these locations. Place this rung anywhere in the ladder program, or in the initial stage if you are using stage programming instructions. This is all that is required to read the input data into V-memory locations. The CPU automatically converts the binary input data to BCD format. Once the input data is in V-memory, you can perform math on the data, compare the data against preset values, and so forth. For the output data, you have to calculate the digital value in BCD (as shown previously) before you send the data to the module, unless you select the binary data format option shown below. V2000 and V2004 are used as the beginning of the data areas in the example, but you can use any user V-memory locations. Also, in the previous examples the module was installed in slot 3. You should use the V-memory locations for your application. The pointer method automatically converts values to BCD.
SP0 LD K 0402

- or -

LD K 8482

Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the data format. The upper byte, most significant nibble (MSN) selects the data format (0=BCD, 8=Binary), the LSN selects the number of input channels (1, 2, 3, or 4). The lower byte, most significant nibble (MSN) selects the data format (0=BCD, 8=Binary), the LSN selects the number of output channels (1, 2).

F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out

The binary format is used for displaying data on some operator interfaces. The DL230/240 CPUs do not support binary math functions, whereas the DL250 does.

OUT V7663 LDA O2000

Special V-memory location assigned to slot 3 that contains the number of input and output channels. This constant designates the first V-memory location that will be used to store the input data. For example, the O2000 entered here would mean: Ch1 - V2000, Ch 2 - V2001, Ch 3 - V2002, Ch 4 - V2003 The constant O2000 is stored here. V7673 is assigned to slot 3 and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the value in this location to determine exactly where to store the incoming data. This constant designates the first V-memory location that will be used to obtain the analog output data. For example, the O2004 entered here would mean: Ch1 - V2004, Ch 2 - V2005. The constant O2004 is stored here. V7703 is assigned to slot 3 and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the value in this location to determine exactly where to obtain the output data.

OUT V7673 LDA O2004 OUT V7703

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out Combination Analog

14-17

The tables below show the special V-memory locations used by the DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 for the CPU base and local expansion base I/O slots. Slot 0 (zero) is the module next to the CPU or D2--CM module. Slot 1 is the module two places from the CPU or D2--CM, and so on. Remember, the CPU only examines the pointer values at these locations after a mode transition. Also, if you use the DL230 (multiplexing) method, verify that these addresses in the CPU are zero. The Table below applies to the DL240, DL250--1 and DL260 CPU base.
CPU Base: Analog In/Out Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations Slot No. of Channels Input Pointer Output Pointer 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V7660 V7661 V7662 V7663 V7664 V7665 V7666 V7667 V7670 V7671 V7672 V7673 V7674 V7675 V7676 V7677 V7700 V7701 V7702 V7703 V7704 V7705 V7706 V7707

The Table below applies to the DL250--1 or DL260 expansion base 1.

Expansion Base D2-CM #1: Analog In/Out Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations Slot No. of Channels Input Pointer Output Pointer 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V36000 V36001 V36002 V36003 V36004 V36005 V36006 V36007 V36010 V36011 V36012 V36013 V36014 V36015 V36016 V36017 V36020 V36021 V36022 V36023 V36024 V36025 V36026 V36027

The Table below applies to the DL250--1 or DL260 expansion base 2.

Expansion Base D2-CM #2: Analog In/Out Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations Slot No. of Channels Input Pointer Output Pointer 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V36100 V36101 V36102 V36103 V36104 V36105 V36106 V36107 V36110 V36111 V36112 V36113 V36114 V36115 V36116 V36117 V36120 V36121 V36122 V36123 V36124 V36125 V36126 V36127

F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out

The Table below applies to the DL260 CPU expansion base 3.

Expansion Base D2-CM #3: Analog In/Out Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations Slot No. of Channels Input Pointer Output Pointer 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V36200 V36201 V36202 V36203 V36204 V36205 V36206 V36207 V36210 V36211 V36212 V36213 V36214 V36215 V36216 V36217 V36220 V36221 V36222 V36223 V36224 V36225 V36226 V36227

The Table below applies to the DL260 CPU expansion base 4.

Expansion Base D2-CM #4: Analog In/Out Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations Slot No. of Channels Input Pointer Output Pointer 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V36300 V36301 V36302 V36303 V36304 V36305 V36306 V36307 V36310 V36311 V36312 V36313 V36314 V36315 V36316 V36317 V36320 V36321 V36322 V36323 V36324 V36325 V36326 V36327

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

14-18

F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out Combination Analog

Reading Input Values (Multiplexing)

230

240 250- 1 260

The DL230 CPU does not have the special V-memory locations that allow you to automatically enable the data transfer. Since all channels are multiplexed into a single data word, the control program must be setup to determine which channel is being read. Since the module appears as X input points to the CPU, it is very easy to use the active channel status bits to determine which channel is being monitored. Note, this example is for a module installed as shown in the previous examples. The addresses used would be different if the module was installed in another I/O arrangement. You can place these rungs anywhere in the program or if you are using stage programming, place them in a stage that is always active.
Load data when module is not busy. X36 LD V40401 ANDD KFFF BCD Store Channel 1 X36 X34 X35
Loads the complete data word into the accumulator. The V-memory location depends on the I/O configuration. See Appendix A for the memory map. This instruction masks the channel identification bits. Without this, the values used will not be correct so do not forget to include it. It is usually easier to perform math operations in BCD, You can leave out this instruction if your application does not require it.

OUT V2000

When the module is not busy and X36, X34 and X35 are off, channel 1 data is stored in V2000.

Store Channel 2 X36 X34 X35

OUT V2001

When the module is not busy and X34 is on and X35 and X36 are off, channel 2 data is stored in V2001.

Store Channel 3 X36 X34 X35

OUT V2002

When the module is not busy and X34 and X36 are off and X35 is on, channel 3 data is stored in V2002.

F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out

Store Channel 4 X36 X34 X35

OUT V2003

When the module is not busy and both X34 and X35 are on and X36 is off, channel 4 data is stored in V2003.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out Combination Analog Single Input Channel Selected (Multiplexing)

14-19

Since you do not have to determine which channel is selected, the single channel program is even simpler.
Store channel 1 when module is not busy. X36 X34 X35 LD V40401 ANDD KFFF BCD
Loads the complete data word into the accumulator. The V-memory location depends on the I/O configuration. See Appendix A for the memory map. This instruction masks the channel identification bits. Without this, the values used will not be correct so do not forget to include it. It is usually easier to perform math operations in BCD. You can leave out this instruction if your application does not require it. When the module is not busy and X34 and X35 are off, channel 1 data is stored in V2000.

OUT V2000

Writing Output Values (Multiplexing)

The DL230 CPU does not have the special V-memory locations that allow you to automatically enable the data transfer. Since all channels are multiplexed into a single data word, the control program must be setup to determine which channel to write. Since the module appears as Y output points to the CPU, it is very easy to use the channel selection outputs to determine which channel to update. Note, this example is for a module installed as shown in the previous examples. The addresses used would be different if the module was used in a different I/O arrangement. You can place these rungs anywhere in the program or if you are using stage programming, place them in a stage that is always active. This example is a two-channel multiplexer that updates each channel on alternate scans. SP7 is a special relay that is on for one scan, then off for one scan. NOTE: You must send binary data to the module. If the data is already in binary format, you should not use the BIN instruction shown in this example.
Load data into the accumulator. SP7 LD V2000 SP7 LD V2001

Loads the data for channel 1 into the accumulator.

F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out

Loads the data for channel 2 into the accumulator.

Send data to V-memory assigned to the module. SP1 Convert the data to binary (you must omit this step if BIN
you have converted the data elsewhere). SP1 is always on. The OUT instruction sends the data to the module. Our example starts with V40501, but the actual value depends on the location of the module in your application.

OUT V40501 Select the channel to update. SP7 Y34

OUT

Selects channel 1 for update when Y34 is OFF (Y35-ON deselects channel 2). Note, Y34 and Y35 are used due to the previous examples. If the module was installed in a different I/O arrangement, the addresses would be different. Selects channel 2 for update when Y35 is OFF (Y34-ON deselects channel 1). Note, Y34 and Y35 are used due to the previous examples. If the module was installed in a different I/O arrangement, addresses would be different.

SP7

Y35
OUT

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

14-20

F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out Combination Analog If you are not using both channels, or if you want to control the updates separately, use the following program.
SP1 LD V2000 BIN ANDD K0FFF OUT V40501 Y34
RST The LD instruction loads the data into the accumulator. Since SP1 is used, this rung automatically executes on every scan. You could also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact. The BIN instruction converts the accumulator data to binary (you must omit this step if you have already converted the data elsewhere). The ANDD instruction masks off the channel select bits to prevent an accidental channel selection. The OUT instruction sends the data to the module. Our example starts with V40501, but the actual value depends on the location of the module in your application. Y34-OFF selects channel 1 for updating.

Sending Data to One Channel (Multiplexing)

Y35
OUT

Y35-ON deselects channel 2 (do not update).

Sending the Same Data to Both Channels (Multiplexing)

If both channel selection outputs are off, both channels will be updated with the same data.
SP1 LD V2000 BIN ANDD K0FFF
The LD instruction loads the data into the accumulator. Since SP1 is used, this rung automatically executes on every scan. You could also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact. The BIN instruction converts the accumulator data to binary (you must omit this step if you have already converted the data elsewhere). The ANDD instruction masks off the channel select bits to prevent an accidental channel selection. The OUT instruction sends the data to the module. Our example starts with V40501, but the actual value depends on the location of the module in your application. Y34-OFF selects channel 1 for updating.

F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out

OUT V40501 Y34

RST

Y35
RST Y35-OFF selects channel 2 for updating.

Analog and Digital Value Conversions

Sometimes it is useful to be able to quickly convert between the signal levels and the digital values. This is especially helpful during machine startup or troubleshooting. The table provides formulas to make this conversion easier.
Range 4 to 20mA If you know the digital value ... A = 16D + 4 4095 If you know the analog signal level ... D = 4095 (A 4) 16 D = 4095 (A 4) 16 4095 D= (10mA 4) 16 D = (255.93) (6)

For example, if you have measured the signal at 10mA, you could use the formula to easily determine the digital value (D) that should be stored in the V-memory location that contains the data.

D = 1536

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out Combination Analog Filtering Input Noise (DL250-1, DL260 CPUs Only)
230

14-21

Add the following logic to filter and smooth analog input noise in DL250--1 or DL260 CPUs. This is especially useful when using PID loops. Noise can be generated by the field device and/or induced by field wiring. The analog value in BCD is first converted to a binary number because there is not a BCD-to-real conversion instruction. Memory location V1400 is the designated workspace in this example. The MULR instruction is the filter factor, which can be from 0.1 to 0.9. The example uses 0.2. A smaller filter factor increases filtering. You can use a higher precision value, but it is not generally needed. The filtered value is then converted back to binary and then to BCD. The filtered value is stored in location V1402 for use in your application or PID loop. NOTE: Be careful not to do a multiple number conversion on a value. For example, if you are using the pointer method to get the analog value, it is in BCD and must be converted to binary. However, if you are using the conventional method of reading analog and are masking the first twelve bits, then it is already in binary and no conversion using the BIN instruction is needed.
SP1 LD V2000
Loads the analog signal, which is a BCD value and has been loaded from V-memory location V2000, into the accumulator. Contact SP1 is always on. Converts the BCD value in the accumulator to binary. Remember, this instruction is not needed if the analog value is originally brought in as a binary number. Converts the binary value in the accumulator to a real number.

240 250- 1 260

BIN

BTOR

SUBR V1400

Subtracts the real number stored in location V1400 from the real number in the accumulator, and stores the result in the accumulator. V1400 is the designated workspace in this example. Multiplies the real number in the accumulator by 0.2 (the filter factor), and stores the result in the accumulator. This is the filtered value. Adds the real number stored in location V1400 to the real number filtered value in the accumulator, and stores the result in the accumulator. Copies the value in the accumulator to location V1400.

F2-4AD2DA 4-Ch. In / 2-Ch. Out

MULR R0.2

ADDR V1400

OUTD V1400

RTOB

Converts the real number in the accumulator to a binary value, and stores the result in the accumulator. Converts the binary value in the accumulator to a BCD number. Note: The BCD instruction is not needed for PID loop PV (loop PV is a binary number). Loads the BCD number filtered value from the accumulator into location V1402 to use in your application or PID loop.

BCD

OUT V1402

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-8AD4DA-1 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Current Comb.

In This Chapter. . . .
Module Specifications Connecting the Field Wiring Module Operation Special V-Memory Locations Writing the Control Program

15

15-2

F2-8AD4DA--1 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination

Module Specifications
The F2-8AD4DA--1 Analog Current Input/Output module provides several hardware features: S Analog inputs and outputs are optically isolated from the PLC logic. S The module has a removable terminal block so the module can be easily removed or changed without disconnecting the wiring. S Updates all input and output channels in one scan. S On-board active analog filtering, two CISC microcontrollers, and CPLD provide digital signal processing to maintain precision analog measurements in noisy environments. S Low-power CMOS design requires only 100mA from an external 18--26.4 VDC power supply. S Input resolution is independently adjustable for each channel. Users may select 12 bit, 14 bit, or 16 bit. S Output resolution is 16 bit. S Broken transmitter detection bit (input < 2mA) for use with 4--20mA input device. S Each input can be independently configured to return the present value, or to track and hold the maximum or minimum value. S No jumper settings. Hardware and Firmware Requirements F2-8AD4DA--1 8--Ch. In / 4 Ch. Out
IN / OUT ANALOG

F2-8AD4DA-1
18-- 26.4VDC @100mA ANALOG 8 IN 0-- 20mA 4 OUT 4-- 20mA 0V OUT2 OUT3 0V IN2 IN3 0V IN6 IN7 24V OUT1 0V OUT4 IN1 0V IN4 IN5 0V IN8

F2-8AD4DA--1

The F2--8AD4DA--1 analog current input/output module requires one of the following components as a CPU or controller: Base Type CPU/Controller Firmware Version D2--250--1 Local Expansion Remote I/O Profibus Slave D2--260 H2--WPLC D2--CM H2--EBC(--F) H2--EBC100 H2--PBC 4.40 or later 2.20 or later pending 1.30 or later 2.1.441 or later 4.0.457 or later pending

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-8AD4DA--1 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination

15-3

The following tables provide the specifications for the F2-8AD4DA--1 Analog Current Input/Output Module. Review these specifications to make sure the module meets your application requirements. Input Specifications
Number of Input Channels Input Range Input Resolution / Value of LSB 8, single ended (one common) 0 to 20mA 12, 14, or 16 bit; selectable 12 bit, 0 to 20mA = 4.88A 14 bit, 0 to 20mA = 1.22A 16 bit, 0 to 20mA = 0.305A Input Impedance Maximum Continuous Overload Loop Supply Voltage Range Filter Characteristics PLC Input Update Rate Sample Duration Time (note 1) Conversion Time (note 1) 100 0.1%, 1/4W 45mA 18 to 26.4VDC Active low pass; -3dB @ 80Hz 8 channels per scan (max. with pointers; local base) 2ms @ 12bit; 5.52ms @ 14bit; 23ms @ 16bit 12 bit = 1.5ms per channel 14 bit = 6ms per channel 16 bit = 25ms per channel Conversion Method Accuracy vs. temperature Input Stability and Repeatability Input Inaccuracy Linearity Error (end to end) Over sampling successive approximation 25ppm/C max. 0.025% of range (after 30 minute warm-up) 0.1% of range max. 12 bit = 2 count max. (0.06% of range) 14 bit = 10 count max. (0.06% of range) 16 bit = 40 count max. (0.06% of range) Monotonic with no missing codes Full Scale Calibration Error (not including offset error) Offset Calibration Error Common Mode Rejection Crosstalk Recommended External Fuse 0.03% of range max. -90dB min. @ DC; -150dB min. @ 50/60Hz 0.025% of range max. @ DC, 50/60Hz 0.032A, Littelfuse series 217 fast-acting, current inputs 0.07% of range max.

Note 1: The values listed for Sample Duration Time and Conversion Time are for a single channel, and do not include PLC scan times.

F2-8AD4DA--1 8--Ch. In / 4--Ch. Out DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

15-4

F2-8AD4DA--1 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination

Output Specifications

Number of Output Channels Output Range Output Resolution Output Type Output Signal at Power-Up & Power-Down External Load Impedance Maximum Inductive Load Allowed Load Type Output Voltage Drop Max. Continuous Output Overload Type of Output Protection PLC Output All Channel Update Time Output Settling Time Output Ripple Accuracy vs. Temperature Output Stability and Repeatability Output Inaccuracy Linearity Error (end to end) Full Scale Calibration Error (not including offset error) Offset Calibration Error Crosstalk at DC, 50/60Hz

4 4 to 20mA 16 bit; 0.244A/bit Current sourcing at 20mA max. 4mA 0-750 1mH Grounded 6V max.; 1V min. Open circuit protected Electronically current limited to 20mA or less 4ms (local base) 0 5ms max 0.5ms max.; ; 5s min min. (full scale change) 0.005% of full scale 25ppm/C max. full scale calibration change (0.0025% of range / C) 1 LSB after 10 minute warm-up typical 0.1% of range max. 33 count max. (0.05% of full scale) Monotonic with no missing codes 0.07% of range max. 0.03% of range max. -70dB or 0.025% of full scale

One count in the specifications table is equal to one least significant bit of the analog data value (1 in 65536).

F2-8AD4DA--1 8--Ch. In / 4 Ch. Out DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-8AD4DA--1 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination

15-5

General Module Specifications

Digital Input and Output Points Required Power Budget Requirement External Power Supply Requirement Field Side to Logic Side Isolation Insulation Resistance Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Relative Humidity Environmental Air Vibration Shock Noise Immunity Emissions Module Location Field Wiring

32 point (X) inputs 32 point (Y) outputs 35mA @ 5VDC (supplied by base) 18 to 26.4VDC, 100mA maximum plus 20mA per output loop 1800VAC applied for 1 second (100% tested) >10M @ 500VDC 0 to 60_C (32 to 140F); IEC60068-2-14 -20 to 70_C (-4 to 158F); IEC60068-2-1, -2-2, -2-14 5 to 95% (non-condensing); IEC60068-2-30 No corrosive gases permitted; EN61131-2 pollution degree 1 MIL STD 810C 514.2; IEC60068-2-6 MIL STD 810C 516.2; IEC60068-2-27 NEMA ICS3-304; IEC61000-4-2, -4-3, -4-4 EN61000-6-4 (conducted and radiated RF emissions) Any non-CPU slot in local, expansion, or Ethernet remote base of DL205 system with DL250-1 or DL260 CPU 19 point removable terminal block included. Optional remote wiring using ZL-CM20 remote feed-through terminal block module and ZL-2CBL2# cable.

Agency Approvals

UL508; UL6079-15 Zone 2; CE (EN61131-2)

Module Placement The F2-8AD4DA--1 analog current input/output module requires 32 discrete input and Configuration and 32 discrete output points. Requirements The module can be installed in any non--CPU slot of D2--250--1 or D2--260 local bases, D2--CM expansion bases, H2--EBC(100)(--F) Ethernet remote bases, H2--PBC Profibus slave bases, or H2--WPLCx--xx WinPLC bases. The module is NOT supported by D2-230, D2-240, or D2-250 CPUs. It is also not supported by D2-RMSM and D2-RSSS remote I/O master/slave modules. The available power budget may also be a limiting factor. Check the user manual for your particular model of CPU and I/O base for more information regarding power budget and number of local, local expansion, or Ethernet remote I/O points.

F2-8AD4DA--1 8--Ch. In / 4--Ch. Out DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

15-6

F2-8AD4DA--1 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination

Connecting the Field Wiring

Wiring Guidelines Your company may have guidelines for wiring and cable installation. If so, you should check those before you begin the installation. Here are some ideas to consider: S Use the shortest wiring route whenever possible. S S S Use shielded wiring and ground the shield at the signal source. Do not ground the shield at both the module and the load or source. Do not run the signal wiring next to large motors, high current switches, or transformers. This may cause noise problems. Route the wiring through an approved cable housing to minimize the risk of accidental damage. Check local and national codes to choose the correct method for your application.

User Power Supply Requirements

The F2-8AD4DA--1 requires at least one field-side power supply. You may use the same or separate power sources for the module supply and loop supply. The module requires 100mA at 18--26.4VDC. In addition, each current loop requires 20mA (a total of 240mA for twelve current loops). If you use a separate power supply, make sure that it meets these requirements. The DL205 bases have built-in 24VDC power supplies that provide up to 300mA of current. You may use this instead of a separate supply if you are using only one combination module with less than ten current loops. It is desirable in some situations to power the loops separately in a location remote from the PLC. This will work as long as the loops power supply meets the voltage and current requirements, and its minus (--) side and the module supplys minus (--) side are connected together. WARNING: If you are using the 24VDC base power supply, make sure you calculate the power budget. Exceeding the power budget can cause unpredictable system operation that can lead to a risk of personal injury or damage to equipment. The DL205 base has a switching type power supply. As a result of switching noise, you may notice 3--5 counts of instability in the analog input data if you use the base power supply. If this is unacceptable, you should try one of the following: 1. Use a separate linear power supply. 2. Connect the 24VDC common to the frame ground, which is the screw terminal marked G on the base.

F2-8AD4DA--1 8--Ch. In / 4 Ch. Out

By using these methods, the input stability is rated at 0.025% of range.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-8AD4DA--1 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination Current Loop Transmitter Impedance

15-7

Standard 0 to 20mA and 4 to 20mA transmitters and transducers can operate from a wide variety of power supplies. Not all transmitters are alike and the manufacturers often specify a minimum loop or load resistance that must be used with the transmitter. The F2-8AD4DA--1 provides 100 Ohms resistance for each input channel. If your transmitter requires a load resistance below 100 Ohms, you do not have to make any adjustments. However, if your transmitter requires a load resistance higher than 100 Ohms, you need to add a resistor in series with the module. Consider the following example for a transmitter being operated from a 24VDC supply with a recommended load resistance of 750 Ohms. Since the module has only 100 Ohms resistance, you need to add an additional resistor. Example:
R = Tr Mr R = 750 100 R 650 R -- resistor to add Tr -- Transmitter total resistance requirement Mr -- Module resistance (internal 100 Ohms)

Two-wire Transmitter + -DC Supply +24V 0V R

Module Channel 1

IN1+ IN-

100 Ohms

In the example, add a 650 Ohm resistor (R) in series with the module.

F2-8AD4DA--1 8--Ch. In / 4--Ch. Out DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

15-8

F2-8AD4DA--1 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination The F2-8AD4DA--1 module has a removable connector to make wiring easier. Simply squeeze the top and bottom retaining clips and gently pull the connector from the module. Use the following diagram to connect the field wiring. The diagram shows one power supply for both the module and the I/O signal loops. If you want to use separate module and loop power supplies, connect the power supply 0V commons together.

Wiring Diagram

Internal module wiring

IN / OUT

ANALOG

+ + + + 3-wire 4-20mA + transmitter

4-20mA output Channel 1 4-20mA output Channel 2 4-20mA output Channel 3 4-20mA output Channel 4

User 24VDC supply 24VDC+ 0VDCOut1 Out2 COM Out3 Out4 COM
100

Isolated analog circuit power

CH1 DAC CH2 DAC CH3 DAC CH4 DAC CH1 ADC CH2 ADC CH3 ADC CH4 ADC CH5 ADC CH6 ADC CH7 ADC CH8 ADC

F2-8AD4DA-1
18-- 26.4VDC @100mA ANALOG 8 IN 0-- 20mA 4 OUT 4-- 20mA 0V OUT2 OUT3 0V IN2 IN3 0V IN6 IN7 24V OUT1 0V OUT4 IN1 0V IN4 IN5 0V IN8

See Note 2
4-20mA transmitter shield, Channel 3

COM In3 COM In5

100 100 100 100

See Note 2
2-wire 4-20mA transmitter 4-20mA transmitter shield, Channel 5

See Note 1
0.032A

COM Transmitter power

AC or DC

100 100 100

See Note 2
4-wire 4-20mA transmitter 4-20mA transmitter shield, Channel 8

In8

See Note 2 Note 1: A Littelfuse Series 217, 0.032A fast-acting fuse is recommended for all 4-20mA current loop inputs. Note 2: Connect shields to ground at their respective signal sources; do not ground both ends of shields.

Isolated analog circuit common

F2-8AD4DA--1 8--Ch. In / 4 Ch. Out DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-8AD4DA--1 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination

15-9

Module Operation
Input Channel Scanning Sequence (Pointer Method) If this module is installed in a local (CPU) base, you can obtain all eight channels of input data in one scan. However, you can obtain only one channel of input data per scan if the module is installed in an expansion, remote I/O, or Profibus slave base.

Scan Read Inputs Execute Application Program Read the data

System with analog module installed in local (CPU) base.

Scan N Scan N+1
Ch 1, 2, 3,... 7, 8 Ch 1, 2, 3,... 7, 8 Ch 1, 2, 3,... 7, 8

Store data

Scan N+2

Scan N+6 Write to Outputs Scan N+7

Ch 1, 2, 3,... 7, 8 Ch 1, 2, 3,... 7, 8

Scan Read Inputs Execute Application Program Read the data

System with analog module installed in expansion, remote I/O or Profibus slave base.
Scan N Scan N+1
Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch 3

Store data

Scan N+2

F2-8AD4DA--1 8--Ch. In / 4--Ch. Out

Scan N+6 Write to Outputs Scan N+7

Ch 7 Ch 8

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

15-10

F2-8AD4DA--1 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination If this module is installed in a local (CPU) base, you can update all four output channels in every scan. However, you can update only one channel of output data per scan if the module is installed in an expansion, remote I/O, or Profibus slave base. The timing is synchronized with the timing of reading the input channels, so you can update each output channel data every eight scans.

Output Channel Update Sequence (Pointer Method)

Scan Read inputs Execute Application Program Calculate the data

Scan N Scan N+1 Scan N+2 Scan N+3

System with analog module installed in local (CPU) base.

Ch 1, 2, 3, 4 Ch 1, 2, 3, 4 Ch 1, 2, 3, 4 Ch 1, 2, 3, 4 Ch 1, 2, 3, 4

Write data

Scan N+4

Write to outputs

Scan Read Inputs Execute Application Program Read the data Scan N Scan N+1

System with analog module installed in expansion, remote I/O or Profibus slave base.
Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch 3 Ch 4

F2-8AD4DA--1 8--Ch. In / 4 Ch. Out

Scan N+2 Store data Scan N+3

Write to Outputs

Scan N+6 Scan N+7 Scan N+8

Ch 1

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-8AD4DA--1 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination Understanding the I/O Assignments

15-11

The F2-8AD4DA--1 module appears to the CPU as 32 discrete input and 32 discrete output points. These points provide the data value, channel identification, and settings for resolution, range, and track and hold feature. You may never have to use these bits, but it may help you understand the data format. Since all input and output points are automatically mapped into V-memory, it is very easy to determine the location of the data words that will be assigned to the module.
F2-8AD4DA--1

Slot 0
8pt Input

Slot 1
8pt Input

Slot 2
16pt Output

Slot 3
32pt In 32pt Out

Slot 4
8pt Output

X0 X7

X10 X17 V40400

Y0 Y17 V40500

X20 Y20 X57 Y57

Y60 Y67 V40503

MSB X 3 7 MSB X 5 7

V40401

LSB X 2 0 LSB X 4 0

MSB Y 3 7 MSB Y 5 7

V40501

LSB Y 2 0 LSB Y 4 0

Input Data Bits

Output Data Bits

V40402

V40502

Within these memory word locations, the individual bits represent specific information about the analog signal. (Your specific memory locations may vary, depending upon the slot location of the F2--8AD4DA--1 module.)

F2-8AD4DA--1 8--Ch. In / 4--Ch. Out DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

15-12

F2-8AD4DA--1 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination Depending upon the resolution selected, up to 16 bits of the first input word represent the analog data in binary format. Bit Value Bit Value 0 1 8 256 1 2 9 512 2 4 10 1024 3 8 11 2048 4 16 12 4096 5 32 13 8192 6 64 14 16384 7 128 15 32768 The upper byte of the second input word represents the broken transmitter detection bits for use only with 4--20mA input devices. The lower byte is not usable by the programmer.

Input Bits

MSB X 3 7 -1 5 X 3 6 -1 4 X 3 5 -1 3 X 3 4 -1 2 XX 33 32 -- -11 10

V40401 X 3 1 -9 X 3 0 -8 X 2 7 -7 X 2 6 -6 X 2 5 -5 X 2 4 -4 X 2 3 -3

LSB X 2 2 -2 X 2 1 -1 X 2 0 -0

= data bits
V40402 LSB X 4 5 -5 X 4 4 -4 X 4 3 -3 X 4 2 -2 X 4 1 -1 X 4 0 -0

MSB X 5 7 -1 5 X 5 6 -1 4 X 5 5 -1 3 X 5 4 -1 2

XX 55 32 -- -11 10

X 5 1 -9

X 5 0 -8

X 4 7 -7

X 4 6 -6

= broken transmitter bits = not usable by programmer

Broken Transmitter Detection Bits (second input word) V40402 X X X X X X X Input Address # 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 Input Bit # 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 BT for Channel # Output Bits 8 7 6 5 4 3 2

X 50 8 1

X 47 7

X 40 ... 0 ...

n/a ... n/a

All 16 bits of the first output word represent the analog data in binary format. Bit Value Bit Value 0 1 8 256 1 2 9 512 2 4 10 1024 3 8 11 2048 4 16 12 4096 5 32 13 8192 6 64 14 16384 7 128 15 32768 The second output word is not usable by the programmer.

MSB Y 3 7 -1 5 Y 3 6 -1 4 Y 3 5 -1 3 Y 3 4 -1 2

V40501 YY 33 32 -- -11 10 Y 3 1 -9 Y 3 0 -8 Y 2 7 -7 Y 2 6 -6 Y 2 5 -5 Y 2 4 -4 Y 2 3 -3

LSB Y 2 2 -2 Y 2 1 -1 Y 2 0 -0

= data bits
V40502 LSB Y 4 5 -5 Y 4 4 -4 Y 4 3 -3 Y 4 2 -2 Y 4 1 -1 Y 4 0 -0

MSB Y 5 7 -1 5 Y 5 6 -1 4 Y 5 5 -1 3 Y 5 4 -1 2 YY 55 32 -- -11 10

F2-8AD4DA--1 8--Ch. In / 4 Ch. Out

Y 5 1 -9

Y 5 0 -8

Y 4 7 -7

Y 4 6 -6

= not usable by programmer

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-8AD4DA--1 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination

15-13

Special V-Memory Locations

The DL250--1 and DL260 CPUs have special V--memory locations assigned to each base slot that greatly simplify the programming requirements. These V--memory locations specify: S S S S S Module Configuration Registers the numbers of input and output channels to scan; the storage locations for the input and output data; the resolution selections for the inputs; the range selections for the inputs and outputs; the track and hold selections for the inputs.

The tables below show the special V--memory used by the CPUs for the CPU base and local expansion base I/O slots. Slot 0 is the module slot next to the CPU or D2--CM module. Slot 1 is the module slot two places from the CPU or D2--CM, and so on. The CPU needs to examine the pointer values at these locations only after a mode transition.
CPU Base: Analog In/Out Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations Slot No. of I/O Channels Enabled & Format Input Pointer Output Pointer Input Resolutions (Reserved) Input Track & Hold 0 V7660 V7670 V7700 1 V7661 V7671 V7701 2 V7662 V7672 V7702 3 V7663 V7673 V7703 4 V7664 V7674 V7704 5 V7665 V7675 V7705 6 V7666 V7676 V7706 7 V7667 V7677 V7707

V36400 V36401 V36402 V36403 V36404 V36405 V36406 V36407 V36410 V36411 V36412 V36413 V36414 V36415 V36416 V36417 V36420 V36421 V36422 V36423 V36424 V36425 V36426 V36427

Expansion Base D2-CM #1: Analog In/Out Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations Slot 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 No. of I/O Channels V36000 V36001 V36002 V36003 V36004 V36005 V36006 V36007 Enabled & Format Input Pointer Output Pointer Input Resolutions (Reserved) Input Track & Hold V36010 V36011 V36012 V36013 V36014 V36015 V36016 V36017 V36020 V36021 V36022 V36023 V36024 V36025 V36026 V36027 V36030 V36031 V36032 V36033 V36034 V36035 V36036 V36037

F2-8AD4DA--1 8--Ch. In / 4--Ch. Out

V36040 V36041 V36042 V36043 V36044 V36045 V36046 V36047 V36050 V36051 V36052 V36053 V36054 V36055 V36056 V36057

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

15-14

F2-8AD4DA--1 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination

Expansion Base D2-CM #2: Analog In/Out Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations Slot 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 No. of I/O Channels V36100 V36101 V36102 V36103 V36104 V36105 V36106 V36107 Enabled & Format Input Pointer Output Pointer Input Resolutions (Reserved) Input Track & Hold V36110 V36111 V36112 V36113 V36114 V36115 V36116 V36117 V36120 V36121 V36122 V36123 V36124 V36125 V36126 V36127 V36130 V36131 V36132 V36133 V36134 V36135 V36136 V36137 V36140 V36141 V36142 V36143 V36144 V36145 V36146 V36147 V36150 V36151 V36152 V36153 V36154 V36155 V36156 V36157

Expansion Base D2-CM #3: Analog In/Out Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations Slot 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 No. of I/O Channels V36200 V36201 V36202 V36203 V36204 V36205 V36206 V36207 Enabled & Format Input Pointer Output Pointer Input Resolutions (Reserved) Input Track & Hold V36210 V36211 V36212 V36213 V36214 V36215 V36216 V36217 V36220 V36221 V36222 V36223 V36224 V36225 V36226 V36227 V36230 V36231 V36232 V36233 V36234 V36235 V36236 V36237 V36240 V36241 V36242 V36243 V36244 V36245 V36246 V36247 V36250 V36251 V36252 V36253 V36254 V36255 V36256 V36257

Expansion Base D2-CM #4: Analog In/Out Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations Slot 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 No. of I/O Channels V36300 V36301 V36302 V36303 V36304 V36305 V36306 V36307 Enabled & Format Input Pointer Output Pointer Input Resolutions (Reserved) Input Track & Hold V36310 V36311 V36312 V36313 V36314 V36315 V36316 V36317 V36320 V36321 V36322 V36323 V36324 V36325 V36326 V36327 V36330 V36331 V36332 V36333 V36334 V36335 V36336 V36337 V36340 V36341 V36342 V36343 V36344 V36345 V36346 V36347 V36350 V36351 V36352 V36353 V36354 V36355 V36356 V36357

F2-8AD4DA--1 8--Ch. In / 4 Ch. Out

Number of I/O Channels Enabled & Data Format

Load this V--memory location with a constant that specifies the number of enabled I/O channels and their data formats. The upper byte applies to the inputs, and the lower byte applies to the outputs. The most significant nibbles specify the data formats, and the least significant nibbles specify the number of channels enabled. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 K01xx K02xx K03xx K04xx K04xx K06xx K07xx K08xx K81xx K82xx K83xx K84xx K85xx K86xx K87xx K88xx Kxx01 Kxx02 Kxx03 Kxx04 n/a Kxx81 Kxx82 Kxx83 Kxx84 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

No. Channels Enabled BCD Input Binary Input BCD Output Binary Output

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-8AD4DA--1 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination Input Resolution Selection Bits

15-15

Each of the eight input channels can be individually disabled or configured for 12, 14, or 16 bit resolution. V36403: (specific memory location varies depending upon base and slot location) 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R-- R-- R-- R-8H 8L 7H 7L R-- R-- R-- R-- R-- R-- R-- R-6H 6L 5H 5L 4H 4L 3H 3L R-- R-- R-- R-2H 2L 1H 1L

RnH = Resolution channel n High bit RnL = Resolution channel n Low bit Input Resolution Select RnH RnL 12 bit 14 bit 16 bit Disabled 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1

Example: Input channels 1--4 are 12 bit, channel 5 is 14 bit, and channel 6 is 16 bit, and channels 7 and 8 are disabled; V36403 = F900(hex): 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R-- R-- R-- R-8H 8L 7H 7L 1 1 1 1 F R-- R-- R-- R-- R-- R-- R-- R-6H 6L 5H 5L 4H 4L 3H 3L 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 9 0 R-- R-- R-- R-2H 2L 1H 1L 0 0 0 0 0

The track and hold feature for each of the eight inputs can be individually configured Input Track and Hold Selection Bits for minimum, maximum, no hold, or reset held value. This configuration can be changed on the fly while the program is running. V36423: (specific memory location varies depending upon base and slot location) 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 T-- T-8H 8L T-- T-7H 7L T-- T-6H 6L T-- T-5H 5L T-- T-4H 4L T-- T-3H 3L T-- T-2H 2L T-- T-1H 1L

TnH = Track and hold channel n High bit TnL = Track and hold channel n Low bit Track and Hold Select TnH TnL Result No Track and Hold Track and Hold Max. Value Reset Track and Hold Value 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 returns real time input value maintains lowest measured value maintains highest measured value resets previously held input value F2-8AD4DA--1 8--Ch. In / 4--Ch. Out Track and Hold Minimum Value 0

Example: Input channel track and hold settings: ch 1--3 = none, ch 4--5 = minimum, ch 6--7 = maximum, ch 8 = reset; V36423 = E940(hex): 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 T-- T-8H 8L 1 1 E T-- T-7H 7L 1 0 T-- T-6H 6L 1 0 9 T-- T-5H 5L 0 1 T-- T-4H 4L 0 1 4 T-- T-3H 3L 0 0 T-- T-2H 2L 0 0 0 T-- T-1H 1L 0 0

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

15-16

F2-8AD4DA--1 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination

Writing the Control Program

Configuring the Module to Read / Write I/O (Pointer Method)
230

240 250- 1 260

These example programs show how to configure the special V--memory locations to read/write data from/to the I/O module. The module configuration rung needs to be read by the CPU only after a mode transition, and does not need to be read every scan. Place the configuration rung anywhere in the ladder program, or in the initial stage if you are using stage programming instructions. This is all that is required to read the input data and write the output data to/from the V-memory locations. Once the input data is in V-memory, you can perform math on the data, compare the data against preset values, and so forth. V2000 and V2020 are used as the beginning of the data areas in the example, but you can use any user V-memory locations. Also, these examples assume that the module is installed in slot 3 of the CPU base. You should use the pointer V-memory locations determined by the layout of your application.

F2-8AD4DA--1 8--Ch. In / 4 Ch. Out DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-8AD4DA--1 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination Module Configuration Example 1: Number of Channels = 8 in, 4 out; Data Format = binary in, BCD out; Input Resolution = 16 bit; Input Track and Hold = none; real time value.
SP0 LD K 8804

15-17

Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the data format. (See note below regarding data format.) The upper byte applies to the inputs. The most significant nibble (MSN) selects the data format (0=BCD, 8=Binary), and the LSN selects the number of channels (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8) to scan. The lower byte applies to the outputs. The most significant nibble (MSN) selects the data format (0=BCD, 8=Binary), and the LSN selects the number of channels (1, 2, 3, or 4) to scan.

OUT V7663 LDA O2000

Special V-memory location assigned to slot 3 that contains the number of input and output channels. This constant designates the first V-memory location that will be used to store the input data. For example, the O2000 entered here would mean: Ch1 - V2000, V2001; Ch2 - V2002, V2003; Ch3 V2004, V2005; Ch4 - V2006, V2007; Ch5 - V2010, V2011; Ch6 V2012, V2013; Ch7 - V2014, V2015; Ch8 - V2016, V2017. For each channel, the 1st word holds the data, and the 2nd word is needed only when displaying 14 or 16 bit data in BCD format. The 2nd word contains the most significant digit in those cases. The constant O2000 is stored here. V7673 is assigned to slot 3 and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the value in this location to determine exactly where to store the incoming data. This constant designates the first V-memory location that will be used for the analog output data. For example, the O2020 entered here would mean: Ch1 - V2020, V2021; Ch2 - V2022, V2023; Ch3 V2024, V2025; Ch4 - V2026, V2027. For each channel, the 1st word holds the data, and the 2nd word is needed only when displaying 14 or 16 bit data in BCD format. The 2nd word contains the most significant digit in those cases. The constant O2020 is stored here. V7703 is assigned to slot 3 and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the value in this location to determine exactly where to obtain the output data. Loads a constant that specifies the resolutions for each of the input channels. This constant is determined by the values of two bits per channel, as shown previously in Input Resolutions Selection Bits. The constant AAAA(hex) configures each of the eight input channels for 16 bits. Special V-memory location assigned to slot 3 that contains the resolution settings for each of the input channels. Loads a constant that specifies the track and hold settings for each of the input channels. This constant is determined by the values of two bits per channel, as previously shown in Track and Hold Selection Bits. The constant 0 configures each of the eight input channels for no track and hold. Special V-memory location assigned to slot 3 that contains the track and hold settings for each of the input channels..

OUT V7673 LDA O2020

OUT V7703 LD KAAAA

OUT V36403 LD K0

F2-8AD4DA--1 8--Ch. In / 4--Ch. Out

OUT V36423

NOTE:

Binary data format is recommended for 14 or 16 bit resolution input data, especially if the input data is to be used in any math instructions (DL205 User Manual, ch. 5). There is only one V-memory word (16 bits) available for the actual input data. Although the 12 bit resolution maximum value of 4095 can be stored in one word using either binary or BCD formats, the 14 and 16 bit resolution maximum values of 16383 and 65535 both exceed the BCD formats maximum single word capacity of 9999. Double word math would be required for 14 or 16 bit data in BCD format. Binary data format is also useful for displaying data on some operator interfaces.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

15-18

F2-8AD4DA--1 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination Module Configuration Example 2: Number of Channels = 4 in, 4 out; Data Format = binary in, BCD out; Input Resolution = 14 bit; Input Track and Hold = all inputs maximum value.
SP0 LD K 8404
Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the data format. (See note below regarding data format.) The upper byte applies to the inputs. The most significant nibble (MSN) selects the data format (0=BCD, 8=Binary), and the LSN selects the number of channels (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8) to scan. The lower byte applies to the outputs. The most significant nibble (MSN) selects the data format (0=BCD, 8=Binary), and the LSN selects the number of channels (1, 2, 3, or 4) to scan.

OUT V7663 LDA O2000

Special V-memory location assigned to slot 3 that contains the number of input and output channels. This constant designates the first V-memory location that will be used to store the input data. For example, the O2000 entered here would mean: Ch1 - V2000, V2001; Ch2 - V2002, V2003; Ch3 V2004, V2005; Ch4 - V2006, V2007. For each channel, the 1st word holds the data, and the 2nd word is needed only when displaying 14 or 16 bit data in BCD format. The 2nd word contains the most significant digit in those cases. The constant O2000 is stored here. V7673 is assigned to slot 3 and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the value in this location to determine exactly where to store the incoming data. This constant designates the first V-memory location that will be used for the analog output data. For example, the O2020 entered here would mean: Ch1 - V2020, V2021; Ch2 - V2022, V2023; Ch3 V2024, V2025; Ch4 - V2026, V2027. For each channel, the 1st word holds the data, and the 2nd word is needed only when displaying 14 or 16 bit data in BCD format. The 2nd word contains the most significant digit in those cases. The constant O2020 is stored here. V7703 is assigned to slot 3 and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the value in this location to determine exactly where to obtain the output data. Loads a constant that specifies the resolutions for each of the input channels. This constant is determined by the values of two bits per channel, as shown previously in Input Resolutions Selection Bits. The constant 5555(hex) configures each of the eight input channels for 14 bits. Special V-memory location assigned to slot 3 that contains the resolution settings for each of the input channels. Loads a constant that specifies the track and hold settings for each of the input channels. This constant is determined by the values of two bits per channel, as previously shown in Track and Hold Selection Bits. The constant AAAA(hex) configures each of the eight input channels to track and hold the maximum value. Special V-memory location assigned to slot 3 that contains the track and hold settings for each of the input channels..

OUT V7673 LDA O2020

OUT V7703 LD K5555

OUT V36403 LD KAAAA

F2-8AD4DA--1 8--Ch. In / 4 Ch. Out

OUT V36423

NOTE:

Binary data format is recommended for 14 or 16 bit resolution input data, especially if the input data is to be used in any math instructions (DL205 User Manual, ch. 5). There is only one V-memory word (16 bits) available for the actual input data. Although the 12 bit resolution maximum value of 4095 can be stored in one word using either binary or BCD formats, the 14 and 16 bit resolution maximum values of 16383 and 65535 both exceed the BCD formats maximum single word capacity of 9999. Double word math would be required for 14 or 16 bit data in BCD format. Binary data format is also useful for displaying data on some operator interfaces.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-8AD4DA--1 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination Module Configuration Example 3: Number of Channels = 4 in, 2 out; Data Format = BCD in, BCD out; Input Resolution = 12 bit; Input Track and Hold = all inputs minimum value.
SP0 LD K 0402

15-19

Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the data format. (See note below regarding data format.) (The leading zero in this LD instruction is shown for clarity. It can be entered by the programmer, but it will be dropped by the programming software.) The upper byte applies to the inputs. The most significant nibble (MSN) selects the data format (0=BCD, 8=Binary), and the LSN selects the number of channels (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8) to scan. The lower byte applies to the outputs. The most significant nibble (MSN) selects the data format (0=BCD, 8=Binary), and the LSN selects the number of channels (1, 2, 3, or 4) to scan.

OUT V7663 LDA O2000

Special V-memory location assigned to slot 3 that contains the number of input and output channels. This constant designates the first V-memory location that will be used to store the input data. For example, the O2000 entered here would mean: Ch1 - V2000, V2001; Ch2 - V2002, V2003; Ch3 V2004, V2005; Ch4 - V2006, V2007. For each channel, the 1st word holds the data, and the 2nd word is needed only when displaying 14 or 16 bit data in BCD format. The 2nd word contains the most significant digit in those cases. The constant O2000 is stored here. V7673 is assigned to slot 3 and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the value in this location to determine exactly where to store the incoming data. This constant designates the first V-memory location that will be used for the analog output data. For example, the O2020 entered here would mean: Ch1 - V2020, V2021; Ch2 - V2022, V2023. For each channel, the 1st word holds the data, and the 2nd word is needed only when displaying 14 or 16 bit data in BCD format. The 2nd word contains the most significant digit in those cases. The constant O2020 is stored here. V7703 is assigned to slot 3 and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the value in this location to determine exactly where to obtain the output data. Loads a constant that specifies the resolutions for each of the input channels. This constant is determined by the values of two bits per channel, as shown previously in Input Resolutions Selection Bits. The constant 0 configures each of the eight input channels for 12 bits. Special V-memory location assigned to slot 3 that contains the resolution settings for each of the input channels. Loads a constant that specifies the track and hold settings for each of the input channels. This constant is determined by the values of two bits per channel, as previously shown in Track and Hold Selection Bits. The constant 5555(hex) configures each of the eight input channels to track and hold the minimum value. Special V-memory location assigned to slot 3 that contains the track and hold settings for each of the input channels..

OUT V7673 LDA O2020

OUT V7703 LD K0

OUT V36403 LD K5555

F2-8AD4DA--1 8--Ch. In / 4--Ch. Out

OUT V36423

NOTE:

Binary data format is recommended for 14 or 16 bit resolution input data, especially if the input data is to be used in any math instructions (DL205 User Manual, ch. 5). There is only one V-memory word (16 bits) available for the actual input data. Although the 12 bit resolution maximum value of 4095 can be stored in one word using either binary or BCD formats, the 14 and 16 bit resolution maximum values of 16383 and 65535 both exceed the BCD formats maximum single word capacity of 9999. Double word math would be required for 14 or 16 bit data in BCD format. Binary data format is also useful for displaying data on some operator interfaces.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

15-20

F2-8AD4DA--1 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination

Module 12 Bit Input Resolution

When the module 0--20mA inputs are configured for 12 bit resolution, the analog signal is converted into 4096 (212) counts ranging from 0 -- 4095. For example, a 0mA signal would be 0, and a 20mA signal would be 4095. This is equivalent to a binary value of 0000 0000 0000 to 1111 1111 1111, or 000 to FFF hexadecimal. The diagram shows how this relates to the signal range. Each count can also be expressed in terms of the signal level by using the equation shown.

0 -- 20mA
20mA

12 Bit Resolution

0mA 0 4095

12 Bit Resolution = H L 4095 H = high limit of the signal range L = low limit of the signal range 20mA / 4095 = 4.88A per count

Module 14 Bit Input Resolution

When the module 0--20mA inputs are configured for 14 bit resolution, the analog signal is converted into 16384 (214) counts ranging from 0 -- 16383. For example, a 0mA signal would be 0, and a 20mA signal would be 16383. This is equivalent to a binary value of 00 0000 0000 0000 to 11 1111 1111 1111, or 0000 to 3FFF hexadecimal. The diagram shows how this relates to the signal range. Each count can also be expressed in terms of the signal level by using the equation shown.

0 -- 20mA
20mA

14 Bit Resolution

0mA 0 16383

14 Bit Resolution = H L 16383 H = high limit of the signal range L = low limit of the signal range 20mA / 16383 = 1.22A per count

Module 16 Bit Input Resolution

When the module 0--20mA inputs are configured for 16 bit resolution, the analog signal is converted into 65536 (216) counts ranging from 0 -- 65535. For example, a 0mA signal would be 0, and a 20mA signal would be 65535. This is equivalent to a binary value of 0000 0000 0000 0000 to 1111 1111 1111 1111, or 0000 to FFFF hexadecimal. The diagram shows how this relates to the signal range. Each count can also be expressed in terms of the signal level by using the equation shown.

0 -- 20mA
20mA

16 Bit Input Resolution

0mA 0 65535

16 Bit Resolution = H L 65535 H = high limit of the signal range L = low limit of the signal range 20mA / 65535 = 0.305A per count

F2-8AD4DA--1 8--Ch. In / 4 Ch. Out

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-8AD4DA--1 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination

15-21

Analog and Digital Sometimes it is useful to be able to quickly convert between the signal levels and the digital values. This is especially helpful during machine startup or Input Data Value troubleshooting. The table provides formulas to make this conversion easier. Conversion A = (D)(Amax) / (Dmax) D = (A)(Dmax) / (Amax) S A = Analog value from current transmitter S Amax = Maximum analog value S D = Digital value of input provided to PLC CPU S Dmax = Maximum digital value
If you know the analog signal level... D = (A)(4095) / 20 D = (A)(16383) / 20 D = (A)(65535) / 20 D = (A) 65535 20 D = (12) (3276.75) D = 39321

Resolution 12 bit 0--4095 14 bit 0--16383 16 bit 0--65535

X-mitter Range 0--20mA 4--20mA 0--20mA 4--20mA 0--20mA 4--20mA

If you know the digital value... A = (D)(20) / 4095 A = (D)(20) / 16383 A = (D)(20) / 65535

For example, if you are using 16 bit resolution, and have measured the signal at 12mA, you could use the formula to easily determine the digital value (D) that should be stored in the V-memory location that contains the data.

Notice that the mathematical relationship between the analog and digital values remains the same regardless of whether 4--20mA or 0--20mA transmitters are used. Only the engineering unit input scaling will vary, as shown later. Input Value Comparisons: Analog, Digital, Engineering Units The following table shows how the input analog, digital, and engineering unit values are related to each other. The example is a measurement of pressure from 0.0 to 140.0 PSI, using a multiplier of 10 for one implied decimal place.
Analog (mA) 20 12 10 4 0 Digital 12 Bit 4095 2457 2048 819 0 Digital 14 Bit 16383 9830 8192 3277 0 Digital 16 Bit 65535 39321 32768 13107 0 E.U. 0-20mA Transmitter 1400 840 700 280 0 E.U. 4-20mA Transmitter 1400 700 525 0 N/A

F2-8AD4DA--1 8--Ch. In / 4--Ch. Out DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

15-22

F2-8AD4DA--1 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination Most applications require measurements in engineering units, which provide more meaningful data. This can be accomplished by using the conversion formulas shown below: EU = (A -- Aoffset)(EUH -- EUL) / (Amax -- Aoffset) EU = (D -- Doffset)(EUH -- EUL) / (Dmax -- Doffset) S S S S S S S A = analog value from current transmitter Aoffset = 4mA offset when using 4--20mA current transmitter D = digital value of input provided to PLC CPU Doffset = digital value of 4mA offset with 4--20mA current transmitter EU = engineering units EUH = engineering units high value EUL = engineering units low value

Scaling the Input Data

The following examples show a 16 bit measurement of pressure (PSI) from 0.0 to 140.0. You need to multiply the analog value by 10 in order to imply a decimal place when you view the value with the programming software or a handheld programmer. Notice how the calculations differ when you use the multiplier.
Analog Value of 12.6mA, 4--20mA transmitter, 16 bit resolution, should yield 75.2 PSI Example without multiplier EU = (D Doffset) EU H EU L D max D offset 140 0 65535 13107 Example with multiplier EU = (10)(D Doffset) EU H EU L D max D offset 140 0 65535 13107

EU = (41287 13107) EU = 75
Handheld Display

EU = (10)(41287 13107) EU = 752

Handheld Display

V 2001 V 2000 0000 0075

V 2001 V 2000 0000 0752

This value is more accurate NOTE:

Binary data format is recommended for 14 or 16 bit resolution input data, especially if the input data is to be used in any math instructions (DL205 User Manual, ch. 5). There is only one V-memory word (16 bits) available for the actual input data. Although the 12 bit resolution maximum value of 4095 can be stored in one word using either binary or BCD formats, the 14 and 16 bit resolution maximum values of 16383 and 65535 both exceed the BCD formats maximum single word capacity of 9999. Double word math would be required for 14 or 16 bit data in BCD format. Binary data format is also useful for displaying data on some operator interfaces.

F2-8AD4DA--1 8--Ch. In / 4 Ch. Out

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-8AD4DA--1 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination Input Engineering Unit Conversion Example 1: Data Format = BCD; Channel 1 data memory location = V2000; Channel 1 resolution = 12 bits; Channel 1 engineering units = 0.0 to 140.0psi; Channel 1 input device = 0 to 20mA transmitter.
Note, this example uses SP1 (which is always on) as a permissive contact for the engineering unit conversion. You could also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact.

15-23

SP1

LD V2000 MUL K1400 DIV K4095 OUT V2100

Load input channel 1 digital value into accumulator. Multiply by 1400; EU range X 10 for implied decimal. Divide by 4095; 12 bit digital range for 0-20mA. Store input EU value in V2100.

Input Engineering Unit Conversion Example 2: Data Format = binary; Channel 1 data memory location = V2000; Channel 1 resolution = 14 bits; Channel 1 engineering units = 0.0 to 140.0psi; Channel 1 input device = 0 to 20mA transmitter.
Note, this example uses SP1 (which is always on) as a permissive contact for the engineering unit conversion. You could also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact.

SP1

LD V2000 MULB K578 DIVB K3FFF OUT V2100

Load input channel 1 digital value into accumulator. Multiply by 1400 [hex 578]; EU range X 10 for implied decimal. Divide by 16383 [hex 3FFF]; 14 bit digital range for 0-20mA. (Use 65535 [KFFFF] for 16 bit; 4095 [KFFF] for 12 bit.) Store input EU value in V2100.

F2-8AD4DA--1 8--Ch. In / 4--Ch. Out DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

15-24

F2-8AD4DA--1 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination Input Engineering Unit Conversion Example 3: Data Format = BCD; Channel 1 data memory location = V2000; Channel 1 resolution = 12 bits; Channel 1 engineering units = 0.0 to 140.0psi; Channel 1 input device = 4 to 20mA transmitter.

SP0

LD K819 OUT V2030

Load constant 819 into accumulator; 12 bit digital value for 4mA offset. Store input offset value in V2030.

V2000 C0

K819

C0
OUT

C0 is on when analog input is less than 4mA; 819 = 4mA @ 12 bits. (This rung not used if input transmitter is 0-20mA.) Load input channel 1 digital value into accumulator. (If input not less than 4mA.) Subtract 819; 12 bit digital value for 4mA offset. (This rung not used if input transmitter is 0-20mA.) Multiply by 1400; EU range X 10 for implied decimal. Divide by 3276; 12 bit digital range for 4-20mA. (For 0-20mA xmitter: use 4095.) Store input EU value in V2100. Load value of 0 into accumulator. (If input less than 4mA.) (This rung not used if input transmitter is 0-20mA.) Store value of 0 in V2100 (This rung not used if input transmitter is 0-20mA.)

LD V2000 SUB V2030 MUL K1400 DIV K3276 OUT V2100

C0

LD K0 OUT V2100

F2-8AD4DA--1 8--Ch. In / 4 Ch. Out DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-8AD4DA--1 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination Input Engineering Unit Conversion Example 4: Data Format = binary; Channel 1 data memory location = V2000; Channel 1 resolution = 16 bits; Channel 1 engineering units = 0.0 to 140.0psi; Channel 1 input device = 4 to 20mA transmitter.

15-25

V2000

K3333

C0
OUT

C0

C0 is on when analog input is less than 4mA; 3333 hex = 13107 = 4mA @ 16 bits. (Use KCCD for 14 bit; K333 for 12 bit.) (This rung not used if input transmitter is 0-20mA.) Load input channel 1 digital value into accumulator. (If input not less than 4mA.) Convert from binary to real data format. Subtract 13107; 16 bit digital value for 4mA offset. (Use R3277 for 14 bit; R819 for 12 bit.) (This rung not used if input transmitter is 0-20mA.) Multiply by 1400; EU range X 10 for implied decimal. Divide by 5248; 16 bit digital range for 4-20mA. (Use R13106 for 14 bit; R3276 for 12 bit.) (For 0-20mA xmitter: use 16 bit R65535, 14 bit R16383, 12 bit R4095.) Convert to binary data format.

LD V2000 BTOR SUBR R13107 MULR R1400 DIVR R52428 RTOB OUT V2100

Store input EU value in V2100. Load value of 0 into accumulator. (If input less than 4mA.) (This rung not used if input transmitter is 0-20mA.) Store value of 0 in V2100 (This rung not used if input transmitter is 0-20mA.)

C0

LD K0 OUT V2100

Using the Input Track and Hold Feature

The input Track and Hold feature allows the individual inputs to be separately configured to maintain their maximum or minimum data values. If No Track and Hold is selected, the present real time value of the input will be stored in the input data V--memory location. If Track and Hold Minimum Value is selected, the first input value less than or equal to full scale will be read and maintained until a lower value is measured, or until Track and Hold is Reset. If Maximum Value is selected, the first input value greater than or equal to zero will be read and maintained until a higher value is measured, or until Track and Hold is Reset. To Reset Track and Hold, write a value of one to the Track and Hold selection high and low bits. When Track and Hold is Reset, the module will display the real--time input value. When the selection is changed from Reset to Minimum Value or Maximum Value, the input will start over as described previously.

F2-8AD4DA--1 8--Ch. In / 4--Ch. Out

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

15-26

F2-8AD4DA--1 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination Track and Hold Example: Number of Channels = 1 in, 1 out; Data Format = binary in, binary out; Input Resolution = 16 bit; Input Track and Hold = channel 1 reset.
SP0 LD K 8181 OUT V7663 LDA O2000 OUT V7673 LDA O2020 OUT V7703 LD K2 OUT V36403 LD K3 OUT V36423 C1 LD K2 OUT V36423 C3 LD K3 OUT V36423 C5 LD K1 OUT V36423
C1 loads value of 2 (binary 10) into the Track and Hold Selection register. This sets input channel 1 for Track and Hold Maximum Value. As the analog value varies, only a measured value higher than the previously stored value will be written to V2000. Rung 1, Module Configuration: Input: binary data format, 1 channel. Output: binary data format, 1 channel. Module location: local base, slot 3. Input data 1st memory location: V2000 Output data 1st memory location: V2020 Input resolution: 16 bit channel 1. Input Track and Hold: reset channel 1.

C3 loads a value of 3 (binary 11) into the Track and Hold Selection register. This sets input channel 1 for Track and Hold Reset Value. Real-time measured values will be written to V2000 until another Track and Hold Selection is made.

F2-8AD4DA--1 8--Ch. In / 4 Ch. Out

C5 loads value of 1 (binary 01) into the Track and Hold Selection register. This sets input channel 1 for Track and Hold Minimum Value. As the analog value varies, only a measured value lower than the previously stored stored will be written to V2000.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-8AD4DA--1 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination Module 16 Bit Output Resolution

15-27

Since the 4--20mA output module has 16 bit resolution, the analog signal is converted into 65536 (216) counts ranging from 0 -- 65535. For example, a 4mA signal would be 0, and a 20mA signal would be 65535. This is equivalent to a binary value of 0000 0000 0000 0000 to 1111 1111 1111 1111, or 0000 to FFFF hexadecimal. The diagram shows how this relates to the signal range. Each count can also be expressed in terms of the signal level by using the equation shown.

4 -- 20mA

16 Bit Output Resolution

20mA

4mA 0 65535

Resolution = H L 65535 H = high limit of the signal range L = low limit of the signal range 16mA / 65535 = 0.244A per count

Digital and Analog Sometimes it is useful to be able to quickly convert between the signal levels and Output Data Value the digital values. This is especially helpful during machine startup or troubleshooting. The table provides formulas to make this conversion easier. Conversion A = Amin + [(D)(Amax --Amin) / (Dmax)] D = (A--Amin)(Dmax) / (Amax --Amin) S A = Analog current output value S Amax = Maximum analog value S Amin = Minimum analog value S D = Digital value from PLC CPU S Dmax = Maximum digital value
If you know the analog signal level... D = (A-- 4)(65535) / 16 D = (10 4) 65535 16 D = (6)(4095.94) D = 24576

Resolution 16 bit 0--65535

Output Range 4--20mA

If you know the digital value... A = 4 + [(D)(16) / 65535]

For example, if you need to produce an analog output signal of 10mA, you could use the formula to easily determine the digital value (D) that should be stored in the V-memory location that contains the data for output. Output Value Comparisons: Analog, Digital, Engineering Units

The following table shows how the input analog, digital, and engineering unit values are related to each other. The example is a measurement of pressure from 0.0 to 140.0 PSI, using a multiplier of 10 for one implied decimal place.
Analog (mA) 20 12 10 4 Digital 16 Bit 65535 32768 24576 0 E.U.

F2-8AD4DA--1 8--Ch. In / 4--Ch. Out

1400 700 525 0

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

15-28

F2-8AD4DA--1 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Current Combination

Calculating the Digital Output Value

Your program must calculate the digital value to send to the 16 bit analog output module. There are many ways to do this, but most applications are understood more easily if you use measurements in engineering units. This is accomplished by using the conversion formula shown. You may have to make adjustments to the formula depending on the scale you choose for the engineering units.

D = EU

D max EU H EU L

D = digital value EU = engineering units EUH = engineering unit range high limit EUL = engineering unit range low limit

Consider the following example which controls pressure from 0.0 to 140.0 PSI. By using the formula, you can determine the digital value that should be sent to the module. The example shows the conversion required to yield 52.5 PSI. Notice the formula divides by 10, because the BCD representation of 52.5 includes a multiplier of 10 to allow for the implied decimal. The division corrects for the multiplier.
D = 10EU D max 10(EU H EU L) D = 525 65535 10(140) D = 24576

Calculating Output Data; Engineering Units Conversion

The example program shows how you would write the program to perform the engineering unit conversion to output 16 bit data format 0 -- 65535. This example assumes you have calculated or loaded the engineering unit values, including a multiplier of 10, in BCD format and stored it in V2120 for output channel 1. Output Engineering Unit Conversion / Output Data Calculation Example: Data Format = binary; Channel 1 data memory location = V2020; Channel 1 engineering units = 0 to 140psi.
Note, this example uses SP1 (which is always on) as a permissive contact for the engineering unit conversion. You could also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact.

SP1

LD V2120 BIN MULB KFFFF DIVB K578

Load output channel data value into accumulator; BCD EU value X 10 for implied decimal. Convert from BCD to binary data format. Multiply by 65535; FFFF hex = 65535; 16 bit maximum digital value. Divide by 1400; 578 hex = 1400; EU range X 10 for implied decimal. Store output digital value in V2020.

F2-8AD4DA--1 8--Ch. In / 4 Ch. Out

OUT V2020

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-8AD4DA-2 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Comb.

In This Chapter. . . .
Module Specifications Connecting the Field Wiring Module Operation Special V-Memory Locations Writing the Control Program

16

16-2
F2-8AD4DA--2 8--Ch. In / 4 Ch. Out

F2-8AD4DA--2 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination

Module Specifications
The F2-8AD4DA--2 Analog Voltage Input/Output module provides several hardware features: S Analog inputs and outputs are optically isolated from the PLC logic. S The module has a removable terminal block so the module can be easily removed or changed without disconnecting the wiring. S Updates all input and output channels in one scan. S On-board active analog filtering, two CISC microcontrollers, and CPLD provide digital signal processing to maintain precision analog measurements in noisy environments. S Low-power CMOS design requires only 80mA from an external 18--26.4 VDC power supply. S Input resolution is independently adjustable for each channel. Users may select 12 bit, 14 bit, or 16 bit. S Output resolution is 16 bit. S Each input can be independently configured to return the present value, or to track and hold the maximum or minimum value. S No jumper settings.

IN / OUT

ANALOG

F2-8AD4DA-2
18-- 26.4VDC @80mA ANALOG 8 IN 0-- 5/0-- 10V 4 OUT 0-- 5/0-- 10V 0V OUT2 OUT3 0V IN2 IN3 0V IN6 IN7 24V OUT1 0V OUT4 IN1 0V IN4 IN5 0V IN8

F2-8AD4DA--2

Hardware and Firmware Requirements

The F2--8AD4DA--2 analog voltage input/output module requires one of the following components as a CPU or controller: Base Type CPU/Controller Firmware Version D2--250--1 Local Expansion Remote I/O Profibus Slave D2--260 H2--WPLC D2--CM H2--EBC(--F) H2--EBC100 H2--PBC 4.40 or later 2.20 or later pending 1.30 or later 2.1.441 or later 4.0.457 or later pending

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-8AD4DA--2 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination

16-3
F2-8AD4DA--2 8--Ch. In / 4--Ch. Out

The following tables provide the specifications for the F2-8AD4DA--2 Analog Voltage Input/Output Module. Review these specifications to make sure the module meets your application requirements. Input Specifications
Number of Input Channels Input Range Input Resolution / Value of LSB 8, single ended (one common) 0 to 5V, 0 to 10V 12, 14, or 16 bit; selectable 12 bit, 0 to 5V = 1.22mV 12 bit, 0 to 10V = 2.44mV 14 bit, 0 to 5V = 305V 14 bit, 0 to 10V = 610V 16 bit, 0 to 5V = 76V 16 bit, 0 to 10V = 152V Input Impedance Maximum Continuous Overload Filter Characteristics PLC Input Update Rate Sample Duration Time (note 1) Conversion Time (note 1) 1 5% 100V Active low pass; -3dB @ 80Hz 8 channels per scan (max. with pointers; local base) 2ms @ 12bit; 5.52ms @ 14bit; 23ms @ 16bit 12 bit = 1.5ms per channel 14 bit = 6ms per channel 16 bit = 25ms per channel Conversion Method Accuracy vs. temperature Input Stability and Repeatability Input Inaccuracy Linearity Error (end to end) Over sampling successive approximation 25ppm/C max. 0.03% of range (after 30 minute warm-up) 0.1% of range max. 12 bit = 2 count max. (0.06% of range) 14 bit = 10 count max. (0.06% of range) 16 bit = 40 count max. (0.06% of range) Monotonic with no missing codes Full Scale Calibration Error (not including offset error) Offset Calibration Error Common Mode Rejection Crosstalk 0.025% of range max. -90dB min. @ DC; -150dB min. @ 50/60Hz 0.025% of range max. @ DC, 50/60Hz 0.07% of range max.

Note 1: The values listed for Sample Duration Time and Conversion Time are for a single channel, and do not include PLC scan times.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

16-4
F2-8AD4DA--2 8--Ch. In / 4 Ch. Out

F2-8AD4DA--2 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination

Output Specifications

Number of Output Channels Output Range Output Resolution Output Type Output Signal at Power-Up & Power-Down Output Impedance External Load Impedance Maximum Capacitive Load Allowed Load Type Max. Continuous Output Overload Type of Output Protection PLC Output All Channel Update Time Output Settling Time Output Ripple Accuracy vs. Temperature Output Stability and Repeatability Output Inaccuracy Linearity Error (end to end) Full Scale Calibration Error (not including offset error) Offset Calibration Error Crosstalk at DC, 50/60Hz

4 0 to 5V, 0 to 10V 16 bit; 76V/bit @ 0 to 5V; 152V/bit @ 0 to 10V Voltage sourcing/sinking at 10mA max. 0V 0.2 typical >1000 0.1F Grounded Limited to 15mA typical 15VDC Peak Output Voltage (clamped by transient voltage suppressor) 4ms (local base) 0 5ms max 0.5ms max.; ; 5s min min. (full scale change) 0.005% of full scale 25ppm/C max. full scale calibration change (0.0025% of range / C) 1 LSB after 10 minute warm-up typical 0.1% of range max. 33 count max. (0.05% of full scale) Monotonic with no missing codes 0.07% of range max. 0.03% of range max. -70dB or 0.025% of full scale

One count in the specifications table is equal to one least significant bit of the analog data value (1 in 65536).

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-8AD4DA--2 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination

16-5
F2-8AD4DA--2 8--Ch. In / 4--Ch. Out

General Module Specifications

Digital Input and Output Points Required Power Budget Requirement External Power Supply Requirement Field Side to Logic Side Isolation Insulation Resistance Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Relative Humidity Environmental Air Vibration Shock Noise Immunity Emissions Module Location Field Wiring

32 point (X) inputs 32 point (Y) outputs 35mA @ 5VDC (supplied by base) 18 to 26.4VDC, 80mA maximum 1800VAC applied for 1 second (100% tested) >10M @ 500VDC 0 to 60_C (32 to 140F); IEC60068-2-14 -20 to 70_C (-4 to 158F); IEC60068-2-1, -2-2, -2-14 5 to 95% (non-condensing); IEC60068-2-30 No corrosive gases permitted; EN61131-2 pollution degree 1 MIL STD 810C 514.2; IEC60068-2-6 MIL STD 810C 516.2; IEC60068-2-27 NEMA ICS3-304; IEC61000-4-2, -4-3, -4-4 EN61000-6-4 (conducted and radiated RF emissions) Any non-CPU slot in local, expansion, or Ethernet remote base of DL205 system with DL250-1 or DL260 CPU 19 point removable terminal block included. Optional remote wiring using ZL-CM20 remote feed-through terminal block module and ZL-2CBL2# cable.

Agency Approvals

UL508; UL6079-15 Zone 2; CE (EN61131-2)

Module Placement The F2-8AD4DA--2 analog voltage input/output module requires 32 discrete input and Configuration and 32 discrete output points. Requirements The module can be installed in any non--CPU slot of D2--250--1 or D2--260 local bases, D2--CM expansion bases, H2--EBC(100)(--F) Ethernet remote bases, H2--PBC Profibus slave bases, or H2--WPLCx--xx WinPLC bases. The module is NOT supported by D2-230, D2-240, or D2-250 CPUs. It is also not supported by D2-RMSM and D2-RSSS remote I/O master/slave modules. The available power budget may also be a limiting factor. Check the user manual for your particular model of CPU and I/O base for more information regarding power budget and number of local, local expansion, or Ethernet remote I/O points.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

16-6
F2-8AD4DA--2 8--Ch. In / 4 Ch. Out

F2-8AD4DA--2 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination

Connecting the Field Wiring

Wiring Guidelines Your company may have guidelines for wiring and cable installation. If so, you should check those before you begin the installation. Here are some ideas to consider: S Use the shortest wiring route whenever possible. S S S Use shielded wiring and ground the shield at the signal source. Do not ground the shield at both the module and the load or source. Do not run the signal wiring next to large motors, high current switches, or transformers. This may cause noise problems. Route the wiring through an approved cable housing to minimize the risk of accidental damage. Check local and national codes to choose the correct method for your application. Unused inputs should be shorted together and connected to common.

S User Power Supply Requirements

The F2-8AD4DA--2 requires at least one field-side power supply. You may use the same or separate power sources for the module supply and transmitter supply. The module requires 80mA at 18--26.4VDC. The DL205 bases have built-in 24VDC power supplies that provide up to 300mA of current. You may use this instead of a separate supply if you are using only a few modules. It is desirable in some situations to power the transmitters separately in a location remote from the PLC. This will work as long as the transmitters power supply meets the voltage and current requirements, and the transmitter supplys minus (--) side is connected together with the module supplys minus (--) side. WARNING: If you are using the 24VDC base power supply, make sure you calculate the power budget. Exceeding the power budget can cause unpredictable system operation that can lead to a risk of personal injury or damage to equipment. The DL205 base has a switching type power supply. As a result of switching noise, you may notice 3--5 counts of instability in the analog input data if you use the base power supply. If this is unacceptable, you should try one of the following: 1. Use a separate linear power supply. 2. Connect the 24VDC common to the frame ground, which is the screw terminal marked G on the base. By using these methods, the input stability is rated at 0.03% of range.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-8AD4DA--2 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination Wiring Diagram

16-7
F2-8AD4DA--2 8--Ch. In / 4--Ch. Out

The F2-8AD4DA--2 module has a removable connector to make wiring easier. Simply squeeze the top and bottom retaining clips and gently pull the connector from the module. Use the following diagram to connect the field wiring. The diagram shows one power supply for both the module and the I/O signal loops. If you want to use separate module and transmitter power supplies, connect the power supply 0V commons together.
IN / OUT ANALOG

Internal module wiring

+ + + + 3-wire voltage transmitter

Voltage output Channel 1 Voltage output Channel 2 Voltage output Channel 3 Voltage output Channel 4

User 24VDC supply 24VDC+ 0VDCOut 1 Out 2 COM Out 3 Out 4 COM See Note 2 See Note 1 COM In 3 See Note 2 COM In 5

Isolated analog circuit power

CH1 DAC CH2 DAC CH3 DAC CH4 DAC CH1 ADC CH2 ADC CH3 ADC CH4 ADC CH5 ADC CH6 ADC CH7 ADC CH8 ADC

F2-8AD4DA-2
18-- 26.4V 80mA 8 INPUTS 0-- 5/1-- 10V 4 OUTPUTS 0-- 5/0-- 10V 0V OUT2 OUT3 0V IN2 IN3 0V IN6 IN7 24V OUT1 0V OUT4 IN1 0V IN4 IN5 0V IN8

Voltage transmitter shield, Channel 3

See Note 1
2-wire voltage transmitter Voltage transmitter shield, Channel 5

COM Transmitter power

AC or DC

See Note 1
Voltage transmitter shield, Channel 8

See Note 2 In 8

4-wire voltage transmitter

See Note 1 Note 1: Connect shields to ground at their respective sources; do not ground both ends of shield. Note 2: Short unused inputs together and connect them to common.

Isolated analog circuit common

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

16-8
F2-8AD4DA--2 8--Ch. In / 4 Ch. Out

F2-8AD4DA--2 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination

Module Operation
Input Channel Scanning Sequence (Pointer Method) If this module is installed in a local (CPU) base, you can obtain all eight channels of input data in one scan. However, you can obtain only one channel of input data per scan if the module is installed in an expansion, remote I/O, or Profibus slave base.

Scan Read Inputs Execute Application Program Read the data

System with analog module installed in local (CPU) base.

Scan N Scan N+1
Ch 1, 2, 3,... 7, 8 Ch 1, 2, 3,... 7, 8 Ch 1, 2, 3,... 7, 8

Store data

Scan N+2

Scan N+6 Write to Outputs Scan N+7

Ch 1, 2, 3,... 7, 8 Ch 1, 2, 3,... 7, 8

Scan Read Inputs Execute Application Program Read the data

System with analog module installed in expansion, remote I/O or Profibus slave base.
Scan N Scan N+1
Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch 3

Store data

Scan N+2

Scan N+6 Write to Outputs Scan N+7

Ch 7 Ch 8

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-8AD4DA--2 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination Output Channel Update Sequence (Pointer Method)

16-9
F2-8AD4DA--2 8--Ch. In / 4--Ch. Out

If this module is installed in a local (CPU) base, you can update all four output channels in every scan. However, you can update only one channel of output data per scan if the module is installed in an expansion, remote I/O, or Profibus slave base. The timing is synchronized with the timing of reading the input channels, so you can update each output channel data every eight scans.

Scan Read inputs Execute Application Program Calculate the data

Scan N Scan N+1 Scan N+2 Scan N+3

System with analog module installed in local (CPU) base.

Ch 1, 2, 3, 4 Ch 1, 2, 3, 4 Ch 1, 2, 3, 4 Ch 1, 2, 3, 4 Ch 1, 2, 3, 4

Write data

Scan N+4

Write to outputs

Scan Read Inputs Execute Application Program Read the data Scan N Scan N+1 Scan N+2 Store data Scan N+3

System with analog module installed in expansion, remote I/O or Profibus slave base.
Ch 1 Ch 2 Ch 3 Ch 4

Write to Outputs

Scan N+6 Scan N+7 Scan N+8

Ch 1

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

16-10
F2-8AD4DA--2 8--Ch. In / 4 Ch. Out

F2-8AD4DA--2 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination The F2-8AD4DA--2 module appears to the CPU as 32 discrete input and 32 discrete output points. These points provide the data value, channel identification, and settings for resolution, range, and track and hold feature. You may never have to use these bits, but it may help you understand the data format. Since all input and output points are automatically mapped into V-memory, it is very easy to determine the location of the data words that will be assigned to the module.
F2-8AD4DA--2

Understanding the I/O Assignments

Slot 0
8pt Input

Slot 1
8pt Input

Slot 2
16pt Output

Slot 3
32pt In 32pt Out

Slot 4
8pt Output

X0 X7

X10 X17 V40400

Y0 Y17 V40500

X20 Y20 X57 Y57

Y60 Y67 V40503

MSB X 3 7 MSB X 5 7

V40401

LSB X 2 0 LSB X 4 0

MSB Y 3 7 MSB Y 5 7

V40501

LSB Y 2 0 LSB Y 4 0

Input Data Bits

Output Data Bits

V40402

V40502

Within these memory word locations, the individual bits represent specific information about the analog signal. (Your specific memory locations may vary, depending upon the slot location of the F2--8AD4DA--2 module.)

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-8AD4DA--2 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination Input Bits Depending upon the resolution selected, up to 16 bits of the first input word represent the analog data in binary format. Bit Value Bit Value 0 1 8 256 1 2 9 512 2 4 10 1024 3 8 11 2048 4 16 12 4096 5 32 13 8192 6 64 14 16384 7 128 15 32768 The second input word is not usable by the programmer.
V40401 X 3 4 -1 2 XX 33 32 -- -11 10 X 3 1 -9 X 3 0 -8 X 2 7 -7 X 2 6 -6 X 2 5 -5 X 2 4 -4 X 2 3 -3

16-11
LSB X 2 2 -2 X 2 1 -1 X 2 0 -0

MSB X 3 7 -1 5 X 3 6 -1 4 X 3 5 -1 3

F2-8AD4DA--2 8--Ch. In / 4--Ch. Out

= data bits
V40402 LSB X 4 5 -5 X 4 4 -4 X 4 3 -3 X 4 2 -2 X 4 1 -1 X 4 0 -0

MSB X 5 7 -1 5 X 5 6 -1 4 X 5 5 -1 3 X 5 4 -1 2

XX 55 32 -- -11 10

X 5 1 -9

X 5 0 -8

X 4 7 -7

X 4 6 -6

= not usable by programmer

Output Bits

All 16 bits of the first output word represent the analog data in binary format. Bit Value Bit Value 0 1 8 256 1 2 9 512 2 4 10 1024 3 8 11 2048 4 16 12 4096 5 32 13 8192 6 64 14 16384 7 128 15 32768 The second output word is not usable by the programmer.

MSB Y 3 7 -1 5 Y 3 6 -1 4 Y 3 5 -1 3 Y 3 4 -1 2

V40501 YY 33 32 -- -11 10 Y 3 1 -9 Y 3 0 -8 Y 2 7 -7 Y 2 6 -6 Y 2 5 -5 Y 2 4 -4 Y 2 3 -3

LSB Y 2 2 -2 Y 2 1 -1 Y 2 0 -0

= data bits
V40502 LSB Y 4 5 -5 Y 4 4 -4 Y 4 3 -3 Y 4 2 -2 Y 4 1 -1 Y 4 0 -0

MSB Y 5 7 -1 5 Y 5 6 -1 4 Y 5 5 -1 3 Y 5 4 -1 2 YY 55 32 -- -11 10

Y 5 1 -9

Y 5 0 -8

Y 4 7 -7

Y 4 6 -6

= not usable by programmer

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

16-12
F2-8AD4DA--2 8--Ch. In / 4 Ch. Out

F2-8AD4DA--2 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination

Special V-Memory Locations

The DL250--1 and DL260 CPUs have special V--memory locations assigned to each base slot that greatly simplify the programming requirements. These V--memory locations specify: S S S S S Module Configuration Registers the numbers of input and output channels to scan; the storage locations for the input and output data; the resolution selections for the inputs; the range selections for the inputs and outputs; the track and hold selections for the inputs.

The tables below show the special V--memory used by the CPUs for the CPU base and local expansion base I/O slots. Slot 0 is the module slot next to the CPU or D2--CM module. Slot 1 is the module slot two places from the CPU or D2--CM, and so on. The CPU needs to examine the pointer values at these locations only after a mode transition.
CPU Base: Analog In/Out Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations Slot No. of I/O Channels Enabled & Format Input Pointer Output Pointer Input Resolutions Input and Output Ranges Input Track & Hold 0 V7660 V7670 V7700 1 V7661 V7671 V7701 2 V7662 V7672 V7702 3 V7663 V7673 V7703 4 V7664 V7674 V7704 5 V7665 V7675 V7705 6 V7666 V7676 V7706 7 V7667 V7677 V7707

V36400 V36401 V36402 V36403 V36404 V36405 V36406 V36407 V36410 V36411 V36412 V36413 V36414 V36415 V36416 V36417 V36420 V36421 V36422 V36423 V36424 V36425 V36426 V36427

Expansion Base D2-CM #1: Analog In/Out Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations Slot 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 No. of I/O Channels V36000 V36001 V36002 V36003 V36004 V36005 V36006 V36007 Enabled & Format Input Pointer Output Pointer Input Resolutions Input and Output Ranges Input Track & Hold V36010 V36011 V36012 V36013 V36014 V36015 V36016 V36017 V36020 V36021 V36022 V36023 V36024 V36025 V36026 V36027 V36030 V36031 V36032 V36033 V36034 V36035 V36036 V36037 V36040 V36041 V36042 V36043 V36044 V36045 V36046 V36047 V36050 V36051 V36052 V36053 V36054 V36055 V36056 V36057

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-8AD4DA--2 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination

16-13
F2-8AD4DA--2 8--Ch. In / 4--Ch. Out
6 7

Expansion Base D2-CM #2: Analog In/Out Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations Slot 0 1 2 3 4 5 No. of I/O Channels V36100 V36101 V36102 V36103 V36104 V36105 V36106 V36107 Enabled & Format Input Pointer Output Pointer Input Resolutions Input and Output Ranges Input Track & Hold V36110 V36111 V36112 V36113 V36114 V36115 V36116 V36117 V36120 V36121 V36122 V36123 V36124 V36125 V36126 V36127 V36130 V36131 V36132 V36133 V36134 V36135 V36136 V36137 V36140 V36141 V36142 V36143 V36144 V36145 V36146 V36147 V36150 V36151 V36152 V36153 V36154 V36155 V36156 V36157

Expansion Base D2-CM #3: Analog In/Out Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations Slot 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 No. of I/O Channels V36200 V36201 V36202 V36203 V36204 V36205 V36206 V36207 Enabled & Format Input Pointer Output Pointer Input Resolutions Input and Output Ranges Input Track & Hold V36210 V36211 V36212 V36213 V36214 V36215 V36216 V36217 V36220 V36221 V36222 V36223 V36224 V36225 V36226 V36227 V36230 V36231 V36232 V36233 V36234 V36235 V36236 V36237 V36240 V36241 V36242 V36243 V36244 V36245 V36246 V36247 V36250 V36251 V36252 V36253 V36254 V36255 V36256 V36257

Expansion Base D2-CM #4: Analog In/Out Module Slot-Dependent V-memory Locations Slot 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 No. of I/O Channels V36300 V36301 V36302 V36303 V36304 V36305 V36306 V36307 Enabled & Format Input Pointer Output Pointer Input Resolutions Input and Output Ranges Input Track & Hold V36310 V36311 V36312 V36313 V36314 V36315 V36316 V36317 V36320 V36321 V36322 V36323 V36324 V36325 V36326 V36327 V36330 V36331 V36332 V36333 V36334 V36335 V36336 V36337 V36340 V36341 V36342 V36343 V36344 V36345 V36346 V36347 V36350 V36351 V36352 V36353 V36354 V36355 V36356 V36357

Number of I/O Channels Enabled & Data Format

Load this V--memory location with a constant that specifies the number of enabled I/O channels and their data formats. The upper byte applies to the inputs, and the lower byte applies to the outputs. The most significant nibbles specify the data formats, and the least significant nibbles specify the number of channels enabled. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 K01xx K02xx K03xx K04xx K04xx K06xx K07xx K08xx K81xx K82xx K83xx K84xx K85xx K86xx K87xx K88xx Kxx01 Kxx02 Kxx03 Kxx04 n/a Kxx81 Kxx82 Kxx83 Kxx84 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a

No. Channels Enabled BCD Input Binary Input BCD Output Binary Output

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

16-14
F2-8AD4DA--2 8--Ch. In / 4 Ch. Out

F2-8AD4DA--2 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination Each of the eight input channels can be individually disabled or configured for 12, 14, or 16 bit resolution. V36403: (specific memory location varies depending upon base and slot location) 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R-- R-- R-- R-8H 8L 7H 7L R-- R-- R-- R-- R-- R-- R-- R-6H 6L 5H 5L 4H 4L 3H 3L R-- R-- R-- R-2H 2L 1H 1L

Input Resolution Selection Bits

RnH = Resolution channel n High bit RnL = Resolution channel n Low bit Input Resolution Select 12 bit 14 bit 16 bit Disabled RnH 0 0 1 1 RnL 0 1 0 1

Example: Input channels 1--4 are 12 bit, channel 5 is 14 bit, and channel 6 is 16 bit, and channels 7 and 8 are disabled; V36403 = F900(hex): 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R-- R-- R-- R-8H 8L 7H 7L 1 1 1 1 F Input and Output Range Selection Bits R-- R-- R-- R-- R-- R-- R-- R-6H 6L 5H 5L 4H 4L 3H 3L 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 9 0 R-- R-- R-- R-2H 2L 1H 1L 0 0 0 0 0

The range of the eight input channels can be collectively set for 0--5V or for 0--10V. The range of the four output channels can also be collectively set for either of the same two voltage ranges. V36413: (specific memory location varies depending upon base and slot location) 15 -14 -13 -12 -11 -10 -9 -8 7 6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 -0 IR OR --

IR = Input Range OR = Output Range Input/Output Range 0 to 5V 0 to 10V IR 0 1 OR 0 1

Example: Input channel range is 0 to 5V, and output channel range is 0 to 10V; V36413 = 100(hex): 15 -0 14 -0 0 13 -0 12 -0 11 -0 10 -0 1 9 -0 8 1 7 0 6 -0 0 5 -0 4 -0 3 -0 2 -0 0 1 -0 0 IR 0 OR --

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-8AD4DA--2 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination

16-15
F2-8AD4DA--2 8--Ch. In / 4--Ch. Out

The track and hold feature for each of the eight inputs can be individually configured Input Track and Hold Selection Bits for minimum, maximum, no hold, or reset held value. This configuration can be changed on the fly while the program is running. V36423: (specific memory location varies depending upon base and slot location) 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 T-- T-8H 8L T-- T-7H 7L T-- T-6H 6L T-- T-5H 5L T-- T-4H 4L T-- T-3H 3L T-- T-2H 2L T-- T-1H 1L

TnH = Track and hold channel n High bit TnL = Track and hold channel n Low bit Track and Hold Select TnH TnL Result No Track and Hold Track and Hold Max. Value Reset Track and Hold Value 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 returns real time input value maintains lowest measured value maintains highest measured value resets previously held input value Track and Hold Minimum Value 0

Example: Input channel track and hold settings: ch 1--3 = none, ch 4--5 = minimum, ch 6--7 = maximum, ch 8 = reset; V36423 = E940(hex): 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 T-- T-8H 8L 1 1 E T-- T-7H 7L 1 0 T-- T-6H 6L 1 0 9 T-- T-5H 5L 0 1 T-- T-4H 4L 0 1 4 T-- T-3H 3L 0 0 T-- T-2H 2L 0 0 0 T-- T-1H 1L 0 0

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

16-16
F2-8AD4DA--2 8--Ch. In / 4 Ch. Out

F2-8AD4DA--2 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination

Writing the Control Program

Configuring the Module to Read / Write I/O (Pointer Method)
230

240 250- 1 260

These example programs show how to configure the special V--memory locations to read/write data from/to the I/O module. The module configuration rung needs to be read by the CPU only after a mode transition, and does not need to be read every scan. Place the configuration rung anywhere in the ladder program, or in the initial stage if you are using stage programming instructions. This is all that is required to read the input data and write the output data to/from the V-memory locations. Once the input data is in V-memory, you can perform math on the data, compare the data against preset values, and so forth. V2000 and V2020 are used as the beginning of the data areas in the example, but you can use any user V-memory locations. Also, these examples assume that the module is installed in slot 3 of the CPU base. You should use the pointer V-memory locations determined by the layout of your application.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-8AD4DA--2 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination Module Configuration Example 1: Number of Channels = 8 in, 4 out; Data Format = binary in, BCD out; Input Resolution = 16 bit; Input/Output Range = 0--5V in, 0--10V out; Input Track and Hold = none; real time value.
SP0 LD K 8804

16-17
F2-8AD4DA--2 8--Ch. In / 4--Ch. Out

OUT V7663 LDA O2000

OUT V7673 LDA O2020

OUT V7703 LD KAAAA OUT V36403 LD K100 OUT V36413 LD K0 OUT V36423

Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the data format. (See note below regarding data format.) The upper byte applies to the inputs. The most significant nibble (MSN) selects the data format (0=BCD, 8=Binary), and the LSN selects the number of channels (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8) to scan. The lower byte applies to the outputs. The most significant nibble (MSN) selects the data format (0=BCD, 8=Binary), and the LSN selects the number of channels (1, 2, 3, or 4) to scan. Special V-memory location assigned to slot 3 that contains the number of input and output channels. This constant designates the first V-memory location that will be used to store the input data. For example, the O2000 entered here would mean: Ch1 - V2000, V2001; Ch2 - V2002, V2003; Ch3 V2004, V2005; Ch4 - V2006, V2007; Ch5 - V2010, V2011; ... Ch8 V2016, V2017. For each channel, the 1st word holds the data, and the 2nd word is needed only when displaying 14 or 16 bit data in BCD mode. The 2nd word contains the most significant digit in those cases. The constant O2000 is stored here. V7673 is assigned to slot 3 and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the value in this location to determine exactly where to store the incoming data. This constant designates the first V-memory location where the analog output data will be stored. For example, the O2020 entered here would mean: Ch1 - V2020, V2021; Ch2 - V2022, V2023; Ch3 V2024, V2025; Ch4 - V2026, V2027. For each channel, the 1st word holds the data, and the 2nd word is needed only when displaying 14 or 16 bit data in BCD mode. The 2nd word contains the most significant digit in those cases. The constant O2020 is stored here. V7703 is assigned to slot 3 and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the value in this location to determine exactly where to obtain the output data. Loads a constant that specifies the resolutions for each of the input channels. This constant is determined by the values of two bits per channel, as described in Input Resolutions Selection Bits. The constant AAAA(hex) configures each of the eight inputs for 16 bits. Special V-memory location assigned to slot 3 that contains the resolution settings for each of the input channels. Loads a constant that specifies the voltage ranges for the input and output channels. This constant is determined by the values of two bits, as described in Input and Output Range Selection Bits. The constant 100(hex) configures the inputs for 0-5V, and outputs for 0-10V. Special V-memory location assigned to slot 3 that contains voltage ranges for the input and output channels. Loads a constant that specifies the track and hold settings for each of the input channels. This constant is determined by the values of two bits per channel, as described in Track and Hold Selection Bits. The constant 0 configures each of the eight input channels for no track and hold. Special V-memory location assigned to slot 3 that contains the track and hold settings for each of the input channels.

NOTE:

Binary data format is recommended for 14 or 16 bit resolution input data, especially if the input data is to be used in any math instructions (DL205 User Manual, ch. 5). There is only one V-memory word (16 bits) available for the actual input data. Although the 12 bit resolution maximum value of 4095 can be stored in one word using either binary or BCD formats, the 14 and 16 bit resolution maximum values of 16383 and 65535 both exceed the BCD formats maximum single word capacity of 9999. Double word math would be required for 14 or 16 bit data in BCD format. Binary data format is also useful for displaying data on some operator interfaces.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

16-18
F2-8AD4DA--2 8--Ch. In / 4 Ch. Out

F2-8AD4DA--2 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination Module Configuration Example 2: Number of Channels = 4 in, 4 out; Data Format = binary in, BCD out; Input Resolution = 14 bit; Input/Output Range = 0--10V in, 0--5V out; Input Track and Hold = all inputs maximum value.
SP0 LD K 8404
Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the data format. (See note below regarding data format.) The upper byte applies to the inputs. The most significant nibble (MSN) selects the data format (0=BCD, 8=Binary), and the LSN selects the number of channels (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8) to scan. The lower byte applies to the outputs. The most significant nibble (MSN) selects the data format (0=BCD, 8=Binary), and the LSN selects the number of channels (1, 2, 3, or 4) to scan. Special V-memory location assigned to slot 3 that contains the number of input and output channels. This constant designates the first V-memory location that will be used to store the input data. For example, the O2000 entered here would mean: Ch1 - V2000, V2001; Ch2 - V2002, V2003; Ch3 V2004, V2005; Ch4 - V2006, V2007. For each channel, the 1st word holds the data, and the 2nd word is needed only when displaying 14 or 16 bit data in BCD mode. The 2nd word contains the most significant digit in those cases. The constant O2000 is stored here. V7673 is assigned to slot 3 and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the value in this location to determine exactly where to store the incoming data. This constant designates the first V-memory location where the analog output data will be stored. For example, the O2020 entered here would mean: Ch1 - V2020, V2021; Ch2 - V2022, V2023; Ch3 V2024, V2025; Ch4 - V2026, V2027. For each channel, the 1st word holds the data, and the 2nd word is needed only when displaying 14 or 16 bit data in BCD mode. The 2nd word contains the most significant digit in those cases. The constant O2020 is stored here. V7703 is assigned to slot 3 and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the value in this location to determine exactly where to obtain the output data. Loads a constant that specifies the resolutions for each of the input channels. This constant is determined by the values of two bits per channel, as described in Input Resolutions Selection Bits. The constant 5555(hex) configures each of the eight inputs for 14 bits. Special V-memory location assigned to slot 3 that contains the resolution settings for each of the input channels. Loads a constant that specifies the voltage ranges for the input and output channels. This constant is determined by the values of two bits, as described in Input and Output Range Selection Bits. The constant 1 configures the inputs for 0-10V, and the outputs for 0-5V. Special V-memory location assigned to slot 3 that contains voltage ranges for the input and output channels. Loads a constant that specifies the track and hold settings for each of the input channels. This constant is determined by the values of two bits per channel, as described in Track and Hold Selection Bits. The constant AAAA(hex) configures each of the eight inputs to track and hold the maximum value. Special V-memory location assigned to slot 3 that contains the track and hold settings for each of the input channels.

OUT V7663 LDA O2000

OUT V7673 LDA O2020

OUT V7703 LD K5555 OUT V36403 LD K1 OUT V36413 LD KAAAA OUT V36423

NOTE:

Binary data format is recommended for 14 or 16 bit resolution input data, especially if the input data is to be used in any math instructions (DL205 User Manual, ch. 5). There is only one V-memory word (16 bits) available for the actual input data. Although the 12 bit resolution maximum value of 4095 can be stored in one word using either binary or BCD formats, the 14 and 16 bit resolution maximum values of 16383 and 65535 both exceed the BCD formats maximum single word capacity of 9999. Double word math would be required for 14 or 16 bit data in BCD format. Binary data format is also useful for displaying data on some operator interfaces.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-8AD4DA--2 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination Module Configuration Example 3: Number of Channels = 4 in, 2 out; Data Format = BCD in, BCD out; Input Resolution = 12 bit; Input/Output Range = 0--10V in, 0--10V out; Input Track and Hold = all inputs minimum value.
SP0 LD K 0402

16-19
F2-8AD4DA--2 8--Ch. In / 4--Ch. Out

OUT V7663 LDA O2000

OUT V7673 LDA O2020

OUT V7703 LD K0 OUT V36403 LD K101 OUT V36413 LD K5555 OUT V36423

Loads a constant that specifies the number of channels to scan and the data format. (See note below regarding data format.) (The leading zero in this LD instruction is shown for clarity. It can be entered by the programmer, but it will be dropped by the programming software. The upper byte applies to the inputs. The most significant nibble (MSN) selects the data format (0=BCD, 8=Binary), and the LSN selects the number of channels (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8) to scan. The lower byte applies to the outputs. The most significant nibble (MSN) selects the data format (0=BCD, 8=Binary), and the LSN selects the number of channels (1, 2, 3, or 4) to scan. Special V-memory location assigned to slot 3 that contains the number of input and output channels. This constant designates the first V-memory location that will be used to store the input data. For example, the O2000 entered here would mean: Ch1 - V2000, V2001; Ch2 - V2002, V2003; Ch3 V2004, V2005; Ch4 - V2006, V2007. For each channel, the 1st word holds the data, and the 2nd word is needed only when displaying 14 or 16 bit data in BCD mode. The 2nd word contains the most significant digit in those cases. The constant O2000 is stored here. V7673 is assigned to slot 3 and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the value in this location to determine exactly where to store the incoming data. This constant designates the first V-memory location where the analog output data will be stored. For example, the O2020 entered here would mean: Ch1 - V2020, V2021; Ch2 - V2022, V2023. For each channel, the 1st word holds the data, and the 2nd word is needed only when displaying 14 or 16 bit data in BCD mode. The 2nd word contains the most significant digit in those cases. The constant O2020 is stored here. V7703 is assigned to slot 3 and acts as a pointer, which means the CPU will use the value in this location to determine exactly where to obtain the output data. Loads a constant that specifies the resolutions for each of the input channels. This constant is determined by the values of two bits per channel, as described in Input Resolutions Selection Bits. The constant 0 configures each of the eight inputs for 12 bits. Special V-memory location assigned to slot 3 that contains the resolution settings for each of the input channels. Loads a constant that specifies the voltage ranges for the input and output channels. This constant is determined by the values of two bits, as described in Input and Output Range Selection Bits. The constant 101(hex) configures both the inputs and outputs for 0-10V. Special V-memory location assigned to slot 3 that contains voltage ranges for the input and output channels. Loads a constant that specifies the track and hold settings for each of the input channels. This constant is determined by the values of two bits per channel, as described in Track and Hold Selection Bits. The constant 5555(hex) configures each of the eight input channels to track and hold the minimum value. Special V-memory location assigned to slot 3 that contains the track and hold settings for each of the input channels.

NOTE:

Binary data format is recommended for 14 or 16 bit resolution input data, especially if the input data is to be used in any math instructions (DL205 User Manual, ch. 5). There is only one V-memory word (16 bits) available for the actual input data. Although the 12 bit resolution maximum value of 4095 can be stored in one word using either binary or BCD formats, the 14 and 16 bit resolution maximum values of 16383 and 65535 both exceed the BCD formats maximum single word capacity of 9999. Double word math would be required for 14 or 16 bit data in BCD format. Binary data format is also useful for displaying data on some operator interfaces.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

16-20
F2-8AD4DA--2 8--Ch. In / 4 Ch. Out

F2-8AD4DA--2 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination

Module 12 Bit Input Resolution

When the module voltage inputs are configured for 12 bit resolution, the analog signal is converted into 4096 (212) counts ranging from 0 -- 4095. For example, a 0V signal would be 0, and a full scale 5V or 10V signal would be 4095. This is equivalent to a binary value of 0000 0000 0000 to 1111 1111 1111, or 000 to FFF hexadecimal. The diagram shows how this relates to the signal range. Each count can also be expressed in terms of the signal level by using the equation shown.

0 -- 5V/10V
5V/10V

12 Bit Resolution

0V 0 4095

12 Bit Resolution = H L 4095 H = high limit of the signal range L = low limit of the signal range 5V / 4095 = 1.22mV per count 10V / 4095 = 2.44mV per count 0 -- 5V/10V
5V/10V

Module 14 Bit Input Resolution

When the module voltage inputs are configured for 14 bit resolution, the analog signal is converted into 16384 (214) counts ranging from 0 -- 16383. For example, a 0V signal would be 0, and a full scale 5V or 10V signal would be 16383. This is equivalent to a binary value of 00 0000 0000 0000 to 11 1111 1111 1111, or 0000 to 3FFF hexadecimal. The diagram shows how this relates to the signal range. Each count can also be expressed in terms of the signal level by using the equation shown.

14 Bit Resolution

0V 0 16383

14 Bit Resolution = H L 16383 H = high limit of the signal range L = low limit of the signal range 5V / 16383 = 305A per count 10V / 16383 = 610A per count 0 -- 5V/10V
5V/10V

Module 16 Bit Input Resolution

When the module voltage inputs are configured for 16 bit resolution, the analog signal is converted into 65536 (216) counts ranging from 0 -- 65535. For example, a 0V signal would be 0, and a full scale 5V or 10V signal would be 65535. This is equivalent to a binary value of 0000 0000 0000 0000 to 1111 1111 1111 1111, or 0000 to FFFF hexadecimal. The diagram shows how this relates to the signal range. Each count can also be expressed in terms of the signal level by using the equation shown.

16 Bit Input Resolution

0V 0 65535

16 Bit Resolution = H L 65535 H = high limit of the signal range L = low limit of the signal range 5V / 65535 = 76A per count 10V / 65535 = 152A per count

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-8AD4DA--2 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination

16-21
F2-8AD4DA--2 8--Ch. In / 4--Ch. Out

Analog and Digital Sometimes it is useful to be able to quickly convert between the signal levels and the digital values. This is especially helpful during machine startup or Input Data Value troubleshooting. The table provides formulas to make this conversion easier. Conversion A = (D)(Amax) / (Dmax) D = (A)(Dmax) / (Amax) S A = Analog value from current transmitter S Amax = Maximum analog value S D = Digital value of input provided to PLC CPU S Dmax = Maximum digital value
If you know the analog signal level... D = (A)(4095) / 5 D = (A)(4095) / 10 D = (A)(16383) / 5 D = (A)(16383) / 10 D = (A)(65535) / 5 D = (A)(65535) / 10 D = (A) 65535 10 D = (6) (6553.5) D = 39321

Resolution 12 bit 0--4095 14 bit 0--16383 16 bit 0--65535

Input Range 0--5V 0--10V 0--5V 0--10V 0--5V 0--10V

If you know the digital value... A = (D)(5) / 4095 A = (D)(10) / 4095 A = (D)(5) / 16383 A = (D)(10) / 16383 A = (D)(5) / 65535 A = (D)(10) / 65535

For example, if you are using 0--10V range with 16 bit resolution, and have measured the signal at 6V, you could use the formula to easily determine the digital value (D) that should be stored in the V-memory location that contains the data.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

16-22
F2-8AD4DA--2 8--Ch. In / 4 Ch. Out

F2-8AD4DA--2 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination Most applications require measurements in engineering units, which provide more meaningful data. For input ranges with a minimum value of zero, this can be accomplished by using the conversion formulas shown below: EU = (A)(EUH -- EUL) / (Amax) EU = (D)(EUH -- EUL) / (Dmax) S S S S S A = analog value from current transmitter D = digital value of input provided to PLC CPU EU = engineering units EUH = engineering units high value EUL = engineering units low value

Scaling the Input Data

The following examples show a 16 bit measurement of pressure (PSI) from 0.0 to 140.0. You need to multiply the analog value by 10 in order to imply a decimal place when you view the value with the programming software or a handheld programmer. Notice how the calculations differ when you use the multiplier.
Analog Value of 6.3V, 0--10V transmitter, 16 bit resolution, should yield 88.2 PSI Example without multiplier EU = (D) EU H EU L D max Example with multiplier EU = (10)(D) EU H EU L D max

EU = (41287) 140 0 65535 EU = 88

Handheld Display

EU = (10)(41287) 140 0 65535 EU = 882

Handheld Display

V 2001 V 2000 0000 0088

V 2001 V 2000 0000 0882

This value is more accurate NOTE:

Binary data format is recommended for 14 or 16 bit resolution input data, especially if the input data is to be used in any math instructions (DL205 User Manual, ch. 5). There is only one V-memory word (16 bits) available for the actual input data. Although the 12 bit resolution maximum value of 4095 can be stored in one word using either binary or BCD formats, the 14 and 16 bit resolution maximum values of 16383 and 65535 both exceed the BCD formats maximum single word capacity of 9999. Double word math would be required for 14 or 16 bit data in BCD format. Binary data format is also useful for displaying data on some operator interfaces.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-8AD4DA--2 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination Input Engineering Unit Conversion Example 1: Data Format = BCD; Channel 1 data memory location = V2000; Channel 1 resolution = 12 bits; Channel 1 engineering units = 0.0 to 140.0psi; Channel 1 input device = 0--5V or 0--10V transmitter.
Note, this example uses SP1 (which is always on) as a permissive contact for the engineering unit conversion. You could also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact.

16-23
F2-8AD4DA--2 8--Ch. In / 4--Ch. Out

SP1

LD V2000 MUL K1400 DIV K4095 OUT V2100

Load input channel 1 digital value into accumulator. Multiply by 1400; EU range X 10 for implied decimal. Divide by 4095; 12 bit digital range. Store input EU value in V2100.

Input Engineering Unit Conversion Example 2: Data Format = binary; Channel 1 data memory location = V2000; Channel 1 resolution = 14 bits; Channel 1 engineering units = 0.0 to 140.0psi; Channel 1 input device = 0--5V or 0--10V transmitter.
Note, this example uses SP1 (which is always on) as a permissive contact for the engineering unit conversion. You could also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact.

SP1

LD V2000 MULB K578 DIVB K3FFF OUT V2100

Load input channel 1 digital value into accumulator. Multiply by 1400 [hex 578]; EU range X 10 for implied decimal. Divide by 16383 [hex 3FFF]; 14 bit digital range for 0-20mA. (Use 65535 [KFFFF] for 16 bit; 4095 [KFFF] for 12 bit.) Store input EU value in V2100.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

16-24
F2-8AD4DA--2 8--Ch. In / 4 Ch. Out

F2-8AD4DA--2 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination Input Engineering Unit Conversion Example 3: Data Format = binary; Channel 1 data memory location = V2000; Channel 1 resolution = 16 bits; Channel 1 engineering units = 0.0 to 140.0psi; Channel 1 input device = 0--5V or 0--10V transmitter.
Note, this example uses SP1 (which is always on) as a permissive contact for the engineering unit conversion. You could also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact.

SP1

LD V2000 BTOR

Load input channel 1 digital value into accumulator.

Convert from binary to real data format.

MULR R1400 DIVR R65535 RTOB

Multiply by 1400; EU range X 10 for implied decimal. Divide by 65535; 16 bit digital range. (Use R16383 for 14 bit; R4095 for 12 bit.) Convert to binary data format.

OUT V2100

Store input EU value in V2100.

Using the Input Track and Hold Feature

The input Track and Hold feature allows the individual inputs to be separately configured to maintain their maximum or minimum data values. If No Track and Hold is selected, the present real time value of the input will be stored in the input data V--memory location. If Track and Hold Minimum Value is selected, the first input value less than or equal to full scale will be read and maintained until a lower value is measured, or until Track and Hold is Reset. If Maximum Value is selected, the first input value greater than or equal to zero will be read and maintained until a higher value is measured, or until Track and Hold is Reset. To Reset Track and Hold, write a value of one to the Track and Hold selection high and low bits. When Track and Hold is Reset, the module will display the real--time input value. When the selection is changed from Reset to Minimum Value or Maximum Value, the input will start over as described previously.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-8AD4DA--2 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination Track and Hold Example: Number of Channels = 1 in, 1 out; Data Format = binary in, binary out; Input Resolution = 16 bit; Input/Output Range = 0--10V in, 0--10V out; Input Track and Hold = channel 1 reset.
SP0 LD K 8181 OUT V7663 LDA O2000 OUT V7673 LDA O2020 OUT V7703 LD K2 OUT V36403 LD K101 OUT V36413 LD K3 OUT V36423 C1 LD K2 OUT V36423 C3 LD K3 OUT V36423 C5 LD K1 OUT V36423
Rung 1, Module Configuration: Input: binary data format, 1 channel. Output: binary data format, 1 channel. Module location: local base, slot 3. Input data 1st memory location: V2000. Output data 1st memory location: V2020. Input resolution: 16 bit channel 1. Input/Output range: 0-10V in, 0-10V out. Input Track and Hold: reset channel 1.

16-25
F2-8AD4DA--2 8--Ch. In / 4--Ch. Out

C1 loads value of 2 (binary 10) into the Track and Hold Selection register. This sets input channel 1 for Track and Hold Maximum Value. As the analog value varies, only a measured value higher than the previously stored value will be written to V2000.

C3 loads a value of 3 (binary 11) into the Track and Hold Selection register. This sets input channel 1 for Track and Hold Reset Value. Real-time measured values will be written to V2000 until another Track and Hold Selection is made.

C5 loads value of 1 (binary 01) into the Track and Hold Selection register. This sets input channel 1 for Track and Hold Minimum Value. As the analog value varies, only a measured value lower than the previously stored stored will be written to V2000.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

16-26
F2-8AD4DA--2 8--Ch. In / 4 Ch. Out

F2-8AD4DA--2 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination

Module 16 Bit Output Resolution

Since the voltage output module has 16 bit resolution, the analog signal is converted into 65536 (216) counts ranging from 0 -- 65535. For example, a 0V signal would be 0, and a full scale 5V or 10V signal would be 65535. This is equivalent to a binary value of 0000 0000 0000 0000 to 1111 1111 1111 1111, or 0000 to FFFF hexadecimal. The diagram shows how this relates to the signal range. Each count can also be expressed in terms of the signal level by using the equation shown.

0 -- 5V/10V
5V/10V

16 Bit Output Resolution

0V 0 65535

16 Bit Resolution = H L 65535 H = high limit of the signal range L = low limit of the signal range 5V / 65535 = 76A per count 10V / 65535 = 152A per count

Digital and Analog Sometimes it is useful to be able to quickly convert between the signal levels and Output Data Value the digital values. This is especially helpful during machine startup or troubleshooting. For output ranges with a minimum value of zero, the table below Conversion provides formulas to make this conversion easier. A = (D)(Amax) / (Dmax) D = (A)(Dmax) / (Amax) S A = Analog current output value S Amax = Maximum analog value S D = Digital value from PLC CPU S Dmax = Maximum digital value
If you know the analog signal level... D = (A)(65535) / 5 D = (A)(65535) / 10 D = (6) 65535 10 D = (6)(6553.5) D = 39321

Resolution 16 bit 0--65535

Output Range 0--5V 0--10V

If you know the digital value... A = (D)(5) / 65535 A = (D)(10) / 65535

For example, if you need to produce a 6V analog output signal with a 0--10V output range, you could use the formula to easily determine the digital value (D) that should be stored in the V-memory location that contains the data for output. Output Value Comparisons: Analog, Digital, Engineering Units

The following table shows how the input analog, digital, and engineering unit values are related to each other. The example is a measurement of pressure from 0.0 to 140.0 PSI, using a multiplier of 10 for one implied decimal place.
Analog Range 0-5V 5 2.5 0 0-10V 10 5 0 Digital 16 Bit 65535 32768 0 EU E.U. 1400 700 0

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

F2-8AD4DA--2 8-Ch. In / 4-Ch. Out Analog Voltage Combination

16-27
F2-8AD4DA--2 8--Ch. In / 4--Ch. Out

Calculating the Digital Output Value

Your program must calculate the digital value to send to the 16 bit analog output module. There are many ways to do this, but most applications are understood more easily if you use measurements in engineering units. This is accomplished by using the conversion formula shown. You may have to make adjustments to the formula depending on the scale you choose for the engineering units.

D = EU

D max EU H EU L

D = digital value EU = engineering units EUH = engineering unit range high limit EUL = engineering unit range low limit

Consider the following example which controls pressure from 0.0 to 140.0 PSI. By using the formula, you can determine the digital value that should be sent to the module. The example shows the conversion required to yield 52.5 PSI. Notice the formula divides by 10, because the BCD representation of 52.5 includes a multiplier of 10 to allow for the implied decimal. The division corrects for the multiplier.
D = 10EU D max 10(EU H EU L) D = (525) 65535 10(140) D = 24576

Calculating Output Data; Engineering Units Conversion

The example program shows how you would write the program to perform the engineering unit conversion to output 16 bit data format 0 -- 65535. This example assumes you have calculated or loaded the engineering unit values, including a multiplier of 10, in BCD format and stored it in V2120 for output channel 1. Output Engineering Unit Conversion / Output Data Calculation Example: Data Format = binary; Channel 1 data memory location = V2020; Channel 1 engineering units = 0 to 140psi.
Note, this example uses SP1 (which is always on) as a permissive contact for the engineering unit conversion. You could also use an X, C, etc. permissive contact.

SP1

LD V2120 BIN MULB KFFFF DIVB K578 OUT V2020

Load output channel data value into accumulator; BCD EU value X 10 for implied decimal. Convert from BCD to binary data format. Multiply by 65535; FFFF hex = 65535; 16 bit maximum digital value. Divide by 1400; 578 hex = 1400; EU range X 10 for implied decimal. Store output digital value in V2020.

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

DL205 Discrete I/O Memory Map

In This Chapter. . . .
X Input / Y Output Bit Map Control Relay Bit Map Remote I/O Bit Map (DL260 Only)

A-2
Appendix A Discrete I/O Memory Map

DL205 Discrete I/O Memory Maps

X Input / Y Output Bit Map

This table provides a listing of the individual Input points associated with each V-memory address bit for the DL230, DL240, and DL250--1 and DL260 CPUs. The DL250--1 ranges apply to the DL250.
MSB 17
017 037 057 077 117 137 157 177

DL230 / DL240 / DL250-1 / DL260 Input (X) and Output (Y) Points 16
016 036 056 076 116 136 156 176

LSB 2
002 022 042 062 102 122 142 162

15
015 035 055 075 115 135 155 175

14
014 034 054 074 114 134 154 174

13
013 033 053 073 113 133 153 173

12
012 032 052 072 112 132 152 172

11
011 031 051 071 111 131 151 171

10
010 030 050 070 110 130 150 170

7
007 027 047 067 107 127 147 167

6
006 026 046 066 106 126 146 166

5
005 025 045 065 105 125 145 165

4
004 024 044 064 104 124 144 164

3
003 023 043 063 103 123 143 163

1
001 021 041 061 101 121 141 161

0
000 020 040 060 100 120 140 160

X Input Address
V40400 V40401 V40402 V40403 V40404 V40405 V40406 V40407

Y Output Address
V40500 V40501 V40502 V40503 V40504 V40505 V40506 V40507

MSB
217 237 257 277 317 337 357 377 417 437 457 477 216 236 256 276 316 336 356 376 416 436 456 476 215 235 255 275 315 335 355 375 415 435 455 475

DL240 / DL250-1 / DL260 Input (X) and Output (Y) Points

214 234 254 274 314 334 354 374 414 434 454 474 213 233 253 273 313 333 353 373 413 433 453 473 212 232 252 272 312 332 352 372 412 432 452 472 211 231 251 271 311 331 351 371 411 431 451 471 210 230 250 270 310 330 350 370 410 430 450 470 207 227 247 267 307 327 347 367 407 427 447 467 206 226 246 266 306 326 346 366 406 426 446 466 205 225 245 265 305 325 345 365 405 425 445 465 204 224 244 264 304 324 344 364 404 424 444 464 203 223 243 263 303 323 343 363 403 423 443 463 202 222 242 262 302 322 342 362 402 422 442 462 201 221 241 261 301 321 341 361 401 421 441 461

LSB
200 220 240 260 300 320 340 360 400 420 440 460

V40410 V40411 V40412 V40413 V40414 V40415 V40416 V40417 V40420 V40421 V40422 V40423 V40424 V40425 V40426 V40427 V40430 V40431 V40432 V40433 V40434 V40435 V40436 V40437

V40510 V40511 V40512 V40513 V40514 V40515 V40516 V40517 V40520 V40521 V40522 V40523 V40524 V40525 V40526 V40527 V40530 V40531 V40532 V40533 V40534 V40535 V40536 V40537

MSB
517 537 557 577 617 637 657 677 717 737 757 777 516 536 556 576 616 636 656 676 716 736 756 776 515 535 555 575 615 635 655 675 715 735 755 775

DL250-1 / DL260 Additional Input (X) and Output (Y) Points

514 534 554 574 614 634 654 674 714 734 754 774 513 533 553 573 613 633 653 673 713 733 753 773 512 532 552 572 612 632 652 672 712 732 752 772 511 531 551 571 611 631 651 671 711 731 751 771 510 530 550 570 610 630 650 670 710 730 750 770 507 527 547 567 607 627 647 667 707 727 747 767 506 526 546 566 606 626 646 666 706 726 746 766 505 525 545 565 605 625 645 665 705 725 745 765 504 524 544 564 604 624 644 664 704 724 744 764 503 523 543 563 603 623 643 663 703 723 743 763 502 522 542 562 602 622 642 662 702 722 742 762 501 521 541 561 601 621 641 661 701 721 741 761

LSB
500 520 540 560 600 620 640 660 700 720 740 760

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

DL205 Discrete I/O Memory Map

A-3
Appendix A Discrete I/O Memory Map
Y Output AdAd dress
V40540 V40541 V40542 V40543 V40544 V40545 V40546 V40547 V40550 V40551 V40552 V40553 V40554 V40555

MSB 17
1017 1037 1057 1077 1117 1137 1157 1177 1217 1237 1257 1277 1317 1337 1357 1377 1417 1437 1457 1477 1517 1537 1557 1577 1617 1637 1657 1677 1717 1737 1757 1777

DL260 Additional Input (X) and Output (Y) Points (contd) 16

1016 1036 1056 1076 1116 1136 1156 1176 1216 1236 1256 1276 1316 1336 1356 1376 1416 1436 1456 1476 1516 1536 1556 1576 1616 1636 1656 1676 1716 1736 1756 1776

LSB 2 1
1001 1021 1041 1061 1101 1121 1141 1161 1201 1221 1241 1261 1301 1321 1341 1361 1401 1421 1441 1461 1501 1521 1541 1561 1601 1621 1641 1661 1701 1721 1741 1761

15
1015 1035 1055 1075 1115 1135 1155 1175 1215 1235 1255 1275 1315 1335 1355 1375 1415 1435 1455 1475 1515 1535 1555 1575 1615 1635 1655 1675 1715 1735 1755 1775

14
1014 1034 1054 1074 1114 1134 1154 1174 1214 1234 1254 1274 1314 1334 1354 1374 1414 1434 1454 1474 1514 1534 1554 1574 1614 1634 1654 1674 1714 1734 1754 1774

13
1013 1033 1053 1073 1113 1133 1153 1173 1213 1233 1253 1273 1313 1333 1353 1373 1413 1433 1453 1473 1513 1533 1553 1573 1613 1633 1653 1673 1713 1733 1753 1773

12
1012 1032 1052 1072 1112 1132 1152 1172 1212 1232 1252 1272 1312 1332 1352 1372 1412 1432 1452 1472 1512 1532 1552 1572 1612 1632 1652 1672 1712 1732 1752 1772

11
1011 1031 1051 1071 1111 1131 1151 1171 1211 1231 1251 1271 1311 1331 1351 1371 1411 1431 1451 1471 1511 1531 1551 1571 1611 1631 1651 1671 1711 1731 1751 1771

10
1010 1030 1050 1070 1110 1130 1150 1170 1210 1230 1250 1270 1310 1330 1350 1370 1410 1430 1450 1470 1510 1530 1550 1570 1610 1630 1650 1670 1710 1730 1750 1770

7
1007 1027 1047 1067 1107 1127 1147 1167 1207 1227 1247 1267 1307 1327 1347 1367 1407 1427 1447 1467 1507 1527 1547 1567 1607 1627 1647 1667 1707 1727 1747 1767

6
1006 1026 1046 1066 1106 1126 1146 1166 1206 1226 1246 1266 1306 1326 1346 1366 1406 1426 1446 1466 1506 1526 1546 1566 1606 1626 1646 1666 1706 1726 1746 1766

5
1005 1025 1045 1065 1105 1125 1145 1165 1205 1225 1245 1265 1305 1325 1345 1365 1405 1425 1445 1465 1505 1525 1545 1565 1605 1625 1645 1665 1705 1725 1745 1765

4
1004 1024 1044 1064 1104 1124 1144 1164 1204 1224 1244 1264 1304 1324 1344 1364 1404 1424 1444 1464 1504 1524 1544 1564 1604 1624 1644 1664 1704 1724 1744 1764

3
1003 1023 1043 1063 1103 1123 1143 1163 1203 1223 1243 1263 1303 1323 1343 1363 1403 1423 1443 1463 1503 1523 1543 1563 1603 1623 1643 1663 1703 1723 1743 1763

0
1000 1020 1040 1060 1100 1120 1140 1160 1200 1220 1240 1260 1300 1320 1340 1360 1400 1420 1440 1460 1500 1520 1540 1560 1600 1620 1640 1660 1700 1720 1740 1760

X Input Address
V40440 V40441 V40442 V40443 V40444 V40445 V40446 V40447 V40450 V40451 V40452 V40453 V40454 V40455 V40456 V40457 V40460 V40461 V40462 V40463 V40464 V40465 V40466 V40467 V40470 V40471 V40472 V40473 V40474 V40475 V40476 V40477

1002 1022 1042 1062 1102 1122 1142 1162 1202 1222 1242 1262 1302 1322 1342 1362 1402 1422 1442 1462 1502 1522 1542 1562 1602 1622 1642 1662 1702 1722 1742 1762

Discrete I/O Memory Map

V40556 V40557 V40560 V40561 V40562 V40563 V40564 V40565 V40566 V40567 V40570 V40571 V40572 V40573 V40574 V40575 V40576 V40577

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

A-4
Appendix A Discrete I/O Memory Map

DL205 Discrete I/O Memory Maps

Control Relay Bit Map

This table provides a listing of the individual control relays associated with each V-memory address bit.
MSB 17
017 037 057 077 117 137 157 177 217 237 257 277 317 337 357 377

DL230 / DL240 / DL250 -1 / DL260 Control Relays (C) 16

016 036 056 076 116 136 156 176 216 236 256 276 316 336 356 376

LSB 3
003 023 043 063 103 123 143 163 203 223 243 263 303 323 343 363

15
015 035 055 075 115 135 155 175 215 235 255 275 315 335 355 375

14
014 034 054 074 114 134 154 174 214 234 254 274 314 334 354 374

13
013 033 053 073 113 133 153 173 213 233 253 273 313 333 353 373

12
012 032 052 072 112 132 152 172 212 232 252 272 312 332 352 372

11
011 031 051 071 111 131 151 171 211 231 251 271 311 331 351 371

10
010 030 050 070 110 130 150 170 210 230 250 270 310 330 350 370

7
007 027 047 067 107 127 147 167 207 227 247 267 307 327 347 367

6
006 026 046 066 106 126 146 166 206 226 246 266 306 326 346 366

5
005 025 045 065 105 125 145 165 205 225 245 265 305 325 345 365

4
004 024 044 064 104 124 144 164 204 224 244 264 304 324 344 364

2
002 022 042 062 102 122 142 162 202 222 242 262 302 322 342 362

1
001 021 041 061 101 121 141 161 201 221 241 261 301 321 341 361

0
000 020 040 060 100 120 140 160 200 220 240 260 300 320 340 360

Address
V40600 V40601 V40602 V40603 V40604 V40605 V40606 V40607 V40610 V40611 V40612 V40613 V40614 V40615 V40616 V40617

MSB
417 437 457 477 517 537 557 577 617 637 657 677 717 737 757 777 416 436 456 476 516 536 556 576 616 636 656 676 716 736 756 776 415 435 455 475 515 535 555 575 615 635 655 675 715 735 755 775 414 434 454 474 514 534 554 574 614 634 654 674 714 734 754 774

Additional DL250-1 / DL260 Control Relays (C)

413 433 453 473 513 533 553 573 613 633 653 673 713 733 753 773 412 432 452 472 512 532 552 572 612 632 652 672 712 732 752 772 411 431 451 471 511 531 551 571 611 631 651 671 711 731 751 771 410 430 450 470 510 530 550 570 610 630 650 670 710 730 750 770 407 427 447 467 507 527 547 567 607 627 647 667 707 727 747 767 406 426 446 466 506 526 546 566 606 626 646 666 706 726 746 766 405 425 445 465 505 525 545 565 605 625 645 665 705 725 745 765 404 424 444 464 504 524 544 564 604 624 644 664 704 724 744 764 403 423 443 463 503 523 543 563 603 623 643 663 703 723 743 763 402 422 442 462 502 522 542 562 602 622 642 662 702 722 742 762 401 421 441 461 501 521 541 561 601 621 641 661 701 721 741 761

LSB
400 420 440 460 500 520 540 560 600 620 640 660 700 720 740 760

Address
V40620 V40621 V40622 V40623 V40624 V40625 V40626 V40627 V40630 V40631 V40632 V40633 V40634 V40635 V40636 V40637

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

DL205 Discrete I/O Memory Map

A-5
Appendix A Discrete I/O Memory Map
Address
V40640 V40641 V40642 V40643 V40644 V40645 V40646 V40647 V40650 V40651 V40652 V40653 V40654 V40655

MSB 17 16 15 14

Additional DL250-1 / DL260 Control Relays (C) 13 12 11

1011

LSB 3 2 1 0
1002 1001 1000 1022 1021 1020 1042 1041 1040 1062 1061 1060 1102 1122 1142 1162 1101 1121 1141 1161 1100 1120 1140 1160

10

1017 1016 1015 1014 1013 1012

1010 1007 1006 1005

1004 1003 1024 1023 1044 1043 1064 1063 1104 1124 1144 1164 1103 1123 1143 1163

1037 1036 1035 1034 1033 1032 1031 1030 1027 1026 1025 1057 1056 1055 1054 1053 1052 1051 1050 1047 1046 1045 1077 1076 1075 1074 1073 1072 1071 1070 1067 1066 1065 1117 1137 1157 1177 1116 1136 1156 1176 1115 1135 1155 1175 1114 1134 1154 1174 1113 1133 1153 1173 1112 1132 1152 1172 1111 1131 1151 1171 1211 1110 1130 1150 1170 1107 1127 1147 1167 1106 1126 1146 1166 1105 1125 1145 1165

1217 1216 1215 1214 1213 1212

1210 1207 1206 1205

1204 1203 1224 1223 1244 1243 1264 1263 1304 1303 1324 1323 1344 1343 1364 1363 1404 1403 1424 1423 1444 1443 1464 1463 1504 1503 1524 1523 1544 1543 1564 1563 1604 1603 1624 1623 1644 1643 1664 1663 1704 1703 1724 1723 1744 1743 1764 1763

1202 1201 1200 1222 1221 1220 1242 1241 1240 1262 1261 1260 1302 1301 1300 1322 1321 1320 1342 1341 1340 1362 1361 1360 1402 1401 1400 1422 1421 1420 1442 1441 1440 1462 1461 1460 1502 1501 1500 1522 1521 1520 1542 1541 1540 1562 1561 1560 1602 1601 1600 1622 1621 1620 1642 1641 1640 1662 1661 1660 1702 1701 1700 1722 1721 1720 1742 1741 1740 1762 1761 1760

1237 1236 1235 1234 1233 1232 1231 1230 1227 1226 1225 1257 1256 1255 1254 1253 1252 1251 1250 1247 1246 1245 1277 1276 1275 1274 1273 1272 1271 1270 1267 1266 1265 1317 1316 1315 1314 1313 1312 1311 1310 1307 1306 1305 1337 1336 1335 1334 1333 1332 1331 1330 1327 1326 1325 1357 1356 1355 1354 1353 1352 1351 1350 1347 1346 1345 1377 1376 1375 1374 1373 1372 1371 1370 1367 1366 1365 1417 1416 1415 1414 1413 1412 1411 1410 1407 1406 1405 1437 1436 1435 1434 1433 1432 1431 1430 1427 1426 1425 1457 1456 1455 1454 1453 1452 1451 1450 1447 1446 1445 1477 1476 1475 1474 1473 1472 1471 1470 1467 1466 1465 1517 1516 1515 1514 1513 1512 1511 1510 1507 1506 1505 1537 1536 1535 1534 1533 1532 1531 1530 1527 1526 1525 1557 1556 1555 1554 1553 1552 1551 1550 1547 1546 1545 1577 1576 1575 1574 1573 1572 1571 1570 1567 1566 1565 1617 1616 1615 1614 1613 1612 1611 1610 1607 1606 1605 1637 1636 1635 1634 1633 1632 1631 1630 1627 1626 1625 1657 1656 1655 1654 1653 1652 1651 1650 1647 1646 1645 1677 1676 1675 1674 1673 1672 1671 1670 1667 1666 1665 1717 1716 1715 1714 1713 1712 1711 1710 1707 1706 1705 1737 1736 1735 1734 1733 1732 1731 1730 1727 1726 1725 1757 1756 1755 1754 1753 1752 1751 1750 1747 1746 1745 1777 1776 1775 1774 1773 1772 1771 1770 1767 1766 1765

Discrete I/O Memory Map

V40656 V40657 V40660 V40661 V40662 V40663 V40664 V40665 V40666 V40667 V40670 V40671 V40672 V40673 V40674 V40675 V40676 V40677

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

A-6
Appendix A Discrete I/O Memory Map
MSB 17

DL205 Discrete I/O Memory Maps

This portion of the table shows additional Control Relays points available with the DL260.
DL260 Additional Control Relays (C) 16 15 14 13 12 11
2011

LSB 4 3 2 1 0
2004 2003 2024 2023 2044 2043 2064 2063 2104 2103 2124 2123 2144 2143 2164 2163 2204 2203 2224 2223 2244 2243 2264 2263 2304 2303 2324 2323 2344 2343 2364 2363 2404 2403 2424 2423 2444 2443 2464 2463 2504 2503 2524 2523 2544 2543 2564 2563 2604 2603 2624 2623 2644 2643 2664 2663 2704 2703 2724 2723 2744 2743 2764 2763 2002 2001 2000 2022 2021 2020 2042 2041 2040 2062 2061 2060 2102 2101 2100 2122 2121 2120 2142 2141 2140 2162 2161 2160 2202 2201 2200 2222 2221 2220 2242 2241 2240 2262 2261 2260 2302 2301 2300 2322 2321 2320 2342 2341 2340 2362 2361 2360 2402 2401 2400 2422 2421 2420 2442 2441 2440 2462 2461 2460 2502 2501 2500 2522 2521 2520 2542 2541 2540 2562 2561 2560 2602 2601 2600 2622 2621 2620 2642 2641 2640 2662 2661 2660 2702 2701 2700 2722 2721 2720 2742 2741 2740 2762 2761 2760

10

Address
V40700 V40701 V40702 V40703 V40704 V40705 V40706 V40707 V40710 V40711 V40712 V40713 V40714 V40715 V40716 V40717 V40720 V40721 V40722 V40723 V40724 V40725 V40726 V40727 V40730 V40731 V40732 V40733 V40734 V40735 V40736 V40737

2017 2016 2015 2014 2013 2012

2010 2007 2006 2005

2037 2036 2035 2034 2033 2032 2031 2030 2027 2026 2025 2057 2056 2055 2054 2053 2052 2051 2050 2047 2046 2045 2077 2076 2075 2074 2073 2072 2071 2070 2067 2066 2065 2117 2116 2115 2114 2113 2112 2111 2110 2107 2106 2105 2137 2136 2135 2134 2133 2132 2131 2130 2127 2126 2125 2157 2156 2155 2154 2153 2152 2151 2150 2147 2146 2145 2177 2176 2175 2174 2173 2172 2171 2170 2167 2166 2165 2217 2216 2215 2214 2213 2212 2211 2210 2207 2206 2205 2237 2236 2235 2234 2233 2232 2231 2230 2227 2226 2225 2257 2256 2255 2254 2253 2252 2251 2250 2247 2246 2245 2277 2276 2275 2274 2273 2272 2271 2270 2267 2266 2265 2317 2316 2315 2314 2313 2312 2311 2310 2307 2306 2305 2337 2336 2335 2334 2333 2332 2331 2330 2327 2326 2325 2357 2356 2355 2354 2353 2352 2351 2350 2347 2346 2345 2377 2376 2375 2374 2373 2372 2371 2370 2367 2366 2365 2417 2416 2415 2414 2413 2412 2411 2410 2407 2406 2405 2437 2436 2435 2434 2433 2432 2431 2430 2427 2426 2425 2457 2456 2455 2454 2453 2452 2451 2450 2447 2446 2445 2477 2476 2475 2474 2473 2472 2471 2470 2467 2466 2465 2517 2516 2515 2514 2513 2512 2511 2510 2507 2506 2505 2537 2536 2535 2534 2533 2532 2531 2530 2527 2526 2525 2557 2556 2555 2554 2553 2552 2551 2550 2547 2546 2545 2577 2576 2575 2574 2573 2572 2571 2570 2567 2566 2565 2617 2616 2615 2614 2613 2612 2611 2610 2607 2606 2605 2637 2636 2635 2634 2633 2632 2631 2630 2627 2626 2625 2657 2656 2655 2654 2653 2652 2651 2650 2647 2646 2645 2677 2676 2675 2674 2673 2672 2671 2670 2667 2666 2665 2717 2716 2715 2714 2713 2712 2711 2710 2707 2706 2705 2737 2736 2735 2734 2733 2732 2731 2730 2727 2726 2725 2757 2756 2755 2754 2753 2752 2751 2750 2747 2746 2745 2777 2776 2775 2774 2773 2772 2771 2770 2767 2766 2765

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

DL205 Discrete I/O Memory Map

A-7
Appendix A Discrete I/O Memory Map
Address
V40740 V40741 V40742 V40743 V40744 V40745 V40746 V40747 V40750 V40751 V40752 V40753 V40754 V40755

MSB 17 16 15 14

DL260 Additional Control Relays (C) 13 12 11

3011

(contd) 5 4 3 2 1
3004 3003 3024 3023 3044 3043 3064 3063 3104 3103 3124 3123 3144 3143 3164 3163 3204 3203 3224 3223 3244 3243 3264 3263 3304 3303 3324 3323 3344 3343 3364 3363 3404 3403 3424 3423 3444 3443 3464 3463 3504 3503 3524 3523 3544 3543 3564 3563 3604 3603 3624 3623 3644 3643 3664 3663 3704 3703 3724 3723 3744 3743 3764 3763

LSB 0
3002 3001 3000 3022 3021 3020 3042 3041 3040 3062 3061 3060 3102 3101 3100 3122 3121 3120 3142 3141 3140 3162 3161 3160 3202 3201 3200 3222 3221 3220 3242 3241 3240 3262 3261 3260 3302 3301 3300 3322 3321 3320 3342 3341 3340 3362 3361 3360 3402 3401 3400 3422 3421 3420 3442 3441 3440 3462 3461 3460 3502 3501 3500 3522 3521 3520 3542 3541 3540 3562 3561 3560 3602 3601 3600 3622 3621 3620 3642 3641 3640 3662 3661 3660 3702 3701 3700 3722 3721 3720 3742 3741 3740 3762 3761 3760

10

3017 3016 3015 3014 3013 3012

3010 3007 3006 3005

3037 3036 3035 3034 3033 3032 3031 3030 3027 3026 3025 3057 3056 3055 3054 3053 3052 3051 3050 3047 3046 3045 3077 3076 3075 3074 3073 3072 3071 3070 3067 3066 3065 3117 3116 3115 3114 3113 3112 3111 3110 3107 3106 3105 3137 3136 3135 3134 3133 3132 3131 3130 3127 3126 3125 3157 3156 3155 3154 3153 3152 3151 3150 3147 3146 3145 3177 3176 3175 3174 3173 3172 3171 3170 3167 3166 3165 3217 3216 3215 3214 3213 3212 3211 3210 3207 3206 3205 3237 3236 3235 3234 3233 3232 3231 3230 3227 3226 3225 3257 3256 3255 3254 3253 3252 3251 3250 3247 3246 3245 3277 3276 3275 3274 3273 3272 3271 3270 3267 3266 3265 3317 3316 3315 3314 3313 3312 3311 3310 3307 3306 3305 3337 3336 3335 3334 3333 3332 3331 3330 3327 3326 3325 3357 3356 3355 3354 3353 3352 3351 3350 3347 3346 3345 3377 3376 3375 3374 3373 3372 3371 3370 3367 3366 3365 3417 3416 3415 3414 3413 3412 3411 3410 3407 3406 3405 3437 3436 3435 3434 3433 3432 3431 3430 3427 3426 3425 3457 3456 3455 3454 3453 3452 3451 3450 3447 3446 3445 3477 3476 3475 3474 3473 3472 3471 3470 3467 3466 3465 3517 3516 3515 3514 3513 3512 3511 3510 3507 3506 3505 3537 3536 3535 3534 3533 3532 3531 3530 3527 3526 3525 3557 3556 3555 3554 3553 3552 3551 3550 3547 3546 3545 3577 3576 3575 3574 3573 3572 3571 3570 3567 3566 3565 3617 3616 3615 3614 3613 3612 3611 3610 3607 3606 3605 3637 3636 3635 3634 3633 3632 3631 3630 3627 3626 3625 3657 3656 3655 3654 3653 3652 3651 3650 3647 3646 3645 3677 3676 3675 3674 3673 3672 3671 3670 3667 3666 3665 3717 3716 3715 3714 3713 3712 3711 3710 3707 3706 3705 3737 3736 3735 3734 3733 3732 3731 3730 3727 3726 3725 3757 3756 3755 3754 3753 3752 3751 3750 3747 3746 3745 3777 3776 3775 3774 3773 3772 3771 3770 3767 3766 3765

Discrete I/O Memory Map

V40756 V40757 V40760 V40761 V40762 V40763 V40764 V40765 V40766 V40767 V40770 V40771 V40772 V40773 V40774 V40775 V40776 V40777

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

A-8
Appendix A Discrete I/O Memory Map

DL205 Discrete I/O Memory Maps

Remote I/O Bit Map (DL 260 only)

This table provides a listing of the individual remote I/O points associated with each V-memory address bit.
MSB 17
017 037 057 077 117 137 157 177 217 237 257 277 317 337 357 377 417 437 457 477 517 537 557 577 617 637 657 677 717 737 757 777

DL260 Remote I/O (GX) and (GY) Points 16

016 036 056 076 116 136 156 176 216 236 256 276 316 336 356 376 416 436 456 476 516 536 556 576 616 636 656 676 716 736 756 776

LSB 3
003 023 043 063 103 123 143 163 203 223 243 263 303 323 343 363 403 423 443 463 503 523 543 563 603 623 643 663 703 723 743 763

15
015 035 055 075 115 135 155 175 215 235 255 275 315 335 355 375 415 435 455 475 515 535 555 575 615 635 655 675 715 735 755 775

14
014 034 054 074 114 134 154 174 214 234 254 274 314 334 354 374 414 434 454 474 514 534 554 574 614 634 654 674 714 734 754 774

13
013 033 053 073 113 133 153 173 213 233 253 273 313 333 353 373 413 433 453 473 513 533 553 573 613 633 653 673 713 733 753 773

12
012 032 052 072 112 132 152 172 212 232 252 272 312 332 352 372 412 432 452 472 512 532 552 572 612 632 652 672 712 732 752 772

11
011 031 051 071 111 131 151 171 211 231 251 271 311 331 351 371 411 431 451 471 511 531 551 571 611 631 651 671 711 731 751 771

10
010 030 050 070 110 130 150 170 210 230 250 270 310 330 350 370 410 430 450 470 510 530 550 570 610 630 650 670 710 730 750 770

7
007 027 047 067 107 127 147 167 207 227 247 267 307 327 347 367 407 427 447 467 507 527 547 567 607 627 647 667 707 727 747 767

6
006 026 046 066 106 126 146 166 206 226 246 266 306 326 346 366 406 426 446 466 506 526 546 566 606 626 646 666 706 726 746 766

5
005 025 045 065 105 125 145 165 205 225 245 265 305 325 345 365 405 425 445 465 505 525 545 565 605 625 645 665 705 725 745 765

4
004 024 044 064 104 124 144 164 204 224 244 264 304 324 344 364 404 424 444 464 504 524 544 564 604 624 644 664 704 724 744 764

2
002 022 042 062 102 122 142 162 202 222 242 262 302 322 342 362 402 422 442 462 502 522 542 562 602 622 642 662 702 722 742 762

1
001 021 041 061 101 121 141 161 201 221 241 261 301 321 341 361 401 421 441 461 501 521 541 561 601 621 641 661 701 721 741 761

0
000 020 040 060 100 120 140 160 200 220 240 260 300 320 340 360 400 420 440 460 500 520 540 560 600 620 640 660 700 720 740 760

GX Address
V40000 V40001 V40002 V40003 V40004 V40005 V40006 V40007 V40010 V40011 V40012 V40013 V40014 V40015 V40016 V40017 V40020 V40021 V40022 V40023 V40024 V40025 V40026 V40027 V40030 V40031 V40032 V40033 V40034 V40035 V40036 V40037

GY Address
V40200 V40201 V40202 V40203 V40204 V40205 V40206 V40207 V40210 V40211 V40212 V40213 V40214 V40215 V40216 V40217 V40220 V40221 V40222 V40223 V40224 V40225 V40226 V40227 V40230 V40231 V40232 V40233 V40234 V40235 V40236 V40237

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

DL205 Discrete I/O Memory Map

A-9
Appendix A Discrete I/O Memory Map

MSB 17
1017 1037 1057 1077 1117 1137 1157 1177 1217 1237 1257 1277 1317 1337 1357 1377 1417 1437 1457 1477 1517 1537 1557 1577 1617 1637 1657 1677 1717 1737 1757 1777

DL260 Remote I/O (GX) and (GY) Points 16

1016 1036 1056 1076 1116 1136 1156 1176 1216 1236 1256 1276 1316 1336 1356 1376 1416 1436 1456 1476 1516 1536 1556 1576 1616 1636 1656 1676 1716 1736 1756 1776

LSB 3
1003 1023 1043 1063 1103 1123 1143 1163 1203 1223 1243 1263 1303 1323 1343 1363 1403 1423 1443 1463 1503 1523 1543 1563 1603 1623 1643 1663 1703 1723 1743 1763

15
1015 1035 1055 1075 1115 1135 1155 1175 1215 1235 1255 1275 1315 1335 1355 1375 1415 1435 1455 1475 1515 1535 1555 1575 1615 1635 1655 1675 1715 1735 1755 1775

14
1014 1034 1054 1074 1114 1134 1154 1174 1214 1234 1254 1274 1314 1334 1354 1374 1414 1434 1454 1474 1514 1534 1554 1574 1614 1634 1654 1674 1714 1734 1754 1774

13
1013 1033 1053 1073 1113 1133 1153 1173 1213 1233 1253 1273 1313 1333 1353 1373 1413 1433 1453 1473 1513 1533 1553 1573 1613 1633 1653 1673 1713 1733 1753 1773

12
1012 1032 1052 1072 1112 1132 1152 1172 1212 1232 1252 1272 1312 1332 1352 1372 1412 1432 1452 1472 1512 1532 1552 1572 1612 1632 1652 1672 1712 1732 1752 1772

11
1011 1031 1051 1071 1111 1131 1151 1171 1211 1231 1251 1271 1311 1331 1351 1371 1411 1431 1451 1471 1511 1531 1551 1571 1611 1631 1651 1671 1711 1731 1751 1771

10
1010 1030 1050 1070 1110 1130 1150 1170 1210 1230 1250 1270 1310 1330 1350 1370 1410 1430 1450 1470 1510 1530 1550 1570 1610 1630 1650 1670 1710 1730 1750 1770

7
1007 1027 1047 1067 1107 1127 1147 1167 1207 1227 1247 1267 1307 1327 1347 1367 1407 1427 1447 1467 1507 1527 1547 1567 1607 1627 1647 1667 1707 1727 1747 1767

6
1006 1026 1046 1066 1106 1126 1146 1166 1206 1226 1246 1266 1306 1326 1346 1366 1406 1426 1446 1466 1506 1526 1546 1566 1606 1626 1646 1666 1706 1726 1746 1766

5
1005 1025 1045 1065 1105 1125 1145 1165 1205 1225 1245 1265 1305 1325 1345 1365 1405 1425 1445 1465 1505 1525 1545 1565 1605 1625 1645 1665 1705 1725 1745 1765

4
1004 1024 1044 1064 1104 1124 1144 1164 1204 1224 1244 1264 1304 1324 1344 1364 1404 1424 1444 1464 1504 1524 1544 1564 1604 1624 1644 1664 1704 1724 1744 1764

2
1002 1022 1042 1062 1102 1122 1142 1162 1202 1222 1242 1262 1302 1322 1342 1362 1402 1422 1442 1462 1502 1522 1542 1562 1602 1622 1642 1662 1702 1722 1742 1762

1
1001 1021 1041 1061 1101 1121 1141 1161 1201 1221 1241 1261 1301 1321 1341 1361 1401 1421 1441 1461 1501 1521 1541 1561 1601 1621 1641 1661 1701 1721 1741 1761

0
1000 1020 1040 1060 1100 1120 1140 1160 1200 1220 1240 1260 1300 1320 1340 1360 1400 1420 1440 1460 1500 1520 1540 1560 1600 1620 1640 1660 1700 1720 1740 1760

GX Address
V40040 V40041 V40042 V40043 V40044 V40045 V40046 V40047 V40050 V40051 V40052 V40053 V40054 V40055 V40056 V40057 V40060 V40061 V40062 V40063 V40064 V40065 V40066 V40067 V40070 V40071 V40072 V40073 V40074 V40075 V40076 V40077

GY Address
V40240 V40241 V40242 V40243 V40244 V40245 V40246 V40247 V40250 V40251 V40252 V40253 V40254 V40255 V40256 V40257 V40260 V40261 V40262 V40263 V40264 V40265 V40266 V40267 V40270 V40271 V40272 V40273 V40274 V40275 V40276 V40277

Discrete I/O Memory Map

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

A-10
Appendix A Discrete I/O Memory Map
MSB 17
2017 2037 2057 2077 2117 2137 2157 2177 2217 2237 2257 2277 2317 2337 2357 2377 2417 2437 2457 2477 2517 2537 2557 2577 2617 2637 2657 2677 2717 2737 2757 2777

DL205 Discrete I/O Memory Maps

DL260 Remote I/O (GX) and (GY) Points 16

2016 2036 2056 2076 2116 2136 2156 2176 2216 2236 2256 2276 2316 2336 2356 2376 2416 2436 2456 2476 2516 2536 2556 2576 2616 2636 2656 2676 2716 2736 2756 2776

LSB 3
2003 2023 2043 2063 2103 2123 2143 2163 2203 2223 2243 2263 2303 2323 2343 2363 2403 2423 2443 2463 2503 2523 2543 2563 2603 2623 2643 2663 2703 2723 2743 2763

15
2015 2035 2055 2075 2115 2135 2155 2175 2215 2235 2255 2275 2315 2335 2355 2375 2415 2435 2455 2475 2515 2535 2555 2575 2615 2635 2655 2675 2715 2735 2755 2775

14
2014 2034 2054 2074 2114 2134 2154 2174 2214 2234 2254 2274 2314 2334 2354 2374 2414 2434 2454 2474 2514 2534 2554 2574 2614 2634 2654 2674 2714 2734 2754 2774

13
2013 2033 2053 2073 2113 2133 2153 2173 2213 2233 2253 2273 2313 2333 2353 2373 2413 2433 2453 2473 2513 2533 2553 2573 2613 2633 2653 2673 2713 2733 2753 2773

12
2012 2032 2052 2072 2112 2132 2152 2172 2212 2232 2252 2272 2312 2332 2352 2372 2412 2432 2452 2472 2512 2532 2552 2572 2612 2632 2652 2672 2712 2732 2752 2772

11
2011 2031 2051 2071 2111 2131 2151 2171 2211 2231 2251 2271 2311 2331 2351 2371 2411 2431 2451 2471 2511 2531 2551 2571 2611 2631 2651 2671 2711 2731 2751 2771

10
2010 2030 2050 2070 2110 2130 2150 2170 2210 2230 2250 2270 2310 2330 2350 2370 2410 2430 2450 2470 2510 2530 2550 2570 2610 2630 2650 2670 2710 2730 2750 2770

7
2007 2027 2047 2067 2107 2127 2147 2167 2207 2227 2247 2267 2307 2327 2347 2367 2407 2427 2447 2467 2507 2527 2547 2567 2607 2627 2647 2667 2707 2727 2747 2767

6
2006 2026 2046 2066 2106 2126 2146 2166 2206 2226 2246 2266 2306 2326 2346 2366 2406 2426 2446 2466 2506 2526 2546 2566 2606 2626 2646 2666 2706 2726 2746 2766

5
2005 2025 2045 2065 2105 2125 2145 2165 2205 2225 2245 2265 2305 2325 2345 2365 2405 2425 2445 2465 2505 2525 2545 2565 2605 2625 2645 2665 2705 2725 2745 2765

4
2004 2024 2044 2064 2104 2124 2144 2164 2204 2224 2244 2264 2304 2324 2344 2364 2404 2424 2444 2464 2504 2524 2544 2564 2604 2624 2644 2664 2704 2724 2744 2764

2
2002 2022 2042 2062 2102 2122 2142 2162 2202 2222 2242 2262 2302 2322 2342 2362 2402 2422 2442 2462 2502 2522 2542 2562 2602 2622 2642 2662 2702 2722 2742 2762

1
2001 2021 2041 2061 2101 2121 2141 2161 2201 2221 2241 2261 2301 2321 2341 2361 2401 2421 2441 2461 2501 2521 2541 2561 2601 2621 2641 2661 2701 2721 2741 2761

0
2000 2020 2040 2060 2100 2120 2140 2160 2200 2220 2240 2260 2300 2320 2340 2360 2400 2420 2440 2460 2500 2520 2540 2560 2600 2620 2640 2660 2700 2720 2740 2760

GX Address
V40100 V40101 V40102 V40103 V40104 V40105 V40106 V40107 V40110 V40111 V40112 V40113 V40114 V40115 V40116 V40117 V40120 V40121 V40122 V40123 V40124 V40125 V40126 V40127 V40130 V40131 V40132 V40133 V40134 V40135 V40136 V40137

GY Address
V40300 V40301 V40302 V40303 V40304 V40305 V40306 V40307 V40310 V40311 V40312 V40313 V40314 V40315 V40316 V40317 V40320 V40321 V40322 V40323 V40324 V40325 V40326 V40327 V40330 V40331 V40332 V40333 V40334 V40335 V40336 V40337

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10

DL205 Discrete I/O Memory Map

A-11
Appendix A Discrete I/O Memory Map

MSB 17
3017 3037 3057 3077 3117 3137 3157 3177 3217 3237 3257 3277 3317 3337 3357 3377 3417 3437 3457 3477 3517 3537 3557 3577 3617 3637 3657 3677 3717 3737 3757 3777

DL260 Remote I/O (GX) and (GY) Points 16

3016 3036 3056 3076 3116 3136 3156 3176 3216 3236 3256 3276 3316 3336 3356 3376 3416 3436 3456 3476 3516 3536 3556 3576 3616 3636 3656 3676 3716 3736 3756 3776

LSB 3
3003 3023 3043 3063 3103 3123 3143 3163 3203 3223 3243 3263 3303 3323 3343 3363 3403 3423 3443 3463 3503 3523 3543 3563 3603 3623 3643 3663 3703 3723 3743 3763

15
3015 3035 3055 3075 3115 3135 3155 3175 3215 3235 3255 3275 3315 3335 3355 3375 3415 3435 3455 3475 3515 3535 3555 3575 3615 3635 3655 3675 3715 3735 3755 3775

14
3014 3034 3054 3074 3114 3134 3154 3174 3214 3234 3254 3274 3314 3334 3354 3374 3414 3434 3454 3474 3514 3534 3554 3574 3614 3634 3654 3674 3714 3734 3754 3774

13
3013 3033 3053 3073 3113 3133 3153 3173 3213 3233 3253 3273 3313 3333 3353 3373 3413 3433 3453 3473 3513 3533 3553 3573 3613 3633 3653 3673 3713 3733 3753 3773

12
3012 3032 3052 3072 3112 3132 3152 3172 3212 3232 3252 3272 3312 3332 3352 3372 3412 3432 3452 3472 3512 3532 3552 3572 3612 3632 3652 3672 3712 3732 3752 3772

11
3011 3031 3051 3071 3111 3131 3151 3171 3211 3231 3251 3271 3311 3331 3351 3371 3411 3431 3451 3471 3511 3531 3551 3571 3611 3631 3651 3671 3711 3731 3751 3771

10
3010 3030 3050 3070 3110 3130 3150 3170 3210 3230 3250 3270 3310 3330 3350 3370 3410 3430 3450 3470 3510 3530 3550 3570 3610 3630 3650 3670 3710 3730 3750 3770

7
3007 3027 3047 3067 3107 3127 3147 3167 3207 3227 3247 3267 3307 3327 3347 3367 3407 3427 3447 3467 3507 3527 3547 3567 3607 3627 3647 3667 3707 3727 3747 3767

6
3006 3026 3046 3066 3106 3126 3146 3166 3206 3226 3246 3266 3306 3326 3346 3366 3406 3426 3446 3466 3506 3526 3546 3566 3606 3626 3646 3666 3706 3726 3746 3766

5
3005 3025 3045 3065 3105 3125 3145 3165 3205 3225 3245 3265 3305 3325 3345 3365 3405 3425 3445 3465 3505 3525 3545 3565 3605 3625 3645 3665 3705 3725 3745 3765

4
3004 3024 3044 3064 3104 3124 3144 3164 3204 3224 3244 3264 3304 3324 3344 3364 3404 3424 3444 3464 3504 3524 3544 3564 3604 3624 3644 3664 3704 3724 3744 3764

2
3002 3022 3042 3062 3102 3122 3142 3162 3202 3222 3242 3262 3302 3322 3342 3362 3402 3422 3442 3462 3502 3522 3542 3562 3602 3622 3642 3662 3702 3722 3742 3762

1
3001 3021 3041 3061 3101 3121 3141 3161 3201 3221 3241 3261 3301 3321 3341 3361 3401 3421 3441 3461 3501 3521 3541 3561 3601 3621 3641 3661 3701 3721 3741 3761

0
3000 3020 3040 3060 3100 3120 3140 3160 3200 3220 3240 3260 3300 3320 3340 3360 3400 3420 3440 3460 3500 3520 3540 3560 3600 3620 3640 3660 3700 3720 3740 3760

GX Address
V40140 V40141 V40142 V40143 V40144 V40145 V40146 V40147 V40150 V40151 V40152 V40153 V40154 V40155 V40156 V40157 V40160 V40161 V40162 V40163 V40164 V40165 V40166 V40167 V40170 V40171 V40172 V40173 V40174 V40175 V40176 V40177

GY Address
V40340 V40341 V40342 V40343 V40344 V40345 V40346 V40347 V40350 V40351 V40352 V40353 V40354

Discrete I/O Memory Map

V40355 V40356 V40357 V40360 V40361 V40362 V40363 V40364 V40365 V40366 V40367 V40370 V40371 V40372 V40373 V40374 V40375 V40376 V40377

DL205 Analog Manual 7th Ed. Rev. B 4/10